Sei sulla pagina 1di 840

Cisco PowerVu Network Centre Control System Version 10.

0 User Guide

Please Read This Entire Guide Veuillez lire entirement ce guide Bitte das gesamte Handbuch durchlesen Srvase leer completamente la presente gua Si prega di leggere completamente questa guida
Important Please read this entire guide before you install or operate this product. Give particular attention to all safety statements. Important Veuillez lire entirement ce guide avant d'installer ou d'utiliser ce produit. Prtez une attention particulire toutes les rgles de scurit. Zu beachten Bitte lesen Sie vor Aufstellen oder Inbetriebnahme des Gertes dieses Handbuch in seiner Gesamtheit durch. Achten Sie dabei besonders auf die Sicherheitshinweise. Importante Srvase leer la presente gua antes de instalar o emplear este producto. Preste especial atencin a todos los avisos de seguridad. Importante Prima di installare o usare questo prodotto si prega di leggere completamente questa guida, facendo particolare attenzione a tutte le dichiarazioni di sicurezza.

Notices
Trademark Acknowledgements
Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. A listing of Cisco's trademarks can be found at www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Other third party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1009R) The PowerVu Network Centre uses the following open source tools: "IP-Filter is a stateful TCIP/IP packet filter written by Darren Reed. "Perl is an interpreted high-level programming language developed by Larry Wall.

Publication Disclaimer
Cisco Systems, Inc. assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions that may appear in this publication. We reserve the right to change this publication at any time without notice. This document is not to be construed as conferring by implication, estoppel, or otherwise any license or right under any copyright or patent, whether or not the use of any information in this document employs an invention claimed in any existing or later issued patent.

Copyright
2011 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. Information in this publication is subject to change without notice. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, by photocopy, microfilm, xerography, or any other means, or incorporated into any information retrieval system, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express permission of Cisco Systems, Inc.

Contents
Chapter 1 Preface
Conventions....................................................................................................................................1-2 Product Support..............................................................................................................................1-3 Product Return................................................................................................................................1-5

Chapter 2

Welcome
Overall System Features ..................................................................................................................2-3 PNC Features...........................................................................................................................2-5

Chapter 3

Getting Started
Client/Server Configuration ..............................................................................................................3-2 Server Computer Configuration ................................................................................................3-3 Understanding the Client/Server Architecture ...................................................................................3-4 Starting the Server ...................................................................................................................3-4 Starting the UPS ......................................................................................................................3-4 Starting the PNC Server............................................................................................................3-5 Logging Onto the Server...........................................................................................................3-5 Logging Off the PNC Server......................................................................................................3-7 Installing the Client ..........................................................................................................................3-8 Logging Onto the Client .................................................................................................................3-11 Logging Off the PNC Client.....................................................................................................3-13 Introducing the Main PNC Elements...............................................................................................3-14 Main Console Window ...........................................................................................................3-14 Menus and Toolbar Icons.......................................................................................................3-15 Startup Configuration ....................................................................................................................3-20 Supported Keyboard .....................................................................................................................3-21 Main Keypad..........................................................................................................................3-21 Editing Keypad.......................................................................................................................3-21 Numeric Keypad ....................................................................................................................3-21 Function Keys and Visual Indicators Keypad ...........................................................................3-22 Setting the Time Zone....................................................................................................................3-23

Chapter 4

Configuring Streams and Services


Displaying the Devices ....................................................................................................................4-2

4042066 Rev A

Configuring an SD (Standard Definition) Encoder .............................................................................4-3 Configuring Video Services ......................................................................................................4-6 Configuring VBI Lines.............................................................................................................4-17 Configuring Imitext Subtitling..................................................................................................4-21 Configuring DVB Subtitles ......................................................................................................4-23 Configuring MPEG Audio Services (MAE & MAC Cards) .........................................................4-26 Audio Encoding and Decoding Modes ....................................................................................4-29 Configuring Dolby Digital Audio Services ................................................................................4-34 Configuring AAC Audio Services.............................................................................................4-42 Configuring a D9040 Encoder........................................................................................................4-46 Configuring the D9040 Encoder Video Services ......................................................................4-48 Configuring DPI Cue Triggering ..............................................................................................4-59 Configuring D9040 Encoder Audio Services ...........................................................................4-62 Configuring VBI Lines.............................................................................................................4-89 Configuring an HD (High Definition) Encoder..................................................................................4-94 Configuring HD Video Services...............................................................................................4-96 Configuring DPI Cue Triggering ............................................................................................4-107 Configuring HD Audio Services.............................................................................................4-109 Configuring the Multiplexer ..........................................................................................................4-137 Configuring Synchronous Data Channels..............................................................................4-139 Configuring Asynchronous Data Channels ............................................................................4-141 Packet IDs (PIDs) ................................................................................................................4-142 Configuring Scrambling...............................................................................................................4-144 Configuring Modulators ...............................................................................................................4-147 DVB-S Modulators ...............................................................................................................4-147 DVB-S2 Modulators .............................................................................................................4-150 Configuring the LEC Server..........................................................................................................4-158

Chapter 5

Virtual Channels and Controlling Access


Virtual Channels ..............................................................................................................................5-2 Displaying and Using the Service Summary Window ................................................................5-4 Displaying and Using the Stream Summary Window.................................................................5-7 Creating a Virtual Channel ...............................................................................................................5-9 General Tab ...........................................................................................................................5-10 Defining Imitext Subtitling.......................................................................................................5-18 Default Settings on the CA and RCO Tabs...............................................................................5-19

vi

4042066 Rev A

CA Tab ..................................................................................................................................5-20 Setting Blackout Codes ..........................................................................................................5-23 Tiers......................................................................................................................................5-24 Assigning Program Tiers........................................................................................................5-24 RCO Tab................................................................................................................................5-25 Managing Virtual Channels ............................................................................................................5-27 Finding a Virtual Channel........................................................................................................5-27 Editing a Virtual Channel.........................................................................................................5-28 Disabling a Virtual Channel.....................................................................................................5-29 Enabling a Disabled Virtual Channel........................................................................................5-30 Deleting a Virtual Channel.......................................................................................................5-30 Defining and Scheduling Events.....................................................................................................5-31 Displaying the Event Schedule Window ..................................................................................5-32 Scheduling Events .................................................................................................................5-34 Event Summary Window ........................................................................................................5-40 Program Schedule .................................................................................................................5-41 Scheduling Conflicts ..............................................................................................................5-42 SR Tab ..................................................................................................................................5-42 FPT Tab.................................................................................................................................5-47 RCO Tab................................................................................................................................5-50 CA Tab ..................................................................................................................................5-50 Saving the New Event ............................................................................................................5-50 Copying Events......................................................................................................................5-52 Expired Log ...........................................................................................................................5-55 Controlling Program Access ..........................................................................................................5-62 Signal Access Using the Installed Flag....................................................................................5-62 Signal Access Using Multi-Session Keys................................................................................5-62 Service Access Using Program Tierbits ..................................................................................5-62 Service Access Using Blackout Codes....................................................................................5-63 Managing Events...........................................................................................................................5-68 Finding an Event ....................................................................................................................5-68 Editing an Event .....................................................................................................................5-68 Deleting an Event ...................................................................................................................5-70

Chapter 6

Decoders
Authorized Programs.......................................................................................................................6-2

4042066 Rev A

vii

The Decoder Database ....................................................................................................................6-3 Adding a Decoder Manually on the PNC Client ..........................................................................6-3 Decoder Searches...........................................................................................................................6-7 Decoder Management ...................................................................................................................6-22 List Window ..........................................................................................................................6-23 Adding/Deleting Decoder Locations........................................................................................6-25 Moving Decoders...................................................................................................................6-33 Searching for Decoders in Decoder Management Tree View....................................................6-47 Editing Decoder Records........................................................................................................6-48 Managing Decoders ......................................................................................................................6-51 Installing the Decoders...........................................................................................................6-51 Installing a Single Decoder .....................................................................................................6-51 Admin....................................................................................................................................6-54 Custom Fields........................................................................................................................6-56 Configuration .........................................................................................................................6-57 Blackouts/Triggers .................................................................................................................6-61 Program Tiers........................................................................................................................6-61 Output Authorization Control (optional) ...................................................................................6-61 Ad Insertion Tiers...................................................................................................................6-64 Transcoder ............................................................................................................................6-64 Editing an Individual Decoder .................................................................................................6-65 Installing Multiple Decoders....................................................................................................6-65 Globally Editing Decoder Records...........................................................................................6-68 Grouping Decoders .......................................................................................................................6-70 Adding Event Groups .............................................................................................................6-70 Editing Event Groups..............................................................................................................6-71 Saving Event Group Summary Entries ....................................................................................6-71 Assigning an Event Group to a Decoder..................................................................................6-72 Removing an Event Group from a Decoder .............................................................................6-73 Editing Event Group Memberships Globally.............................................................................6-73 Decoder Output Control.................................................................................................................6-75 Output Authorization Profile Summary ....................................................................................6-75 Force Tuning Decoders ..........................................................................................................6-78 Deauthorizing Decoders .........................................................................................................6-79 Transcoder Configuration Control ..................................................................................................6-81 Transcoder Configuration Profile Summary.............................................................................6-81

viii

4042066 Rev A

Authorizing Services......................................................................................................................6-89 Assigning Program Tiers........................................................................................................6-89 Assigning Ad Insertion Tiers...................................................................................................6-94 Using the EmcDecoder Command Line Interface ....................................................................6-99

Chapter 7

Uplink Configuration
Viewing an Uplink Configuration ......................................................................................................7-2 Encoder Web GUI Control................................................................................................................7-9 D9034/D9054 Statmux Control ..............................................................................................7-18 Multiple Signalling .........................................................................................................................7-20 Setting the Operating State and Mode of a Device ...................................................................7-21 Redundancy Systems ...................................................................................................................7-23 Transport Media and Assigning Frequencies ..................................................................................7-25 Single Frequency Plans ..........................................................................................................7-25 Multiple Frequency Plans .......................................................................................................7-25 Grooming ..............................................................................................................................7-26 Ad Hoc ..................................................................................................................................7-26 The Transport Media Window.................................................................................................7-27 Assigning Network IDs...........................................................................................................7-32 Moving a Signal from Carrier to Carrier...................................................................................7-33 Allocating Bandwidth.....................................................................................................................7-35 Selecting a Device for Bandwidth Allocation ...........................................................................7-38 Allocating Bandwidth to a Stream ...........................................................................................7-39 Managing EMM Configuration........................................................................................................7-40 DPI Source ...................................................................................................................................7-43 Multiplexer Rate Control ................................................................................................................7-48 Configuring Multiplex Group Statistical Multiplexing........................................................................7-50 Configuring BitMizer Statistical Multiplexing for Encoders with D9790 Video Encoder cards.....7-56 Configuring Statistical Multiplexing for Encoders with D9791 Video Encoder cards..................7-61 Configuring Statistical Multiplexing for HD Encoders ...............................................................7-67

Chapter 8

Security and User Administration


Security Features ............................................................................................................................8-2 Multi-Session Keys ..................................................................................................................8-2 Algorithms A and B ..................................................................................................................8-3 Entitlement Management Message (EMM) Transmission ..........................................................8-3 Displaying Current Security Values ..................................................................................................8-4

4042066 Rev A

ix

User Administration.........................................................................................................................8-6 Summary of Steps ...................................................................................................................8-6 Creating Privilege Groups .........................................................................................................8-6 Copying Privilege Groups .......................................................................................................8-10 Deleting a Privilege Group ......................................................................................................8-11 Working with Users................................................................................................................8-11 Adding a User ........................................................................................................................8-11 Editing a User ........................................................................................................................8-13 Deactivating a User ................................................................................................................8-13 Reactivating a User ................................................................................................................8-14 Deleting a User ......................................................................................................................8-14 Changing a Users Password .................................................................................................8-14 Managing Email Alerts for Alarms..................................................................................................8-16 Enabling Users to Receive Email Alerts...................................................................................8-16 Selecting Alarms that Generate Emails Messages ...................................................................8-17 Enabling Email Alerts for the PNC System...............................................................................8-22 Managing Email Alerts for Users.............................................................................................8-23 Alarm Messages displayed using MS Outlook.........................................................................8-25 API Management...........................................................................................................................8-26 Managing API Interface Communication .................................................................................8-26

Chapter 9

Configuring Programmer Segmentation


Overview of Programmer Segmentation...........................................................................................9-2 Creating a Customer Account..........................................................................................................9-3 Creating a Customer Account...................................................................................................9-3 Assigning Program Tiers for Customer Use ..............................................................................9-4 Creating Customer Privilege Groups .........................................................................................9-6 Adding Customer Users ...........................................................................................................9-8 Configuring Uplink Customer Controls .............................................................................................9-9 Creating Virtual Channels for Customers...................................................................................9-9 Conditional Access (CA) Tab .................................................................................................9-10 Remote Control Output (RCO) Tab .........................................................................................9-10 Configuring Downlink Customer Controls.......................................................................................9-11 Assigning Decoders to a Customer ........................................................................................9-11 Transferring Decoders from One Customer to Another ............................................................9-12 Creating a Pool of Shared Customer Decoders .......................................................................9-13

4042066 Rev A

Chapter 10 PNC User Guide for Programmers


Introduction to the PowerVu Network Centre ..................................................................................10-2 Logging On to the PNC Client ........................................................................................................10-3 PNC Client Basics ..................................................................................................................10-5 Controlling Subscriber Access to Scrambled Programs..................................................................10-6 Accessing the Program Authorization Tools............................................................................10-6 Authorizing Subscriber Access to Scrambled Programs..........................................................10-6 Configuring the Remote Control Outputs for a Receiver...........................................................10-8 Defining and Scheduling Your Programming Events .......................................................................10-9 Managing Your Decoders ............................................................................................................10-10 Searching the Decoder Database..........................................................................................10-10 Editing an Individual Decoder ...............................................................................................10-12 Globally Editing Decoder Records.........................................................................................10-14 Transferring Decoders To and From Another Programmer.....................................................10-15 Transferring Decoders To and From the Shared Customer Decoder Pool...............................10-18 Monitoring PNC Operating Status ................................................................................................10-19

Chapter 11 MetroMux
MetroMux Software Advantages ....................................................................................................11-2 Using the MetroMux Software .......................................................................................................11-4

Chapter 12 Log and Transaction Monitoring


Monitoring Aids.............................................................................................................................12-2 Monitoring Transactions................................................................................................................12-3 Displaying the Transaction Monitor.........................................................................................12-3 Automatically Displaying New Transactions............................................................................12-4 Viewing Transaction Attributes ...............................................................................................12-4 Searching the Transaction Log ...............................................................................................12-5 Diagnostic Monitoring ...................................................................................................................12-9 Displaying the Diagnostic Monitor ..........................................................................................12-9 Automatically Displaying New Events ...................................................................................12-17 Searching the Diagnostic Log...............................................................................................12-17 Saving Transaction Log or Diagnostic Search Results to a File .....................................................12-20 Preconfiguring the Save As Function .................................................................................12-21 PNC SNMP Agent........................................................................................................................12-24

4042066 Rev A

xi

Chapter 13 Protecting Your Services


Disaster Recovery.........................................................................................................................13-2 Theory of Operation ...............................................................................................................13-2 Configuring the Disaster Recovery Plan ..................................................................................13-4 Suspending Sun Outage Triggering.........................................................................................13-7 Using the Decoder Change Input (GoTo) Command................................................................13-8 Disaster Recovery Profile Setup ...........................................................................................13-16 Post Disaster Operations......................................................................................................13-24 Data Replication..........................................................................................................................13-26 Theory of Operation .............................................................................................................13-26 Logging Onto the PowerVu Data Replication Client................................................................13-29 Logging Off the Data Replication Client.................................................................................13-30 Introducing the Data Replication Elements ............................................................................13-31 Configuring Data Replication ................................................................................................13-34 Managing Data Replication...................................................................................................13-39 Setting Operating Thresholds................................................................................................13-49 Viewing the Alarm Summary ................................................................................................13-53 Resolving a Data Replication Conflict ...................................................................................13-55 PNC Warm Standby Server Option........................................................................................13-58

Chapter 14 PNC Server and Client Setup


Changing Server Passwords..........................................................................................................14-2 Controlling the Server Using EmcAdmin .................................................................................14-3 Adding Decoder Custom Fields......................................................................................................14-5 Configuring the System .................................................................................................................14-9 Setting the System Date and Time ........................................................................................14-11 Backing Up and Restoring the System Files .................................................................................14-12 Backup/Transfer of Web Control Device Settings Files ..........................................................14-14 Defining Alarms ...................................................................................................................14-16 Setting the Alarm Repeat Rate ..............................................................................................14-17 Exiting EmcAdmin................................................................................................................14-18 Using EmcDecoders ...........................................................................................................14-18 Solaris System/PNC Server Backup .............................................................................................14-23 Shutdown the System ..........................................................................................................14-24 Using the PNC Informix Backup/Restore/Schedule Procedure.......................................................14-25 Back up the Unix root file system (root tape/opt) ..................................................................14-28

xii

4042066 Rev A

Back up the PNC System (V tape) ........................................................................................14-29 Startup PNC System in multi-user mode...............................................................................14-30 Shutting Down the System ..........................................................................................................14-32 Completely Shutting Down the Solaris System......................................................................14-33 Starting and Re-starting the PNC Software............................................................................14-34 Booting Up the System ........................................................................................................14-35 Local Connections ......................................................................................................................14-36 Direct Connections ..............................................................................................................14-36 Local LAN Connections........................................................................................................14-36 LAN Connections ........................................................................................................................14-37 Changing the Servers IP Address ........................................................................................14-37 Entering the Clients IP Address............................................................................................14-38 Data Replication Server/Client Connections ..........................................................................14-39 Setting Up a Modem Connection .................................................................................................14-40 Editing the Existing Connection....................................................................................................14-41 Adding a New Connection ...........................................................................................................14-42 Dialing In to the PNC Server.........................................................................................................14-43 Server Info Window.....................................................................................................................14-45 PNC Client Connections ..............................................................................................................14-46 Local Connections ...............................................................................................................14-46 LAN Connections .................................................................................................................14-47 Setting Up a Modem Connection ..........................................................................................14-49 Adding a New Connection ....................................................................................................14-50 Dialing In to the PNC Server .................................................................................................14-51 Server Info Window..............................................................................................................14-53

Appendix A PNC Configuration


Expansion Port/Remote Control Pinouts/Cue Trigger ....................................................................... A-2

Appendix B PNC Warm Standby Server with Data Replication


Deploying a Warm Standby PNC Server................................................................................... B-2 Re-deploying a Standby Server ............................................................................................... B-4

Appendix C PNC Alarms and Status Messages


Configuring PNC Application Status/Alarm Messages ..................................................................... C-2 Reading the Alarm Message Display............................................................................................... C-5 Ethernet (UDP) Communications Status Messages ......................................................................... C-8

4042066 Rev A

xiii

Serial Communications Status Messages ....................................................................................... C-9 PNC Alarm Message Information .................................................................................................. C-10 Alarm Message Definitions.................................................................................................... C-10 2800 Series and higher alarms (Device-related alarms) ......................................................... C-47

Appendix D Glossary

xiv

4042066 Rev A

Chapter 1

Preface
Conventions Product Support Product Return

The PowerVu Network Centre (PNC) is the heart of the PowerVu product family. It is designed to meet the dynamic needs of programmers, broadcasters and other network operators who need to control multiple encoders in an automatically redundant system to transmit video, audio and data to a large receiver population.

4042066 Rev A

1-1

Conventions
The following conventions are used in this guide:
Convention
Typewriter Font

Description
Source code and examples of file contents Commands and arguments that you type Path names and file names Titles of external documents Terms introduced for the first time Figure captions Responses to actions performed during procedures

Italic Text

<value> Bold Text

Placeholder for a value that you must supply


Controls in procedures, such as menu items, button names and keyboard key names Email addresses and URLs

Typographical Conventions
Convention
Select Menu > Item.

Description
Menu: Select a menu and choose a menu item. Directory paths use backslashes. For UNIX systems, substitute forward slashes. Screen captures were taken running PNC2000 with default settings on a Windows XP platform. The PNC Console may look different on your computer.

<working_dir>\path\file
screen captures

Other Conventions

1-2

4042066 Rev A

Product Support
Cisco provides its customers who have purchased support agreements with telephone support from anywhere in the world. If you require technical telephone assistance or product training support, or if you have any questions concerning the Cisco product, you may contact the appropriate Customer Support Center from those listed below. Charges may apply for customers without a current and applicable product support agreement.
Customers
Programmers and Broadcasters Telcos and Cable Service Providers

Location
USA and Canada

Phone Number
Toll-Free: 1.888.949.4786 +1.770.236.4786 dmn_support@cisco.com Toll-Free: 1.800.722.2009 Local: 678.277.1120 (press 2 at the prompt) customer-service@cisco.com +32.56.445.155 or +32.56.445.197 saemea-support@cisco.com +852.2588.4746 saapac-support@cisco.com

Cisco Services

All Customers

Europe

All Customers

Asia

Customers who call a Customer Support Center are asked specific questions in order to identify their needs. In this way, each call can be directed to the customer support representative most experienced with their Cisco product.Customer Support Centers also provide the following pre- and post-sales support services for Cisco products.

Training Support
On and off-site training plus technical support services are available for purchase both equipment operators and system administrators.

Warranty and Post-Warranty Support


Warranty and post-warranty support services are available to help customers return Cisco products for service or repair.

4042066 Rev A

1-3

Customer Responsibility
When returning equipment, the customer is solely responsible for equipment packaging and transportation costs to the factory. At the customer's request, Cisco will make reasonable efforts to provide warranty service at the customer's premises, provided that the customer pays current field service rates plus direct travel and accommodation expenses.

In Case of Repair
If your product requires repair, perform following steps: 1. Notify Cisco of the problem immediately, providing the model number and serial number of the equipment plus details of the problem. On receipt of this information, service information and shipping instructions will be provided. 2. Upon receipt of instructions, return the product by prepaid freight. Refer to Product Return on page 1-5.

In Case of a Fault
If your product requires repair, perform the following steps: 1. Notify Cisco of the problem immediately, providing the model number and serial number of the equipment plus details of the problem. Upon receipt of this information, service information and shipping instructions will be provided. 2. Upon receipt of instructions, return the product by prepaid freight. Refer to the section Product Return on page 1-5 for details.

1-4

4042066 Rev A

Product Return
You must have a return material authorization (RMA) number to return a product. Contact the nearest customer service center and follow their instructions. Returning a product to Cisco for repair includes the following steps: Obtaining a RMA number Obtaining a customer service center shipping address Packing and shipping the product

Obtaining an RMA Number and Shipping Address


You must have an RMA number to return products. RMA numbers are valid for 60 days. If you already have a number, but it is older than 60 days, you must contact a customer service representative to revalidate the number. You can return the product after the RMA number is revalidated. Follow these steps to obtain an RMA number and shipping address. 1. Contact a customer service representative to request a new RMA number or revalidate an existing one. Refer to Product Support on page 1-3 to find a customer service telephone number in your area 2. Provide the following information to the customer service representative:

Product name, model number, part number, serial number (if applicable) Quantity of products to return A reason for returning the product Your company name, contact, telephone number, email address, and fax number Any service contract details Purchase order number of repair disposition authority, if available

Result: The customer service representative issues the RMA number and provides the shipping address. Note: If you cannot provide a purchase order number: A proforma invoice listing all costs incurred will be sent to you at the completion of product repair. Customer service must receive a purchase order number within 15 days after you receive the proforma invoice.

4042066 Rev A

1-5

Products can accrue costs through damage or misuse, or if no problem is found. Products incurring costs will not be returned to you without a valid purchase order number.

3. Proceed to Packing and Shipping the Product.

Packing and Shipping the Product


Follow these instructions to pack the product and ship it to Cisco. 1. Are the product's original container and packing material available?

If yes, pack the product in the container using the packing material. If no, pack the product in a sturdy, corrugated box, and cushion it with packing material. Important: You are responsible for delivering the returned product to Cisco safely and undamaged. Shipments damaged due to improper packaging may be refused and returned to you at your expense. Do not return any power cords or accessories.

2. Write the RMA number on the outside of the container. Note: Absence of the RMA number may delay processing of product repair and/ or result in the equipment being returned unrepaired. Include the RMA number in all correspondence 3. Ship the product to the address provided by the customer service representative. Note: Cisco does not accept freight collect. Be sure to prepay and insure all shipments.

1-6

4042066 Rev A

Chapter 2

Welcome
Overall System Features

The PowerVu Network Centre (PNC) control system provides a complete digital video compression solution for a wide range of implementations. The PNC application offers a comprehensive solution for network management, decoder management, security, and revenue protection. It is designed to meet the analog and digital content distribution needs of programmers, broadcasters and other network operators; users who need to control multiple encoders and multiplexers in an automatically redundant system transmitting video, audio and data securely to large decoder (receiver) populations will benefit from the PNCs robust and comprehensive feature set. The PNC supports up to a 4:32 redundancy architecture, also providing support for multiple satellite hops without the need to re-encode the original services, via the PNCs Transport Media support. Below is a PNC transmission system architecture diagram. In this system, the encoder receives video, audio, and/or data, from sources such as a server, tape or camera, converts the input to a compressed format and passes it to the encoders control cards. To convert the data to a compressed format, program content redundancies are discarded, and only the differences are kept. Encoders accept composite, component or digital D1 video, and analog or AES/EBU audio.

4042066 Rev A

2-1

The encoders output travels to the multiplexer in the form of a serial data stream. The multiplexer, which accepts multiple encoder streams, combines and encrypts the encoder output, then multiplexes the streams into one MPEG-2 transport stream and transmits it. This output, in turn, travels to the modulator, which converts the data to 70/140 MHz (52-176 variable) analog, using QPSK (8PSK and 16QAM are also available) modulation technique. From the modulator, the data travels to an earth station, which transmits the data to the satellite, which in turn transmits it to the decoder population. The Live Event Controller (LEC) server is connected to the PNC through an IP connection and transmits event control data to the Multiplexers through an ASI card. The LEC feature is an option. For more information, contact Cisco customer support. With the MetroMux software feature, you can re-multiplex satellite received programming into the local transport stream and send it to one or more satellites and then to the decoder population without loss in quality which is generally experienced with the recompression of video, audio and/or data.

The PNC system supports up to four signals, and multi-frequency hops, providing the capability for global transmission. PNC offers 4:n (n 32) redundancy. In a redundant system, all video and audio signals also travel through a routing switch, then to a backup (secondary) encoder. The encoders feed a backup multiplexer, and the primary and backup multiplexers both feed a primary and a backup modulator. If a primary encoder or multiplexer device fails, then the PNC can automatically switch the backup device with the failed device, ensuring that transmission disruption is minimal.

2-2

4042066 Rev A

Advanced revenue protection features are also available in the PNC system. Disaster recovery and data replication features allow a user to recover services quickly and easily in the event of a critical failure in the transmission link at their uplink location. The PNC consists of a Solaris Server and multiple clients running Windows XP , providing centralized control of the compression uplink system, network security, and the decoder population.

Overall System Features


The PowerVu digital video compression system provides: AVC Encoder (i.e., D9034, D9036, and D9054) Web GUI device launch and configuration Ad insertion tier configuration Full MPEG-2 and DVB compliance with a packet-based transport layer for easy interface to a variety of systems, including SONET and ATM networks and digital file servers Simultaneously available NTSC and PAL video formats to facilitate worldwide use with 4:2:0 and 4:2:2 encoding High-definition encoder support 4:32 configuration, enhancing system reliability DVB-S and DVB-S2 modulation User-selectable FEC and information rates that can be matched to a variety of applications and content System support for multiple video and audio inputs in a single multiplexer, providing the maximum in satellite transponder efficiency Virtual channels that support the combination of audio and video services from single or multiple chassis Proven entitlement and scrambling systems to ensure that transmissions reach only authorized receivers, policed by two types of traceable fingerprint information Conditional access capabilities that can be set for a service in one chassis, but can still control individual channels within the entire system Email alerts enabling users to receive email messages containing alarms/error messages when the PNC reports alarms Dual-pass encoding and HD/SD closed-loop statistical multiplexing support, providing improved bandwidth optimization and efficiency Copy protection feature providing identification and control of content rights through to the display devices MetroMux software re-multiplexing capabilities to help eliminate signal loss and degradation during satellite hops DPI enhancements supporting configuration of multiple messages on a single PID

4042066 Rev A

2-3

Front Audio Encoder (FAE) card support for PowerVu Model D9120 Advanced Encoder Visual alarm indication for all major and minor alarms on the PNC GUI client EmcDecoder Command Line Interface for remote loading of an SSN files or individual User Addresses Optional Data Replication, providing automatic replication of critical revenuebased information in real time, and automatic synchronization of data on a scheduled basis or IRD-only data replication Optional Disaster Recovery management, allowing for service recovery in the event of unforeseen critical failures in the transmission link that may occur at the satellite, transponder, uplink site, or downlink site, such as a natural disaster, sun outage or power outage. These features help ensure that services are transmitted even under the most adverse conditions. Optional Database segmentation to provide third-party customers (typically programmers) with segmented access to the PNC database Optional SNMP Agent allowing remote monitoring of alarms and device states Optional Warm Standby Server providing data replication on a backup server Decoder database management tree allowing quick visually-based navigation through the decoder database in a hierarchical fashion that resembles everyday network operation Support for Newtec DVB-S2 Modulator and Universal Switching System (USS) Decoder database management tree enhancements Decoder export profile Spatial adaptive coefficient filtering for D9050 HD Encoder video device configuration Configurable GOP sequence for D9050 HD Encoder video encoding Linear Dolby E stream type for D9050 HD Encoder Support for Ethernet SNMP control of the following types of AV matrix switchers: 4:32 HD/SD and 4:16 HD/SD PowerVu D9858 Transcoder controls Support Live Event Controller (LEC) Server for scheduling channel tuning events Ability to group decoders using the Event Group Summary Inband Transcode Control option

2-4

4042066 Rev A

PNC Features
Based on Server/Client architecture, the PNC software allows you to fully control the uplink devices, services, users and decoders/subscribers via an easy-to-use graphical user interface that simplifies complex tasks. You can manage these components locally or remotely, according to your system requirements. The PNC Server runs on Solaris, while the Client runs on Windows XP . Software management and design features include:
Virtual Channels

A virtual channel map transmitted to decoders allows selection of individual program services, with each channel being defined as a service. For example, this capability allows subscribers to tune to one channel to receive a movie broadcast in English, and to a different channel to receive the same movie in another language, simplifying program selection for the subscriber. Entitlement management messages stored in decoder memory provide information about individual decoders and are sent by the system to authorized decoders. Instant authorization and deauthorization are also supported, either for groups of receivers or for an individual subscriber. Furthermore, the ability to control the actual output on certain PowerVu receivers. Subscriber data stored in the control and security system can be managed with single and multiple criteria searches and global changes supported. When network managers change individual subscriber information, the system performs real-time updates of the database, eliminating the need to recompile the database after each change. Once you enter the program name, start date and duration of play, the system automatically manages scheduling, initiating programming according to your specifications. Using the Service Replacement feature, an operator is able to easily replace or substitute one kind of program for another all with the viewer having virtually no knowledge that a substitution has occurred. You can also set one or multiple decoders to a specific channel (either immediately or after a short delay) so that they can access a training event, a special message, or other event.

Subscriber Authorization

On-line Database Management

Program Scheduling, Service Replacement and Force Tuning

Black-Out Codes

Simple coding allows selection of individual decoders or a group of decoders to be deauthorized for a specific single broadcast, such as a local sporting event. In the event of suspected illegal use, finger-printing can identify the illegal receiver, allowing rapid removal of the infringing receiver from the system.

Fingerprinting

4042066 Rev A

2-5

2-6

4042066 Rev A

Chapter 3

Getting Started
Client/Server Configuration Understanding the Client/Server Architecture Installing the Client Logging Onto the Client Introducing the Main PNC Elements Startup Configuration Supported Keyboard Setting the Time Zone

The amount of preparation you must do before your PNC is operational depends on the arrangements made with the Cisco support personnel and the amount of set up and configuration done when the system is installed. If you are unsure of the systems state, contact your system administrator or Cisco. The minimum settings configured on your system should include: At least one virtual channel configured per encoder At least one decoder loaded on the system Data rate and symbol rate settings configured for each piece of equipment processing and receiving the virtual channel (service).

4042066 Rev A

3-1

Client/Server Configuration

3-2

4042066 Rev A

Server Computer Configuration


To perform PNC system functions such as making system data backups or restoring data from backups, you'll need to become familiar with the CD and tape drives in the computer and the external media used. The server is equipped with a CD-ROM drive.

Tape Drive
To perform PNC system functions such as making database backups or restoring the decoder database from backups, you'll need to become familiar with the external DDST tape drive. The tape drive can accept a 4 GB capacity, 4 mm cartridge tape.Check that the write-protect tab on the tape is in the off position when backing up data, and in the on position.

4042066 Rev A

3-3

Understanding the Client/Server Architecture


For regular, day-to-day operations, the PNC client computer is used to configure and control the PNC system. For the most part, this is the element of the system with which most users will have contact. However, there are some system control functions which can only be controlled from the PNC Server. It is mostly system administrators who will have contact with this element. For more information about system configuration, and PNC Client/Server configurations and connections, see PNC Server and Client Setup on page 14-1 and PNC Client Connections on page 14-46.

Starting the Server


You start the PNC Server by completing these tasks: Powering on the Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS). Starting the PNC Server.

Starting the UPS


To start the UPS: 1. Ensure that the unit is properly connected according to the UPS manufacturers installation manual. 2. Switch on the UPS, ensure that the power indicator is on and that there are no audible alarms.

3-4

4042066 Rev A

3. If you experience any difficulty, consult the troubleshooting guide in the UPS manufacturers installation manual. Do not proceed until any difficulties have been resolved. If necessary, contact your Cisco representative. Note: The voltage switch on the back of the servers power supply (back of the PC) MUST match the voltage supplied by the UPS. (i.e. 120V UPS can only be used when the servers power supply is set to 120V as well.)

Starting the PNC Server


To start the PNC Server: 1. Ensure the workstation is properly setup and connected. 2. Turn on the workstation. 3. Wait for the PNC Server to boot up. If it does not boot and/or display the login screen, contact your system administrator for assistance.

Once the PNC Servers login screen is displayed, you can login to the Server.

Logging Onto the Server


To log onto the PNC Server: 1. At the Please enter your user name prompt, type your user name exactly as you received it, and press Enter. The factory default username is emcadmin. User

4042066 Rev A

3-5

names are case-sensitive.

2. At the Please enter your password prompt, type your password and press Enter. The factory default password is emc. For security reasons, your password does not appear on the screen when you enter it. Passwords are also casesensitive. If you enter the wrong user name or password, a system message informs you that your login attempt was unsuccessful. The system default for the number of login attempts is 10. If you exceed the maximum number of login attempts, your account is automatically deactivated and the system administrator must reactivate the account before you can try again. For security reasons, the system administrator should immediately change the Server password. A procedure for changing the PNC application password is given in Changing Server Passwords on page 14-2. Cisco recommends that the system administrator immediately create an additional backup user ID to provide another means of accessing the system if an accidental lockout occurs. CAUTION:There is no method of accessing the PNC Server if the UNIX passwords are lost or forgotten. If the PNC Server passwords are lost, then the UNIX system must be re-installed, and all data will be lost. When you enter the correct User Id and password, the PNC may display any of four different screens (depending on how the system is configured). However, during normal operation the system will display a Terminal window, simi-

3-6

4042066 Rev A

lar to the example shown below.

CAUTION:The PNC systems are designed to be operated through the Client PC running the Windows XP operating system. The screens available on the server PC are not fully documented here. Therefore, only the tasks specifically described in this chapter or in other parts of this manual should be performed on the Server.

Logging Off the PNC Server


To log off the system when you are finished: 1. Ensure that the Solaris UNIX CDE (Common Desktop Environment) Front Panel is displayed, similar to the example below:

Exit button

2. Select Exit from the CDE front panel. The system displays a dialog window similar to the following:

3. Select Continue Logout. When the logout process is complete, the system displays the logon screen.

4042066 Rev A

3-7

Installing the Client


This section steps you through the procedures for installing the PowerVu Network Centre application software (the PNC client) on a PC, either for first-time use or for a software upgrade. The PNC client is optimized to run on Windows XP and uses the familiar Installshield Wizard setup application to complete the installation. To install the PNC client software: 1. Ensure that Windows XP is running, all other applications are closed and you are logged in with Administrative privileges (See your System Administrator for more information). 2. Place the PNC installation CD-ROM in the drive. The installation should start automatically and display the Welcome window.

If the installation does not start automatically, right-click the My Computer icon on your desktop and click Explore. When the Windows Explorer window opens, click on the drive letter assigned to the drive where you put the CD. On the right side of the window, double-click the gui folder and then run pncgui--x.x.x.x (e.g., 10.0.0.9) to start the installation.

3. On the Welcome window, click Next. 4. On the Select Menu Folder window, confirm the folder name or select the appropriate folder and then click Next.

3-8

4042066 Rev A

5. On the Choose Components window, you can select the following: a. GUI Client (selected by default) b. Standard Help Files to include Standard help files in the current installation c. Turner Help Files to include Turner help files in the current installation 6. Click Next. 7. On the Choose Install Location window, select the appropriate location and then click Install to begin copying files to your system. If you want to make any changes, click Back to return to the previous window. 8. The progress bar displays the installation status. When the installation is complete, the Complete window appears.

9. You can optionally select to create a shortcut to the PNC Client. Click Finish. The PNC Client is now installed on your PC. If you selected to create a shortcut, you will see a shortcut to the PNC Client on your desktop:

4042066 Rev A

3-9

Configuring System Settings


1. From the Windows Start menu, click Settings > Control Panel > Power Options. 2. On the Power Options Properties window click the Power Schemes tab, select Always On from the Power Schemes list, and then click OK. The PNC Client is now ready to be used.

3-10

4042066 Rev A

Logging Onto the Client


Before you can perform any task on the PNC, you must log onto the appropriate computer for the task you are performing. Most tasks are performed on the PNC Client. Unless specifically instructed otherwise, you should manage the database and configure the system by using the PNC Client. The PNC Client Login offers regular and advanced login methods. Advanced login options allow you to define the target IP address, communication port, and timeout before you log in. Note: The maximum number of users on the system at any one time is five. To log on to the PNC Client, follow these steps. 1. Double-click the PNC shortcut on your desktop to display the login screen. The PNC Logon window is displayed.

CAUTION: The default number of logon attempts is set to three. If you try to logon unsuccessfully three times consecutively, then your account is automatically deactivated, and the system administrator must reactivate the account before you can try again.

2. Enter your assigned user ID in the User field. The system administrator should assign you your own user ID. 3. Enter your assigned password in the Password box.
middlefield. For security reasons, the system administrator should change the

Note: The default user ID is pncadministrator, and the default password is

default password and create a unique user profile for each user as soon as the system is operational.

4042066 Rev A

3-11

4. If you do not want to display or change the advanced communication information, then skip to Step 5. To configure the IP address or other communication information, choose Advanced to display the following additional fields.

Select or enter information in these fields.


Host Name

Enter the IP Address of the PNC system server. This number is initially set by Cisco personnel, and must match the IP address of the Server to which it is connected. Enter the reserved port on the Solaris server. This value is set when the system is installed, and you should not change it unless recommended by Cisco customer support personnel. The default value is 7088. Enter the timeout rate, in seconds, desired for the server. This is the inactivity the server allows from logged-in clients before it will send a request to verify if the client is still active and connected. If no response to the servers request is received, the server shuts down the connection. Select None if you do not want the system to remember the user name and password for subsequent logins. Select User Name if you want the system to remember the user name for subsequent logins, but not the password. Select User Name and Password if you want the system to remember the user name and password each time you log in. 5. Click OK. If your login is successful, the Login window closes and the main PNC window displays. If your user ID or password are incorrect (not recognized by the system), the system wipes the attempted password and re-displays the logon window. You

Server Port

Timeout(sec)

Remember

3-12

4042066 Rev A

are allowed up to three login attempts before your keyboard is locked out. If this occurs, the system administrator must reactivate your user ID to unlock your keyboard and allow you to try again.

Logging Off the PNC Client


When you have finished working on the PNC Client, you should log off to prevent unauthorized access and free up system resources. To log off the PNC Client: 1. Update any changes you have made by choosing the Save icon while each open window is active. 2. Close all open windows. 3. Choose File > Exit. The PNC cleans up any minimized windows, performs routine background maintenance, and closes the PNC window.

4042066 Rev A

3-13

Introducing the Main PNC Elements


The following are the elements users will have the most frequent contact with while using the PNC system. Understanding these elements is critical to all procedures and tasks within the PNC.

Main Console Window


Tool Bar Menu Bar

Signal Bar

LEC Server connection Status Bar

Status Bar

Signal Bar

The signal bar displays the active signal number, the operating state for each signal, and the refresh interval (in seconds) to the PNC system. The signal bar also allows you to select a particular signal by clicking on the signals radio button. The status bar displays the current connection status information for the Live Event Controller (LEC) Server. The status will change to Failed to Coordinate if the PNC is not connected to a LEC Server. The status bar displays current system state information, such as server ip address and port, system activity status and a mirror of the menus/tool bar icons under the mouse cursor.

LEC Server Connection Status Bar Status Bar

3-14

4042066 Rev A

Menus and Toolbar Icons


While availability is impacted by context and system state, the following shows the relationship between features available on both the tool bar and the menu:
Menu File Menu Item Relogin Save As Print Exit View Uplink Window List Uplink Configuration Redundancy Multiplex Group Configuration Bitmizer Configuration DPI Source EMM Configuration EMM Transmission Status Signal Parameters Bandwidth Summary Stream Summary Multiplexer Rate Control Transport Media
n/a n/a n/a

Button

Description
Log onto/re-log onto the PNC. Saves a Decoder Search, Event Schedule, or Event Groups to a file (txt or html). Prints the contents of the active window. Exit the application. Displays the Window List window which allows you to manage currently open windows. Displays the Uplink Configuration window for the selected signal. Displays the Redundancy window which allows you to set the redundancy on a per-signal basis. Displays the Multiplex Group Configuration window for the selected signal. Displays the BitMizerTM Configuration window. Displays the DPI Source window. Displays the Entitlement Management Messages window. Displays the EMM Transmission Status window. Displays the Signal Parameters window. Displays the Bandwidth Summary window for the selected signal. Displays the Stream Summary window. From this window, you can assign PIDs to elementary streams. Displays the Multiplexer Rate Control window. Displays the Transport Media window.

n/a

n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

4042066 Rev A

3-15

Menu

Menu Item Disaster Recovery Plan Device Alarms

Button
n/a n/a n/a

Description
Displays the Disaster Recover Plan window for the selected decoders. Displays the Device Alarms window. Displays the Network Security window, where you can create a new encryption code and change the active multi-session key. Displays the Scramble Control window. Displays the Service Summary window, which lists all of the created virtual channels for this PNC system. Displays the Event Schedule window, which you can use to search for a specific virtual channels events on this PNC. If the virtual channel exists, the system displays the Event Schedule window for the selected channel.

Security

Network Security
n/a

Scramble Control Channel Service Summary

Event Schedule

Expired Event Log

n/a

Displays the Expired Event Log, showing expired events on a per virtual channel basis. Displays the Decoder Search window, which allows you to define search criteria to select a single or group of decoders.

Decoder

Decoder Search
n/a

Decoder Management

Displays the Decoder database management tree allowing quick visually-based navigation through the decoder database in a hierarchical fashion that resembles everyday network operation. Displays the Add Decoder window. Displays the Decoder Transfer window. Displays the Output Authorization Profile Summary window. Use this window to create output profiles that can be used for decoder authorization.

Add Decoder Decoder Transfer

n/a n/a n/a

Output Authorization

3-16

4042066 Rev A

Menu

Menu Item

Button
n/a

Description
This option downloads software upgrades for decoders. CAUTION: Only system administrators should use this option. Cisco recommends that you contact customer support before attempting to use this function. Displays the Disaster Recovery Profile window. NOTE: This is only available if the Disaster Recover option was installed. Displays the Transcoder Configuration Profile Summary window. Displays the Event Group Summary window. Displays the Diagnostic Monitor window.

Decoder OS Download

Disaster Recovery Profile Transcoder Configuration Event Group Summary Logging Diagnostic Monitor

n/a

n/a n/a

n/a

Diagnostic History Transaction Log Monitor Transaction Log History Email Recipient Summary Alarm Email Configuration Administration Privilege Administration Change Password API Management
n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Displays the Diagnostic History window, where you can specify various metrics to review past Diagnostic log entries. Displays the Transaction Log Monitor window. Displays the Transaction Log History window where you can review past Operator Log items, search for items in a specific date range and save search results to a text file. Displays the Email Recipient Summary window. Displays the Alarms Email Configuration window. Displays the current privilege groups. You can add and edit information for groups and for each user within a group. Users can select this option to change their passwords. Displays the API Management window.

n/a n/a

4042066 Rev A

3-17

Menu

Menu Item Server Info LEC Configuration

Button
n/a

Description
Displays the Server Info dialog which shows information about the current server connections. Displays the LEC Configuration window. Retrieves information from the server and refreshes the display. Saves changes in the active window to the database. Once changes are saved, they cannot be undone.

n/a

Actions
The contents of the Actions menu are dynamic, changing based on what the operator is currently doing.

Refresh

Save

Undo

Prior to an Save, you can choose Undo to cancel any changes you have made to the active window. Some windows are updated immediately and do not support the Undo function. n/a Displays a Properties window that presents a parameters summary of a selected device in the Uplink Configuration window. Displays a detailed summary of a selected line item in the Transaction Log window or the Transaction Log History window. Enables autoscrolling. Displays the selected Decoder Profile allowing you to edit the record. Use this feature to stop a decoder search. Use this feature to delete a location (e.g., city, company or country) from the Decoder Management window. Use this feature to paste a location (e.g., city, company or country) in the Decoder Management window Displays the Decoder Search Extended Criteria window. Use this feature to search for decoders that are authorized for a selected event.

Device Properties
n/a

Attributes Autoscroll Edit


n/a

Stop

Cut Location

Paste Location

Extended Criteria

3-18

4042066 Rev A

Menu

Menu Item

Button

Description
Displays the Bitmizer Signal Overview window. Use this feature to view dynamic bandwidth allocations and configuration summaries for individual Bitmizer channels, and bandwidth allocations for the Bitmizer group and the signal. Displays the Configuration window which allows you to set how status/ alarm messages are displayed, and which views to display on startup. Displays general help for the active window.

Signal Overview

Options

Configuration

Help

Contents About
n/a

Displays information dialog. Toggles auto scroll for the Diagnostic Monitor or Operator Log Monitor window. When enabled, the display automatically jumps to the most recent log entries. Note: This icon is only available and visible when the Diagnostic Monitor or Operator Log Monitor window is open. Displays the attributes dialog for the currently selected entry in the Operator Log Monitor window. Note: This icon is only available and visible when the Operator Log Monitor window is open. When selected, this icon auto resizes dialogs to make sure all of their controls can be seen.

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

4042066 Rev A

3-19

Startup Configuration
You can preconfigure the views you want displayed on startup. It is recommended that you set select the views most frequently used during any particular login session, although you can change them to suit your needs at any time. To set the views you want to display once you are logged on to the PNC: 1. Choose the Configuration icon, or choose Options > Configuration. The system displays:

2. In the Views window, check the boxes beside the views you want displayed on startup. 3. Upon startup, if you prefer to display the views from the previous login session, check the Use last login box near the bottom of the window. In this case, this function takes priority over any settings in the Views window. 4. Choose Apply to enable changes or Cancel to abort changes. 5. Select OK to save the changed settings to the PNC database or Cancel to abort any changes.

3-20

4042066 Rev A

Supported Keyboard
The PowerVu Network Centre hardware platform consists of a server and a client desktop computer. The desktop computers with their monitors and keyboards are used as the control computers for the PNC system. Please note that there may be function and key differences between one type of manufacturers computer keyboard and another. All keyboard references in this manual are made with the assumption that the keyboard in use is a standard IBMstyle 101-key enhanced keyboard. The keyboard is divided into four keypads: Main Keypad Editing Keypad Numeric Keypad Function Keys and Visual Indicators Keypad

Main Keypad
The Main Keypad is used for entering letters and numbers. It also contains the Enter key, Tab key, Backspace key, Space Bar, and Shift key. Refer to your manufacturers manual for an explanation of the keys on the Main Keypad.

Editing Keypad
The Editing Keypad contains the cursor control arrows as well as the following keys used by the PNC system: Page Up (Prev Screen), and Page Down (Next Screen).

Numeric Keypad
The Numeric Keypad contains numeric keys and the Enter key. You may use either the numeric keys on the Main Keypad or the numeric keys on this keypad when entering numbers in the system.

4042066 Rev A

3-21

Function Keys and Visual Indicators Keypad


The Function Keys and Visual Indicators Keypad contains the function keys and status indicators. These indicators display the status of the workstation. These indicators include Caps Lock, Scroll Lock and Num Lock.

IBM-compatible 101-key Enhanced Keyboard

3-22

4042066 Rev A

Setting the Time Zone


The time zone is used by the PNC server to display the correct time on alarm messages displayed in the diagnostic log, transactions displayed in the transaction log, time in the program/event schedule, and in other views where time is displayed. This flexibility allows time zone configuration on a per user basis and a per view basis. The time zone setting appears at the bottom of the window. See an example of the Time Zone displayed at the bottom of the Transaction Log Monitor window.shown below.

Time zone setting The time zone feature also allows data replication to be performed between PNCs located in different time zones with different time zone settings.

4042066 Rev A

3-23

To set the time zone: 1. Choose Options > Configuration or click the Configuration icon in the tool bar to display the Configuration window.

2. Select Time Zone on the left side of the window to display the Views on the right side of the window. 3. Highlight the view(s) you want to set to display the PNC GUI time according to a particular time zone, and then select the (radio button beside) Time Zone. The three time zone setting selections are: Server, Local or Other. The default Time Zone setting is Server. Server: The PNC GUI client uses the same time zone set on the PNC server. Local: The PNC GUI client uses the local time zone set on your PC. Other: The PNC GUI client displays the time according to the selected time zone. You can set the time zone from a number of international time zones.

3-24

4042066 Rev A

4. If you select a specific Time Zone that adjusts time according to daylight savings time, check the box below the drop down menu to adjust for daylight savings time as shown below.

Check box to adjust for daylight savings time

The year selection box allows you to view and verify the start and end times for daylight savings time for the current and future years. 5. When you finish making changes to these fields, choose OK to save the changes and close the window.

4042066 Rev A

3-25

3-26

4042066 Rev A

Chapter 4

Configuring Streams and Services


Displaying the Devices Configuring an SD (Standard Definition) Encoder Configuring a D9040 Encoder Configuring an HD (High Definition) Encoder Configuring the Multiplexer Configuring Scrambling Configuring Modulators Configuring the LEC Server

Services consist of elementary streams, primarily video and audio, which you group together to form virtual channels. The services you can use depends on the hardware configuration options contained within the system. Before you can create virtual channels, available services must already be configured. Available services are defined by cards contained in the PNC encoders and multiplexers. You can view the available services and their current settings through the Uplink Configuration window. This chapter describes how the Uplink Configuration window works, and how to use it to view an encoders or multiplexers available services.

4042066 Rev A

4-1

Displaying the Devices


Devices, such as encoders, multiplexers, modulators and AV switches, are graphically shown on the Uplink Configuration window. You can edit the devices and their services, if appropriate, and monitor their diagnostic messages. To display the Uplink Configuration window: 1. Select the signal whose equipment you want to configure by selecting one of the Signal radio buttons from the signal bar at the bottom of the Main window. If your system includes more than one signal, all the devices associated with this signal will be dimmed until you click the signal that includes them. Note: It should be noted that all devices across all signals are displayed, but only the devices for the currently selected signal is editable. 2. Choose the Uplink icon, or choose Uplink > Uplink Configuration to display the Uplink Configuration window.

The Uplink Configuration window displays the devices switchers, encoders, multiplexers, modulators and virtual encoders (MetroMux devices) as they are set up during installation. Each pictured rack displays the equipment and its current state. This window is meant to display the devices as they actually exist in your physical racks. Note: You can only configure primary encoders, multiplexers and modulators; you cannot configure secondary devices, as they are configured automatically by the PNC.

4-2

4042066 Rev A

3. Choose the encoder, multiplexer, or modulator whose services you want to configure by double-clicking on the device. If you select an encoder, the Encoder Configuration window appears, displaying a list of the encoders cards, their slot number, and status.

Configuring an SD (Standard Definition) Encoder


Depending on how your system was installed, you may need to change the encoder settings and configure its cards. You must have appropriate user privileges before you can change the encoders configuration values. For more information on User Privileges, see Working with Users on page 8-11. To configure a D9120 encoder: 1. Select the signal whose devices you want to display from the signal bar. 2. Choose the Uplink icon, or choose Uplink > Uplink Configuration to display the Uplink Configuration window. 3. Double-click the encoder you want to configure. The encoders name appears in the title bar of the displayed window. Note: You can open multiple encoder windows so that you can compare their settings.

Name

Enter the name of this encoder. You can enter up to 30 characters. This is an alias to differentiate the channel (i.e., sports). For example, the name ENC1P1 is a system-assigned name only. This field displays one of the following encoder states:

State

4042066 Rev A

4-3

Encoder States
Active Standby Off line

Description
Indicates that the data paths are operating normally and that the unit is being used for broadcast purposes. Indicates that the system and virtual channel data paths are operating normally for the unit, which has been designated as the standby device. Indicates communication with the device has stopped, the reporting of diagnostics messages for this unit has stopped, and the transmission of virtual channel EMMs has been disabled. Indicates a failure in the device and that communication has stopped between the PNC system and the device (e.g., due to a cable problem or a power supply failure).

Failed

Redundancy
Group

The encoder redundancy group is decided during system configuration at the factory (i.e., it is not a user configurable parameter). It is essentially the grouping of encoders (it actually applies to other devices - muxes, modulators) with similar card sets. Select the encoder priority for autochangeover to a standby encoder in case this encoder fails. The lower the number, the higher the priority. For example, if encoders 1 and 2 both fail, and their priorities are set at 50 and 100 respectively, encoder 1 has priority to the standby encoder of the same type. The standby encoder must be configured as Standby, and Autochangeover must be enabled. Select a number from 0 to 255. The default, and the highest priority, is 0.

Priority

Cards
Type

The type of card. Depending on the encoders hardware configuration, some or all of these cards may be listed in the encoder window.
Encoder Card Types Video Input Control/Conditional Access Video Encoder Description
The D9796 Video Input Card receives analog and digital signals and prepares them for compression. In addition, it handles VBI, DPI and Imitext subtitling. The D9753 Control Card provides a communication bridge between the PNC control computer and individual cards in the chassis. The D9790 MPEG Video Encoder card compresses, packetizes, and produces real-time MPEG-2 video.

4-4

4042066 Rev A

Encoder Card Types

Description
The D9791 Video Encoder (VE5) Card receives analog and digital signals and prepares them for compression. In addition, it handles VBI, DPI and Imitext subtitling. Additionally, this card performs statistical multiplexing to optimize bandwidth usage when transmitting multiple services in the same transport stream. Note that the D9790 Video Encoder (VE4) card and the D9791 Dual Pass Video Encoder (VE5) card cannot exist within the same multiplex, therefore all encoders transmitting on a particular signal must be equipped with the same model Video Encoder cards. The D9793 Audio Encoder Card provides MPEG-1 (Layer 2) audio encoding and transport stream packetization for four audio channels from analog and SDI inputs. The D9792 Dolby (digital) Audio Encoder Card provides Dolby digital encoding and transport stream packetization for four audio channels. The D9794 AAC Audio Encoder Card provides two-channel audio encoding with support for externally encoded AAC 5.1 on two chains.

Dual Pass Video Encoder

MPEG Audio (Rear Card) Dolby Digital Audio

AAC Audio

Slot

The slot number within the chassis. 4. To save changes to the database, click the Save icon or choose Actions > Save. 5. To continue, select the service you want to configure.

4042066 Rev A

4-5

Configuring Video Services


Note: Contact Cisco Customer Support before changing this setting as the default settings are configured according to other preconfigured settings made by the system administrator.

Encoders with D9790 Video Encoder (VE4) Cards


Video encoder cards are used to compress a single channel from either a 525-line (NTSC) or 625-line (PAL) source. To configure a video service, follow these steps: 1. Select the appropriate signal, display the Uplink Configuration window, and choose the encoder whose video card you want to display or modify. (See Configuring an SD (Standard Definition) Encoder on page 4-3.) 2. Select the Video service from the list on the left portion of the window. The window displays the following:

3. Select or enter information for the following fields. Note: The system assigns a system name automatically to cards.
Input Format

Select the input signal format the video card is set to receive.
525 Line

NTSC Serial D1 - 525 PAL-M 525

625 Line

PAL B, G, H, I Serial D1 - 625 PAL-N 625 PAL-(N)

4-6

4042066 Rev A

Resolution Horiz/Vert

Select the appropriate horizontal resolution (line standard) of the compressed signal. The available options are not constrained by the Input Format you select for this service. Packet Identification numbers are usually set by Cisco personnel during system installation. Although Cisco does not recommend that you change this number, you can define your own numbering system and enter a unique PID number for this service. The number you enter must be one that the system is not using. Enter a number in the range 200 to 8190. For more information, see Packet IDs (PIDs) on page 4-142

PID

Enabled

When checked, this stream is available to be transmitted. Note: If this check box is disabled (unchecked), you will be able to create Virtual Channels and perform other functions, but the services will not be transmitted.

Bitrate (Mbps)

Enter the compressed bit rate (the data transmission rate) of the transmitted video. If Chroma Format is set to 4:2:0, enter a value in the range from 0.50 to 15.0. If Chroma Format is set to 4:2:2, enter a value in the range from 0.50 to 50.0. The default bit rate is 08.0. Cisco recommends you enter a bit rate in the range from 2.00 to 15.00 for a 4:2:0 chroma or 6.00 to 40.00 for a 4:2:2 chroma. Increasing the bit rate increases the video quality, but this uses more bandwidth.

Frame Sync Bypass Mode

Select one of the following to determine frame synchronization.


Frame Sync Bypass Modes Normal Description
Video input passes through the video input cards frame synchronizer, which provides video synchronization. Synchronization is independent of the input video clock. Video input does not pass through the video input cards frame synchronizer and the video encoder internal clock is locked to the input video clock. This mode requires that the input video source has a stable clock. Typically, professional video equipment contains clock sources that provide the stability suited to this mode. Frame synchronization is bypassed for the purpose of reducing system delay when end-to-end delay is critical. The drawback to using this mode as opposed to the standard bypass mode is that low delay cannot immediately conceal (by freeze framing) a corrupt video signal and, therefore, a flash of the corrupt video will be visible before the freeze frame begins.

Bypass

Low Delay Bypass

4042066 Rev A

4-7

3/2 Pulldown

Use this check box to enable the 3/2 Pulldown feature (if available) in your system hardware. The 3/2 Pulldown function removes redundant information when the system converts film-based material to video. Traditionally, NTSC video (which is broadcast at 30 fps) transmits 5 video frames for every 4 frames of film (which is shot at 24 fps). This is achieved by repeating every 5th video field. Each time a field is repeated, three fields of video are generated from two actual fields. 3/2 Pulldown detects the repeated field in the encoder and instructs the encoder to redisplay the repeated field using MPEG functions rather than re-encoding the redundant field. The available bandwidth recovered by using 3/2 Pulldown is made available to the next encoded picture and helps improve system throughput and picture quality. The 3/2 Pulldown feature is only applicable to NTSC video (i.e., not PAL).

Enable 3/2 Pulldown Coding

Use this check box to determine if 3/2 Pulldown Coding is in effect in order to enhance the video signal. Click the check box to ON to ensure that 3/2 Pulldown Coding is operational while the video card is processing film-based material shot at 24 fps.

Chroma Format
4:2:0

This option indicates the encoding format and supports video bit rates from 0.5 Mbps to 15 Mbps. This option indicates the encoding format and supports video bit rates up to 50 Mbps.

4:2:2

Filters
Luma

Use this field to override the Luma Horizontal Bandwidth setting predefined in the hardware. The Luma field provides you with a range of settings from 25 to 100 that you can use to control Y bandwidth filtering with more precision and consistency. Use this field to override the Chroma Horizontal Bandwidth setting predefined in the hardware. The Chroma field provides you with a range of settings from 25 to 100 that you can use to control C bandwidth filtering with more precision and consistency.

Chroma

Test Parameters
Video Test Pattern Mode

Select one of the following options to check the encoders video processing capability.

4-8

4042066 Rev A

Video Test Pattern Modes Live Video

Use
This option is used for servicing and diagnostic testing. (typically selected for normal operation) Select this option to display the internally-generated pattern currently selected in the Video Test Pattern field. This option allows live video to be seen when it is present. However, when there is a loss of live video signal the test pattern selected in the Video Test Pattern field will be enabled after a time-out period (default is one second). This option is intended primarily for factory calibration purposes.

Description
The test pattern will not be displayed when there is a loss of video signal. Instead, a black screen displays at the IRD. The pattern will always be displayed regardless of whether or not a live video signal is present. To change the duration of this time-out period, contact Cisco customer service.

Test Pattern

Substitute for Loss of Input

Alignment

The test pattern selected in the Video Test Pattern field is applied over top of the live video, in broad horizontal strips. Used for video level adjustment.

Video Test Pattern

If you selected Test Pattern Mode, then select one of the internally-generated test patterns from the drop down list. Select this check box to test line 21 closed captioning using an internally-generated test pattern. Clear the check box to disable this test and display live video, select one of the test patterns from the drop down list. The default is Disabled. Closed captioning is preset at the time of installation to the following default settings: Packet 1: 4 (DVS 053 Type 4, SA proprietary), Packet 2: 0, Packet 3: 0. If there is a need to change these settings, contact Cisco Customer Support.

Line 21 Test Pattern

Cue Trigger (Auxiliary)

Use this check box to enable the cue trigger feature for all authorized decoders. If the check box is set to ON, the user is able to define the Cue Trigger Mask information for authorized decoders. 4. To save the changes and leave this window, choose the Save icon, or choose Save from the Actions menu to save the changes to the database. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message Discard changes to close?

4042066 Rev A

4-9

Encoders with D9791 Dual Pass Video Encoder (VE5) Cards


1. Select the appropriate signal, display the Device Configuration window, and then double-click the name of the encoder that contains the Video Encoder you want to display or modify. (See Configuring an SD (Standard Definition) Encoder on page 4-3.) 2. Select the Video Encoder from the list on the left portion of the window. You will see a window similar to this:

Note: The system assigns a system name automatically. 3. Select or enter information for the fields under the following tabs.

Encoding tab
Use the Encoding tab to control the most commonly changed video attributes.To configure the video attributes: 1. In the left portion of the Device Config window, click the Video Encoder card from the list of cards under the encoder. The Encoding tab is the default tab within the Video Encoder view, as illustrated above. 2. Select the settings for the following fields:

4-10

4042066 Rev A

Enable

Select this check box to enable the video stream. If this check box is cleared, the video stream will not be generated and it will occupy no bandwidth. However, the PID will be reserved so that you can enable the video stream in the future. Assigns the transport packet PID of the video stream. Enter a value in a range from 16-8190. Defines the PES encoding rate (in Mbps) to be allocated to the video stream.You can set the rate here, but it is recommended to set it from the Multiplex Group Configuration view if the video is part of a Multiplex Group. Enter a value in the range from 1.49 to 50 Mbps. The default bit rate is 5.0 Mbps. To set the bit rate, type in a value to a maximum of two decimal places within the following ranges: 1.49 to 15.00 if the Chroma Format value is set to 4:2:0 3.0 to 50.00 if the Chroma Format is to 4:2:2

PID

Bitrate (Mbps)

Horizontal Resolution

Sets the horizontal resolution of the generated the video stream in pixels. In the list, click one of seven values: 352, 480, 528, 544, 640, 704, 720. The default horizontal resolution is 480. Sets the chroma format encoding to be used by the video stream. In the list, click one of two values: 4:2:0, 4:2:2. The default chroma format is 4:2:0. Select the check box to enable 3/2 pulldown processing in the video stream. Controls the aspect ratio to be signalled in the video stream. In the Aspect Ratio list, click one of two options: 4x3 or 16x9. The default aspect ratio is 4x3. Displays the participation status of the video stream within the statmux group of the multiplex group, either Statmux Off - CBR or Statmux On - VBR. A statmux group exists within a multiplex group. An encoder can transition between Statmux Off - CBR and Stamux On - VBR, but can only belong to one multiplex group. Any encoder which is not connected to a Regulus Controller is not in a multiplex group and therefore cannot be assigned to a statmux group. Encoders not connected to a Regulus Controller must be configured with Statmux Off - CBR.

Chroma Format

3/2 Pulldown Enable Aspect Ratio

Encode Mode

Test Pattern Mode

Sets when a video test pattern will replace live video. In the list, click one of four options: Live Video, Test Pattern, Substitute for Loss of Input, Alignment. The default is Substitute for Loss of Input. Sets what test pattern will display. In the list, click one of eight test pattern options: 75% Bars, NTC-7 Composite, VITS-17, FCC Multiburst, VITS-18, Digital Black, Digital White, Matrix. The default test pattern is 75% Bars.

Test Pattern

4042066 Rev A

4-11

Input tab
Use the Input tab to change video encoding attributes that are not normally changed or require specialized knowledge. To configure these parameters: 1. From the Video Encoder view, click the Input tab. You will see this window:

2. Select the settings for the following fields:


Input Standard

Select the input signal format the video card is set to receive.
525 Line

NTSC Serial D1 - 525 PAL-M J-NTSC

625 Line

PAL B, G, H, I Serial D1 - 625 PAL-N PAL-(N)

In the list, click one of the input options. The default input standard is D1-525.
Synchronizer Mode

Controls how the internal frame synchronizer will be used. This setting is fixed at Normal and cannot be changed. Enables preprocessing of the video signal. Select the Enable check box so the Preanalysis and Prefilter settings you configure will be implemented. Enables preanalysis of the video signal. In the list, click either On or Off. The default is On. You will need Preanalysis to be On for frame accurate insertion of user data into the video stream and 3/2 pull-down operation.

Preprocessor Enable

Preanalysis

4-12

4042066 Rev A

Prefilter

Enables prefiltering of the video signal. In the list, click Off, Adaptive or Custom. Adaptive means that the encoder dynamically changes the type and level of filtering according to the complexity of the input. Custom enables the user to specify a level and combination of filtering. Note: The following Prefilter controls are only applicable if Prefilter is set to Custom.

Spatial Prefilter Control

Sets how the video signal will be spatially prefiltered. This aids to reduce noise and improve picture quality (within each picture frame). In the list, click one of three options: None, Fixed, Adaptive. The default is None. If you choose Adaptive, the encoder dynamically changes the type and level of prefiltering according to the complexity of the signal. If you click Fixed, you need to select one of 15 predefined fixed spatial prefilters in the Fixed list. Uses the Fixed Spatial Prefilter value in the drop-down list to set the cut-off level. In the Fixed list, select a value in a range from 1 to 15. The higher the number, the the heavier (more) filtering is applied. In the Fixed mode, the encoder determines where to use the filter, but the user sets the cut-off level. Sets how the video signal will be temporally prefiltered. This aids to reduce noise and improve picture quality from picture frame to picture frame. In the list, click one of the options: None, Fixed, Adaptive, Multitap_very_weak, Multitap_weak, Multitap_less_than_normal, Multitap_normal, Multitap_strong, Multitap_very_strong. The default is None. If you choose Adaptive, the encoder dynamically changes the type and level of prefiltering according to the complexity of the signal. Other settings affect picture quality by applying progressively heavier prefiltering from Multitap_very_weak to Multitap_very_strong. 3. To save the changes and leave this window, choose the Save icon, or choose Save from the Actions menu to save the changes to the database. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message Discard changes to close?

Fixed

Temporal Prefilter Control

4042066 Rev A

4-13

Multiplex Group tab


The Multiplex Group tab provides control of multiplex group operation. To configure the Multiplex Group parameters: 1. From the Video Encoder view, click the Multiplex Group tab. You will see this window:

2. Select the settings for the following fields:


Multiplex Group Membership

Read-only. Displays the multiplex group that the video stream belongs to. You can set the group membership on the Multiplex Group Configuration view (Uplink > Multiplex Group Configuration). Read-only. Displays the chroma format used to encode the video stream. The format is set on the Encoding tab, but is displayed here so you can evaluate the constraints of other configuration settings. Defines the PES encoding rate (in Mbps) to be allocated to the video stream. It is recommended to set the bit rate in this view if the video is part of a Multiplex Group. To set the bit rate, type in a value to a maximum of two decimal places within the following ranges: 0.50 to 15.00 if the Chroma Format value is set to 4:2:0 3.0 to 50.00 if the Chroma Format is to 4:2:2 The default bit rate is 5.0 Mbps.

Chroma Format

Bitrate (Mbps)

Encode Mode

The video streams generated by the D9791 Video Encoder (VE5) cards in the D9120 Encoder are statistically multiplexed by the Regulus Controller. However, the PNC does not directly control the Regulus Controller. The Model D9791

4-14

4042066 Rev A

Video Encoder (VE5) card in the D9120 Encoder is controlled by the PNC, which then communicates with the Regulus Controller to statistically multiplex the video streams, providing increased efficiency of bandwidth utilization. The Encode field is used to control statmux participation of the video stream within a multiplex group. In the list, select either Statmux Off - CBR or Statmux On - VBR. Note: The D9791 Video Encoder (VE5) card only supports VBR operation in 4:2:0 Chroma Format, meaning that if Statmux - VBR is selected along with 4:2:2 Chroma Format (in the Encoding tab window), an error message will be displayed, and the setting will be changed to Statmux On - CBR unless the Chroma Format is changed to 4:2:0.
Regulus StatMux Controls (Statmux On)

The following Regulus StatMux Control settings are applicable when the Encode Mode is set to Statmux On - VBR, in which case statistical multiplexing is ON. The Regulus changes the actual encode rate of the encoder within the boundary defined by the minimum and maximum rates depending on the relative complexity and priority of the video. These parameters should not be confused with the Bitrate setting. Sets the maximum encoding bit rate when closed-loop statmux is enabled. This rate defines the default and maximum boundaries for encoder operation.This control is provided so you can limit the burstiness of generated video stream to prevent overflowing downstream consumption equipment.To set the maximum bit rate, type in a value to a maximum of two decimal places within the following ranges: 0.50 to 50.00 when the chroma format value is set to 4:2:0 or 4:2:2 The default bit rate is 15.00. Note: The Maximum Rate cannot be set to a value less than the encoding Bitrate setting.

Maximum Rate (Mbps)

Minimum Rate (Mbps)

Sets the minimum encoding bit rate when closed-loop statmux is enabled. This rate defines the default and minimum boundaries for encoder operation.It should be noted that the PNC will allow the user to set this field to the lowest possible allowable value even if results in unsatisfactory video quality. It is the responsibility of the user to determine the best quality in order to maximize bandwidth optimization within the multiplex group. To set the minimum bit rate, type in a value to a maximum of two decimal places within the following ranges: 0.50 to 50.00 when the chroma format value is set to 4:2:0 or 4:2:2 The default bit rate is 1.50. Note: The Minimum Rate cannot be set to a value higher than the encoding Bitrate setting.

4042066 Rev A

4-15

Priority

Sets the relative priority used by the statmux process to assign bandwidth to the video stream. When statmux performs bandwidth redistribution, the video quality of higher priority video is maintained, while the video quality of lower priority streams may be reduced. To assign a priority value to the video stream, in the Priority list select a value in the range from 0 - 15, where 0 is the lowest priority and 15 is the highest. The default priority value is 8.

Quality

Sets the bandwidth efficiency of the statmuxed video stream. The highest quality uses all available bandwidth allocated to the video stream. Lower values use progressively less proportions of the allocated bandwidth. To assign a bandwidth quality level to the statmuxed video stream, in the Quality list click one value in a range from 0 - 15, where 0 is the lowest quality and 15 is the highest. The default quality value is 15 - highest. 3. To save the changes and leave this window, choose the Save icon, or choose Save from the Actions menu to save the changes to the database. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message Discard changes to close?

Captions/Cues tab
Use the Captions/Cue Trigger tab to control the insertion of captions and cue triggers into the video user data. To configure the Captions/Cues parameters: 1. From the Video Encoder view, click the Captions/Cues tab. You will see this window:

4-16

4042066 Rev A

2. Select the settings for the following fields:


Cue Triggers Enable Input Source Captions Test Pattern Enable Field 1 & Field 2 Test Patterns

Click this check box to enables cue trigger insertion into video user data. Defines the source of the cue trigger input, which is set to Rear Panel GPI. Click this check box to enable field 1 and field 2 captions test patterns. Selects captions test pattern for the VBI line 21 field configured in your system. In each list, click one of four options: Scientific Atlanta, Test Pattern 2, Test Pattern 3, Loopback Test. The default captions test pattern is Scientific Atlanta. Sets up to three captions encoding modes for simultaneous insertion into video user data. In the list, click one of four options: None, EIA 708, SA, DVS 157. Packet 1 specifies the captions encoding mode to be inserted in the first captions position. The default encoding mode is SA. Packet 2 specifies the captions encoding mode to be inserted in the second captions position. The default encoding mode is None. Packet 3 specifies the captions encoding mode to be inserted in the third captions position. The default encoding mode is None. 3. To save the changes and leave this window, choose the Save icon, or choose Save from the Actions menu to save the changes to the database. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message Discard changes to close.

Captions Encoding Modes - Packets 1-3

Configuring VBI Lines


The VBI line standard and its associated line numbers are normally set up when the system is installed. However, if you need to modify the VBI line numbers (e.g., to define non-standard line numbers for customized line placement of the VBI information, or to configure for new hardware, etc.), the VBI Line Config dialog enables you to quickly make the required changes.

4042066 Rev A

4-17

VBI allows for the configuration of General VBI, as well as, DVB WST.

To enable VBI: 1. On the left side of the device config window, expand the video service hierarchy by clicking the plus sign to the left of the video service. 2. Click VBI to display the VBI Configuration window. 3. Select the Enabled check box and set the PID. To create and/or edit VBI lines: 1. On the left side of the device config window, expand the video service hierarchy by clicking the plus sign to the left of the video service. 2. Click VBI to display the VBI Configuration window. 3. To add a new VBI line, right-click on the white space below the table at the bottom of the window. Choose Edit from the pop-up menu. The VBI Line Config dialog displays. To edit an existing VBI line, right-click any existing line and choose Edit from the pop-up menu. The VBI Line Config dialog displays with the fields already filled in.

Select your desired values in the following drop-down list boxes:

4-18

4042066 Rev A

Line

Select the line number to add/change from the line numbers available in this drop-down list box. Both the Field 1 and Field 2 line numbers are shown, in the form Field 1(Field 2). The available lines are dependant on the selected video input format (NTSC or PAL) The available values for both Field 1 and Field 2 are the same, though you can make unique selections between the two. In either case, choose the standard to use for this VBI Line. When you have the settings for the VBI line the way you want them, click Set to apply the change to the Valid Field Lines listing (Note, the changes arent saved until the final step when you Save the changes.). You can now continue to add more VBI lines by repeating the above steps and clicking Set to apply your changes. When youre done, click Close to dismiss the VBI Line Config dialog. 4. When you finish setting the values for the VBI lines, choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the new values. World System Teletext (WST) allows for the transmission of teletext data in almost every language.

Field 1 Standard Field 2 Standard

To enable DVB WST: 1. On the left side of the device config window, expand the video service hierarchy by clicking the plus sign to the left of the video service. 2. Click VBI to display the VBI Configuration window. 3. Click the DVB WST tab to display the DVB WST window. The WST lines, if any, are highlighted yellow in the VBI Input Definition list box. 4. Select the DVB WST Enabled check box and set the DVB WST PID. If General VBI is not currently enabled, you are prompted on whether or not you

4042066 Rev A

4-19

want to enable it. If you click No, the DVB WST is not enabled. Note: You MUST select Yes to ensure DVB WST is enabled and transmitted. As well, if you attempt to disable General VBI while DVB WST is enabled, you are warned that this action will also disable DVB WST. To create and/or edit DVB WST lines:

1. On the left side of the device config window, expand the video service hierarchy by clicking the plus sign to the left of the video service. 2. Click VBI to display the VBI Configuration window. 3. Click the DVB WST tab to display the DVB WST window. The WST lines, if any, are highlighted in the VBI Input Definition list box. 4. To add a new DVB WST line, right-click on the WST Lines listing and choose Add from the pop-up menu. The DVB WST Config dialog displays. To edit an existing WST line, right-click on the line to change and select Edit from the pop-up menu. The DVB WST Config dialog displays with the values already filled in.

Possible values for the dialogs fields are:


Type

Choose the desired page type from the predefined list. This defines the teletext page to be transmitted. Choose the desired language from the predefined list. This is where you tell the PNC which page of information you want. As described earlier, each screen of text is considered a page. Pages are further grouped into Magazines. To specify the information you want, you enter a three-digit number.

Language Page

4-20

4042066 Rev A

The first digit identifies which magazine (0-8 can be used) contains the page you want. The last two digits identify the page itself within the magazine (0-99). The default is 100 and the possible range is 100-899.

Configuring Imitext Subtitling


If your system is equipped with Imitext subtitling hardware from Screen Subtitling Systems Inc., you can use the PNC to control subtitling capabilities for all decoders. Before you can transmit Imitext subtitling on the video stream you need to configure each VBI card which will process subtitling data. The procedure described here only covers VBI card configuration for Imitext subtitling. In order to broadcast subtitling information on the virtual channel you must also define the languages to be used. Languages are defined when the Virtual Channel is created. For more information see Creating a Virtual Channel on page 5-9. To configure Imitext subtitling: 1. On the left side of the Device Config window, expand the Video Encoder hierarchy by clicking the plus sign to the left of Video Encoder. 2. Click Subtitling to display the Imitext Subtitling Configuration window.

3. Enter, select or view information in the following fields:


Input Control

Baud Rate

This field matches the rate of the data being input into the multiplexer.

4042066 Rev A

4-21

Possible Baud Rates


1200 9600 2400 19200 4800

Data Bits

The number of data bits used in the transmission. Note: Although the multiplexer is capable of accepting this range of values, a decoder is fixed at 8 bits.

Stop Bits

The number of stop bits per input value. Note: Although the multiplexer is capable of accepting this range of values, a decoder is fixed at 1 stop bit.

Parity

Specifies Odd, Even or None for the parity per input value. Note: Although the multiplexer is capable of accepting this range of values, a decoder is fixed at None (no parity).

Output Control Enable

When enabled (checked), this check box makes this stream available to the system to now be transmitted. Use this field to define a PID for the appropriate stream carrying the Imitext subtitling language data. The digits of each PID is very significant to the stream identification process. Cisco has defined the following PID numbering conventions for language subtitling:
PID Digit Position 1&2 Meaning
Device unit number. While the first two digits are used for this, the range is 1-33, so at times a single digit represents the first two digits (i.e., 01 is written as just 1). What this means is your PID, while four digits in the past, may only have three digits, now. Elemental Stream (ES) type -1. For Imitext subtitling, this digit is always 1 (Stream type 2-1)

PID

4-22

4042066 Rev A

PID Digit Position

Meaning
This is the ES Channel number used to differentiate streams of the same type from one another. In this case, it is the index number of the subtitling language carried on a particular stream and port

Digit 4 PID 2 4 3 4 5 6 7

Port
1

Stream
1 2

1 2

1 2

For example, PID 212 identifies Encoder 02, Imitext Subtitling stream type, Port 1, Stream 1.
Delay

The relative delay in milliseconds to offset the Imitext subtitles from the video. The valid range is -1000 to +1000, inclusively. The encoder internally synchronizes subtitles with video. The delay value from the view is added to the internal video synchronization delay and allows the operator to cause the subtitles to lead or lag video by up to 1 second. The delay is applied to all streams of Imitext subtitles.

Configuring DVB Subtitles


Depending on how your system was installed, you may need to change the DVB Subtitles settings. You must have appropriate user privileges before you can change the DVB Subtitle configuration values. For more information on User Privileges, see Working with Users on page 8-11. A virtual device in the Uplink Configuration View called External Service Utility (ESU) represents the DVB Subtitling device. Since this is a virtual device, it will always remain in the Active state.

4042066 Rev A

4-23

To configure DVB Subtitles: 1. Select the signal whose devices you want to display from the signal bar. 2. Choose the Uplink icon, or choose Uplink > Uplink Configuration to display the Uplink Configuration window. 3. Double-click the External Service Utility you want to configure. The External Service Utility window displays.

Note: You can open multiple External Service Utility windows so that you can compare their settings. To add/edit Streams: 1. Double-click any existing streams or double-click in the stream window below existing streams to open the DVB Subtitle view window. If you double-clicked an existing item, the window opens with the information from that line filled into the fields. You can click the Edit button to change the information. If you double-clicked below any items or on a blank area, the window opens ready

4-24

4042066 Rev A

for input.

Possible values for the dialogs fields are:


Name Type Enable Bandwidth

This is the System-assigned name for the stream. It cannot be edited. Displays the stream type to be transmitted. When selected, this field specifies whether the stream is available for transmission. This is the DVB stream bandwidth setting. It is preset to a default value of 50,000 bps when a DVB subtitle stream is created, but should be set according to the requirement of the third-party input source. PID used by the input stream. PID used by the output stream. The PID must be unique across the system. This value is used for locating languages within a DVB Subtitle stream. The default value is 2. This is additional information to aid in locating languages within a DVB Subtitle stream. The default value is 2. This field can be used to select a language from a predefined list. While this virtual channel, it is only editable here. These types of streams can, however, be deleted from the Service Assignment window by right-clicking on the stream and selecting Delete from the pop-up menu.

In PID Out PID Composition Page ID

Ancillary Page ID

Language Code

4042066 Rev A

4-25

Configuring MPEG Audio Services (MAE & MAC Cards)


The Model D9793 MPEG (MAE) and Model D9778 MPEG (MAC) audio encoder cards are used to provide real-time encoding of up to four audio channels from analog, SDI inputs and AES3 digital inputs, using the MPEG-1 Layer 2 encoding algorithm. All defined MPEG compression data rates and samples rates are supported. Each decoder contains special integrated circuits designed to decode the multichannel audio bitstreams found in digital signals that are compliant to MPEG-1 and satellite broadcasting DVB standards. The basic function of these integrated circuits is to accept any legal layer 1 or layer 2 audio elementary stream coded according to the standard and produce two analog signals. The MPEG audio stream is the integrated circuit that does the decoding. Each integrated circuit is capable of producing one audio stereo pair output. A decoder option allows a second pair of MPEG audio streams to produce another two pairs of outputs. Configuring audio encoder cards consists of two main procedures: Configuring the parameters of the source audio output to the PNC system for the paired channels (Channels 1/2 or Channels 3/4). The settings you select for the paired channels apply to both channels. Configuring each individual audio channel within the PNC system.

Configuring Paired Channels


When you configure paired channels (either Channels 1/2, or Channels 3/4), the settings you select set the parameters for the source audio output. Once you have configured the paired channels, you can configure the individual audio channels within the PNC system. To configure the paired channels: 1. Display the encoders device window as described in Configuring an SD (Standard Definition) Encoder on page 4-3. 2. Click on the audio service you want to configure. The window displays a sum-

4-26

4042066 Rev A

mary of the services audio streams, as shown below.

3. From either the Channel 1/2 Input Select or the Channel 3/4 Input Select pulldown list (whichever is appropriate), select the source type. The selection you make applies to both channels in the pair.
Sampling Frequency

Should display 48 kHz. This field is grayed-out and is for informational purposes only.
inputs.

Channels 1/2 Input Select

Select the type of audio source each encoder outputs. The default is Analog audio

Audio Source Type


Analog audio inputs Embedded SDI digital PCM audio AES3 digital inputs, PCM audio

Description
Select this option if the audio source to the encoder is via the four XLR connectors. Select this option if the audio source to the encoder is via the DI serial input on the D9796 Video Input Card. Select this option if the audio source to the encoder is via the two XLR AES3 connectors.

Channels 3/4 Input Select

See Channels 1/2 Input Select above.

4042066 Rev A

4-27

Configuring Individual Channels (MAE or MAC Cards)


To configure an individual MPEG-1 audio channel: 1. Be sure you have chosen the audio service containing the channel you want to configure, as the previous section describes. 2. Click on the channel you want to configure. A window similar to the following is displayed.

3. Select or enter information in the following fields. The values you set only apply to this channel.
Name Enabled Encoding Mode

Name of the Audio Channel is defined by the system. When checked, this Audio Channel is available to the system to be transmitted. Select the audio channel configuration output from the encoder:

Single Mono (default) Dual Mono Stereo Joint Stereo.

See Audio Encoding and Decoding Modes on page 4-29.


Data Rate

Select the audio transmission rate. Settings for the compressed bit rate are available from 64 to 384 Kbps, depending on the Encoding Mode setting. Increasing the number in this field increases the audio bandwidth at the encoder, improving the quality of the audio transmitted by the encoder. The default is 64.

PID

Packet Identification numbers are usually set by Cisco personnel during system installation. Although Cisco does not recommend that you change this number,

4-28

4042066 Rev A

you can define your own numbering system and enter a unique PID number for this service. The number you enter must be one that has not already been used by the system. See Packet IDs (PIDs) on page 4-142.

Test Pattern
Enable

Select this check box to enable the pre-selected test tone. If this check box is cleared, live audio will be enabled. Select one of the options that determine the frequency and level of the test tone for this channel.

Audio Input 1(L) Audio Input 2(R)

Analog Input Attenuation


Audio Input 1(L) Audio Input 2(R)

Select the attenuation (between 0 and 31 dB) to be applied to the live analog audio for this channel. These settings will be used only if the Enable check box is cleared. These settings do not apply to either live embedded SDI digital or AES3 digital audio. Use this field to define the adjustment required in the audio encoding delay to make audio synchronize with video in a program which has both. The PNC system automatically calculates the value of this field whenever the bit rate on the video card configuration window changes. Enter the duration of the delay (between -1000 and +1000 milliseconds). 4. To save the changes and leave this window, choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the database.

Delay

Audio Encoding and Decoding Modes


The following sections discuss audio processing on both the Encoding and Decoding side. Typically, what happens in the process is:
audio the

stream(s) enter the encoder via the audio inputs

encoder processes (encodes) the audio stream(s) using a designated audio mode (see audio modes below) processed (encoded) audio is mapped to a PID, which is broadcast PID is received by the decoder

the the the

decoder processes (decodes) the PID and produces appropriate audio for the decoders left and right audio outputs, depending on which mode was used to encode the audio (see audio modes below)

4042066 Rev A

4-29

Audio Modes
There are four types of audio modes: Single Mono, Dual Mono, Stereo and Joint Stereo. The following table explains the basic differences between the modes:
Audio Mode Single Mono Description
The same monaural audio is played out of both the left and right speakers connected to the decoder. Independent monaural audio is played out of the left and right speakers connected to the decoder. Gives the greatest degree of audio separation, but requires more complex coding, and, consequently, higher operating bit rates. The left and right speakers connected to the decoder work together to produce a single audio program. Phase and separation are maintained between the left and right signals. The left and right speakers connected to the decoder work together to produce a single audio program. Stereophonic irrelevancy and redundancy are used to the best advantage. Joint Stereo, while similar to Stereo, saves transmission bandwidth, allowing lower bit rates to be used.

Dual Mono

Stereo

Joint Stereo

Note: Stereo and Joint Stereo are recommended for music programs.

Single Mono Encoding


While the interface is the same for MPEG and AC-3 audio cards, the rules for the two cards are slightly different, as indicated below.

MPEG Cards
In Single Mono Mode, the encoder has four audio inputs, each input mapped to an audio stream and each audio stream mapped to a unique PID:

Encoder MPEG Audio Processing Card


Audio Engine Audio 1 Audio 2 Stream 1 Stream 2 Stream 3 Stream 4 Single Mono Mode Single Mono Mode System PIDs 1120 1121 1122 1123

Audio 3 Audio 4

4-30

4042066 Rev A

If you assign audio stream 1 to run in Single Mono mode, then audio stream 2 (the other half of that audio pair) automatically runs in Single Mono mode too. The same applies to the 3/4 audio pair, as well.

Single Mono Data Rate


The data rate you set for an audio pair (1/2 or 3/4) is the total for the two inputs. For instance, if you set the data rate at 256 Kbps, then the total data rate for audio inputs 1 and 2 is 256 Kbps, carried on two combined PIDs.

Single Mono Sampling Rate


While all four inputs must operate at the same sampling rate, each audio input may be set to an independent audio bit rate. As well, though audio is dealt with in pairs (1/2 or 3/4), the pairs themselves may be set to different modes. (i.e., if audio pair 1/2 is set to Single Mono Mode, audio pair 3/4 may be set to Dual Mono/Stereo/ Joint Stereo, as desired.)

AC-3 Cards
In Single Mono Mode, the encoder has four audio inputs, but only the first (or left) of each pair (1/2 and 3/4) is used. Each of these is mapped to a single PID, as shown in the diagram below.

Encoder AC-3 Audio Processing Card


Audio Engine Audio 1 Audio 2 (ignored) Stream 1 Single Mono System PIDs 1120

Audio 3 Audio 4 (ignored)

Stream 2 Single Mono

1122

As with MPEG, the audio pairs are independent, meaning that while audio pair 1/2 may be in Single Mono mode, audio pair 3/4 can be in a completely different mode. The data rate you set for an audio pair (1/2 or 3/4) is the total for the two inputs. For instance, if you set the data rate at 256 Kbps, then the total data rate for audio inputs 1 and 2 is 256 Kbps, carried on two combined PIDs. Note: While all four inputs must operate at the same sampling rate, each audio input may be set to an independent audio bit rate. As well, though audio is dealt with in pairs (1/2 or 3/4), the pairs themselves may be set to different modes. (i.e., if audio pair 1/2 is set to Single Mono Mode, audio pair 3/4 may be set to Dual Mono/Stereo/Joint Stereo, as desired.)

4042066 Rev A

4-31

Single Mono Decoding (MPEG & AC-3)


If only one audio stream is being fed into one of the encoders audio pair inputs, Single Mono mode is advantageous because the decoder uses the same stream for both the left and right outputs, as shown in the following diagram:

Decoder MPEG Audio Processing


System PIDs Audio Engine Stream 1 Single Mono Mode Decoder Outputs Audio 1 Left Audio 1 Right Audio 2 Left Audio 2 Right

PID 1120

PID 1121

Stream 2

The actual mapping of PIDs to programs, and which PIDs are routed to which decoder outputs is variable.

Dual Mono/Stereo/Joint Stereo Encoding


For both MPEG and AC-3 audio cards, the encoder has four audio inputs which are combined to produce two encoded PIDs, one for the 1/2 audio pair and one for the 3/4 audio pair.

Encoder Audio Processing Cards


Audio Engine Audio 1 Audio 2 Stream 1 Stream 2 Stream 3 Stream 4 Dual Mono, Stereo, or Joint Stereo System PIDs 1120

Audio 3 Audio 4

Dual Mono, Stereo, or Joint Stereo

1122

You must assign the PID number for audio stream 1/2 pair using just the 1 of the pair, and for audio stream 3/4 pair using just the 3 of the pair when you are creating a virtual channel (i.e., When you drag just the 1 of the 1/2 audio pair, both are moved into the virtual channel). Note: Any PID assigned to channel 2 or 4 will be ignored.

4-32

4042066 Rev A

Dual Mono/Stereo/Joint Stereo Sampling Rate


Both the 1/2 pair and the 3/4 pair must operate at the same sampling rate, although each audio stream may operate at an independent bit rate and be set to different modes.

Dual Mono and Stereo Data Rate


The data rate you set for an audio pair (1/2 or 3/4) is shared equally for the two audio inputs. For instance, if you set the data rate at 256 Kbps, then audio inputs 1 and 2 each have an effective data rate of 128 Kbps, carried on the same PID.

Joint Stereo Data Rate


The data rate you set for an audio pair (1/2 or 3/4) is coded by the first member of the pair (1 for 1/2 and 3 for 3/4) and the difference between the two members is then used to reconstruct the second member, showing a bit rate efficiency over stereo. For example, 192 Kbps joint stereo might be equivalent to 256 Kbps in stereo.

Dual Mono/Stereo/Joint Stereo Decoding


A decoders audio engine can only process one PID, but the channel within that PID, when in these modes, contains all the information required to produce the appropriate two streams required for the Left and Right decoder outputs.

Decoder Audio Processing


System PIDs 1120 Stream 1 Stream 2 1122 Stream 3 Stream 4 Dual Mono, Stereo, or Joint Stereo Audio1 Left Audio1 Right Audio2 Left Audio2 Right

Dual Mono, Stereo, or Joint Stereo

4042066 Rev A

4-33

Configuring Dolby Digital Audio Services


The Dolby Digital audio encoder card is used to provide real-time encoding for up to four monaural audio signal inputs. With this card, an elemental stream can carry either one or two monaural signal inputs depending on the encoding mode (monaural or stereo). In general, the encoding mode can be one of the following:
1/0 2/0

Center Left, Right (Stereo) (Left - Channel 1, Right - Channel 2) Dual Mono.

1+1

Note: In 1+1 mode, the audio inputs for the individual stream are considered to be two independent monaural signals Main (left) and Aux (right). The following diagram displays two elemental streams carrying various combinations of signal inputs. When configured for 2/0 or 1+1 encoding, the signals labelled as Audio 1 and 3 are used as Main (left) inputs and the signals labelled as Audio 2 and 4 are used as Aux (right) inputs. When configured for 1/0 encoding, the Main (left) audio input is used and the Aux (right) audio input is not used.

Configuring a digital audio encoder card consists of three related procedures: Configuring the control parameters of the source audio output stream to the PNC system. Configuring the input/output characteristics of the stream. Configuring the bit stream/preprocessing characteristics of the stream.

4-34

4042066 Rev A

Displaying the Current Digital Audio Settings


If an encoder is equipped with a Dolby Digital audio card the current audio settings can be viewed from the encoders device window. On the left portion of the window the system displays a card/component tree that the operator can use to view and select specific elements/characteristics of the audio.

Configuring the Dolby Digital Audio Stream


The Dolby Digital audio card can control and broadcast two elemental streams with each stream carrying a certain type of audio data. To configure a digital audio stream: 1. Display the encoders device window as described in Configuring an SD (Standard Definition) Encoder on page 4-3. 2. Click on the Dolby Digital audio service you want to configure. The window displays a summary of the cards audio streams. 3. Click on the particular stream you want to configure. The system displays the fields associated with the elemental stream similar to the example shown

4042066 Rev A

4-35

below.

4. Select or enter information in the following fields. Note: The values you set only apply to this stream.
Name Enabled Encoding Mode

Name of the Dolby Digital Audio stream as defined by the system. Check this box to make this stream available to the system for transmission. Use this field to select the number of channels and the channel format within the encoded bit stream. The three available audio encoding modes are listed below. The mode definition uses two numbers (m/n), with m indicating the number of front channels, and n indicating the number of rear (surround) channels.
Mode
1+1 1/0 2/0

Channel Format
(Left Channel 1, Right Channel 2) Dual Mono Center Left, Right (Stereo)

The default setting is 2/0 (Stereo). If the mode is set to 1+1, then two completely independent program channels (dual-mono), referenced as Channel 1 and Channel 2, are encoded into the bit stream. Dual-mono mode is for use only in broadcast applications. Dual Mono mode is recommended if simultaneous output of unrelated, independent audio signals is required. Dual Mono mode gives the greatest degree of audio separation, but requires more complex coding, and, consequently, higher operating bit rates.

4-36

4042066 Rev A

Although each channel is assigned its own PID, you must use the PID number of channel 1 for the channel 1/2 pair when you are creating a virtual channel. If you use the PID of the even numbered streams in a virtual channel, no output occurs.
Data Rate

Use this field to select the digital audio transmission rate. Settings for the compressed bit rate are available from 56 to 640 kbps, depending on the Encoding Mode setting. Increasing the number in this field increases the audio bandwidth at the encoder, improving the quality of the audio transmitted by the encoder. The default is 192K. To ensure high audio quality, the following table contains recommended Data Rate ranges for the selected audio encoding mode.
Mode
1/0 1+1 2/0

Data Rate Range


56 640 kbps 112 640 kbps 96 640 kbps

Bitstream Mode

Use this field to select the type of information that the bit stream conveys. This is an information-only field for the benefit of operators and other technicians and does not affect the performance or behavior of the actual signal. The current system choices are: main audio service: complete main (CM) main audio service: music and effects (ME) associated service: visually impaired (VI) associated service: hearing impaired (HI) associated service: dialog (D) associated service: commentary (C) associated service: emergency (E) associated service: voice over (VO)/karaoke.

PID

Packet Identification numbers are usually set by Cisco personnel during system installation. Although Cisco does not recommend that you change this number, you can define your own numbering system and enter a unique PID number for this service. The number you enter must be one that the system is not using. For more information, see Packet IDs (PIDs) on page 4-142.

Dialog Normalization

The dialog normalization controllers indicate how far the average dialog level of the encoded program is below digital 100%. Values range between 1 and 31, with 1 representing -1.0 dB and 31 representing 31.0 dB with respect to digital 100%.

4042066 Rev A

4-37

Main Dialog Normalization Auxiliary Dialog Normalization Delay

Use this field to select how far the average dialog level is below 0 dBFS for 2/0 streams, 1/0 streams, or the main channel of 1+1 streams. The default is 27. Use this field to select how far the average dialog level is below 0 dBFS for the auxiliary channel of 1+1 streams. The default is 27. Use this field to define the adjustment required in the audio encoding delay to make audio synchronize with video in a program which has both. The PNC system automatically calculates the value of this field whenever the bit rate on the video card configuration window changes. To change the delay value, enter the number of milliseconds delay that will occur. You can enter a range between -1000 and +1000 milliseconds.

Configuring Digital Audio Input/Output


The Input/Output parameters on the digital audio tree enable the operator to define the incoming and outgoing bit streams and other control parameters. To configure the digital audio streams input/output: 1. Display the encoders device window as described in Configuring an SD (Standard Definition) Encoder on page 4-3. 2. Click on the Dolby Digital audio card you want to configure. 3. Click on the Input/Output for the stream you want to configure. The system displays the Input/Output fields associated with the elemental stream similar to the example shown below.

4. Select or enter information in the following fields. The values you set only apply to this stream.
Input Select

Use this field to select the source type and format for the incoming audio signal. The field selection options are described in the following table. The default value is Analog Audio Input.

4-38

4042066 Rev A

Input Type
Analog Audio Inputs Embedded SDI Digital PCM audio (D1-SMPTE 272M) AES3 Digital Inputs, PCM Audio Pre-Encoded Dolby Digital bit stream (SMPTE 276M) Default value.

Description
Audio embedded in the SDI bitstream per SMPTE 272M is encoded. Dolby Digital audio encoding occurs. Pass-through mode enabled. Pre-encoded bitstreams move through the audio card unmodified to the output.

Sampling Frequency

Use this field to view the sampling frequency at which the PCM audio signals are input into the encoder. The Dolby Digital audio stream supports three standard sampling frequencies: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, and 32 kHz. This is a view-only field. The system automatically sets the sampling frequency according to the detected rate of the PCM audio input data.

Test Pattern
Enable

Use this check box to override the input source and input format of the audio signal and replace the signal with the test tones for left and right audio inputs selected in the fields below. Note: If the Enable check box is set On, an asterisk appears beside the Input/ Output branch of the digital audio tree in the left portion of the window.

Test Tones

Test tones replace the currently selected input signal with an internally-generated test signal. Use this field to select the test tone input characteristics for the left audio channel when Stereo Encoding is selected. Use this field to select the test tone generated when Mono Encoding is selected. The default value is Digital Silence.

L Audio Input

R Audio Input

Use this field to select the test tone input characteristics for the right audio channel when Stereo Encoding is selected. This field is ignored when Mono Encoding is selected. The default value is Digital Silence.

Input Processing
Attenuation

The left and right audio input attenuation controls enable the operator to input various audio levels.

4042066 Rev A

4-39

L Audio Input

Use this field to select the attenuation value for the left input source when Stereo Encoding is selected. Use this field to select the attenuation value when Mono Encoding is selected. Values range between 0 and 30. The default value is 0 (zero).

R Audio Input

Use this field to select the attenuation value for the right input source when Stereo Encoding is selected. This field is ignored when Mono Encoding is selected. Values range between 0 and 30. The default value is 0 (zero).

Configuring Digital Audio Bitstream/Preprocessing


The Bitstream/Preprocessing parameters on the digital audio tree enable the operator to define and control the transmission characteristics of the outgoing bit stream. To configure the digital audio streams bitstream/preprocessing: 1. Display the encoders device window as described in Configuring an SD (Standard Definition) Encoder on page 4-3. 2. Click on the Dolby Digital audio card you want to configure. 3. Click on the Bitstream/Preprocessing for the stream you want to configure. The system displays the Bitstream/Preprocessing fields associated with the elemental stream similar to the example shown below.

4. Select or enter information in the following fields. The values you set only apply to this stream.

4-40

4042066 Rev A

Bitstream Info
Center Downmix Level

Use this field to select the nominal downmix level of the center channel with respect to the left and right channels. The default value is 25.0 dB.

Surround Downmix Level

Use this field to select the nominal downmix level of the surround channel with respect to the left and right channels. The default value is 25.0 dB.

Dolby Surround Mode

This information-only field only appears in the bit stream when the system is operating in the 2/0 Encoding Mode and indicates the type and calibration of the mixing room used for the final audio mixing session. The value in this field is not typically used by the Dolby Digital encoding algorithm, but may be used by other types of audio reproduction equipment. The default value is Not Indicated.
Surround Mode
2/0 2/0 2/0 Not Indicated NOT Dolby Surround Encoded Dolby Surround Encoded

Description

Preprocessing
Dynamic Range Compression

Use this field to select one of the dynamic range compression presets built into the Dolby Digital encoding/decoding algorithm. Each setting reduces the audio bitstreams output to a characteristic dynamic range as shown in the following table. The default value is None.
Compression Settings
None Film Standard Film Light Music Standard Music Light Speech

RF Overmodulation Protection

Use this check box to enable or disable RF overmodulation protection. The default is Off. Note: If the RF Overmodulation Protection check box is set On, an asterisk appears beside the Bitstream/Preprocessing branch of the digital audio tree in the left portion of the window.

4042066 Rev A

4-41

5. To save the changes and leave this window, choose the Save icon, or choose Save from the Actions menu to save the changes to the database. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message Discard changes to close?

Configuring AAC Audio Services


AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) encoder cards have two AAC encoding engines which are capable of independently performing internal encoding. Two streams of internally encoded AAC audio can be generated; whereas, only one stream of External Pass-Through AAC audio can be generated, since external pass-through encoding requires both of the AAC encoding engines to perform packetization (i.e., both engines are needed to produce one stream). Configuring AAC audio encoder cards consists of two main procedures: Selecting whether to use Internal or External Pass-Through encoding. Configuring each individual audio channel within the PNC system.

Selecting AAC Encoding Mode


The PNC supports two internally encoded AAC audio streams (channels) or one External Pass-Through stream. To configure the AAC card for internal encoding, select Internal in the Encoding Select list. To configure the AAC card for External Pass-Through encoding, select External Pass-Through. Depending on your choice, different configuration fields are available to you. Note: Remember, only ONE channel is available when using External PassThrough encoding mode. Due to this, if an AAC card is configured for Internal encoding and is displaying 2 audio channels, the second channel will disappear from your display if you change the encoding mode to External Pass-Through.

4-42

4042066 Rev A

Configuring Individual Channels


To configure an individual AAC audio channel: 1. Be sure you have chosen the audio service containing the channel you want to configure. 2. Select the encoding mode you wish to use. The type of mode selected (internal or external pass-through) controls which channel configuration dialog is displayed. 3. Click on the channel you want to configure. One of the following windows displays, depending on the encoding mode youve selected.

External Pass-Through

Internal

4. Select or enter information in the following fields. For Internal Encoding Mode, the values you set only apply to the current channel.
Enable PID

When checked, this Audio Channel is available to the system to be transmitted. Packet Identification numbers are usually set by Cisco personnel during system installation. Although Cisco does not recommend that you change this number, you can define your own numbering system and enter a unique PID number for this service. The number you enter must be in the range 0 to 8191and must be one that the system is not using. See Packet IDs (PIDs) on page 4-142.

Sample Frequency

Use this field to view the sampling frequency at which the PCM audio signals are input into the encoder. The Dolby Digital audio stream supports three standard sampling frequencies: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, and 32 kHz.

4042066 Rev A

4-43

Encoding Mode

Use this field to select the number of channels and the channel format within the encoded bit stream (internal mode only). The five available audio encoding modes are listed below. The mode definition uses two numbers (m/n), with m indicating the number of front channels, and n indicating the number of rear (surround) channels.
Mode
1+1 1/0 2/0 2/0 1/0 Dual Mono Single Mono (L only) Stereo Joint Stereo Single Mono (L + R)

Channel Format

The default setting is 2/0 (Stereo). Dual Mono?


Bit Rate

Use this field to select the digital audio transmission rate. Settings for the compressed bit rate are available from 32 to 384 kbps, depending on the Encoding Mode setting. Increasing the number in this field increases the audio bandwidth at the encoder, improving the quality of the audio transmitted by the encoder. The default is 192K. To ensure high audio quality, the following table contains recommended Data Rate ranges for the selected audio encoding mode.
Mode
1+1 (Dual Mono) 1/0 (Single Mono - L Only) 2/0 (Stereo) 2/0 (Joint Stereo) 1/0 (Single Mono - L + R)

Data Rate Range


32 384 kbps 32 192 kbps 32 384 kbps 32 384 kbps 32 192 kbps

Input (internal only)


Input Select

Use this field to select the source type and format for the incoming audio signal. The field selection options are described in the following table. The default value is Embedded SDI Digital PCM audio.

4-44

4042066 Rev A

Input Type
Analog Audio Inputs Embedded SDI Digital PCM audio (D1-SMPTE 272M) AES3 Digital Inputs, PCM Audio

Note: When set to Embedded SDI Digital PCM audio, Channel 1 selects SDI audios 1 and 2, while Channel 2 selects SDI audios 3 and 4.
Delay

Use this field to define the adjustment required in the audio encoding delay to make audio synchronize with video in a program which has both. The PNC system automatically calculates the value of this field whenever the bit rate on the video card configuration window changes. Enter the duration of the delay (between -1000 and +1000 milliseconds).

Analog Attenuation

The left and right audio input attenuation controls enable the operator to input various audio levels. Values for Input 1 and 2 are limited to 0 through 31. Input 1 sets the attenuation for the Left or Main input source; while Input 2 sets the Right or Aux input source. If MONO Encoding (1/0-L) is selected, Input 2 is ignored.

Test Tones
Enable

Use this check box to override the input source and input format of the audio signal and replace the signal with the test tones for left and right audio inputs selected in the fields below. Note: If the Enable check box is set On, an asterisk appears beside the Input/ Output branch of the digital audio tree in the left portion of the window.

Test Tones

Test tones replace the currently selected input signal with an internally-generated test signal. Use this field to select the test tone input characteristics for the left audio channel when Stereo Encoding is selected. Use this field to select the test tone generated when Mono Encoding is selected. The default value is 500 Hz, -1 dBFS.

L Audio Input

R Audio Input

Use this field to select the test tone input characteristics for the right audio channel when Stereo Encoding is selected. This field is ignored when Mono Encoding is selected. The default value is 500 Hz, -1 dBFS. 5. To save the changes and leave this window, choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the database

4042066 Rev A

4-45

Configuring a D9040 Encoder


Depending on how your system was installed, you may need to change the encoder settings. You must have appropriate user privileges before you can change the encoders configuration values. For more information on User Privileges, see Working with Users on page 8-11. To configure a D9040 Encoder: 1. Select the signal whose devices you want to display from the signal bar. 2. Choose the Uplink icon, or choose Uplink > Uplink Configuration to display the Uplink Configuration window. 3. Double-click the encoder you want to configure. The encoders name appears in the title bar of the displayed window. Note: You can open multiple encoder windows so that you can compare their settings.

Name

Enter the name of this encoder. You can enter up to 30 characters. This is an alias to differentiate the channel (i.e., sports). For example, the name ENC1P1 is a system-assigned name only. This field displays one of the following encoder states:

State

4-46

4042066 Rev A

Encoder State
Active Standby

Description
Indicates that the data paths are operating normally and that the unit is being used for broadcast purposes. Indicates that the data paths are operating normally for the unit but are not being used for broadcast purposes which has been designated as the standby device. Indicates communication with the device has stopped, the reporting of diagnostics messages for this unit has stopped, and the transmission of virtual channel EMMs has been disabled. Indicates a failure in the device and that communication has stopped between the PNC system and the device (e.g., due to a cable problem or a power supply failure).

Off line

Failed

Redundancy
Group

The encoder redundancy group is decided during system configuration at the factory (i.e., it is not a user configurable parameter). It is essentially the grouping of encoders (it actually applies to other devices - muxes, modulators) with similar card license sets. Select the encoder priority for autochangeover to a standby encoder in case this encoder fails. The lower the number, the higher the priority. For example, if encoders 1 and 2 both fail, and their priorities are set at 50 and 100 respectively, encoder 1 has priority to the standby encoder of the same type. The standby encoder must be configured as Standby, and Autochangeover must be enabled. Select a number from 0 to 255. The default, and the highest priority, is 0. 4. To save the changes, choose the Save icon, or choose Save from the Actions menu to save the changes to the database and, when applicable, to the device. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message Discard changes to close?

Priority

Superset Redundancy
The D9040 Encoder supports superset redundancy. This means that backup encoders can be optioned to support more than the required configuration to back up a single encoder. After a PNC database has been populated with encoders that have the same configuration the encoders belong to the same redundancy group. Note: D9040 Encoders can not be included in the same redundancy group with other types of encoders such as the D9120 and D9050.

4042066 Rev A

4-47

Configuring the D9040 Encoder Video Services


1. Select the appropriate signal, display the Uplink Configuration window, and then double-click the name of the encoder that contains the Video service want to display or modify. (See Configuring a D9040 Encoder on page 4-46.) 2. Select the video service from the list on the left portion of the window. You will see a window similar to this:

Note: The system assigns a system name automatically. 3. Select or enter information for the fields under the following tabs.

Encoding tab
Use the Encoding tab to control the most commonly changed video attributes.To configure the video attributes: 1. In the left portion of the Device Config window, click the D9040 Encoder video service from the list of services under the encoder. The Encoding tab is the default tab within the video service view, as illustrated above. 2. Select the settings for the following fields:
Enable

Click this check box to enable the video stream. If this check box is cleared, the video stream will not be generated and it will occupy no bandwidth. However, the PID will be reserved so you can enable the video stream in the future. Assigns the transport packet PID of the video stream. Enter an unassigned value in a range from 32-8190.

PID

4-48

4042066 Rev A

Chroma Format

Sets the chroma format encoding to be used by the video stream. In the list, click one of two values: 4:2:0, 4:2:2. The default chroma format is 4:2:0. Displays the participation status of the video stream within the multiplex group. You can set the group participation status on the Multiplex Group tab. It can be set to Statmux or Off. An encoder can transition between Statmux and Off, but can only belong to one multiplex group. Any encoder which is not connected to a Regulus controller is not in a multiplex group and therefore cannot be statistically multiplexed with other encoders. Encoders not connected to a Regulus Controller must be configured with Off.

Encode Mode

Valid Bitrate Range Bitrate (Mbps)

Read-only Displays the operating bit rate range based on the Bitrate setting. Defines the PES encoding rate (in Mbps) to be allocated to the video stream.You can set the bit rate here, but we recommend that you set it from the Multiplex Group Configuration view if the video is part of a Multiplex Group. Enter a value in the range from 1.49 to 50 Mbps. The default bit rate is 5.0 Mbps. To set the bit rate, type in a value to a maximum of two decimal places within the following ranges: 1.49 to 15.00 if the Chroma Format value is set to 4:2:0 3.0 to 50.00 if the Chroma Format is to 4:2:2 The bit rate must be set to a value between the Minimum and Maximum Rates.

Horizontal Resolution

Sets the horizontal resolution of the generated video stream in pixels. The output resolution of the video stream is expressed as a fraction of the full horizontal resolution In the list, choose from the options below.
Horizontal Resolution
352 480 528 544 640 704 720

3/2 Pulldown Enable Auto Concatenation Line 23 Blanking(625 System Only)

Select the check box to enable 3/2 pulldown processing in the video stream. Enables the encoder to lock the encoding GOP to that of the preceding encoder. This sets line 23 in the blanking mode and applies to the 625 system only.

4042066 Rev A

4-49

Options: No or Entire

Input tab
Use the Input tab to change D9040 Encoder video encoding attributes that are not normally changed or require specialized knowledge. To configure these advanced parameters: 1. From the D9040 Encoder Video Device Config view, click the Input tab. You will see the above window. 2. Select the settings for the following fields:
Input Input Standard

Sets the input standard for the video input. In the list, click one of seven input options: The default setting is NTSC.
Available Settings

PAL NTSC SDI525 SDI625 PAL-M PAL-N PAL-[N] J-NTSC


Changing the video input will change the valid ranges for the Bit Rate, Minimum Rate and Maximum Rate fields on the Multiplex Group tab. Choose Cancel to leave the setting unchanged.
Synchronizer Mode

Enables frame synchronization for improved statistical multiplexing performance within the statmux group that the encoder belongs to. In the list, click Off, On Internal Clock or On - External Reference. The default is Off. When you select On - External Reference, the encoder uses the synchronization source applied to the analog reference input, which can be either a 25 Hz or 29.97 Hz frame rate depending on the selected input source. This mode sets the video test pattern when it replaces live video. In the list, click one of two options: Test Pattern or Substitute for Loss of Input. The default is Substitute for Loss of Input.

Test Pattern Mode

4-50

4042066 Rev A

Test Pattern

Sets which test pattern will display. In the list, click either 75% Bars or Digital Black. The default test pattern is 75% Bars When the frame synchronizer is enabled the video will be delayed by the number of seconds displayed in this box. The number of seconds of delay depends on the test pattern mode selected.

Input Loss Action Delay

Aspect Ratio Source

The aspect ratio value is determined by the source. Options: Manual, Contact Closure, Auto-VII/WSS
Source Option
Manual Contact Closure Auto-VII/WSS

Aspect Ratio
Requires user input; either 4X3 or 16X9 Open= 4X3 Closed= 16X9 Pre-programmed algorithm

Aspect Ratio

Controls the aspect ratio to be signalled in the video stream. In the Aspect Ratio list, click one of two options: 4x3 or 6x9. The default aspect ratio is 16x9.

Preprocessing Tab
Use the Preprocessing tab to enable preprocessor controls, preanalysis controls and prefilters.

4042066 Rev A

4-51

Preprocessor Enable

Enables preprocessing of the video signal. Select the Enable check box so the Preanalysis and Prefilter settings you configure will be implemented.

Preprocessor Enabled Controls Preanalysis Enable

Enables preanalysis of the video signal. In the list, click either On or Off. Select the Enable check box so that the Preanalysis and Prefilter settings you configure will be implemented. The default is On. You will need Preanalysis to be On for frame accurate insertion of user data into the video stream and 3/2 pull-down operation. Note: You will be prompted with a warning message when an invalid or out-of range setting is entered in a field at any time.

Preanalysis Enabled Controls Quantization Matrices Prefilter

This is a video preprocessing method. In the list, click Fixed or Adaptive. Enables prefiltering of the video signal. In the list, click Off, Adaptive or Custom. The default is Off.

Custom Prefilter Controls Spatial Prefilter Control

Sets how the video will be filtered. In the list, click None, Fixed or Adaptive. The default is None. None means no prefiltering will be applied to the video signal. Fixed means the Fixed low pass filter will be used. In the fixed mode, the encoder still determines where to use the filter, but the user sets the cut-off level. If you click Fixed, you then need to select one of 15 predefined fixed spatial prefilters in the Fixed list. The higher the number, the more filtering is applied. Adaptive means that the encoder dynamically changes the type and level of filtering according to the complexity of the input.

Temporal Prefilter Control

Sets how the video signal will be temporally prefiltered. This aids to reduce noise and improve picture quality from picture frame to picture frame. In the list, click one of the options: None, Fixed, Adaptive, Multitap_less_than_normal, The default is None. If you choose Adaptive, the encoder dynamically changes the type and level of prefiltering according to the complexity of the signal.

4-52

4042066 Rev A

Filters

Luma Filter Enable Use this field to override the Luma Horizontal Bandwidth setting predefined in the hardware. The Luma field provides you with a range of settings from 31to 100 that you can use to control Y bandwidth filtering with more precision and consistency. Chroma Filter Enable Use this field to override the Chroma Horizontal Bandwidth setting predefined in the hardware. The Chroma field provides you with a range of settings from 31to 100 that you can use to control Chroma bandwidth filtering with more precision and consistency.

Multiplex Group tab


The Multiplex Group tab provides control of multiplex group operation. To configure the Multiplex Group parameters: 1. From the D9040 Encoder Video (Device Config) view, click the Multiplex Group tab. You will see this window:

2. Select the settings for the following fields:


Multiplex Group Membership

Read-only. Displays the multiplex group that the video stream belongs to. You can set the group membership on the Multiplex Group Configuration view (Uplink > Multiplex Group Configuration).

Multiplex Group Video


Chroma Format

Read-only. Displays the chroma format used to encode the video stream. The format is set on the Encoding tab, but is displayed here so you can evaluate the constraints of other configuration settings. Read-only. Displays the input standard for the video input as set on the Input tab. See the Input tab for more information.

Input Standard

4042066 Rev A

4-53

Bitrate (Mbps)

Defines the PES encoding rate (in Mbps) to be allocated to the video stream. Set the bit rate in this view. Minimum bit rates when the Encoding Mode is set to statmux, and the Chroma Format is set to 4:2:0.
Delay Mode
352 Normal Extended Low 753664 647099 985566 480 851968 757243 1191847 528 999424 853620 1306448

Horizontal Resolution
544 999424 853620 1306448 640 1097728 908692 1398128 704 1294336 1101445 1489808 720 1294336 1101445 1489808

Minimum bit rates when the Encoding Mode is set to statmux, and the Chroma Format is set to 4:2:2.
Delay Mode
352 Normal Extended Low 2981888 3000000 2979617 480 2981888 3000000 2979617 528 2981888 3000000 2979617

Horizontal Resolution
544 2981888 3000000 2979617 640 2981888 3000000 2979617 704 2981888 3000000 2979617 720 2981888 3000000 2979617

The bit rate must be set to a value between the Minimum and Maximum Rates. Note: You will be prompted with a warning message when an invalid or out-of range setting is entered in a field.
Valid Bitrate Range Encode Mode

Read-only. Displays the operating bit rate range based on the bit rate setting. Sets the encode mode used to control statistical multiplexing participation of the video stream within a multiplex group. An encoder can transition between Fixed and Statmux, but can only belong to one multiplex group. Any encoder which is not connected to a Regulus controller is not in a multiplex group and therefore cannot be statistically multiplexed with other encoders. Encoders not connected to a Regulus Controller must be configured with Fixed.

Regulus Statmux Controls (VBR - Statmux On)


Minimum Rate (Mbps)

Sets the minimum encoding bit rate when statmux is enabled. This value must be larger than 3 Mbps for 4:2:2 and 1.49 for 4:2:0.

4-54

4042066 Rev A

Maximum Rate (Mbps)

Sets the maximum encoding bit rate when statmux is enabled. This control is provided so you can limit the burstiness of generated video stream to prevent overflowing downstream consumption equipment.This value can be up to 50 Mbps for 4:2:2 and 15 Mbps for 4:2:0. As this depends on the selected Video Input and Encode Mode, see the table above for more information on the allowable bit rate ranges for each setting. Sets the relative priority used by the statmux process to assign bandwidth to the video stream. When statmux performs bandwidth redistribution, the video quality of higher priority video is maintained, while the video quality of lower priority streams may be reduced. To assign a priority value to the video stream, in the Priority list click one value in a range from 0 - 15, where 0 is the lowest priority and 15 is the highest. The default priority value is 8.

Priority

Quality

Sets the bandwidth efficiency of the statmuxed video stream. The highest quality uses all available bandwidth allocated to the video stream. Lower values use progressively less proportions of the allocated bandwidth. To assign a bandwidth quality level to the statmuxed video stream, in the Quality list click one value in a range from 0 - 15, where 0 is the lowest quality and 15 is the highest. The default quality value is 15 - highest.

Advanced tab
Use the Advanced tab to control advanced Video Encoding parameters. To configure the Advanced parameters: 1. From the D9040 Encoder Video (Device Config) view, click the Advanced tab. You will see this window:

4042066 Rev A

4-55

2. Select the settings for the following fields:

GOP Encoding
GOP Encoding

GOP Select M/N can only be changed by a user with reading and writing access to the Configuration view. Displays the input standard for the video input as set on the Input tab. See the Input tab for more information. The GOP Mode specifies if sequence is arranged according to user input or arranged according to the video input type. The GOP sequence specifies the order in which I-frames, B-frames and P-frames are arranged. Drop-down options are Manual and Auto-525/625. When the Manual option is selected, encoding follows the user input values in GOP M and GOP N. When Auto-525/625 is selected, encoding follows the 525 or 625 video input standard. 525: NTSC, SDI525, PAL-M, J-NTSC 625: PAL, SDI625, PAL-N, PAL-[N]

Input Standard

GOP Mode

GOP Select M

Displays the reference picture period (i.e., distance between I or P frames) in the range from 1 to 3. 1=no B frames between reference frames 2=1 B frame between reference frames 3=2 B frames between reference frames This is preset to a default value of 3.

GOP Select N

Displays the total length of the GOP sequence in frames in the range from 1 to 15. This is preset to a default value of 15. Displays the GOP frame sequence as selected by GOP Select. The I, B and P frames are displayed with the correct quantity and sequencing within a GOP sequence. Sequence = <i Anchor><P Anchor Sequence><Closed GOP> Where: <I Anchor>:= I<B Sequence> <B Sequence> := BBB(M - 1) B frames <P Anchor Sequence>:= <P Anchor><P Anchor> int(N/M)-1 <P Anchor>s <P Anchor>:= P<B Sequence> <Closed GOP>:= P if (N%M) == 1 := <NULL> if (N%M) != 1 Example:

Sequence

4-56

4042066 Rev A

GOP N = 16 GOP M = 3 <B Sequence> = BB(M=3)-1=2 <I Anchor> = IBB <P Anchor> = PBB <P Anchor Sequence> = PBBPBBPBBPBB {int[(N=16)/(M=3)]=5}-1=4 <Closed_GOP> = P (N=16)%(M=3)=1 Sequence= IBBPBBPBBPBBPBBP

Non-Multiplex Group Encode Delay


Sets the encode delay method for the video encoding delay when the video does not belong to a multiplex group. When a video is a member of a multiplex group, the group determines the delay characteristics of all videos within that group.
Multiplex Group Membership

Read-only. Displays the multiplex group that the video stream belongs to. You can set the group membership on the Multiplex Group Configuration view (Uplink > Multiplex Group Configuration). The delay setup method selects the method to control video encoding delay. Choose either Auto or Delay Mode. When you choose Delay Mode, select one of the Delay mode options. Auto - the video encoding algorithm determines the optimal delay Delay Mode - uses the selected Delay Mode setting

Delay Setup Method

Delay Mode

Sets the group encode delay for the stream if it is not part of the multiplex group. Choose one of the three options: Normal, Extended or Short Delay. The default Delay Mode is Normal. Normal means equivalent to the statmux delay mode = Normal 1.0 sec Extended means equivalent to the statmux delay mode = Extended: 2.0 sec Low means equivalent to the statmux delay mode = Low: 0.7 sec

4042066 Rev A

4-57

Captions/Cues tab
Use the Captions/Cues tab to control the insertion of captions into the video user data. To configure the Captions parameters: 1. From the Video Encoder view, click the Captions tab. You will see this window:

2. Select the settings for the following fields:


Cue Triggers Enable

Select the checkbox to enable cue triggering.

Captions
Encoding modes

Packets 1, 2 and 3 allow more than a single encoding mode to be selected. Options on drop down: None, E1A-708, SA, DVS 157

Test Pattern

When Test Pattern is enabled, the Pattern Select options are: Test Pattern 1, Test Pattern 2 and Custom Pattern E1A 608/708 Channel is the display parameter which affects the format and position of the display as follows:
Setting
Roll Up Pop Up Paint On

Display Result
Text starts at bottom of screen and scrolls up Text flashes at top and bottom of screen Text paints across lines at top and middle of screen

4-58

4042066 Rev A

Field 1 Custom Test Pattern

E1A 608-708 Channel options are Off, CC1, CC2 and CC1+2 CC data: May enter up to four lines of text in this box (32 characters per line)

Field 2 Custom Test Pattern

E1A 608/708 Channel options are Off, CC3, CC4 and CC3+4 CC Data: May enter up to four lines of text in this box (32 characters per line)

Configuring DPI Cue Triggering


Digital Program Insertion (DPI) allows for the insertion of multiple advertisements into program content in the digital domain on a single PID. The DPI messages supported in the PNC are in accordance with the ANSI/SCTE-35 2001 specification. If DPI Sources have been set up both physically on an encoder controlled by the PNC, and logically within the PNC (see DPI Source on page 7-43), you can use the Device Config window shown below to configure the attributes of the DPI triggers. To access the following window: 1. Choose Uplink > Uplink Configuration. The Uplink Configuration window displays. 2. Double-click the encoder which has the DPI Source set up on it. 3. Under the Video Encoder, click a DPI trigger to configure. There can be up to 8 DPI triggers/streams listed, labelled DPI 1 through DPI 8. The trigger assigned to the Cue Trigger Source is equal to the DPI source ID entered in the Cue Trigger Source window. For more information, see DPI Source on page 7-43.

4042066 Rev A

4-59

The triggers system name is shown in bold at the top of the DPI Trigger Panel. The Cue Trigger Source is shown below that.

Packet Generation
This panel contains attributes used to control packet generation.
Enable PID

When checked, this option enables packet generation. This is the transport packet PID of the DPI stream. Possible values are in the range from 32 to 8190, inclusive. This value must be unique within the signal. This is the transport packet bandwidth in kbps allocated to the DPI stream. This value must be within bandwidth limits for the signal. The default value is 15 kbps. Possible range is from 1.504 to 45.075 kbps. When checked, this option enables null DPI packet generation.

Bandwidth Allocation

BW (Bandwidth) Reservation

Alternate Program Selection


This panel potentially selects an alternate program for insertion. Whether or not this feature is implemented depends on your systems hardware configuration.
Event Source

This is the Event Source ID for the Alternate Program in the range 0 to 15. The default is 0. This is the Event ID for the Alternate Program. The default value is 0. This must be a unique value from other Event IDs. This is the Program ID for the Alternate Program. The default value is 0. This sets the avail parameter. This is the counter for breaks in the program. The counter starts at 1 and increments for each new break period until a new program starts. Entering 0 here means this parameter is not used. Sets the avail_count parameter. This value represents the expected maximum number of breaks in a program. Entering 0 here means this parameter is not used. Sets the break duration in ms for the next avail period in the range from 0 to 2147483747. A zero (0) value means the break duration is not sent to the cue trigger (i.e., alternate program) source. When enabled (checked), the Provider ID Value is sent in the DPI message. The default is unchecked. Note: You will need to enter a Provider Avail ID value in the field below when the Enable box is checked.

Event ID

Unique Program ID Avail Num (Avail)

Avail Expected (Avail Count) Duration

Provider Avail ID Enable

4-60

4042066 Rev A

Provider Avail ID Value

This is the value that is sent as part of the DPI message if the Provider Avail ID Enable check box is checked. Each provider has their own unique ID. The default value is 0.

Ad Insertion Authorization
Ad insertion allows the user to insert alternate ads into programs. Ad Insertion Authorization tiers are set up in the D9050, D9040, D9120 and D9125 Encoders and are part of DPI messages. Ad insertion tiers that are part of DPI source are controlled by the DPI source view as encoder attributes. Ad insertion tiers that are added to the ADP are controlled through the decoder view as decoder attributes.To configure a DPI source see DPI Source on page 7-43. To access the screen below, go to Uplink Configuration and select DPI source.

Each DPI source may be associated with up to three DPI triggers (e.g., Start, Stop and Cancel). A maximum of eight tiers can be set for each of the eight DPI triggers. When a tier is set for a DPI source, a message will be sent to all DPI triggers associated with that particular DPI source. The Authorization Insertion Tier Bit has a range of 0-151.

4042066 Rev A

4-61

Model D98xx receivers are capable of processing ad insertion tiers. If a decoder has one of the tiers contained in a DPI message, it will output the SCTE 35 message via its ASI port without the tier information. If none of the tiers in the DPI message have been assigned to the decoder via the decoder database, the message is not forwarded from the IRD.

Configuring D9040 Encoder Audio Services


The D9040 Encoder provides real-time encoding of up to four audio channels from analog, AES/EBU digital or SDI inputs. Each decoder contains special integrated circuits designed to decode the multichannel audio bitstreams found in digital signals that are compliant to MPEG-1 and satellite broadcasting DVB standards. The basic function of these integrated circuits is to accept any legal layer 1 or layer 2 audio elementary stream coded according to the standard and produce two analog signals. The MPEG audio stream is the integrated circuit that does the decoding. Each integrated circuit is capable of producing one audio stereo pair output. A decoder option allows a second pair of MPEG audio streams to produce another two pairs of outputs. Configuring audio services consists of two main procedures: Configuring the parameters of the source audio output to the PNC system for the paired channels (Input Channels 1(L)/2(R) or Channels 3(L)/4(R)). The settings you select for the paired channels apply to both channels. Configuring each individual audio channel within the PNC system. Each audio channel is configurable to operate in any one of the following modes: MPEG Layer 2, Dolby Digital (AC3) internal, Dolby Digital (AC-3) pass-through, AAC internal or AAC pass-through.

Configuring Paired Channels


When you configure paired channels (either Input Channels 1/2, or Input Channels 3(L)/4(R)), the settings you select set the parameters for the source audio output to the PNC system. Once you have configured the paired channels, you can configure the individual audio channels within the PNC system.

4-62

4042066 Rev A

To configure the paired channels: 1. Display the encoders device window as described in Configuring an HD (High Definition) Encoder on page 4-94. 2. Click on the audio service you want to configure. The window displays a summary of the services audio streams, as shown below.

3. From either the Input 1(L)/2(R) or the Input 3(L)/4(R) tab (whichever is appropriate), select the Encoding Format. The selection you make applies to both channels in the pair.
Encode Format

Select the type of audio format each encoder outputs. The default is MPEG Layer 2.The field selection options are described in the following table.
Input Type
MPEG Layer 2 Dolby Digital Internal Dolby Digital Pass-through Default value. Dolby Digital audio encoding occurs. Removed if channel has no Dolby Digital license. Dolby Digital (AC-3) pass-through mode enabled. Preencoded bitstreams move through the audio card unmodified to the output. AAC audio encoding occurs.AAC Internal requires a license that can be generated for Stereo CH1 and CH2 or Stereo CH3 and CH4. AAC pass-through mode enabled. Pre-encoded bitstreams move through the audio card unmodified to the output.

Description

AAC Internal

AAC Pass-through

When the Encode Format is set to one of the pass-through modes, only SDI or AES/EBU digital can be selected for the audio source (i.e., Input Select) type.
Streams

The window displays a summary of the services audio streams including the name

4042066 Rev A

4-63

of the service, whether the service is enabled or disabled, the data transmission rate, the type of service (i.e., encoding mode) and the PID associated with the service.
Sampling Rate

Use this field to set the sampling frequency at which the PCM audio signals are input into the encoder. The internal audio stream supports three standard sampling frequencies: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, and 32 kHz. Pass-through audio streams support 48 kHz only. Use this field to define the adjustment required in the audio encoding delay to make audio synchronize with video in a program which has both. The PNC system automatically calculates the value of this field whenever the bit rate on the video card configuration window changes. Select the type of audio source each encoder outputs to the PNC system. The default is Analog.The field selection options are described in the following table.
Audio Source Type
Analog SDI AES3/EBU digital

Delay

Input Select

Description
Select this option if the audio source to the encoder is via the four XLR connectors. Select this option if the audio source to the encoder is via the DI serial input. Select this option if the audio source to the encoder is via the two XLR AES3 connectors.

Note: When SDI is selected, a Sampling Rate of 48 kHz is only supported.

SDI Input Controls


When you assign the SDI audio group, you select a group pair between 1 and 4 to represent the group of four digital audio channels. When you have assigned the SDI group, you can configure the individual audio channels within the PNC system.
Audio Group

A numeric list (1, 2, 3, 4). Select the number that matches the group of four audio streams you are sending to the encoder. The default is Group1, Pair 1. The field selection options are described in the following table.
Audio Group
Group1, Pair 1 Group1, Pair 2 Group2, Pair 1 Group2 , Pair 2 Group3, Pair 1

4-64

4042066 Rev A

Audio Group
Group3, Pair 2 Group4, Pair 1 Group4, Pair 2

AES/EBU Digital Input Controls


Impedance

This is the impedance of the AES/EBU digital input. For Stereo CH1 and CH2 select 75 Ohm. For Stereo CH 3 and CH4 select between 75 and 110 Ohm. The default setting is 75 Ohm.

Analog Input Controls


Impedance

This is the impedance of the Analog audio input(s). Select between High and 600 Ohm. The default setting is High. This is the input level at which clipping will start to occur specified as an absolute voltage level. Decreasing the setting increases the gain applied to the input signal. Enter a value in the range between -6.0 and 24.0 dBu. The default setting is 15.0 Save the changes by choosing the Save icon, or choose Save from the Actions menu to save the changes to the database. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message Discard changes to close? Note: You must save the changes in this view to Enable the individual audio channels.

Clipping Level

Configuring Individual MPEG Audio Channels/Services


To configure an individual MPEG-1 audio channel: 1. Be sure you have chosen the audio service containing the channel you want to configure, as the previous section describes. 2. Click on the channel you want to configure. A window similar to the following is displayed.

4042066 Rev A

4-65

3. Select or enter information in the following fields. The values you set only apply to this channel.
Enabled PID

When checked, this Audio Channel is available to the system to be transmitted. Packet Identification numbers are usually set by Cisco personnel during system installation. Although Cisco does not recommend that you change this number, you can define your own numbering system and enter a unique PID number for this service. The number you enter must be one that the system is not using. See Packet IDs (PIDs) on page 4-142.

Encoding Mode

Select the audio channel configuration output from the encoder:


1/0(C) - Single Mono (default) 1+1 (L/Ch1,R/CH2) - Dual Mono 2/0 (L,R) - Joint Stereo 2/0 (L,R) - Stereo

Data Rate

Select the audio transmission rate. Settings for the compressed bit rate are available from 64 to 384 Kbps, depending on the Encoding Mode setting. Increasing the number in this field increases the audio bandwidth at the encoder, improving the quality of the audio transmitted by the encoder. The default is 128K.

4-66

4042066 Rev A

Test Pattern
Enable Tones

Select this check box to enable the pre-selected test tone. If this check box is cleared, live audio will be enabled. Select one of the options that determine the frequency and level of the test tone for this channel.

Input 1(L) Input 2(R)

Audio Encoding and Decoding Modes


The following sections discuss audio processing on both the Encoding and Decoding side. Typically, what happens in the process is:
audio the

stream(s) enter the encoder via the audio inputs

encoder processes (encodes) the audio stream(s) using a designated audio mode (see audio modes below) processed (encoded) audio is mapped to a PID, which is broadcast PID is received by the decoder

the the the

decoder processes (decodes) the PID and produces appropriate audio for the decoders left and right audio outputs, depending on which mode was used to encode the audio (see audio modes below)

Audio Modes
There are four types of audio modes: Single Mono, Dual Mono, Stereo and Joint Stereo. The following table explains the basic differences between the modes:
Audio Mode Single Mono Description
The same monaural audio is played out of both the left and right speakers connected to the decoder. Independent monaural audio is played out of the left and right speakers connected to the decoder. Gives the greatest degree of audio separation, but requires more complex coding, and, consequently, higher operating bit rates. The left and right speakers connected to the decoder work together to produce a single audio program. Phase and separation are maintained between the left and right signals. The left and right speakers connected to the decoder work together to produce a single audio program. Stereophonic irrelevancy and redundancy are used to the best advantage. Joint Stereo, while similar to Stereo, saves transmission bandwidth, allowing lower bit rates to be used.

Dual Mono

Stereo

Joint Stereo

Note: Stereo and Joint Stereo are recommended for music programs.

4042066 Rev A

4-67

Single Mono Encoding


While the interface is the same for MPEG and AC-3 audio, the rules for the two services are slightly different, as indicated below.

MPEG Audio
In Single Mono Mode, the encoder has four audio inputs, each input mapped to an audio stream and each audio stream mapped to a unique PID:

Encoder MPEG Audio Processing


Audio Engine Audio 1 Audio 2 Stream 1 Stream 2 Stream 3 Stream 4 Single Mono Mode Single Mono Mode System PIDs 1120 1121 1122 1123

Audio 3 Audio 4

If you assign audio stream 1 to run in Single Mono mode, then audio stream 2 (the other half of that audio pair) automatically runs in Single Mono mode, too. Of course, the same applies to the 3/4 audio pair, as well.

Single Mono Data Rate


The data rate you set for an audio pair (1/2 or 3/4) is the total for the two inputs. For instance, if you set the data rate at 256 Kbps, then the total data rate for audio inputs 1 and 2 is 256 Kbps, carried on two combined PIDs.

Single Mono Decoding (MPEG)


If only one audio stream is being fed into one of the encoders audio pair inputs, Single Mono mode is advantageous because the decoder uses the same stream for both the left and right outputs, as shown in the following diagram:

4-68

4042066 Rev A

Decoder MPEG Audio Processing


System PIDs Audio Engine Stream 1 Single Mono Mode Decoder Outputs Audio 1 Left Audio 1 Right Audio 2 Left Audio 2 Right

PID 1120

PID 1121

Stream 2

The actual mapping of PIDs to programs, and which PIDs are routed to which decoder outputs is variable.

Dual Mono/Stereo/Joint Stereo Encoding


For both MPEG and AC-3 audio, the encoder has four audio inputs which are combined to produce two encoded PIDs, one for the 1/2 audio pair and one for the 3/4 audio pair.

Encoder Audio Processing


Audio Engine Audio 1 Audio 2 Stream 1 Stream 2 Stream 3 Stream 4 Dual Mono, Stereo, or Joint Stereo System PIDs 1120

Audio 3 Audio 4

Dual Mono, Stereo, or Joint Stereo

1122

You must assign the PID number for audio stream 1/2 pair using just the 1 of the pair, and for audio stream 3/4 pair using just the 3 of the pair when you are creating a virtual channel (i.e., When you drag just the 1 of the 1/2 audio pair, both are moved into the virtual channel). Note: Any PID assigned to channel 2 or 4 will be ignored.

Dual Mono and Stereo Data Rate


The data rate you set for an audio pair (1/2 or 3/4) is shared equally for the two audio inputs. For instance, if you set the data rate at 256 Kbps, then audio inputs 1 and 2 each have an effective data rate of 128 Kbps, carried on the same PID.

4042066 Rev A

4-69

Joint Stereo Data Rate


The data rate you set for an audio pair (1/2 or 3/4) is coded by the first member of the pair (1 for 1/2 and 3 for 3/4) and the difference between the two members is then used to reconstruct the second member, showing a bit rate efficiency over stereo. For example, 192 Kbps joint stereo might be equivalent to 256 Kbps in stereo.

Dual Mono/Stereo/Joint Stereo Decoding


A decoders audio engine can only process one PID, but the channel within that PID, when in these modes, contains all the information required to produce the appropriate two streams required for the Left and Right decoder outputs.

Decoder Audio Processing


System PIDs 1120 Stream 1 Stream 2 1122 Stream 3 Stream 4 Dual Mono, Stereo, or Joint Stereo Audio1 Left Audio1 Right Audio2 Left Audio2 Right

Dual Mono, Stereo, or Joint Stereo

Configuring Dolby Digital Audio Channels/ Services


Dolby Digital audio encoding provides real-time encoding for up to four monaural audio signal inputs. A Dolby Digital elemental stream can carry either one or two monaural signal inputs depending on the encoding mode (monaural or stereo). In general, the encoding mode can be one of the following:
1/0 2/0

Center Left, Right (Stereo) (Left - Channel 1, Right - Channel 2) Dual Mono.

1+1

Note: In 1+1 mode, the audio inputs for the individual stream are considered to be two independent monaural signals Main (left) and Aux (right). The following diagram displays two elemental streams carrying various combinations of signal inputs. When configured for 2/0 or 1+1 encoding, the signals labelled as Audio 1 and 3 are used as Main (left) inputs and the signals labelled as Audio 2 and 4 are used as

4-70

4042066 Rev A

Aux (right) inputs. When configured for 1/0 encoding, the Main (left) audio input is used and the Aux (right) audio input is not used.

Configuring a digital audio encoder card consists of three related procedures: Configuring the control parameters of the source audio output stream to the PNC system. Configuring the input/output characteristics of the stream. Configuring the bit stream/preprocessing characteristics of the stream.

Dolby Digital/AC-3 Audio


In Single Mono Mode, the encoder has four audio inputs, but only the first (or left) of each pair (1/2 and 3/4) is used. Each of these is mapped to a single PID, as shown in the diagram below.

4042066 Rev A

4-71

Encoder Dolby Digital/AC-3 Audio Processing


Audio Engine Audio 1 Audio 2 (ignored) Stream 1 Single Mono System PIDs 1120

Audio 3 Audio 4 (ignored)

Stream 2 Single Mono

1122

As with MPEG, the audio pairs are independent, meaning that while audio pair 1/2 may be in Single Mono mode, audio pair 3/4 can be in a completely different mode. The data rate you set for an audio pair (1/2 or 3/4) is the total for the two inputs. For instance, if you set the data rate at 256 Kbps, then the total data rate for audio inputs 1 and 2 is 256 Kbps, carried on two combined PIDs. While all four inputs must operate at the same sampling rate, each audio input may be set to an independent audio bit rate. As well, though audio is dealt with in pairs (1/2 or 3/4), the pairs themselves may be set to different modes. (i.e., if audio pair 1/2 is set to Single Mono Mode, audio pair 3/4 may be set to Dual Mono/Stereo/ Joint Stereo, as desired.)

Configuring the Dolby Digital Audio Stream


When the Encoding Format is configured as either Dolby Digital Internal or Dolby Digital Pass-through, the encoder can control and broadcast two elemental streams with each stream carrying a certain type of audio data. To configure a digital audio stream: 1. Display the encoders device window as described in Configuring an HD (High Definition) Encoder on page 4-94. 2. Click on the audio service you want to configure. The window displays a sum-

4-72

4042066 Rev A

mary of the services audio streams, as shown below.

3. From either the Input 1(L)/2(R) or the Input 3(L)/4(R) tab (whichever is appropriate), select the Encoding Format, Dolby Digital Internal or Dolby Digital Pass-through. The selection you make applies to both channels in the pair.
Encode Format

Select the type of audio format each encoder outputs. The default is MPEG Layer 2.The field selection options are described in the following table.
Input Type
MPEG Layer 2 Dolby Digital Internal Default value. Dolby Digital audio encoding occurs. Dolby Digital Internal requires a license that can be generated for Stereo CH1 and CH2 or Stereo CH3 and CH4. Dolby Digital (AC-3) pass-through mode enabled. Preencoded bitstreams move through the audio card unmodified to the output. A license is not required for Dolby Digital passthrough. AAC audio encoding occurs.AAC Internal requires a license that can be generated for Stereo CH1 and CH2 or Stereo CH3 and CH4. AAC pass-through mode enabled. Pre-encoded bitstreams move through the audio card unmodified to the output. A license is not required for AAC pass-through.

Description

Dolby Digital Pass-through

AAC Internal

AAC Pass-through

4. Select Dolby Digital Internal. The values you set only apply to this streams described in the previous section. 5. Save the changes by choosing the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the database. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message

4042066 Rev A

4-73

Discard changes to close? Note: You must save the changes in this view to Enable the individual audio channels. 6. Click on the particular stream you want to configure in the left side of the window. The system displays the fields associated with the elemental stream similar to the example shown below.

7. Select or enter information in the following fields. Note: The values you set only apply to this stream.
Enabled PID

Check this box to make this stream available to the system for transmission. Packet Identification numbers are usually set by Cisco personnel during system installation. Although Cisco does not recommend that you change this number, you can define your own numbering system and enter a unique PID number for this service. The number you enter must be one that the system is not using. Read-only. Displays the audio output format of the encoder as selected in the audio channel window, Dolby Digital Internal or Dolby Digital Pass-through. Use this field to select the digital audio transmission rate. Settings for the compressed bit rate are available from 56 to 640 kbps, depending on the Encoding Mode setting. Increasing the number in this field increases the audio bandwidth at the encoder, improving the quality of the audio transmitted by the encoder. The default is 128K.

Encoding Format

Data Rate

4-74

4042066 Rev A

To ensure high audio quality, the following table contains recommended Data Rate ranges for the selected audio encoding mode.
Mode
1/0 1+1 2/0

Data Rate Range


56 640 kbps 112 640 kbps 96 640 kbps

Internal Encode Controls


Encoding Mode

Use this field to select the number of channels and the channel format within the encoded bit stream. The three available audio encoding modes are listed below. The mode definition uses two numbers (m/n), with m indicating the number of front channels, and n indicating the number of rear (surround) channels.
Mode
1+1 (L/Ch1, R/Ch2) - Dual Mono 1/0 (C) - Single Mono 2/0 (L,R) - Stereo

Channel Format
(Left Channel 1, Right Channel 2) Dual Mono Center Stereo

The default setting is 2/0 (Stereo). If the mode is set to 1+1, then two completely independent program channels (dual-mono), referenced as Channel 1 and Channel 2, are encoded into the bit stream. Dual-mono mode is for use only in broadcast applications. Dual Mono mode is recommended if simultaneous output of unrelated, independent audio signals is required. Dual Mono mode gives the greatest degree of audio separation, but requires more complex coding, and, consequently, higher operating bit rates. Although each channel is assigned its own PID, you must use the PID number of channel 1 for the channel 1/2 pair when you are creating a virtual channel. If you use the PID of the even numbered streams in a virtual channel, no output occurs.

4042066 Rev A

4-75

Test Pattern
Enable Tones

Use this check box to override the input source and input format of the audio signal and replace the signal with the test tones for left and right audio inputs selected in the fields below. Test tones replace the currently selected input signal with an internally-generated test signal. Note: If the Enable check box is set On, an asterisk appears beside the Input/ Output branch of the digital audio tree in the left portion of the window.

Input 1(L)

Use this field to select the test tone input characteristics for the left audio channel when Stereo Encoding is selected. Use this field to select the test tone generated when Mono Encoding is selected. The default value is Digital Silence.

Input 2(R)

Use this field to select the test tone input characteristics for the right audio channel when Stereo Encoding is selected. This field is ignored when Mono Encoding is selected. The default value is Digital Silence.

Configuring Internal Dolby Digital/AC3 Parameters


The Bitstream/Preprocessing parameters on the Dolby Digital audio view enable the operator to define and control the transmission characteristics of the outgoing bit stream. To configure the digital audio streams bitstream/preprocessing: 1. Display the encoders device window as described in Configuring an HD (High Definition) Encoder on page 4-94. 2. Click on the Dolby Digital audio card you want to configure. 3. Click on the Internal AC3 Parameters tab for the stream you want to configure. The system displays the bitstream/preprocessing fields associated with

4-76

4042066 Rev A

the elemental stream similar to the example shown below.

4. Select or enter information in the following fields. The values you set only apply to this stream.
Bitstream Mode

Use this field to select the type of information that the bit stream conveys. This is an information-only field for the benefit of operators and other technicians and does not affect the performance or behavior of the actual signal. The current system choices are: main audio service: complete main (CM) main audio service: music and effects (ME) associated service: visually impaired (VI) associated service: hearing impaired (HI) associated service: dialog (D) associated service: commentary (C) associated service: emergency (E) associated service: voice over (VO)/karaoke. For more information, see Packet IDs (PIDs) on page 4-142.

Encoding Mode

Read-only. Displays the number of channels and the channel format within the encoded bit stream as set on the Stream tab. See Configuring the Dolby Digital Audio Stream in the previous section for more information. The default setting is 2/0 (Stereo).

4042066 Rev A

4-77

Dialog Normalization

The dialog normalization controllers indicate how far the average dialog level of the encoded program is below digital 100%. Values range between 1 and 31, with 1 representing -1.0 dB and 31 representing 31.0 dB with respect to digital 100%.

Center Downmix Level Surround Downmix Level Dolby Surround Mode

Use this field to select the nominal downmix level of the center channel with respect to the left and right channels. The default value is -3.0 dB. Use this field to select the nominal downmix level of the surround channel with respect to the left and right channels. The default value is 0.0 dB. This information-only field only appears in the bit stream when the system is operating in the 2/0 Encoding Mode and indicates the type and calibration of the mixing room used for the final audio mixing session. The value in this field is not typically used by the Dolby Digital encoding algorithm, but may be used by other types of audio reproduction equipment. The default value is Not Indicated.
Surround Mode
2/0 2/0 2/0 Not Indicated NOT Dolby Surround Encoded Dolby Surround Encoded

Description

Preprocessing
Dynamic Range Compression

Use this field to select one of the dynamic range compression presets built into the Dolby Digital encoding/decoding algorithm. Each setting reduces the audio bitstreams output to a characteristic dynamic range as shown in the following table. The default value is None.
Compression Settings
None Film Standard Film Light Music Standard Music Light Speech

RF Overmodulation Protection

Use this check box to enable or disable RF overmodulation protection. The default is Off. 5. Save the changes by choosing the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the database. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message Discard changes to close?

4-78

4042066 Rev A

Configuring Audio Channels for Dolby Digital Pass-through


When the Encoding Format is configured as Dolby Digital Pass-through, the encoder can control and broadcast four elemental streams from an external Dolby Digital audio source. To configure an external digital audio stream: The setup procedure below assumes the Dolby encoder has been connected to the uplink system and the digital audio source has been set up. 1. Display the encoders device window as described in Configuring an HD (High Definition) Encoder on page 4-94. 2. Click on the Audio service you want to configure. The window displays a summary of the cards audio streams.

3. From either the Input 1(L)/2(R) or the Input 3(L)/4(R) tab (whichever is appropriate), select the Encoding Format - Dolby Digital Pass-through as shown in the example above. The selection you make applies to both channels in the pair. 4. Select or enter information in the following fields. Sampling Rate: match this field with the Dolby Digital encoder or leave it set at 48 kHz. Input Select: AES/EBU or SDI.

4042066 Rev A

4-79

AES/EBU Digital Input Controls - Impedance: 75 Ohm (only applicable if using the AES/EBU input). Do not change the settings for all the remaining fields. Note: You must save the changes in this view to Enable the individual audio channels. 5. Set the fields in the Dolby Digital Stream window for the selected channel similar to those shown below ensuring that the fields are set according to the Dolby encoder audio input source parameters (e.g., data rate).

6. Click on the AC3 Parameters tab for the stream you want to configure. The system displays the bitstream/preprocessing fields associated with the elemen-

4-80

4042066 Rev A

tal stream similar to the example shown below

7. Set the fields in this window similar to those described previously for the Dolby Digital internal operation. See Configuring Internal AC3 Parameters on page 4-123 for more information. 8. Save the changes by choosing the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the database. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message Discard changes to close?

Configuring AAC Audio Services


AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) encoder cards have two AAC encoding engines which are capable of independently performing internal encoding. Two streams of internally encoded AAC audio can be generated; whereas, only one stream of External Pass-Through AAC audio can be generated, since external pass-through encoding requires both of the AAC encoding engines to perform packetization (i.e., both engines are needed to produce one stream). Configuring AAC audio encoder cards consists of two main procedures: Selecting whether to use Internal or External Pass-Through encoding. Configuring each individual audio channel within the PNC system.

4042066 Rev A

4-81

Configuring the AAC Internal Audio Stream


When the Encoding Format is configured as either AAC Internal or AAC Passthrough, the encoder can control and broadcast two elemental streams with each stream carrying a certain type of audio data. To configure a digital audio stream: 1. Display the encoders device window as described in Configuring an HD (High Definition) Encoder on page 4-94. 2. Click on the audio service you want to configure. The window displays a summary of the services audio streams, as shown below.

3. From either the Input 1(L)/2(R) or the Input 3(L)/4(R) tab (whichever is appropriate), select the Encoding Format, Dolby Digital Internal or Dolby Digital Pass-through. The selection you make applies to both channels in the pair.
Encode Format

Select the type of audio format each encoder outputs. The default is MPEG Layer 2.The field selection options are described in the following table.
Input Type
MPEG Layer 2 Dolby Digital Internal Default value. Dolby Digital audio encoding occurs. Dolby Digital Internal requires a license that can be generated for Stereo CH1 and CH2 or Stereo CH3 and CH4. Dolby Digital (AC-3) pass-through mode enabled. Preencoded bitstreams move through the audio card unmodified to the output. A license is not required for Dolby Digital passthrough.

Description

Dolby Digital Pass-through

4-82

4042066 Rev A

AAC Internal

AAC audio encoding occurs.AAC Internal requires a license that can be generated for Stereo CH1 and CH2 or Stereo CH3 and CH4. AAC pass-through mode enabled. Pre-encoded bitstreams move through the audio card unmodified to the output. A license is not required for AAC pass-through.

AAC Pass-through

4. Select AAC Internal. The values you set only apply to this streams described in the previous section. 5. Save the changes by choosing the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the database. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message Discard changes to close? Note: You must save the changes in this view to Enable the individual audio channels. 6. Click on the particular stream you want to configure in the left side of the window. The system displays the fields associated with the elemental stream similar to the example shown below.

7. Select or enter information in the following fields. Note: The values you set only apply to this stream.
Enabled PID

Check this box to make this stream available to the system for transmission. Packet Identification numbers are usually set by Cisco personnel during system installation. Although Cisco does not recommend that you change this number, you can define your own numbering system and enter a unique PID number for this service. The number you enter must be one that the system is not using.

4042066 Rev A

4-83

Encoding Format

Read-only. Displays the audio output format of the encoder as selected in the audio channel window, Dolby Digital Internal or Dolby Digital Pass-through. Use this field to select the digital audio transmission rate. Settings for the compressed bit rate are available from 56 to 640 kbps, depending on the Encoding To ensure high audio quality, the following table contains recommended Data Rate ranges for the selected audio encoding mode.
Mode
1/0 1+1 2/0

Data Rate

Data Rate Range


56 640 kbps 112 640 kbps 96 640 kbps

Internal Encode Controls


Encoding Mode

Use this field to select the number of channels and the channel format within the encoded bit stream. The three available audio encoding modes are listed below. The mode definition uses two numbers (m/n), with m indicating the number of front channels, and n indicating the number of rear (surround) channels.
Mode
1+1 (L/Ch1, R/Ch2) - Dual Mono 1/0 (C) - Single Mono 2/0 (L,R) - Stereo

Channel Format
(Left Channel 1, Right Channel 2) Dual Mono Center Stereo

The default setting is 2/0 (Stereo). If the mode is set to 1+1, then two completely independent program channels (dual-mono), referenced as Channel 1 and Channel 2, are encoded into the bit stream. Dual-mono mode is for use only in broadcast applications. Dual Mono mode is recommended if simultaneous output of unrelated, independent audio signals is required. Dual Mono mode gives the greatest degree of audio separation, but requires more complex coding, and, consequently, higher operating bit rates. Although each channel is assigned its own PID, you must use the PID number of channel 1 for the channel 1/2 pair when you are creating a virtual channel. If you use the PID of the even numbered streams in a virtual channel, no output occurs.

4-84

4042066 Rev A

Test Pattern
Enable Tones

Use this check box to override the input source and input format of the audio signal and replace the signal with the test tones for left and right audio inputs selected in the fields below. Test tones replace the currently selected input signal with an internally-generated test signal. Note: If the Enable check box is set On, an asterisk appears beside the Input/ Output branch of the digital audio tree in the left portion of the window.

Input 1(L)

Use this field to select the test tone input characteristics for the left audio channel when Stereo Encoding is selected. Use this field to select the test tone generated when Mono Encoding is selected. The default value is Digital Silence.

Input 2(R)

Use this field to select the test tone input characteristics for the right audio channel when Stereo Encoding is selected. This field is ignored when Mono Encoding is selected. The default value is Digital Silence.

Configuring Internal AAC Parameters


The Bitstream/Preprocessing parameters on the AAC audio view enable the operator to define and control the transmission characteristics of the outgoing bit stream. To configure the digital audio streams bitstream/preprocessing: 1. Display the encoders device window as described in Configuring an HD (High Definition) Encoder on page 4-94. 2. Click on the AAC audio card you want to configure.

Configuring Audio Channels for AAC Pass-through


When the Encoding Format is configured as AAC Pass-through, the encoder can control and broadcast four elemental streams from an external AAC audio source. To configure an external analog audio stream: The setup procedure below assumes the audio encoder has been connected to the uplink system and the digital audio source has been set up. 1. Display the encoders device window as described in Configuring an HD (High Definition) Encoder on page 4-94.

4042066 Rev A

4-85

2. Click on the Audio service you want to configure. The window displays a summary of the cards audio streams.

3. From either the Input 1(L)/2(R) or the Input 3(L)/4(R) tab (whichever is appropriate), select the Encoding Format - AAC Pass-through as shown in the example above. The selection you make applies to both channels in the pair. 4. Select or enter information in the following fields. Delay: set as necessary for lip-sync. Input Select: Analog, AES/EBU or SDI. SDI Input Controls - Audio Group: set according to D9050 Encoder audio group pair (only applicable if using the SDI input). AES/EBU Digital Input Controls - Impedance: 75 Ohm (only applicable if using the AES/EBU input). Do not change the settings for all the remaining fields. Note: The values you set only apply to this stream. 5. Save the changes by choosing the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the database. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message Discard changes to close? Note: You must save the changes in this window to Enable the individual audio channels. 6. Click on the particular stream you want to configure in the left side of the window. The system displays the fields associated with the elemental stream simi-

4-86

4042066 Rev A

lar to the example shown below.

7. Select or enter information in the following fields. Note: The values you set only apply to this stream.
Enable PID

Check this box to make this stream available to the system for transmission. Packet Identification numbers are usually set by Cisco personnel during system installation. Although Cisco does not recommend that you change this number, you can define your own numbering system and enter a unique PID number for this service. The number you enter must be one that the system is not using.

Encoding format Encoding Mode

This option applies to internal encoding streams only and does not affect passthrough audio streams.
Options
1/0{C} - Single Mono 1/0{L + R} - Single Mono 1+1 {L/CH,R/CH} - Dual Mono 2/0 - Joint Stereo 2/0{L, R} - Stereo

Data Rate

Use this field to select the digital audio transmission rate. Settings for the compressed bit rate are available from 56 to 640 kbps, depending on the Encoding Mode setting. Increasing the number in this field increases the audio bandwidth at the encoder, improving the quality of the audio transmitted by the encoder. The default is 128K.

4042066 Rev A

4-87

External Delay

Use this field to set the external delay. Set this to the same value of higher than that used by the D9040 Encoder. 8. Save the changes by choosing the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the database. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message Discard changes to close?

Mode Control Tab

Internal Encoding Mode Control Contact Closure

If it is selected, all the internal encoding audio streams (MPEG LII, AC 3 internal, AAC internal) will be affected. The audio streams encoding modes will be controlled by the contact closure according to the following table (which may be different from the PNC GUI configuration):
Contact Pair States Input 1
Open Open Closed Closed

Contact State/Audio Mode Definitions Stereo Dual Mono Single Mono Follow Audio Setting
X X X X

Input 2
Open Closed Open Closed

Note: It is only possible to enable Contact Closure when using an SDM card.

4-88

4042066 Rev A

Configuring VBI Lines


The VBI line standard and its associated line numbers are normally set up when the system is installed. However, if you need to modify the VBI line numbers (e.g., to define non-standard line numbers for customized line placement of the VBI information, or to configure for new hardware, etc.), the VBI Line Config dialog enables you to quickly make the required changes. VBI allows for the configuration of PowerVu VBI, DVB-WST, Inverted WST and DVB-VBI.

PowerVu VBI, DVB-WST and DVB-VBI may be enabled independently, but the maximum number of VBI modes that can be enabled at one time is two Unless you have specific requirements, dont check the Inverted WST (World Standard Teletext) box. When you check the Inverted WST box, the encoder accepts inverted framing words. Typically, inverted framing words are found in the teletext data when you use the teletext system for transmission of proprietary data. Inverted WST is discarded by TV sets. Inverted teletext is processed and sent together with normal teletext according to the standard EN 300 472. It is not marked to be inverted teletext in the transport stream as specified in the DVB VBI standard EN 301 775.
VPS & WSS

These line standards must reside on a specific line and may be selected by checking the boxes. When the VPS or WSS line standard is set the line standard will be included in the view with the rest of the line definitions. Enabling or Overwriting VPS Line Standard: If you try to enable VPS when a line in

4042066 Rev A

4-89

Field 1 has been defined, the user interface will allow you to delete the line and disable the VBI mode or cancel the change. If you try to define a line standard when VPS is already enabled, the user interface will allow you to disable VPS and set the new line standard or cancel the change. To enable VBI: 1. Click VBI to display the VBI Configuration window. 2. Select the Enabled check box of preference and set the PID. To create and/or edit VBI lines: 1. On the left side of the device config window, expand the video service hierarchy by clicking the plus sign to the left of the video service. 2. Click VBI to display the VBI Configuration window. 3. To add a new VBI line, right-click on the white space below the table at the bottom of the window. Choose Edit from the pop-up menu. The VBI Line Config dialog displays. To edit an existing VBI line, right-click any existing line and choose Edit from the pop-up menu. The VBI Line Config dialog displays with the fields already filled in.

Select your desired values from one of the following from the drop-down list: None, NABTS, Nielsen/AMOL, VITC, Gemstar, WST, Transparent.
Line

Select the line number to add/change from the line numbers available in this dropdown list box. Both the Field 1 and Field 2 line numbers are shown, in the form Field 1(Field 2). The available lines are dependant on the selected video input format. For VBI to be enabled you must define at least one VBI line standard. Line Standards Supported in VBI modes
PowerVu Mode 525 Lines
VITC NABTS

DVB-VBI Mode 525 Lines


VITC

DVB-WST Mode 525 Lines 625 Lines


WST

625 Lines
VITC WST

625 Lines
VITC WST

4-90

4042066 Rev A

PowerVu Mode 525 Lines


Neilsen/ AMOL Gemstar

DVB-VBI Mode 525 Lines 625 Lines


VPS WSS Transparent

DVB-WST Mode 525 Lines 625 Lines

625 Lines

If you change the input format to either 525 line mode or 625 line mode the VBI line standard view and the hardware configuration will reflect the effect of the change.
Field 1 Standard Field 2 Standard

The available values for both Field 1 and Field 2 are the same, though you can make unique selections between the two. In either case, choose the standard to use for this VBI Line. When you have the settings for the VBI line the way you want them, click Set to apply the change to the Valid Field Lines listing (Note, the changes arent saved until the final step when you Save the changes.). You can now continue to add more VBI lines by repeating the above steps and clicking Set to apply your changes. When youre done, click Close to dismiss the VBI Line Config dialog. 4. When you finish setting the values for the VBI lines, choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the new values.

Show

This filter allows users to display selected VBI modes and does not affect hardware configuration. World System Teletext (WST) allows for the transmission of teletext data in almost every language.

WST Descriptors

4042066 Rev A

4-91

To enable DVB WST:

1. Click VBI to display the VBI Configuration window. 2. Select the DVB WST Enabled check box and set the DVB WST PID. 3. Click the WST Descriptors tab to display the DVB WST window. To create and/or edit DVB WST lines: 1. Click VBI to display the VBI Configuration window. 2. Click the WST Descriptors tab to display the DVB WST window. The WST lines, if any, are in the VBI Input Definition list box. 3. To add a new DVB WST line, right-click on the WST Lines listing and choose Add from the pop-up menu.

4-92

4042066 Rev A

The WST Config dialog displays.

Possible values for the WST Config dialogs fields are:


Type

Choose the desired page type from the predefined list. This defines the teletext page to be transmitted. Choose the desired language from the predefined list. This is where you tell the PNC which page of information you want. As described earlier, each screen of text is considered a page. Pages are further grouped into Magazines. To specify the information you want, you enter a three-digit number. The first digit identifies which magazine (0-8 can be used) contains the page you want. The last two digits identify the page itself within the magazine (0-99). The default is 100 and the possible range is 100-899.

Language Page

Editing WST Lines


To edit an existing WST line, right-click on the line to change and select Edit from the pop-up menu. The VBI Line Config dialog displays with the values already filled in.

4042066 Rev A

4-93

Configuring an HD (High Definition) Encoder


Depending on how your system was installed, you may need to change the HD encoder settings. You must have appropriate user privileges before you can change the encoders configuration values. For more information on User Privileges, see Working with Users on page 8-11. To configure an HD encoder: 1. Select the signal whose devices you want to display from the signal bar. 2. Choose the Uplink icon, or choose Uplink > Uplink Configuration to display the Uplink Configuration window. 3. Double-click the encoder you want to configure. The encoders name appears in the title bar of the displayed window. Note: You can open multiple encoder windows so that you can compare their settings.

Name

Enter the name of this encoder. You can enter up to 30 characters. This is an alias to differentiate the channel (i.e., sports). For example, the name ENC2P1-VDH1 is a system-assigned name only. This field displays one of the following encoder states:

State

4-94

4042066 Rev A

HD Encoder State
Active Standby Off line

Description
Indicates that the data paths are operating normally and that the unit is being used for broadcast purposes. Indicates that the system and virtual channel data paths are operating normally for the unit, which has been designated as the standby device. Indicates communication with the device has stopped, the reporting of diagnostics messages for this unit has stopped, and the transmission of virtual channel EMMs has been disabled. Indicates a failure in the device and that communication has stopped between the PNC system and the device (e.g., due to a cable problem or a power supply failure).

Failed

Redundancy
Group

The encoder redundancy group is decided during system configuration at the factory (i.e., it is not a user configurable parameter). It is essentially the grouping of encoders (it actually applies to other devices - muxes, modulators) with similar card sets. Select the encoder priority for autochangeover to a standby encoder in case this encoder fails. The lower the number, the higher the priority. For example, if encoders 1 and 2 both fail, and their priorities are set at 50 and 100 respectively, encoder 1 has priority to the standby encoder of the same type. The standby encoder must be configured as Standby, and Autochangeover must be enabled. Select a number from 0 to 255. The default, and the highest priority, is 0. 4. To save the changes and leave this window, choose the Save icon, or choose Save from the Actions menu to save the changes to the database. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message Discard changes to close?

Priority

4042066 Rev A

4-95

Configuring HD Video Services


The HD Encoder gives you control of HD video and audio services. 1. Select the appropriate signal, display the Uplink Configuration window, and then double-click the name of the encoder that contains the Video service want to display or modify. (See Configuring an HD (High Definition) Encoder on page 4-94.) 2. Select the video service from the list on the left portion of the window. You will see a window similar to this:

Note: The system assigns a system name automatically. 3. Select or enter information for the fields under the following tabs.

Encoding tab
Use the Encoding tab to control the most commonly changed video attributes.To configure the video attributes: 1. In the left portion of the Device Config window, click the HD video service from the list of services under the encoder. The Encoding tab is the default tab within the video service view, as illustrated above. 2. Select the settings for the following fields:
Enable

Click this check box to enable the video stream. If this check box is cleared, the video stream will not be generated and it will occupy no bandwidth. However, the PID will be reserved so you can enable the video stream in the future.

4-96

4042066 Rev A

PID

Assigns the transport packet PID of the video stream. Enter an unassigned value in a range from 32-8190. Sets the chroma format encoding to be used by the video stream. In the list, click one of two values: 4:2:0, 4:2:2. The default chroma format is 4:2:0. If you attempt to the Chroma Format from 4:2:0 to 4:2:2 while in VBR mode, the following dialog box will appear:

Chroma Format

If you select Yes, the Encode mode will automatically change from VBR to CBR mode because 4:2:2 Chroma format is only supported in CBR mode. If you select No, the change will be discarded and the Chroma Format will remain 4:2:0.
Video Input

Displays the input standard for the video input as set on the Input tab. See the Input tab for more information. Displays the participation status of the video stream within the multiplex group. You can set the group participation status on the Multiplex Group tab. It can be set to Statmux On - VBR or Stamux Off - CBR. An encoder can transition between Stamux Off - CBR and Statmux On - VBR, but can only belong to one multiplex group. Any encoder which is not connected to a Regulus controller is not in a multiplex group and therefore cannot be statistically multiplexed with other encoders. Encoders not connected to a Regulus Controller must be configured with Statmux Off - CBR.

Encode Mode

Valid Bitrate Range

Read-only Displays the operating bit rate range based on the bit rate setting. See the table below for the valid for minimum and maximum operating range values. Defines the PES encoding rate (in Mbps) to be allocated to the video stream.You can set the bit rate here, but we recommend that you set it from the Multiplex Group Configuration view. To set the bit rate, type in a value to a maximum of two decimal places within the ranges shown in the following table: The default bit rate is 15.0.
Video Type
1080i @ 29.97 Hz 1080i @ 29.97 Hz

Bitrate (Mbps)

Chroma Format
4:2:0 4:2:0

Encode Mode
CBR VBR

Minimum Bit Rate


7.50 Mbps 5.63 Mbps

Maximum Bit Rate


80.00 Mbps 25.00 Mbps

4042066 Rev A

4-97

Video Type
1080i @ 29.97 Hz 1080i @ 29.97 Hz 1080i @ 25 Hz 1080i @ 25 Hz 1080i @ 25 Hz 1080i @ 25 Hz 720p @ 59.94 Hz 720p @ 59.94 Hz 720p @ 59.94 Hz 720p @ 59.94 Hz 720p @ 50 Hz 720p @ 50 Hz 720p @ 50 Hz 720p @ 50 Hz 576p @ 50 Hz 576p @ 50 Hz 480p @ 59.94 Hz 480p @ 59.94Hz 480p @ 50 Hz 480p @ 50 Hz

Chroma Format
4:2:2 4:2:2 4:2:0 4:2:0 4:2:2 4:2:2 4:2:0 4:2:0 4:2:2 4:2:2 4:2:0 4:2:0 4:2:2 4:2:2 4:2:0 4:2:0 4:2:0 4:2:0 4:2:0 4:2:0

Encode Mode
CBR VBR CBR VBR CBR VBR CBR VBR CBR VBR CBR VBR CBR VBR CBR VBR CBR VBR CBR VBR

Minimum Bit Rate


11.25 Mbps Not supported 7.50 MBps 5.63 Mbps 11.25 Mbps5 Not supported 7.50 Mbps 5.63 Mbps 11.25 Mbps Not supported 7.50 Mbps 5.63 Mbps 11.25 Mbps Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported

Maximum Bit Rate


100.00 Mbps Not supported 80.00 Mbps 25.00 Mbps 100.00 Mbps Not supported 80.00 Mbps 25.00 Mbps 100.00 Mbps Not Supported 80.00 Mbps 25.00 Mbps 100.00 Mbps Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported

The bit rate must be set to a value between the Minimum and Maximum Rates.
Horizontal Resolution

Sets the horizontal resolution of the generated the video stream in pixels. The output resolution of the video stream is expressed as a fraction of the full horizontal resolution In the list, click either Full or 3/4.The default horizontal resolution is Full.
Video Input
1080i 720p 576p 480p

Horizontal Resolution Range/Setting


3/4, Full 3/4, Full Full Full

Full Horizontal Resolution


1920 1280 720 720

3/2 Pulldown Enable

Select the check box to enable 3/2 pulldown processing in the video stream.

4-98

4042066 Rev A

Aspect Ratio

Controls the aspect ratio to be signalled in the video stream. In the Aspect Ratio list, click one of three options: 4x3, 16x9, 4x3 Pillar Box or Contact Closure #1. The default aspect ratio is 16x9. Sets when a video test pattern will replace live video. In the list, click one of two options: Test Pattern or Substitute for Loss of Input. The default is Substitute for Loss of Input. Sets which test pattern will display. In the list, click either 75% Bars or Digital Black. The default test pattern is 75% Bars.

Test Pattern Mode

Test Pattern

Input tab
Use the Input tab to change HD video encoding attributes that are not normally changed or require specialized knowledge. To configure these advanced parameters: 1. From the HD Video Device Config view, click the Input tab. You will see this window:

2. Select the settings for the following fields:


Input Format

Sets the input standard for the video input. In the list, click one of seven input options: The default setting is 1080i @ 29.97 Hz (HD SDI).
Available Settings

1080i @ 25 Hz (HD SDI)

4042066 Rev A

4-99

Available Settings

1080i @ 29.97 Hz (HD SDI) 720p @ 59.94 Hz (HD SDI) 480p @ 59.94 Hz (HD SDI) 720p @ 50 Hz (HD SDI) 576p @ 50 Hz (HD SDI) 480p @ 50 Hz (HD SDI) Changing the video input will change the valid ranges for the Bit Rate, Minimum Rate and Maximum Rate fields on the Multiplex Group tab. Note: When saving 480p or 576p Video Input settings when 3/4 resolution is set on the Encoding tab, you will be prompted as to whether the Horizontal resolution should automatically be changed to Full as follows: Video Input of 480p/576p requires Horizontal Resolution to be Full Select OK to change the setting to Full or choose Cancel to leave the setting unchanged.
Frame Synchronizer

Enables frame synchronization for improved statistical multiplexing performance within the statmux group that the encoder belongs to. In the list, click Off, On Internal Clock or On - External Reference. The default is Off. When you select On - External Reference, the encoder uses the synchronization source applied to the analog reference input, which can be either a 25 Hz or 29.97 Hz frame rate depending on the selected input source. Enables preprocessing of the video signal. Select the Enable check box so the Preanalysis and Prefilter settings you configure will be implemented. Enables preanalysis of the video signal. In the list, click either On or Off. Select the Enable check box so that the Preanalysis and Prefilter settings you configure will be implemented. The default is On. You will need Preanalysis to be On for frame accurate insertion of user data into the video stream and 3/2 pull-down operation. Note: You will be prompted with a warning message when an invalid or out-of range setting is entered in a field at any time.

Preprocessor Enable

Preanalysis Enable

PreSight Filter

Sets how the video will be filtered. In the list, click None, Fixed or Adaptive. The default is None. None means no prefiltering will be applied to the video signal. Fixed means the Fixed low pass filter will be used. In the fixed mode, the encoder

4-100

4042066 Rev A

still determines where to use the filter, but the user sets the cut-off level. If you click Fixed, you then need to select one of 15 predefined fixed spatial prefilters in the Fixed list. The higher the number, the more filtering is applied. Adaptive means that the encoder dynamically changes the type and level of filtering according to the complexity of the input.
Spatial Adaptive Coefficient

If Adaptive is selected for PreSight Filter, you can set the degree of filtering. Select between Minimum, Moderate, Medium and Maximum filtering. Minimum gives the lowest and Maximum gives the highest degree of filtering. It is recommended that you choose Medium. In statmux systems with low bit rates, select the Maximum filtering setting.

Multiplex Group tab


The Multiplex Group tab provides control of multiplex group operation. To configure the Multiplex Group parameters: 1. From the HD Video (Device Config) view, click the Multiplex Group tab. You will see this window:

2. Select the settings for the following fields:


Multiplex Group Membership

Read-only. Displays the multiplex group that the video stream belongs to. You can set the group membership on the Multiplex Group Configuration view (Uplink > Multiplex Group Configuration).

Multiplex Group Video


Chroma Format

Read-only. Displays the chroma format used to encode the video stream. The format is set on the Encoding tab, but is displayed here so you can evaluate the constraints of other configuration settings.

4042066 Rev A

4-101

Video Input

Read-only. Displays the input standard for the video input as set on the Input tab. See the Input tab for more information. Defines the PES encoding rate (in Mbps) to be allocated to the video stream. Set the bit rate in this view. To set the bit rate, type in a value to a maximum of two decimal places within the ranges shown in the following table: The default bit rate is 15.0.
Video Type
1080i @ 29.97 Hz 1080i @ 29.97 Hz 1080i @ 25 Hz 1080i @ 25 Hz 720p @ 59.94 Hz 720p @ 59.94 Hz 720p @ 50 Hz 720p @ 50 Hz 576p @ 50 Hz 480p @ 59.94Hz 480p @ 50 Hz

Bitrate (Mbps)

Chroma Format
4:2:0 4:2:2 4:2:0 4:2:2 4:2:0 4:2:2 4:2:0 4:2:2 4:2:0 4:2:0 4:2:0

Encode Mode
VBR VBR VBR VBR VBR VBR VBR VBR VBR VBR VBR

Minimum Bit Rate


5.63 Mbps Not supported 5.63 Mbps Not supported 5.63 Mbps Not supported 5.63 Mbps Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported

Maximum Bit Rate


25.00 Mbps Not supported 25.00 Mbps Not supported 25.00 Mbps Not Supported 25.00 Mbps Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported

The bit rate must be set to a value between the Minimum and Maximum Rates. Note: You will be prompted with a warning message when an invalid or out-of range setting is entered in a field.
Valid Bitrate Range

Read-only. Displays the operating bit rate range based on the bit rate setting. See the table above for the valid operating range. Sets the encode mode used to control statistical multiplexing participation of the video stream within a multiplex group.This field can only be edited if the PNC server indicates that video can be statistically multiplexed; otherwise this field must be set to Statmux Off - CBR An encoder can transition between Stamux Off - CBR and Statmux On - VBR, but can only belong to one multiplex group. Any encoder which is not connected to a Regulus controller is not in a multiplex group and therefore cannot be statistically multiplexed with other encoders. Encoders not connected to a Regulus Controller must be configured with Statmux Off - CBR.

Encode Mode

4-102

4042066 Rev A

If you attempt to change the Encode Mode from Statmux On - CBR to Statmux On - VBR when using 4:2:2 Chroma Format, the following dialog box will appear:

If you select Yes, the Chroma Format will automatically change from 4:2:0 because only 4:2:0 Chroma format is supported in VBR mode. If you select No, the change will be discarded and the Chroma Format will remain 4:2:2.

Regulus Statmux Controls (VBR - Statmux On)


Minimum Rate (Mbps)

Sets the minimum encoding bit rate when statmux is enabled. This value must be larger than 5.63 Mbps. As this depends on the selected Video Input and Encode Mode, see the table above for more information on the allowable bit rate ranges for each setting. Sets the maximum encoding bit rate when statmux is enabled. This control is provided so you can limit the burstiness of generated video stream to prevent overflowing downstream consumption equipment.This value can be up 80 Mbps. As this depends on the selected Video Input and Encode Mode, see the table above for more information on the allowable bit rate ranges for each setting. Sets the relative priority used by the statmux process to assign bandwidth to the video stream. When statmux performs bandwidth redistribution, the video quality of higher priority video is maintained, while the video quality of lower priority streams may be reduced. To assign a priority value to the video stream, in the Priority list click one value in a range from 0 - 15, where 0 is the lowest priority and 15 is the highest. The default priority value is 8.

Maximum Rate (Mbps)

Priority

Quality

Sets the bandwidth efficiency of the statmuxed video stream. The highest quality uses all available bandwidth allocated to the video stream. Lower values use progressively less proportions of the allocated bandwidth. To assign a bandwidth quality level to the statmuxed video stream, in the Quality list click one value in a range from 0 - 15, where 0 is the lowest quality and 15 is the highest. The default quality value is 15 - highest.

4042066 Rev A

4-103

Advanced tab
Use the Advanced tab to control advanced Video Encoding parameters. To configure the Advanced parameters: 1. From the HD Video (Device Config) view, click the Advanced tab. You will see this window:

2. Select the settings for the following fields:

Video Encoding
GOP Encoding

GOP Select M/N can only be changed by an administrator, after which the PNC must be restarted for the changed values to take affect. Displays the input standard for the video input as set on the Input tab. See the Input tab for more information. Select the reference picture period (i.e., distance between I or P frames) in the range from 1 to 3. 1=no B frames between reference frames 2=1 B frame between reference frames 3=2 B frames between reference frames This is preset to a default value of 3.

Video Input

GOP Select M

GOP Select N

Select the total length of the GOP sequence in frames in the range from 1 to 60. This is preset to a default value of 15.

4-104

4042066 Rev A

Sequence

Displays the GOP frame sequence as selected by GOP Select. The I, B and P frames are displayed with the correct quantity and sequencing within a GOP sequence. Sequence = <I Anchor><P Anchor Sequence><Closed GOP> Where: <I Anchor>:= I<B Sequence> <B Sequence> := BBB(M - 1) B frames <P Anchor Sequence>:= <P Anchor><P Anchor> int(N/M)-1 <P Anchor>s <P Anchor>:= P<B Sequence> <Closed GOP>:= Pif (N%M) == 1 := <NULL>if (N%M) != 1 Example: GOP N = 16 GOP M = 3 <B Sequence> = BB(M=3)-1=2 <I Anchor> = IBB <P Anchor> = PBB <P Anchor Sequence> = PBBPBBPBBPBB{int[(N=16)/(M=3)]=5}-1=4 <Closed_GOP> = P(N=16)%(M=3)=1 Sequence= IBBPBBPBBPBBPBBP

Multiplex Group Membership

Read-only. Displays the multiplex group that the video stream belongs to. You can set the group membership on the Multiplex Group Configuration view (Uplink > Multiplex Group Configuration).

Non-Multiplex Group Encode Delay


Sets the encode delay method for the video encoding delay when the video does not belong to a multiplex group. When a video is a member of a multiplex group, the group determines the delay characteristics of all videos within that group.
Delay Setup Method

The delay setup method selects the method to control video encoding delay. Choose either Auto or Delay Mode. When you choose Delay Mode, select one of the Delay mode options. Auto - the video encoding algorithm determines the optimal delay Delay Mode - uses the selected Delay Mode setting

Delay Mode

Sets the group encode delay for the stream if it is not part of the multiplex group. Choose one of the three options: Normal, Extended or Short Delay. The default Delay Mode is Normal.

4042066 Rev A

4-105

Normal means equivalent to the statmux delay mode = Normal 1.0 sec Extended means equivalent to the statmux delay mode = Extended: 2.0 sec Low means equivalent to the statmux delay mode = Low: 0.7 sec

Captions tab
Use the Captions tab to control the insertion of captions into the video user data. To configure the Captions parameters: 1. From the Video Encoder view, click the Captions tab. You will see this window:

2. Select the settings for the following fields:


Captions Enable

Click this check box to enable Field 1 and Field 2 captions test patterns into user data. Displays the closed captions input source. This release only supports HD SDI as selected on the Input tab. Selects the captions test pattern for the corresponding line 21 field configured in your system. In each list, click one of three options: None, Test Pattern A, or Test Pattern B. The default is None.

Input Source

Test Patterns, Field 1 & Field 2

4-106

4042066 Rev A

Configuring DPI Cue Triggering


Digital Program Insertion (DPI) allows for the insertion of multiple advertisements into program content in the digital domain on a single PID. The DPI messages supported in the PNC are in accordance with the ANSI/SCTE-35 2001specification. If DPI Sources have been set up both physically on an encoder controlled by the PNC, and logically within the PNC (see DPI Source on page 7-43), you can use the Device Config window shown below to configure the attributes of the DPI triggers. To access the following window: 1. Choose Uplink > Uplink Configuration. The Uplink Configuration window displays. 2. Double-click the encoder which has the DPI Source set up on it. 3. Under the Video Encoder, click a DPI trigger to configure. There can be up to 8 DPI triggers/streams listed, labelled DPI 1 through DPI 8. The trigger assigned to the Cue Trigger Source is equal to the DPI source ID entered in the Cue Trigger Source window. For more information, see DPI Source on page 7-43.

The triggers system name is shown in bold at the top of the DPI Trigger Panel. The Cue Trigger Source is shown below that.

4042066 Rev A

4-107

Packet Generation
This panel contains attributes used to control packet generation.
Enable PID

When checked, this option enables packet generation. This is the transport packet PID of the DPI stream. Possible values are in the range from 0 to 8190, inclusive. This value must be unique within the signal. This is the transport packet bandwidth in kbps allocated to the DPI stream. This value must be within bandwidth limits for the signal. The default value is 15 kbps. Possible range is from 1.5 to 35 kbps. When checked, this option enables null DPI packet generation.

Bandwidth Allocation

BW (Bandwidth) Reservation

Alternate Program Selection


This panel potentially selects an alternate program for insertion. Whether or not this feature is implemented depends on your systems hardware configuration.
Event Source

This is the Event Source ID for the Alternate Program in the range 0 to 15. The default is 0. This is the Event ID for the Alternate Program. The default value is 0. This must be a unique value from other Event IDs. This is the Program ID for the Alternate Program. The default value is 0. This sets the avail parameter. This is the counter for breaks in the program. The counter starts at 1 and increments for each new break period until a new program starts. Entering 0 here means this parameter is not used. Sets the avail_count parameter. This value represents the expected maximum number of breaks in a program. Entering 0 here means this parameter is not used. Sets the break duration in ms for the next avail period in the range from 0 to 2147483747. A zero (0) value means the break duration is not sent to the cue trigger (i.e., alternate program) source. When enabled (checked), the Provider ID Value is sent in the DPI message. The default is unchecked. Note: You will need to enter a Provider Avail ID value in the field below when the Enable box is checked.

Event ID

Unique Program ID Avail Num (Avail)

Avail Expected (Avail Count) Duration

Provider Avail ID Enable

Provider Avail ID Value

This is the value that is sent as part of the DPI message if the Provider Avail ID Enable check box is checked. Each provider has their own unique ID. The default value is 0.

4-108

4042066 Rev A

Configuring HD Audio Services


The HD encoder can provide real-time encoding of up to four audio channels from analog AES/EBU digital or HD SDI inputs, using the MPEG-1 Layer 2 encoding algorithm. All defined MPEG compression data rates and samples rates are supported. Each decoder contains special integrated circuits designed to decode the multichannel audio bitstreams found in digital signals that are compliant to MPEG-1 and satellite broadcasting DVB standards. The basic function of these integrated circuits is to accept any legal layer 1 or layer 2 audio elementary stream coded according to the standard and produce two analog signals. The MPEG audio stream is the integrated circuit that does the decoding. Each integrated circuit is capable of producing one audio stereo pair output. A decoder option allows a second pair of MPEG audio streams to produce another two pairs of outputs. Configuring audio services consists of two main procedures: Configuring the parameters of the source audio output to the PNC system for the paired channels (Input Channels 1(L)/2(R) or Channels 3(L)/4(R). The settings you select for the paired channels apply to both channels. Configuring each individual audio channel within the PNC system. Each audio channel is configurable to operate in any one of the following modes: MPEG Layer 2, Dolby Digital (AC3) internal, Dolby Digital (AC3) passthrough, AAC pass-through or Dolby E pass-through.

Configuring Paired Channels


When you configure paired channels (either Input Channels 1/2, or Input Channels 3(L)/4(R), the settings you select set the parameters for the source audio output to the PNC system. Once you have configured the paired channels, you can configure the individual audio channels within the PNC system.

4042066 Rev A

4-109

To configure the paired channels: 1. Display the HD encoders device window as described in Configuring an HD (High Definition) Encoder on page 4-94. 2. Click on the audio service you want to configure. The window displays a summary of the services audio streams, as shown below.

3. From either the Input 1(L)/2(R) or the Input 3(L)/4(R) tab (whichever is appropriate), select the Encoding Format. The selection you make applies to both channels in the pair.
Encode Format

Select the type of audio format each encoder outputs. The default is MPEG Layer 2.The field selection options are described in the following table.
Input Type
MPEG Layer 2 Dolby Digital Internal Dolby Digital Pass-through Default value. Dolby Digital audio encoding occurs. Dolby Digital (AC-3) pass-through mode enabled. Preencoded bitstreams move through the audio card unmodified to the output. Dolby E pass-through mode enabled. Pre-encoded bitstreams move through the audio card unmodified to the output. AAC pass-through mode enabled. Pre-encoded bitstreams move through the audio card unmodified to the output.

Description

Dolby E Pass-through AAC Pass-through

When the Encode Format is set to one of the pass-through modes, only HD-SDI or AES/EBU digital can be selected for the audio source (i.e., Input Select) type.

4-110

4042066 Rev A

Streams

The window displays a summary of the services audio streams including the name of the service, whether the service is enabled or disabled, the data transmission rate, the type of service (i.e., encoding mode) and the PID associated with the service. Use this field to set the sampling frequency at which the PCM audio signals are input into the encoder. The Dolby Digital audio stream supports three standard sampling frequencies: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, and 32 kHz. Use this field to define the adjustment required in the audio encoding delay to make audio synchronize with video in a program which has both. The PNC system automatically calculates the value of this field whenever the bit rate on the video card configuration window changes. Select the type of audio source each encoder outputs to the PNC system. The default is Analog.The field selection options are described in the following table.
Audio Source Type
Analog HD SDI AES3/EBU digital

Sampling Rate

Delay

Input Select

Description
Select this option if the audio source to the encoder is via the four XLR connectors. Select this option if the audio source to the encoder is via the DI serial input. Select this option if the audio source to the encoder is via the two XLR AES3 connectors.

Note: When HD SDI is selected, a Sampling Rate of 48 kHz is only supported.

HD SDI Input Controls


When you assign the SDI audio group, you select a group pair between 1 and 4 to represent the group of four digital audio channels. When you have assigned the SDI group, you can configure the individual audio channels within the PNC system.
Audio Group

A numeric list (1, 2, 3, 4). Select the number that matches the group of four audio streams you are sending to the encoder. The default is Group1, Pair 1. The field selection options are described in the following table.
Audio Group
Group1, Pair 1 Group1, Pair 2 Group2, Pair 1 Group2 , Pair 2 Group3, Pair 1

4042066 Rev A

4-111

Audio Group
Group3, Pair 2 Group4, Pair 1 Group4, Pair 2

AES/EBU Digital Input Controls


Impedance

This is the impedance of the AES/EBU digital input. Select between 75 Ohm and 100 Ohm. The default setting is 75 Ohm.

Internal Encode Audio Input Analog Input Controls


Impedance

This is the impedance of the Analog audio input(s). Select between High and 600 Ohm. The default setting is High. This is the input level at which clipping will start to occur specified as an absolute voltage level. Decreasing the setting increases the gain applied to the input signal. Enter a value in the range between -6.0 and 24.0 dBu. The default setting is 15.0 4. Save the changes by choosing the Save icon, or choose Save from the Actions menu to save the changes to the database. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message Discard changes to close? Note: You must save the changes in this view to Enable the individual audio channels.

Clipping Level

Configuring Individual MPEG Audio Channels


To configure an individual MPEG-1 audio channel: 1. Be sure you have chosen the audio service containing the channel you want to configure, as the previous section describes. 2. Click on the channel you want to configure. A window similar to the following is displayed.

4-112

4042066 Rev A

3. Select or enter information in the following fields. The values you set only apply to this channel.
Enabled PID

When checked, this Audio Channel is available to the system to be transmitted. Packet Identification numbers are usually set by Cisco personnel during system installation. Although Cisco does not recommend that you change this number, you can define your own numbering system and enter a unique PID number for this service. The number you enter must be one that the system is not using. See Packet IDs (PIDs) on page 4-142.

Encoding Mode

Select the audio channel configuration output from the encoder:


1/0(C) - Single Mono (default) 1+1 (L/Ch1,R/CH2) - Dual Mono 2/0 (L,R) - Joint Stereo 2/0 (L,R) - Stereo

See Audio Encoding and Decoding Modes on page 4-29.


Data Rate

Select the audio transmission rate. Settings for the compressed bit rate are available from 64 to 384 Kbps, depending on the Encoding Mode setting. Increasing the number in this field increases the audio bandwidth at the encoder, improving the quality of the audio transmitted by the encoder. The default is 128K.

4042066 Rev A

4-113

Test Pattern
Enable Tones

Select this check box to enable the pre-selected test tone. If this check box is cleared, live audio will be enabled. Select one of the options that determine the frequency and level of the test tone for this channel.

Input 1(L) Input 2(R)

Audio Encoding and Decoding Modes


The following sections discuss audio processing on both the Encoding and Decoding side. Typically, what happens in the process is:
audio the

stream(s) enter the encoder via the audio inputs

encoder processes (encodes) the audio stream(s) using a designated audio mode (see audio modes below) processed (encoded) audio is mapped to a PID, which is broadcast PID is received by the decoder

the the the

decoder processes (decodes) the PID and produces appropriate audio for the decoders left and right audio outputs, depending on which mode was used to encode the audio (see audio modes below)

Audio Modes
There are four types of audio modes: Single Mono, Dual Mono, Stereo and Joint Stereo. The following table explains the basic differences between the modes:
Audio Mode Single Mono Description
The same monaural audio is played out of both the left and right speakers connected to the decoder. Independent monaural audio is played out of the left and right speakers connected to the decoder. Gives the greatest degree of audio separation, but requires more complex coding, and, consequently, higher operating bit rates. The left and right speakers connected to the decoder work together to produce a single audio program. Phase and separation are maintained between the left and right signals. The left and right speakers connected to the decoder work together to produce a single audio program. Stereophonic irrelevancy and redundancy are used to the best advantage. Joint Stereo, while similar to Stereo, saves transmission bandwidth, allowing lower bit rates to be used.

Dual Mono

Stereo

Joint Stereo

Note: Stereo and Joint Stereo are recommended for music programs.

4-114

4042066 Rev A

Single Mono Encoding


While the interface is the same for MPEG and AC-3 audio, the rules for the two services are slightly different, as indicated below.

MPEG Audio
In Single Mono Mode, the encoder has four audio inputs, each input mapped to an audio stream and each audio stream mapped to a unique PID:

Encoder MPEG Audio Processing


Audio Engine Audio 1 Audio 2 Stream 1 Stream 2 Stream 3 Stream 4 Single Mono Mode Single Mono Mode System PIDs 1120 1121 1122 1123

Audio 3 Audio 4

If you assign audio stream 1 to run in Single Mono mode, then audio stream 2 (the other half of that audio pair) automatically runs in Single Mono mode, too. Of course, the same applies to the 3/4 audio pair, as well.

Single Mono Data Rate


The data rate you set for an audio pair (1/2 or 3/4) is the total for the two inputs. For instance, if you set the data rate at 256 Kbps, then the total data rate for audio inputs 1 and 2 is 256 Kbps, carried on two combined PIDs.

AC-3 Audio
In Single Mono Mode, the encoder has four audio inputs, but only the first (or left) of each pair (1/2 and 3/4) is used. Each of these is mapped to a single PID, as shown in the diagram below.

4042066 Rev A

4-115

Encoder AC-3 Audio Processing


Audio Engine Audio 1 Audio 2 (ignored) Stream 1 Single Mono System PIDs 1120

Audio 3 Audio 4 (ignored)

Stream 2 Single Mono

1122

As with MPEG, the audio pairs are independent, meaning that while audio pair 1/2 may be in Single Mono mode, audio pair 3/4 can be in a completely different mode. The data rate you set for an audio pair (1/2 or 3/4) is the total for the two inputs. For instance, if you set the data rate at 256 Kbps, then the total data rate for audio inputs 1 and 2 is 256 Kbps, carried on two combined PIDs. Note: While all four inputs must operate at the same sampling rate, each audio input may be set to an independent audio bit rate. As well, though audio is dealt with in pairs (1/2 or 3/4), the pairs themselves may be set to different modes. (i.e., if audio pair 1/2 is set to Single Mono Mode, audio pair 3/4 may be set to Dual Mono/Stereo/Joint Stereo, as desired.)

Single Mono Decoding (MPEG & AC-3)


If only one audio stream is being fed into one of the encoders audio pair inputs, Single Mono mode is advantageous because the decoder uses the same stream for both the left and right outputs, as shown in the following diagram:

Decoder MPEG Audio Processing


System PIDs Audio Engine Stream 1 Single Mono Mode Decoder Outputs Audio 1 Left Audio 1 Right Audio 2 Left Audio 2 Right

PID 1120

PID 1121

Stream 2

The actual mapping of PIDs to programs, and which PIDs are routed to which decoder outputs is variable.

4-116

4042066 Rev A

Dual Mono/Stereo/Joint Stereo Encoding


For both MPEG and AC-3 audio, the encoder has four audio inputs which are combined to produce two encoded PIDs, one for the 1/2 audio pair and one for the 3/4 audio pair.

Encoder Audio Processing


Audio Engine Audio 1 Audio 2 Stream 1 Stream 2 Stream 3 Stream 4 Dual Mono, Stereo, or Joint Stereo System PIDs 1120

Audio 3 Audio 4

Dual Mono, Stereo, or Joint Stereo

1122

You must assign the PID number for audio stream 1/2 pair using just the 1 of the pair, and for audio stream 3/4 pair using just the 3 of the pair when you are creating a virtual channel (i.e., When you drag just the 1 of the 1/2 audio pair, both are moved into the virtual channel). Note: Any PID assigned to channel 2 or 4 will be ignored.

Dual Mono and Stereo Data Rate


The data rate you set for an audio pair (1/2 or 3/4) is shared equally for the two audio inputs. For instance, if you set the data rate at 256 Kbps, then audio inputs 1 and 2 each have an effective data rate of 128 Kbps, carried on the same PID.

Joint Stereo Data Rate


The data rate you set for an audio pair (1/2 or 3/4) is coded by the first member of the pair (1 for 1/2 and 3 for 3/4) and the difference between the two members is then used to reconstruct the second member, showing a bit rate efficiency over stereo. For example, 192 Kbps joint stereo might be equivalent to 256 Kbps in stereo.

Dual Mono/Stereo/Joint Stereo Decoding


A decoders audio engine can only process one PID, but the channel within that PID, when in these modes, contains all the information required to produce the appropriate two streams required for the Left and Right decoder outputs.

4042066 Rev A

4-117

Decoder Audio Processing


System PIDs 1120 Stream 1 Stream 2 1122 Stream 3 Stream 4 Dual Mono, Stereo, or Joint Stereo Audio1 Left Audio1 Right Audio2 Left Audio2 Right

Dual Mono, Stereo, or Joint Stereo

Configuring Dolby Digital Audio Services


Dolby Digital audio encoding provides real-time encoding for up to four monaural audio signal inputs. A Dolby Digital elemental stream can carry either one or two monaural signal inputs depending on the encoding mode (monaural or stereo). In general, the encoding mode can be one of the following:
1/0 2/0

Center Left, Right (Stereo) (Left - Channel 1, Right - Channel 2) Dual Mono.

1+1

Note: In 1+1 mode, the audio inputs for the individual stream are considered to be two independent monaural signals Main (left) and Aux (right). The following diagram displays two elemental streams carrying various combinations of signal inputs. When configured for 2/0 or 1+1 encoding, the signals labelled as Audio 1 and 3 are used as Main (left) inputs and the signals labelled as Audio 2 and 4 are used as Aux (right) inputs. When configured for 1/0 encoding, the Main (left) audio input is used and the Aux (right) audio input is not used.

4-118

4042066 Rev A

Configuring a digital audio encoder card consists of three related procedures: Configuring the control parameters of the source audio output stream to the PNC system. Configuring the input/output characteristics of the stream. Configuring the bit stream/preprocessing characteristics of the stream.

Configuring the Dolby Digital Audio Stream


When the Encoding Format is configured as either Dolby Digital Internal or Dolby Digital Pass-through, the encoder can control and broadcast two elemental streams with each stream carrying a certain type of audio data.

4042066 Rev A

4-119

To configure a digital audio stream: 1. Display the encoders device window as described in Configuring an HD (High Definition) Encoder on page 4-94. 2. Click on the audio service you want to configure. The window displays a summary of the services audio streams, as shown below.

3. From either the Input 1(L)/2(R) or the Input 3(L)/4(R) tab (whichever is appropriate), select the Encoding Format, Dolby Digital Internal or Dolby Digital Pass-through. The selection you make applies to both channels in the pair.
Encode Format

Select the type of audio format each encoder outputs. The default is MPEG Layer 2.The field selection options are described in the following table.
Input Type
MPEG Layer 2 Dolby Digital Internal Dolby Digital Pass-through Default value. Dolby Digital audio encoding occurs. Dolby Digital (AC-3) pass-through mode enabled. Preencoded bitstreams move through the audio card unmodified to the output. Dolby E pass-through mode enabled. Pre-encoded bitstreams move through the audio card unmodified to the output. AAC pass-through mode enabled. Pre-encoded bitstreams move through the audio card unmodified to the output.

Description

Dolby E Pass-through AAC Pass-through

4. Select or enter information in the following fields. The values you set only apply to this streams described in the previous section. 5. Save the changes by choosing the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to

4-120

4042066 Rev A

save the changes to the database. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message Discard changes to close? Note: You must save the changes in this view to Enable the individual audio channels. 6. Click on the particular stream you want to configure in the left side of the window. The system displays the fields associated with the elemental stream similar to the example shown below.

7. Select or enter information in the following fields. Note: The values you set only apply to this stream.
Enabled PID

Check this box to make this stream available to the system for transmission. Packet Identification numbers are usually set by Cisco personnel during system installation. Although Cisco does not recommend that you change this number, you can define your own numbering system and enter a unique PID number for this service. The number you enter must be one that the system is not using. Read-only. Displays the audio output format of the encoder as selected in the audio channel window, Dolby Digital Internal or Dolby Digital Pass-through. Use this field to select the digital audio transmission rate. Settings for the compressed bit rate are available from 56 to 640 kbps, depending on the Encoding Mode setting. Increasing the number in this field increases the audio bandwidth at the encoder, improving the quality of the audio transmitted by the encoder. The default is 128K. To ensure high audio quality, the following table contains recommended Data Rate

Encoding Format

Data Rate

4042066 Rev A

4-121

ranges for the selected audio encoding mode.


Mode
1/0 1+1 2/0

Data Rate Range


56 640 kbps 112 640 kbps 96 640 kbps

Internal Encode Controls


Encoding Mode

Use this field to select the number of channels and the channel format within the encoded bit stream. The three available audio encoding modes are listed below. The mode definition uses two numbers (m/n), with m indicating the number of front channels, and n indicating the number of rear (surround) channels.
Mode
1+1 (L/Ch1, R/Ch2) - Dual Mono 1/0 (C) - Single Mono 2/0 (L,R) - Stereo

Channel Format
(Left Channel 1, Right Channel 2) Dual Mono Center Stereo

The default setting is 2/0 (Stereo). If the mode is set to 1+1, then two completely independent program channels (dual-mono), referenced as Channel 1 and Channel 2, are encoded into the bit stream. Dual-mono mode is for use only in broadcast applications. Dual Mono mode is recommended if simultaneous output of unrelated, independent audio signals is required. Dual Mono mode gives the greatest degree of audio separation, but requires more complex coding, and, consequently, higher operating bit rates. Although each channel is assigned its own PID, you must use the PID number of channel 1 for the channel 1/2 pair when you are creating a virtual channel. If you use the PID of the even numbered streams in a virtual channel, no output occurs.

4-122

4042066 Rev A

Test Pattern
Enable Tones

Use this check box to override the input source and input format of the audio signal and replace the signal with the test tones for left and right audio inputs selected in the fields below. Test tones replace the currently selected input signal with an internally-generated test signal. Note: If the Enable check box is set On, an asterisk appears beside the Input/ Output branch of the digital audio tree in the left portion of the window.

Input 1(L)

Use this field to select the test tone input characteristics for the left audio channel when Stereo Encoding is selected. Use this field to select the test tone generated when Mono Encoding is selected. The default value is Digital Silence.

Input 2(R)

Use this field to select the test tone input characteristics for the right audio channel when Stereo Encoding is selected. This field is ignored when Mono Encoding is selected. The default value is Digital Silence.

Configuring Internal AC3 Parameters


The Bitstream/Preprocessing parameters on the Dolby Digital audio view enable the operator to define and control the transmission characteristics of the outgoing bit stream. To configure the digital audio streams bitstream/preprocessing: 1. Display the encoders device window as described in Configuring an HD (High Definition) Encoder on page 4-94. 2. Click on the Dolby Digital audio card you want to configure. 3. Click on the Internal AC3 Parameters tab for the stream you want to configure. The system displays the bitstream/preprocessing fields associated with

4042066 Rev A

4-123

the elemental stream similar to the example shown below.

4. Select or enter information in the following fields. The values you set only apply to this stream.
Bitstream Mode

Use this field to select the type of information that the bit stream conveys. This is an information-only field for the benefit of operators and other technicians and does not affect the performance or behavior of the actual signal. The current system choices are: main audio service: complete main (CM) main audio service: music and effects (ME) associated service: visually impaired (VI) associated service: hearing impaired (HI) associated service: dialog (D) associated service: commentary (C) associated service: emergency (E) associated service: voice over (VO)/karaoke. For more information, see Packet IDs (PIDs) on page 4-142.

Encoding Mode

Read-only. Displays the number of channels and the channel format within the encoded bit stream as set on the Stream tab. See Configuring the Dolby Digital Audio Stream in the previous section for more information. The default setting is 2/0 (Stereo).

4-124

4042066 Rev A

Dialog Normalization

The dialog normalization controllers indicate how far the average dialog level of the encoded program is below digital 100%. Values range between 1 and 31, with 1 representing -1.0 dB and 31 representing 31.0 dB with respect to digital 100%.

Center Downmix Level

Use this field to select the nominal downmix level of the center channel with respect to the left and right channels. The default value is -3.0 dB.

Surround Downmix Level

Use this field to select the nominal downmix level of the surround channel with respect to the left and right channels. The default value is 0.0 dB.

Dolby Surround Mode

This information-only field only appears in the bit stream when the system is operating in the 2/0 Encoding Mode and indicates the type and calibration of the mixing room used for the final audio mixing session. The value in this field is not typically used by the Dolby Digital encoding algorithm, but may be used by other types of audio reproduction equipment. The default value is Not Indicated.
Surround Mode
2/0 2/0 2/0 Not Indicated NOT Dolby Surround Encoded Dolby Surround Encoded

Description

Preprocessing
Dynamic Range Compression

Use this field to select one of the dynamic range compression presets built into the Dolby Digital encoding/decoding algorithm. Each setting reduces the audio bitstreams output to a characteristic dynamic range as shown in the following table. The default value is None.
Compression Settings
None Film Standard Film Light Music Standard Music Light Speech

RF Overmodulation Protection

Use this check box to enable or disable RF overmodulation protection. The default is Off.

4042066 Rev A

4-125

5. Save the changes by choosing the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the database. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message Discard changes to close?

Configuring Audio Channels for Dolby Digital Pass-through


When the Encoding Format is configured as Dolby Digital Pass-through, the encoder can control and broadcast four elemental streams from an external Dolby Digital audio source. To configure an external digital audio stream: The setup procedure below assumes the Dolby encoder has been connected to the uplink system and the digital audio source has been set up. 1. Display the encoders device window as described in Configuring an HD (High Definition) Encoder on page 4-94. 2. Click on the Audio service you want to configure. The window displays a summary of the cards audio streams.

3. From either the Input 1(L)/2(R) or the Input 3(L)/4(R) tab (whichever is appropriate), select the Encoding Format - Dolby Digital Pass-through as shown in the example above. The selection you make applies to both channels in the pair.

4-126

4042066 Rev A

4. Select or enter information in the following fields. Sampling Rate: match this field with the Dolby Digital encoder or leave it set at 48 kHz. Input Select: AES/EBU or HD-SDI. AES/EBU Digital Input Controls - Impedance: 75 Ohm (only applicable if using the AES/EBU input). Do not change the settings for all the remaining fields. Note: You must save the changes in this view to Enable the individual audio channels. 5. Set the fields in the Dolby Digital Stream window for the selected channel similar to those shown below ensuring that the fields are set according to the Dolby encoder audio input source parameters (e.g., data rate).

6. Click on the AC3 Parameters tab for the stream you want to configure. The system displays the bitstream/preprocessing fields associated with the elemen-

4042066 Rev A

4-127

tal stream similar to the example shown below

7. Set the fields in this window similar to those described previously for the Dolby Digital internal operation. See Configuring Internal AC3 Parameters on page 4-123 for more information. 8. Save the changes by choosing the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the database. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message Discard changes to close?

4-128

4042066 Rev A

Configuring Audio Channels for Dolby E Pass-through


When the Encoding Format is configured as Dolby E Pass-through, the encoder can control and broadcast four elemental streams from an external Dolby E audio source. To configure an external digital audio stream: The setup procedure below assumes the Dolby encoder has been connected to the uplink system and the digital audio source has been set up. 1. Display the encoders device window as described in Configuring an HD (High Definition) Encoder on page 4-94. 2. Click on the Audio service you want to configure. The window displays a summary of the cards audio streams.

3. From either the Input 1(L)/2(R) or the Input 3(L)/4(R) tab (whichever is appropriate), select the Encoding Format - Dolby E Pass-through as shown in the example above. The selection you make applies to both channels in the pair. 4. Select or enter information in the following fields. Sampling Rate: match this field with the Dolby E encoder or leave it set at 48 kHz. Input Select: AES/EBU or HD SDI. HD SDI Input Controls - Audio Group: set according to D9050 HD Encoder audio group pair (only applicable if using the HD SDI input). AES/EBU Digital Input Controls - Impedance: 75 Ohm (only applicable if using the AES/EBU input).

4042066 Rev A

4-129

Do not change the settings for all the remaining fields. 5. Save the changes by choosing the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the database. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message Discard changes to close? Note: You must save the changes in this window to Enable the individual audio channels. 6. Click on the specific stream you want to configure on the left side of the window. The system displays the fields associated with the elemental stream similar to the example shown below.

7. Select or enter information in the following fields. Note: The values you set only apply to this stream.
Enable PID

Check this box to make this stream available to the system for transmission. Packet Identification numbers are usually set by Cisco personnel during system installation. Although Cisco does not recommend that you change this number, you can define your own numbering system and enter a unique PID number for this service. The number you enter must be one that the system is not using. The digital audio transmission rate is fixed at 2304 kbps. Use this field to set the external delay. Set this to the same value of higher than that used by the HD Encoder. 8. Save the changes by choosing the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the database. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message Discard changes to close?

Data Rate External Delay

4-130

4042066 Rev A

Configuring Audio Channels for AAC Pass-through


When the Encoding Format is configured as AAC Pass-through, the encoder can control and broadcast four elemental streams from an external AAC audio source. To configure an external analog audio stream: The setup procedure below assumes the audio encoder has been connected to the uplink system and the digital audio source has been set up. 1. Display the encoders device window as described in Configuring an HD (High Definition) Encoder on page 4-94. 2. Click on the Audio service you want to configure. The window displays a summary of the cards audio streams.
Select audio mode

Enable audio channel

3. From either the Input 1(L)/2(R) or the Input 3(L)/4(R) tab (whichever is appropriate), select the Encoding Format - AAC Pass-through as shown in the example above. The selection you make applies to both channels in the pair. 4. Select or enter information in the following fields. Delay: set as necessary for lip-sync. Input Select: Analog. AES/EBU or HD SDI. HD SDI Input Controls - Audio Group: set according to D9050 HD Encoder audio group pair (only applicable if using the HD SDI input). AES/EBU Digital Input Controls - Impedance: 75 Ohm (only applicable if using the AES/EBU input). Do not change the settings for all the remaining fields. Note: The values you set only apply to this stream.

4042066 Rev A

4-131

5. Save the changes by choosing the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the database. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message Discard changes to close? Note: You must save the changes in this window to Enable the individual audio channels. 6. Click on the particular stream you want to configure in the left side of the window. The system displays the fields associated with the elemental stream similar to the example shown below.

7. Select or enter information in the following fields. Note: The values you set only apply to this stream.
Enable PID

Check this box to make this stream available to the system for transmission. Packet Identification numbers are usually set by Cisco personnel during system installation. Although Cisco does not recommend that you change this number, you can define your own numbering system and enter a unique PID number for this service. The number you enter must be one that the system is not using. Use this field to select the digital audio transmission rate. Settings for the compressed bit rate are available from 56 to 640 kbps, depending on the Encoding Mode setting. Increasing the number in this field increases the audio bandwidth at the encoder, improving the quality of the audio transmitted by the encoder. The default is 128K.

Data Rate

External Delay

Use this field to set the external delay. Set this to the same value of higher than that used by the HD Encoder. Save the changes by choosing the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the database. To cancel the changes you have made, close the window and choose Yes when the system prompts you with the message Discard changes to close?

4-132

4042066 Rev A

Configuring AAC Audio Services


AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) encoder cards have two AAC encoding engines which are capable of independently performing internal encoding. Two streams of internally encoded AAC audio can be generated; whereas, only one stream of External Pass-Through AAC audio can be generated, since external pass-through encoding requires both of the AAC encoding engines to perform packetization (i.e., both engines are needed to produce one stream). Configuring AAC audio encoder cards consists of two main procedures: Selecting whether to use Internal or External Pass-Through encoding. Configuring each individual audio channel within the PNC system.

Selecting AAC Encoding Mode


The PNC supports two internally encoded AAC audio streams (channels) or one External Pass-Through stream. To configure the AAC card for internal encoding, select Internal in the Encoding Select list. To configure the AAC card for External Pass-Through encoding, select External Pass-Through. Depending on your choice, different configuration fields are available to you. Note: Only ONE channel is available when using External Pass-Through encoding mode. Due to this, if an AAC card is configured for Internal encoding and is displaying 2 audio channels, the second channel will disappear from your display if you change the encoding mode to External Pass-Through.

4042066 Rev A

4-133

Configuring Individual Channels


To configure an individual AAC audio channel: 1. Be sure you have chosen the audio service containing the channel you want to configure. 2. Select the encoding mode you wish to use. The type of mode selected (internal or external pass-through) controls which channel configuration dialog is displayed. 3. Click on the channel you want to configure. One of the following windows displays, depending on the encoding mode youve selected.

External Pass-Through

Internal

4. Select or enter information in the following fields. For Internal Encoding Mode, the values you set only apply to the current channel.
Enable PID

When checked, this Audio Channel is available to the system to be transmitted. Packet Identification numbers are usually set by Cisco personnel during system installation. Although Cisco does not recommend that you change this number, you can define your own numbering system and enter a unique PID number for this service. The number you enter must be in the range 0 to 8191and must be one that the system is not using. See Packet IDs (PIDs) on page 4-142.

Sample Frequency

Use this field to view the sampling frequency at which the PCM audio signals are input into the encoder. The Dolby Digital audio stream supports three standard sampling frequencies: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, and 32 kHz.

4-134

4042066 Rev A

Encoding Mode

Use this field to select the number of channels and the channel format within the encoded bit stream (internal mode only). The five available audio encoding modes are listed below. The mode definition uses two numbers (m/n), with m indicating the number of front channels, and n indicating the number of rear (surround) channels.
Mode
1+1 1/0 2/0 2/0 1/0 Dual Mono Single Mono (L only) Stereo Joint Stereo Single Mono (L + R)

Channel Format

The default setting is 2/0 (Stereo). Dual Mono


Bit Rate

Use this field to select the digital audio transmission rate. Settings for the compressed bit rate are available from 32 to 384 kbps, depending on the Encoding Mode setting. Increasing the number in this field increases the audio bandwidth at the encoder, improving the quality of the audio transmitted by the encoder. The default is 192K. To ensure high audio quality, the following table contains recommended Data Rate ranges for the selected audio encoding mode.
Mode
1+1 (Dual Mono) 1/0 (Single Mono - L Only) 2/0 (Stereo) 2/0 (Joint Stereo) 1/0 (Single Mono - L + R)

Data Rate Range


32 384 kbps 32 192 kbps 32 384 kbps 32 384 kbps 32 192 kbps

Input (internal only)


Input Select

Use this field to select the source type and format for the incoming audio signal. The field selection options are described in the following table. The default value is Embedded SDI Digital PCM audio.
Input Type
Analog Audio Inputs

4042066 Rev A

4-135

Embedded SDI Digital PCM audio (D1-SMPTE 272M) AES3 Digital Inputs, PCM Audio

Note: When set to Embedded SDI Digital PCM audio, Channel 1 selects SDI audios 1 and 2, while Channel 2 selects SDI audios 3 and 4.
Delay

Use this field to define the adjustment required in the audio encoding delay to make audio synchronize with video in a program which has both. The PNC system automatically calculates the value of this field whenever the bit rate on the video card configuration window changes. Enter the duration of the delay (between -1000 and +1000 milliseconds).

Analog Attenuation

The left and right audio input attenuation controls enable the operator to input various audio levels. Values for Input 1 and 2 are limited to 0 through 31. Input 1 sets the attenuation for the Left or Main input source; while Input 2 sets the Right or Aux input source. If MONO Encoding (1/0-L) is selected, Input 2 is ignored.

Test Tones
Enable

Select this check box to override the input source and input format of the audio signal and replace the signal with the test tones for left and right audio inputs selected in the fields below. Note: If the Enable check box is selected, an asterisk appears beside the Input/Output branch of the digital audio tree in the left portion of the window.

Test Tones

Test tones replace the currently selected input signal with an internally-generated test signal. Use this field to select the test tone input characteristics for the left audio channel when Stereo Encoding is selected. Use this field to select the test tone generated when Mono Encoding is selected. The default value is 500 Hz, -1 dBFS.

L Audio Input

R Audio Input

Use this field to select the test tone input characteristics for the right audio channel when Stereo Encoding is selected. This field is ignored when Mono Encoding is selected. The default value is 500 Hz, -1 dBFS. To save the changes and leave this window, choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the database.

4-136

4042066 Rev A

Configuring the Multiplexer


Depending on how your system was installed, you may need to change the Multiplexer settings and configure its cards. You must be assigned the appropriate user privileges before you can change the multiplexers configuration values. To configure a multiplexer: 1. Select the signal whose devices you want to configure from the signal bar. 2. Choose the Uplink icon, or choose Uplink > Uplink Configuration to display the Uplink Configuration window. 3. Double-click anywhere on the multiplexers device panel. The multiplexers device configuration window displays.

The left side of the window is the hierarchical listing of the multiplexers services. When first shown, the listing is collapsed. Click the plus sign beside any node to expand the listing beneath that node. The right side of the window shows dynamic information, depending on what is selected on the left side of the window. When first shown, the right side shows a read-only table listing of the multiplexers cards, including their type and location. The following table shows the types of cards which can appear in the list:

4042066 Rev A

4-137

Card Type Control/Conditional Access Transport Stream Input BitMizer Controller BitMizer/StatMux Channel Processor Data I/F

Description
The D9754 Control and Conditional Access Card provides a communication bridge between the PNC control computer and individual cards in the chassis, and also generates MPEG-2 and/or DVB tables that describe the output stream. The D9719 ASI Input Card receives and processes serial DVB/ ASI-formatted transport streams. The D9731 Central bit rate Control Card performs statistical multiplexing calculations and assigns output rates. The D9727 Channel Processor Card is needed for statistical multiplexing and can process as many as four channels. The D9742 Data I/F Card is a multiplexer card that accepts auxiliary customer input, converts the input into MPEG-2 packetized data, and sends the packets out via the midplane.

The Name which appears at the top of the right side of the window is an alias for the device in question. Click on the Data Interface node and a read-only listing of channels displays. Beneath the Data Interface node are nodes representing the channels displayed in the above list. Clicking on each one allows you to configure them by editing the fields displayed on the right side of the window. There are two types of channels: Synchronous and Asynchronous. For more information on configuring Synchronous and Asynchronous Data Channels, see below. 4. You can either continue by configuring the Utility Data card (if one is available), or exiting from this window. If you changed the multiplexers information, choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the database.

4-138

4042066 Rev A

Configuring Synchronous Data Channels


To configure a synchronous data channel: 1. Click on a Synchronous Data Channel node on the left of the Device Config window to display the following window on the right.

Enter or select information in the following fields. Note: The synchronous data configuration window contains settings for both High Speed Data and Wide Band Data. Many fields are similar in the synchronous data window for both high speed and wide band. High speed data, however, contains a few extra fields which are identified in the following field descriptions. Note: The name is only assigned after the stream has been enabled as either HSD or WBD.
Name

This is the system name which is automatically assigned. Enabling this check box configures this channel as High Speed and makes it available for transmission. Enabling this check box configures this channel as Wide Band and makes it available for transmission. The Wide Band Data feature enables you to simultaneously transmit video and data to a properly configured decoder (i.e., Business Satellite Receiver). However, in order to achieve effective, simultaneous transmissions, the following operating limits and restrictions must be observed. where a = video bit rate, and where b = wide band data rate, then:
a if if if

High Speed Data Enable Wide Band Data Enable

+ 2 x b 15 Mbps a 8 Mbps and b 3.375 Mbps, all services are supported

a = 1.5 Mbps and b = 6.75 Mbps, only video, audio and WBD services are supported b = 13.5 Mbps, only WBD is supported.

4042066 Rev A

4-139

The following table demonstrates some bandwidth assignment possibilities for various services. The far right column shows some possible transponder bandwidth configurations.
Video = a (525 & 625)
8 Mbps 6 Mbps 4 Mbps 3 Mbps 2 Mbps

Audio
384 Kbps 256 Kbps 256 Kbps 128 Kbps 64 Kbps

Wide Band Data = b


3.375 Mbps 3.375 Mbps 1.6875 Mbps 843.75 Kbps 421.875 Kbps

Low Speed Data


38.4 Kbps 38.4 Kbps 38.4 Kbps No 38.4 Kbps

Close Captions
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Subtitling
Yes Yes Yes Yes No

VBI
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Symbol FEC
10M3/4 10M2/3 8M1/2 6M1/2 4M3/2

PID (Packet Identification)

Packet Identification numbers are usually set by Cisco personnel during system installation. Although Cisco does not recommend that you change this number, you can define your own numbering system and enter a unique PID number for this service. The number you enter must be one that the system is not using. For more information, see Packet IDs (PIDs) on page 4-142.

Rate Delay (ms)

Select the appropriate baud rate for the synchronous data channel. Select from the drop down list. Use this field to define the additional amount of delay (in milliseconds) you can set for the synchronous data service. The additional delay can be used to approximately equalize processing delays in other services. Normally, the value in this field is set to zero, resulting in only the base system delay (which is bit rate dependent). The nominal base system delay can be approximated as 23,500 bits/ Bit Rate. However, the value can be changed to suit user preference. The delay value is adjustable in the range from 0 to 3000 milliseconds across all available bit rates.

Clock Ref

This field only applies to high speed data settings.

Use this field to select either an Internal or External source for the synchronization input. Note: A user with the appropriate privileges is able to change the scrambling control even if there are events scheduled or active on a virtual channel in the elementary stream multiplex. CAUTION:In addition, any user with the appropriate privileges is able to change the scrambling control on an elementary stream from uplink-control to a virtual channel/event-control. 2. When you have finished setting the values for the synchronous data card,

4-140

4042066 Rev A

choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the values.

Configuring Asynchronous Data Channels


To configure an asynchronous data channel: 1. Click on an Asynchronous Data Channel node on the left of the Device Config window to display the following window on the right.

2. Select or enter information in the following fields:


Name Enable

The name of the Asynchronous data stream as defined by the system. Enabling (checking) this check box makes this stream available for transmission. Packet Identification numbers are usually set by Cisco personnel during system installation. Although Cisco recommends that you do not change this number, you can define your own numbering system and enter a unique PID number for this service. The number you enter must be one that the system is not using. For more information, see Packet IDs (PIDs) on page 4-142. Use this field to select the baud rate of the asynchronous data channel. This field is used to match the rate of the data being input into the multiplexer. Select a baud rate in the range 300 to 38400 baud.
Available Baud Rates
Off 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400

PID (Packet Identification)

Rate

Data (bits)

The number of data bits to be used in the transmission. Select a value in the range 5 to 8 per input value. The default value is 8. Note: Although the multiplexer is capable of accepting this range of values, a decoder is fixed at 8 bits. Therefore, Cisco recommends that the values match.

Stop (bits)

Select 1, 2, or 1.5 (if you selected 5 for the Data field) stop bits per input value. The default value is 1.

4042066 Rev A

4-141

Note: Although the multiplexer is capable of accepting this range of values, a decoder is fixed at 1 stop bit. Therefore, Cisco recommends that the values match. Parity Select Odd, Even or None for the parity per input value. The default is None. Note: Although the multiplexer is capable of accepting this range of values, a decoder is fixed at None (no parity). Therefore, Cisco recommends that the values match. WARNING!: Under no circumstances should the number of input bits (i.e., data, stop, parity) exceed the output bit capability of the decoder. 3. When you have finished configuring the asynchronous data channels, choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the system.

Packet IDs (PIDs)


This section explains the Cisco PID numbering system. Although PIDs are already set up for elementary streams, and the PNC provides tools to make PID identification easy, a knowledge of PIDs makes tracking elementary streams throughout the system useful when you are tracking and diagnosing problems. Each elementary stream -- the video, audio and data services available on your encoders, multiplexers and modulators -- is assigned a unique PID by Cisco personnel when your system is installed and configured. Although you can define and assign your own PID numbering system, Cisco has defined the following numbering conventions for the PowerVu system. Essentially, a Packet ID is the central identifier for transport packets. When you define virtual channels, you combine audio, video and/or data services by identifying their PID numbers.

Recommended Special PID Numbers


PMT PID
5000 plus the virtual channel number

The Program Map Table PID to all PID streams in the multiplexer. This PID is transmitted with every elementary stream. The system automatically enters a default PMT PID whenever you create a virtual channel (e.g., virtual channel 67 PID would be 5067). Note: PMT is the MPEG term for the table carrying the assignment of all PIDs within the multiplex which carry programs (video and/or audio elemental streams).

4-142

4042066 Rev A

ECM PID
6000 plus the virtual channel number

The Entitlement Control Message PID contains global system data and virtual channel packets. This PID is carried in the form of a Conditional Access Message Table, and is private data. The ECM message may include a Virtual Channels Packet (VCP), which contains multiple virtual channel definitions, one for each program number carried in the transport stream. The system automatically enters a default ECM PID whenever you create a virtual channel (e.g., virtual channel 67 PID would be 6067).

CDT OS Download
8000 plus microtype

The Operating System download messages carry information about new versions of the operating system to decoders. Microtype is the 2 decimal digit microprocessor type that is to be downloaded.

4042066 Rev A

4-143

Configuring Scrambling
Scrambling of all of the configured elemental streams is done through a consolidated scrambling view. You must configure scrambling through this window if you want to encrypt your services. To view this window: 1. Select Security > Scramble Control.

Scrambling Control This window will display every stream you have configured for your system, as well as a number of read-only parameters.
Type: Name:

This is the type of stream (i.e., audio, video, etc.) This is the name the PNC uses to identify this stream, including its associated signal. PID defined for this stream Displays any Virtual Channels that have been created containing this stream. Whether the stream is scrambled or not. 2. Scrambling can be managed by double clicking on the stream you want to scramble. The following window is displayed:

PID Service Scr State

4-144

4042066 Rev A

Scrambling Dialog Note: Streams highlighted in gray are disabled and cannot be transmitted. To enable a stream, see the type of streams configuration section earlier in this chapter.
Group ID

You can enter a number in the range of 1 to 31 identify the scrambling group ID. You can assign this elemental stream a unique group ID, or you can assign the same group ID to several different services. You should consider assigning the same group ID to services that you plan to package together on the same virtual channel. The PNC system provides for two kinds of scrambling control:
Uplink Virtual

Scr control

control Channel (event-activated) control

As a result, there are 3 available choices:


ON

This means that the selected stream will be encrypted and is controlled by the uplink. When you encrypt an elementary stream and then select the stream as a service on a virtual channel, you must assign corresponding tiers to the event on the virtual channel and the decoder to enable the decoder to decrypt the authorization information. Note: When you combine services to create a virtual channel, only one of the elementary services needs to be encrypted to scramble the channel. For example, if you scramble this video service, and combine it with an unscrambled audio service, the resulting virtual channel will be encrypted.

OFF

This means that the selected stream will not be encrypted. If encryption is OFF for all elementary streams associated with a virtual channel then you cannot schedule events for that channel or assign them program tiers. All decoders can receive the unencrypted channel.

Service

If Service is selected, then the particular virtual channel (via its events) has exclusive control over the scrambling status of the elementary stream, provided the virtual channel exists. If this parameter is selected, then the Controlling Service field

4042066 Rev A

4-145

becomes available and the virtual channel to control the stream must be selected (see below). Note: For DPI and DAI streams, the only choices are Off and Track Video.
Controlling service

Provides a list of the available virtual channels. You must ensure the virtual channel that is to control this stream has been selected in the service option (see above). 3. Click Set. 4. Choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the system. CAUTION: A user with the appropriate privileges is able to change the scrambling control even if there are events scheduled or active on a virtual channel in the elementary stream. In addition, any user with the appropriate privileges is able to change the scrambling control on an elementary stream from uplinkcontrol to a virtual channel/event-control. Note: DPI Scrambling is controlled by the Video Stream associated with the DPI stream. The Scramble Control option for a DPI or DAI stream has only two options: Off or Track Video. When Off is selected, the DPI or DAI stream is never scrambled. When Track Video is selected, the scramble state of the associated video stream determines if the DPI or DAI stream is scrambled or not. For MetroMux DPI streams, the scrambling state follows the state of the MetroMux Video stream which has the same Program ID.

4-146

4042066 Rev A

Configuring Modulators
DVB-S Modulators
Your system may be equipped with DVB-S or DVB-S2 modulators. The PowerVu Model D9390 Advanced Modulator uses the DVB-S modulation scheme. When your uplink is configured with this modulator, follow the instructions below. Depending on how your system was installed, you may need to change the modulator settings. You must have appropriate user privileges before you can change the modulators configuration values. For more information on User Privileges, see Working with Users on page 8-11. To configure this modulator: 1. Select the signal whose devices you want to display from the signal bar. 2. Choose the Uplink icon, or choose Uplink > Uplink Configuration to display the Uplink Configuration window. 3. Double-click the modulator you want to configure. The modulator window displays.

If there is no carrier associated with the modulator, the modulation section of the window displays a note with a Carrier Config button, which when pressed opens up the Transport Media window to allow you to select a carrier to associate with the modulator.

4042066 Rev A

4-147

Name

Enter the name of this modulator. You can enter up to 30 characters. This is a customer-assigned name. Indicates how the modulator is being controlled. When Remote is selected, the PNC is in control. When Local is selected, control is managed at the front panel of the modulator. For example, Local control may be required in situations where the modulator requires maintenance. Local indicates control is driven through the front panel of the modulator. As soon as the PNC regains remote control, any parameters changed through the front panel will be overwritten by PNC selections. The following diagram shows the difference on the Uplink Configuration view when Modulator Control is Local or Remote:

Control

Local (Modulator Front Panel) Control

When in Local mode, the status displays as white text on a blue background, making it easy to determine when the PNC doesnt have control.

Remote (PNC) Control

In the above diagram, it is obvious that the PNC has control of the device. Of course, this can be extended to Offline (all black) and Maintenance (all Yellow)

4-148

4042066 Rev A

states and modes.


State

This field displays one of the following modulator states:


State
Active Standby Off line

Description
Indicates that the data paths are operating normally and that the unit is being used for broadcast purposes. Indicates that the data paths are operating normally and that the unit has been designated as the standby device. Indicates communication with the device has stopped. The reporting of diagnostics messages for this unit has stopped. Note that this setting can only be achieved through the PNCs GUI, never through the Modulators front panel. Indicates a failure in the device or that communication has stopped between the PNC system and the device (e.g., due to a cable problem or a power supply failure).

Failed

Mute Actual Mute Request

A non-editable field indicating the actual mute setting from the modulator. When you click this check box, a PNC mute request is sent and the modulator is muted. Regardless of the modulators settings, this type of request is always honored. When you clear this check box, a PNC unmute request is sent to the modulator. Whether the modulator is actually unmuted or not depends on the current state and configuration of the modulator.

Mux Select Symbol Rate

A non-editable field indicating the modulators selected ASI input. The Symbol Rate identified in the Network/Carrier fields in the Transport Media View. This value is non-editable. If no carrier is associated with the modulator, then the note in the modulation section will appear. The Modulation Mode identified in the Network/Carrier fields in the Transport Media View. This value is non-editable. If no carrier is associated with the modulator, then the note in the modulation section will appear. Note: The Modulator Enabled check box on the Transport Media view MUST be selected for the carrier to be associated with the modulator.

Modulation Mode

FEC Inner

The FEC identified in the Network/Carrier fields in the Transport Media View. This value is non-editable. If no carrier is associated with the modulator, then the note in the modulation section will appear. The modulators video sensing function. When this check box is selected, this enables a spectrum inversion in the link. Non-inverting mode should be used for DVB/MPEG2 compliance. If no carrier is associated with the modulator, then the note in the modulation section will appear.

Spectral Inversion

4042066 Rev A

4-149

Pure Carrier Frequency Output Power ASI Protection Control - Actual ASI Protection Control - Request MUX Protection Control - Actual MUX Protection Control - Request

When enabled, this check box sets the modulators Pure Carrier mode on. This field sets the transmission frequency the modulator should use. This field sets the output power setting for the modulator. This non-editable field displays the actual state of the modulators ASI Protection. This is the user-requested ASI Protection Mode. This non-editable field displays the actual state of the modulators MUX Protection. This is the user-requested MUX Protection Mode. Note: If both modulators are offline, neither the ASI Protection Control request nor the MUX Protection Control request will succeed.

DVB-S2 Modulators
Your system may be equipped with DVB-S or DVB-S2 modulators. The Newtec Modulator can be configured for DVB-S or DVB-S2 modulation schemes. When it is configured for DVB-S modulation, some fields in the Device configuration window will not displayed because they are not applicable for that modulation scheme. When your uplink is configured with this modulator, follow the instruction below. Depending on how your system was installed, you may need to change the modulator settings. You must have appropriate user privileges before you can change the modulators configuration values. For more information on User Privileges, see Working with Users on page 8-11. Note: The following operating parameters for the Newtec modulator should be changed on the PNC as any changes on the Newtec modulator front panel will be overwritten by the parameters in the PNC Device Configuration views; therefore, any changes made to the modulator front panel parameters will be changed back to the parameters set in the PNC.
Symbol

Rate Standard Frequency

Modulation Output Excess FEC

Bandwidth Framing

Rate and Mod Band Processing Mode (DVB-S2 only) Frame Type (DVB-S2 only)

MPEG Base Pilot FEC

4-150

4042066 Rev A

To configure the modulator: 1. Select the signal whose devices you want to display from the signal bar. 2. Choose the Uplink icon, or choose Uplink > Uplink Configuration to display the Uplink Configuration window. 3. Double-click the modulator you want to configure. The modulator window displays.

If there is no carrier associated with the modulator, the modulation section of the window displays a note with a Carrier Config button, which when pressed opens up the Transport Media window to allow you to select a carrier to associate with the modulator.

4042066 Rev A

4-151

Name

Enter the name of this modulator. You can enter up to 30 characters. This is a customer-assigned name. This field displays one of the following modulator states:
State
Active Standby Off line

State

Description
Indicates that the data paths are operating normally and that the unit is being used for broadcast purposes. Indicates that the data paths are operating normally and that the unit has been designated as the standby device. Indicates communication with the device has stopped. Reporting of diagnostics messages for this unit has stopped. Note that this setting can only be achieved through the PNCs GUI, never through the Modulators front panel. Indicates a failure in the device or that communication has stopped between the PNC system and the device (e.g., due to a cable problem or a power supply failure).

Failed

Base Band Interface

The installed ASI type. The options displayed are ASI-A, ASI-B or Off. This setting corresponds to the rear panel ASI input port.The default is ASI-A. This is the Symbol Rate identified in the Network/Carrier fields in the Transport Media View. If no carrier is associated with the modulator, then the note in the modulation section will appear. The default is 6 MS/s.

Symbol Rate

4-152

4042066 Rev A

Modulation Mode

The Modulation Mode identified in the Network/Carrier fields in the Transport Media View. This value is non-editable. If no carrier is associated with the modulator, then the note in the modulation section will appear. The default is QPSK DVB-S2. Note: The Modulator Enabled check box on the Transport Media view MUST be selected for the carrier to be associated with the modulator.

FEC Inner

The FEC identified in the Network/Carrier fields in the Transport Media View. This value is non-editable. If no carrier is associated with the modulator, then the note in the modulation section will appear. The default is 3/4 FEC. The DVB-S2 physical layer pilot insertion mode. No Pilot or Pilot Active. When Pilot Active is displayed, the modulator inserts 36 unmodulated symbols every 16 slots (of 90 symbols) to aid in receiver synchronization. The default is No Pilot. This value is used with the symbol rate to calculate the Occupied Bandwidth. The options are 0.35, 0.25 and 0.2 based on signal quality. The default is 0.25. The modulation mode/scheme of the modulator. DVB-S or DVB-S2. The default is DVB-S2. Select one of the baseband processing functions. The default is MPEGRA.

Pilot Mode

Roll-off Factor

Modulation Standard

Base Band Processing

State
Off MPEGRA Stuffing

Description
No additional processing is performed on the baseband data. The modulator transmit clock is slaved to the input data stream. Rate adaptation is activated, null packets are dropped/inserted and PCR is updated. The modulator transmit clock is free-running. In DVB-S mode, MPEG null packets are inserted to adapt to the transmit rate. The modulator transmit clock is free-running.

MPEG Framing

The interface MPEG framing defines the data framing format received at the interface. The default is External(188).
State
External(188)

Description
The modulator expects MPEG packets of 188 bytes with the first byte being the MPEG syncmarker (0x47).

Rate Priority

Determines which rate will be kept constant when one of the following parameters is changed: Modulation Type and FEC, MPEG Framing and Framing Mode. The rate that has been changed last automatically receives rate priority assignment. The default is Symbol.
State
Symbol

Description
The baud rate of the modulated output signal.

4042066 Rev A

4-153

Output Frequency

Enter the operational output frequency in the range from 50,000,000 MHz to 180,000,000. Enter the Output level in dBm. The actual range is determined by the gain of the converter (which also depends on the operating frequency) and the gain of the optional extra amplifier. The displayed level can also be changed by introducing an offset level. The default is -15 dBm. Enables or Disables the modulator output signal. The default is Disabled. Transmit is switched off upon detection of a general device alarm of the modulator board. This is the or-ing of the incompatibility, external 10 MHz reference, external 10 MHz reference PLL and synthesizer lock alarm. When this alarm is resolved, transmit is switched back on. Factors which modify the transmitted signal and its spectrum, and disable transmission unconditionally are:
interface symbol FEC

IF Output Level

IF Transmit

rate

rate framing standard

rate and modulation type bandwidth frequency

interface excess

modulation output

Carrier Modulation

Choose the carrier modulation. The setting options are On, Clock8, Clock4 and Clock16. The default is On. The output level gain control mode.
State
AGC AGC

Gain Control Mode

Description
The modulator output level accuracy is controlled statically in the fixed manual gain control mode.

The AGC mode is used to keep level changes in output level small caused by gain drift (due to temperature changes or aging) of the amplifier stages of the modulator.

The default is AGC.


Output Level Plan

This is the output power setting for the modulator.


State
Constant Power

Description
The output power is kept equal for combinations of FEC rate and modulation mode. This is the default mode of operation.

The default is Const. Pwr.

4-154

4042066 Rev A

PLS signature

The Physical Layer Scrambler Signature (PLSCRAMBLER) scrambles all of the PLFRAMES except for their header parts. The sequence is reset at the start of the frame body. The PLS signature is programmed as an 18-bit value. The default is 0.

IF Spectrum Inv.

Choose the modulators video sensing mode, Direct or Inverted. Non-inverting mode, or Direct spectrum, should be used for DVB/MPEG-2 compliance, corresponding with the INTELSAT specification IESS-308 (Rev.8 - pgs 18 & 69) and with the DVB standard ETS 300 421 (December 1994). If no carrier is associated with the modulator, then the note will appear in the modulation section of the window. The spectrum at IFL and at RF is coupled by the installed upconverter module. This can be deduced from the frequency conversion formula. If the L-band frequency is subtracted from the LO, then the spectrum is inverted in the converter module. If a direct spectrum is required in this case, the spectrum must also be inverted at IFL. The default is Direct.

4042066 Rev A

4-155

Slope Equaliser

An amplitude slope in the upconverter or HPA can be compensated by using this equaliser, which has a maximum range of 2 dB/50 MHz. This is done by changing the corresponding control parameter in steps of 1 unit, in the range of 7 unit. The default is 0.

Monitor Output Mode

This controls the monitoring output functional mode. The default is Always on.
State Description

Always on
Occupied Bandwidth

The monitor output signal is continuously active, irrespective of the operational output status.

The -26 dB bandwidth of the signal. This is calculated as the symbol rate multiplied by (1 + a) with a = the selected roll-off factor. This is not applicable for DVB-S modulation.

Modulator Redundancy Control


Newtec modulator redundancy is controlled by a Universal Switching System (USS). The USS is shown in the Uplink Configuration Rack view below. The order in which the devices appear in the Uplink Configuration window may vary.

USS The USS is preconfigured and has no settable fields except for the Name. Doubleclick on the USS in the Uplink Configuration Rack window to display the view.
Name State ASI Redundancy Mode

The name identifying the USS. You can enter up to 30 characters. The operating state of the USS. The switching mode of the ASI switch, either Manual or Auto.

4-156

4042066 Rev A

For ASI switching only, these rows are not displayed.

If one MUX is set Offline, the USS will change to Manual. If both MUXes (primary and secondary) are Online, the USS will be set to Auto.
ASI Select

The position of the ASI switch connected to the Primary and Secondary multiplexers. The switching mode of the IF switch, either Manual or Auto. If one modulator is set Offline, the USS will change to Manual mode. If both modulators (primary and secondary) are Online, the USS will be set to Auto.

IF Redundancy Mode

IF Select

The position of the IF switch connected to the Primary and Secondary modulators.

4042066 Rev A

4-157

Configuring the LEC Server


The Live Event Controller (LEC) server supports dynamic scheduling of tuning events for a group of decoders. The scheduled channel events must be in a CSV file format. A template is provided by Cisco and can optionally be used to create the CSV file. The file is then imported into the LEC server through a Web GUI. For details on scheduling events and the Web GUI, refer to the Live Event Controller Users Guide. The events are scheduled according to event groups, which are a group of decoders that are defined and maintained in the Event Group window. For details, refer to Grouping Decoders on page 6-70. Before you can successfully connect to the LEC server, you must configure the server information in the LEC Configuration window. If the server is successfully connected, the status in the LEC Server connection status bar displays Normal. Otherwise, the status displays Failed to Coordinate. For more information, refer to Main Console Window on page 3-14. The PNC communicates the following to the LEC Server: System Configuration settings Event Groups Virtual Channels The above information is communicated to the LEC when any of the following occurs: system configuration or virtual channel information is updated on the PNC. PNC is started while LEC is online LEC is brought online from offline communication recovery (previously online) Note: Information is not communicated to the LEC when the LEC server is not online.

4-158

4042066 Rev A

To configure the LEC Server: 1. Choose Administration > LEC Configuration. The LEC Configuration window opens.

2. Set the following information:


Host

Enter the name of the LEC Server. This must match the host name of the LEC Server. The customer identification code that the LEC Server in the network is assigned (belongs) to. Cisco defines this field when the LEC server is installed and configured. You cannot edit this field. This value identifies the LEC Server. The default value is 0. You cannot edit this field. This is the ID assigned to the Global Data Stream (GDS) for the LEC Server. You can enter a value in the range from 0 to 8190. This is the GDS stream bandwidth setting for the LEC Server. You can enter a value in the range from 10000 to 200000 kbps. Note: The bandwidth is configured in Kbps in the LEC Configuration window, but is converted and displayed as bps in the LECs web GUI.

Customer Code

ID

PID

Bandwidth

InPID

This is the incoming PID for the current MetroMux stream. This value must be unique. You can select which MetroMux device you would like associated with which signal. The LEC server can connect up to four MetroMux devices. 3. Choose Actions > Save or click the Save icon on the toolbar to save the changes.

Metromux Device List

4042066 Rev A

4-159

4-160

4042066 Rev A

Chapter 5

Virtual Channels and Controlling Access


Virtual Channels Creating a Virtual Channel Managing Virtual Channels Defining and Scheduling Events Controlling Program Access Managing Events

This chapter describes Virtual Channels, defining and scheduling Events and Controlling Access to Virtual Channels and Events.

4042066 Rev A

5-1

Virtual Channels
A virtual channel is a collection of services which you define within the PNC System. To maximize the use of your available services, and to provide flexibility in packaging them, you can create up to 499 virtual channels (85 virtual channels per multiplexer). Before you define virtual channels, you must ensure that the service definition is configured for the multiplexer and associated encoders. For information about defining services, see Configuring Streams and Services on page 4-1. You can define the following services for each virtual channel:
One Up Up

video stream

to four audio streams (rear) to four asynchronous data streams (LSD) VBI stream DPI stream (see note below)

One One Up Up

to four synchronous data streams (HSD/WBD) to 12 subtitles (DVB and Imitext combined)

Note: The DPI stream must be from the same encoder as the selected video stream. Also, a video stream must first be defined before a DPI stream can be defined as part of the virtual channel. Similarly, a MetroMux DPI stream can only be defined after a MetroMux video stream with the same Program ID has been defined. The services you combine on a virtual channel may depend on the decoders to which the PNC is transmitting. The decoders receiving the channel must be equipped to output the services you have defined for the channel. Note: Each virtual channel you create reduces the number of total bits available for system resources. Though, bandwidth can be managed. For information on managing bandwidth, see Allocating Bandwidth on page 7-35. You can combine services from any of the primary encoders and multiplexers associated with a particular signal (provided that an MSYNC generator is part of the system). You cannot combine services from encoders or multiplexers associated with different signals. Note: However, to ensure lip sync for a particular language within a program, all sources must originate from the same decoder. For example: With other languages, you can combine a video stream from Encoder 1 on Signal 1 with a Spanish language audio stream from Encoder 3 on Signal 1 to create Channel 56. You can then combine the same video stream from Encoder 1 with a French language audio stream from Encoder 4 (also on Signal 1) to create Channel

5-2

4042066 Rev A

57. You should, however, make sure that the decoders receiving the channel are equipped to output the services you are assigning to the channel. For authorization purposes, each event created for a virtual channel can be assigned one or more program tiers. If a decoder has been authorized with a matching program tier, the decoder configures itself as defined in the virtual channels settings. When a virtual channel is properly defined, the decoder can access the channel number which appears on its front panel display. For decoder details, see Decoders on page 6-1.

Identifying Services
Packet Identification Numbers (PIDs) are unique numbers which identify elemental streams. The PID numbering system is already set up when your system is installed. Although you can change the existing PID numbers, Cisco recommends that you use the existing numbering system. For example:

Elementary Streams Video A Video B Audio 1 Audio 2 Audio 3 Audio 4

PIDs

1560 1660 1620 1621 1622 1623

Service Channel 12 Channel 21

Program Sports (English) Sports (Spanish)

PIDs 1560 1620 1621 1560 1622 1623

Elementary Streams Video A Audio 1 Audio 2 Video A Audio 3 Audio 4

Authorization Control (Conditional Access)


When the video, audio and data services were defined, each service was configured as either scrambled or unscrambled. If you include a scrambled service in a virtual channel, then the channel becomes scrambled.
Scrambled Channels

When a channel is scrambled, you can schedule and control events for that channel. You can also assign program tiers to it to control which decoders can decrypt this signal for the channel, and, optionally, special or particular events on that channel. When a decoder receives the signal for that virtual channel or event, it checks the channels program tiers to see if one of them matches the decoders authorized program tiers. If an identical match is found (excluding blackout/spotlight codes), then the decoder can decode the signal and the subscriber can view the channel or event.

4042066 Rev A

5-3

For information about using program tiers to control events, see Tiers on page 5-24 and Setting Blackout Codes on page 5-23. Note: You should assign the same group ID to scrambled services that you intend to include in the same virtual channel.
Unscrambled Channels

If none of the elementary streams/services you include in a virtual channel are encrypted, then all decoders can receive and view that channel without the need for any program tier authorization.

Displaying and Using the Service Summary Window


The Service Summary window allows you to create and control virtual channels and events in the PNC system with the help of the Stream Summary window. It lists the defined virtual channels and depicts the events that have been created for each virtual channel. Each field or component in the window and the main editing and control functions available from this window are described in detail later in this chapter. To display the Service Summary window: 1. Choose the Service Summary icon, or choose Channel > Service Summary to display the Service Summary window:
Display Control Fields

Virtual Channel Panel

Divider Bar

Events Panel

5-4

4042066 Rev A

The Service Summary window contains three major control areas:


Display Virtual Events

Control Fields

Channel Panel Panel

Display Control Fields


The fields and buttons in the display control area of the window enable you to control how virtual channels and events are displayed in the window.
Channel(s)

This field displays the virtual channel(s) selected by the operator. When you work with virtual channels, it is used to key in a specific channel number and select a single channel, or a range of channels. If the field is blank, all virtual channels are selected by default. This button lets you display or hide the events associated with each virtual channel. Events are displayed in the events panel to the right of the virtual channels list panel. The button has an ON and OFF state that you control using the mouse.
Button set ON displays all scheduled events in the events panel. Button set OFF does not display any scheduled events in the events panel.

Events

Search

Click this button to activate a search for one or more virtual channels defined in the Channel(s) field. This field identifies the date and time of the selection in the events panel. Remember that this field represents the PNC server time, not the local client PC time. The Current button in the Date area lets you quickly set the selection date in the events panel to the current server date and time. This field lets you select the scope of the view to display in the events panel. Use the drop down box to select viewing increments of 3 Hours, 6 Hours, 12 Hours, Daily, Weekly, or Monthly.

Date/Time

Current

View

Virtual Channel Panel


The virtual channel panel contains the following field columns.
Channel

This field displays the virtual channel number assigned when the channel was defined. The virtual channel numbers are colour coded as follows:
Teal

indicates that the channel is enabled, and is broadcasting indicates that the channel is disabled, and is not transmitting

Maroon

4042066 Rev A

5-5

If a virtual channel is off (disabled), Off appears beside the channel number as shown below.

Note: You cannot delete Channel 001. Channel 1 is often used to download operating system information to decoders. As a result, you should not try to use it for regular broadcast virtual channel service assignments.
Signal

This field identifies the transmitting source for the channel. The number represents the transponder signal carrying the channel. This field contains the channel description, defined when the channel was created. The description typically identifies the channels function, service or number. The Type column identifies the channel as a Primary or Alternate channel. This channel type identification is crucial if you need to use the PNC Service Replacement feature. For details and definitions of primary and alternate channels, see the description in the Type field in the topic, Creating a Virtual Channel on page 5-9, in this chapter.

Description

Type

Short Cut Menus


The virtual channel panel also enables you to highlight a channel and quickly access selected functions by choosing the secondary mouse button. The system displays a flyout menu similar to:
Double-click on the channel number, or select Edit menu option to open the Service Assignment window

Open Event schedule window

5-6

4042066 Rev A

Displaying and Using the Stream Summary Window


The Stream Summary window provides a list of all of the elementary streams that have been configured for your system based on the hardware components that you are using. The window lists all of the signals, associated devices, available PSI/SI information and configured streams. To display the Stream Summary window: 1. Select the Stream Summary icon or choose Uplink > Stream Summary. The following window appears:

2. The Stream Summary view contains two distinct areas: The left side of the window details the available signals in the system and their associated devices encoders and multiplexers. In addition, it lists general PSI/ SI information and any Virtual Channels which have been created. Searches can be done by highlighting the various elements displayed in this panel. The right side of the window lists all available elemental streams. What is selected on the left side of the window will dictate which streams are displayed on the right. Note: Streams highlighted in gray are disabled. Streams which are MetroMuxed appear in yellow. The following information can be displayed:
Stream Name

This is the system-assigned name the PNC gives to the stream.

4042066 Rev A

5-7

Stream Type

Possible types are:


AAC CAT DPI DVB DVB

WST Audio

MPEG NIT

Subtitle Audio

PAT PMT SDT Subtitle TDT VBI Video WBD Linear

Digital ECM GDS GDS2 EIT EMM HSD LSD

(STL, SBT)

Dolby E

Note: Stream types presented in brackets refer to multiple types of system assigned stream names.
PID Device Name Device Type VC

This is the PID assigned to the stream. This is the alias of the stream, if one has been assigned. This is the type of device providing the stream (i.e. encoder, MUX, etc.). This is the Virtual Channel(s) associated with the stream.

5-8

4042066 Rev A

Creating a Virtual Channel


You define a virtual channel by identifying the streams associated with each service you want to transmit on the selected channel. Before you create a virtual channel, you should: identify the transmission source of each service you want to use consider the type of input required consider the decoder output required. The encoder and multiplexer services must be configured before you create virtual channels. To create a virtual channel: 1. Ensure that the encoder and multiplexer services are configured. 2. Choose Channel > Service Summary to display the Service Summary window.

3. With the Service Summary window displayed, right-click on or below the existing Virtual Channel(s) and choose Create Virtual Channel from the popup menu. A blank Service Assignment window displays. The Service Assignment window consists of three tabbed dialogs: General (see General Tab on page 5-10), CA (see CA Tab on page 5-20), and RCO (see RCO Tab on page 5-25). Each tab is explained below.

4042066 Rev A

5-9

General Tab
Enter or Select information for the following fields on the General tab:
Name

The name you have associated with the channel. This displays as the description on the Service Summary window. Enter or select a new channel number in the range 2 to 65,535. You cannot use a number assigned to an existing channel. The number you select is the number the subscriber requests to receive this channel. For example, if you create Channel 40, the subscriber must select Channel 40 to receive this combination of services. Note: Channels 0 and 1 are usually reserved for operating system downloads to decoders. You cannot select Channel 0 for a broadcasting service, and you cannot remove Channel 1 from the system. You can create up to 499 virtual channels.

Channel

Signal

Select or enter the appropriate signal on which this channel and its corresponding services are being transmitted. This version of PNC can support up to four signals. Note: You cannot create a virtual channel from services on different signals (i.e., services must come from encoders and multiplexers within a single signal/transponder).

Type

Use this field to select if the channel is a Primary or Alternate. Alternate channels can be used to substitute for primary channels under certain conditions. This is known as Service Replacement. By default, all virtual channels are primary channels. You must modify the channels type if you want to create an alternate.

5-10

4042066 Rev A

Primary

A primary channel is a virtual channel that has been assigned both PMT and ECM PIDs. A primary channel may or may not have:
a

service (elementary stream) associated with it

one

alternate channel linked to it which is the target of a service replacement event.

Alternate

An alternate channel is a virtual channel that has been assigned both PMT and ECM PIDs. An alternate channel cannot have a service replacement event defined for it. An alternate channel may or may not:
have be

a service (elementary stream) associated with it

linked to one or many primary channels.

Do not assign more than 15 primary channels to a single alternate. Although the system will accept more than 15 primaries linked to an alternate, doing so may cause poor switching performance and/or unexpected results.
Service Type

Select one of the following options to specify the type of service that is to be transmitted on this channel. The type of service you select depends on the events that are to be broadcast. If you are not sure which option to choose, select Digital TV to force reception of the service. Select this option when the new channel is to include a video stream to be broadcast for television. Select this option when the new channel is to include one or more audio streams to be broadcast on radio. Select this option to transmit low speed data. Select this option to transmit high speed data. Enter an identifying description for the new virtual channel: the channels function, service or number. For example, you can enter any of these descriptions: Channel 40, Basic Sports, or 1-1 to represent signal 1, encoder 1. You can enter up to 24 ASCII characters to identify the channel.

Digital TV

Digital Radio

Lo Speed Data Hi Speed Data Description

Properties
Enable
Select the Enable check box to enable transmission on this channel. Clear the check box to disable transmission on this channel. You cannot access the Event schedule for this channel unless this option is enabled.
CA Scramble

The CA Scramble field is a read-only field; you cannot edit it. When the box is checked, then you have included at least one scrambled elementary stream on

4042066 Rev A

5-11

this channel. You can, as a result, assign program tiers to the channel to control which decoders can receive and view the services, and schedule events for this channel. When the box is cleared, then none of the elementary streams included on this channel have been scrambled. Any decoder can access the services included on the channel, and you cannot control access to the signal. However, the operator can still schedule event authorization for this channel.
Scrambling Controllable Broadcast Flag

If the event is controlling scrambling as defined on the Scrambling Control window, then this check box is enabled. Select the Broadcast Flag check box to enable copy protection on this channel. This flag is understood by the decoder to disallow displaying or copying of the program, allowing content providers to identify and control the transmission of content through to the device displaying the program (e.g., TV via set-top box, DVR/VCR or PC). This prevents streaming of video or program content to the internet. Clear the check box to disable copy protection on this channel. The default is disabled (unchecked).

Service Streams
PMT PID 5000 plus the virtual channel number

The PMT (Program Map Table) contains the definition for the service contents of the virtual channel. The system automatically assigns a PMT PID when the channel is created. For example, if you create Channel 40, the system assigns a PID of 5040, then as soon as you assign a Signal Number, the system sets the Enable check box to ON. Note: You can override the default and assign any unused PID to the PMT. However, Cisco strongly recommends that you use the default whenever possible. If you enter a number that is already in use, the following message is displayed:
PID is in use. ECM PID 6000 plus the virtual channel number

The ECM (Entitlement Control Message) contains global system data and virtual channel packets. It is carried in the form of a Conditional Access Message Table, and is private data. The ECM message may include a Virtual Channels Packet (VCP) which contains multiple virtual channel definitions, one for each program number carried in the transport stream.

5-12

4042066 Rev A

The system automatically assigns an ECM PID when the channel is created. For example, if you create Channel 40, the system assigns a PID of 6040, then as soon as you assign a Signal Number, the system sets the Enable check box to ON. Note: You can override the default and assign any unused PID to the ECM, however, Cisco strongly recommends that you use the default whenever possible. If you enter a number that is already in use, the following message is displayed:
PID is in use.

4. To complete the Stream Reference area of the Service Assignment window, the Stream Summary window must be displayed. Choose Uplink>Stream Summary. For more information on the Stream Summary window, see Displaying and Using the Stream Summary Window on page 5-7. 5. From the Stream Summary window select the video stream (or whatever stream needs to be associated with the PCR) and then drag and drop that stream on top of the PCR reference on the Service Assignment window. This configures the PCR to the same properties as the dropped stream. 6. To add the stream to define its own properties, not just as the template for its properties, drag the stream over again and this time drop it under the PCR in the list. 7. Select all of the other streams which you require to create your virtual channel from the Service Summary window and similarly drag and drop them below the PCR stream onto the Stream Reference area of the Service Assignment window. Note: The order in which audio streams are dragged to the Service Assignment window is significant in determining which audio streams are aligned with which audio output. The first audio stream dropped is aligned with audio output 1, the second dropped is aligned with audio output 2, and so on.

4042066 Rev A

5-13

Click and hold your left mouse button and drag one stream at a time to setup your new Virtual Channel.

Stream References
System Name Type PID Language Code

The system-assigned name of the stream. Defines the stream type Defines the PID that was assigned to the stream Defines the language that will be transmitted for the appropriate stream. Language codes can be set for any stream, but are most appropriate on audio and subtitling streams. For more information, see Defining Imitext Subtitling on page 5-18. Note: Language codes for DVB Subtitling and DVB WST cannot be set here, but must be set when those streams are created. Also, DVB WST, which will have several languages configured for each stream, will display multiple languages.

Scramble Control Scramble Group

Indicates whether scrambling is on or off for the stream. Indicates the scrambling group this stream is a part of.

Key Elementary Service Descriptions


Video

The PID must be identical to the PID identifier assigned to the card when it was installed or configured. For each service (Audio 1, Audio 2, Audio 3, Audio 4), enter the PID used by the appropriate elementary stream. The PID must be identical to the PID

Audio 1 to 4

5-14

4042066 Rev A

identifier assigned to the card when it was installed or configured.


Audio Pairs

If the paired audio channels (Channels 1/2 and Channels 3/4) were configured as Single Mono, then enter the PID number for the appropriate individual audio channel, as shown below. If the paired audio channels (Channels 1/2 and Channels 3/4) were configured as Dual Mono, Stereo or Joint Stereo (for MPEG only), then you must enter the PID number that identifies the odd channel of the pair (audio channel 1 for the first pair, or audio channel 3 for the second pair). For example, if you configured audio channels 1/2 as Stereo and want to include it in this virtual channel, you must enter audio channel 1s PID number on the Service Assignment window, as shown below. If you enter audio channel 2s PID number, then no audio will be output.

MPEG Valid Single Mono Audio PIDs

Dolby Valid Single Mono Audio PIDs

4042066 Rev A

5-15

MPEG Valid Dual Mono, Stereo or Joint Stereo PIDs

Dolby Valid Dual Mono or Stereo PIDs

Enter a number in the range from 2 to 8190. Select the Enable check box to activate each audio service, or clear the Enable check box to disable it. Note: Decoder output assignments for Audio 3 and Audio 4 are not available on two-channel receivers.

Saving the Virtual Channel


To save the new virtual channel: 1. Choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save. To cancel the new channel without saving its information to the Service Summary window, choose Actions > Undo. If you have already saved the channel, however, you cannot undo it. To invalidate the channel, you can edit it and disable transmission, or you can delete it. 2. Choose Refresh to update the Service Summary window with the new virtual

5-16

4042066 Rev A

channel. If you enabled transmission on this channel, then the channel information is displayed in blue. If you disabled transmission on this channel, then the channel information is displayed in red.

4042066 Rev A

5-17

Defining Imitext Subtitling


Note: This section describes Imitext subtitling ONLY. For information on DVB Subtitles, see Configuring DVB Subtitles on page 4-23. If your system is equipped with subtitling hardware from Screen Subtitling Systems Inc., you can use the PNC to control subtitling capabilities for PowerVu decoders. If the decoders are equipped and configured to interpret the subtitling information carried in the video stream, then you can use this window to define the languages and controlling PIDs for each subtitled language.

Video Subtitling
Video Subtitling is a PowerVu system feature, and is defined together with all other virtual channel subscriber services at the uplink via PowerVu Network Centre (PNC) system software. The video subtitling feature provides the ability to display the audio portion of foreign-language programming as captions at the bottom of the TV monitor screen in a language understood by the viewer. Video subtitles can be set for display in a number of different languages, or can be disabled. As many as six language Imitext subtitles can be configured on each encoder. Any receiver can be configured to select any one of the six language subtitles. Each subtitle can consist of one or multiple lines of text that will be displayed at the bottom of the TV screen attached to the receiver. Video subtitle text can be displayed as either white or yellow characters against a variety of backgrounds. Video subtitling services are associated with a separate PID (Packet IDentification). To define Imitext subtitling for the virtual channel: 1. Ensure that the required PIDs, ports, etc. have been assigned to the subtitle stream as configured on the VBI portion of the Encoder Configuration view. See Configuring an SD (Standard Definition) Encoder on page 4-3. 2. If streams have already been configured, then with the Stream Summary view and Service Assignment window open, drag-and-drop the required subtitle streams from the Stream Summary window onto the stream reference area of the virtual channel you are working with. For information on how to create a Virtual Channel, see Creating a Virtual Channel on page 5-9. 3. On the stream reference area, highlight the subtitle stream and then right-click the selected stream. Choose Edit from the popup menu that displays. The following window displays:

5-18

4042066 Rev A

4. Enter the language code as required and select Set. 5. When you have finished setting the subtitling values, choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the data. Note: The PNC lists most available languages, however your decoder may not be equipped to handle all of them. Check your decoder to see what is actually supported.

Default Settings on the CA and RCO Tabs


You can control access to a scrambled virtual channel by assigning program tiers and blackout or spotlight codes to it from the Service Assignment window. These default settings are important because whenever a scheduled event (see Scheduling Events on page 5-34) is not being transmitted, the PNC reverts to the values set for the default settings of the virtual channel.

4042066 Rev A

5-19

CA Tab
The information at the top of the CA tab (Name, Channel, Signal and Type) are read-only values, carried over from the General tab.

Scrambling Action
The radio buttons in this area of the window are activated for use if scrambling control is available for the event (i.e., a virtual channel has been assigned to control and use at least one of the elementary streams/services). Otherwise, the radio buttons are greyed out if scrambling control is unavailable for the event.
On

Use this radio button to determine if virtual channel scrambling is to be controlled by the event defined in this window. If this button is set to ON, the virtual channel assigned to control the elementary stream will switch scrambling on when the date and time value defined in the Start field is reached (i.e., the moment it occurs). Once the scrambling control period is completed for this event, scrambling control then returns either to the virtual channels next scheduled event or the default event. The default is ON.

Off

Use this radio button to turn Off any virtual channel scrambling which is controlled by the event defined in this window. You would normally use this button as an override switch to turn off (or prevent) scrambling which is in progress or scheduled for some period in the future.

5-20

4042066 Rev A

Note: If any elementary stream (video, audio, or data) is controlled by another virtual channel which is set to scramble, then even though the virtual channel associated with this event may have scrambling set to Off, the service will still be scrambled. Once the scrambling control period is completed for this event, scrambling control then returns either to the virtual channels next scheduled event or the default event. If, at a later date, you wish to reintroduce scrambling controlled by this event, then you simply set the new dates and times and click the On radio button. This method allows you to maintain the event in the database without the need to delete and then re-key the event data for future use. The default is OFF.

Blackout/Spotlight
Blackout codes control access by allowing selection of individual decoders or a group of decoders to be de-authorized for a specific single broadcast like a local sporting event. At the time of a broadcast, the blackout codes can override assigned tier authorization for a time determined by the operator and the decoder will actually be de-authorized for the specific broadcast. This occurs even if a decoder has been previously authorized to view a program and appropriate tiers have been assigned. Similar to the assignment of tiers, blackout codes can be associated with a virtual channel event and if the decoder profile matches any of the blackout codes associated with the virtual channel event, then the decoder is either authorized (spotlighted) or unauthorized (blacked out) to receive the event. See the following illustrative examples: For example, a sports channel (Virtual Channel 13) is sold in all three regions. Due to syndication, the game/program is not supposed to be broadcast in a certain radius, region D, around a city. Therefore, all IRDs in the shaded area are assigned blackout codes matching those associated with the blackout codes on the virtual channel/program event, and will be blacked out during that period of the program.

4042066 Rev A

5-21

Virtual Channel: 13 Tier Assignment: 50 Blackout Code: 111

A 50/-

B 50/-

C 50/-

D 50/111

Alternatively, in the event that a particular area has a spotlight, only those IRDs in the spotlighted area, region D, will be authorized for the program, provided the spotlight code matches the spotlight code of the virtual channel/program event.
Virtual Channel: 13 Tier Assignment: 50 Blackout Code: 111 Spotlight Code: 237

A 50/111

B 50/111

C 50/111

D 50/237

Blackout codes can be used in a variety of ways, however they are most often used to divide the IRD population into demographic groups to aid in program distribution, for advertising and designated marketing areas (DMA). Some additional considerations include:
Any

virtual channel or any event within a virtual channel can carry a maximum of 10 blackout codes for authorizations at any point in time IRD can hold up to a maximum of 4 blackout codes in its profile at any point in time maximum of 65,535 blackout/spotlight regions exists

Each A

5-22

4042066 Rev A

Setting Blackout Codes


The Blackout/Spotlight list shows the current list of blackout and spotlight locations for this event. Spotlight codes appear in blue. Blackout codes appear in black.

To set the location (blackout/spotlight) codes for the default event: 1. To add a blackout code to the list, enter the appropriate code in the Code field. Enter a code in the range 1 to 65535 that matches a blackout code set for the decoders. 2. Choose one of the following options for the code you entered. Whenever a scheduled event is not being transmitted, the virtual channel uses these default settings.
Spotlight Blackout

3. Set the priority of the code you have entered by moving it up or down in the list with the Up and Down buttons. Note: The codes in the Blackout/Spotlight list are applied cumulatively. The first code in the list (at the top) is applied first. Then the second code in the list is applied, and so on. Therefore, if the code at the bottom of the list overrides a code higher up, the earlier code is negated. For example, if the second blackout code on the list authorizes all appropriate decoders in a particular city to view an event, but the last blackout code on the list deauthorizes those same decoders, then the decoders will not be able to view the event. To change a code from blackout to spotlight (or vice versa), highlight the code and click the Toggle button.

4042066 Rev A

5-23

To remove a code, highlight it and click the Remove button. To remove all the codes and start over, click the Remove All button. Note: To streamline code selection, Windows Common User Access (CUA) modifier keys can be used. For example, to select several consecutive items, highlight the first item and then hold down the Shift key and select the last item in the list. All items in between will be selected. To select non-contiguous items, use the CTRL key as a modifier as you select each item. 4. When you finish adding default blackout codes for this channel, choose OK to save the changes, or Cancel to exit without saving the changes. 5. You can now assign default program tiers to the default event, as described in the previous topic, or choose the Save icon to save the information and return to the Event window.

Tiers
Tiers are an arbitrary set of numbers used for authorizing a program for a particular decoder. EMMs are used to deliver an encrypted 256-bit tier word, which defines access to specific tiers within a virtual channel. The number of tiers used depends on the system type and the customer application. For authorization to function correctly, a match has to occur between the tier information that is carried in the ECM for the virtual channels and the tier authorization information that is carried for each decoder in its EMM packets.
ECM: Specific to one program EMM: Specific to one decoder

Assigning Program Tiers


You can assign tiers in the range 1 to 255. If a subscribers program tier matches the active program tier you assign to this event, then the program is authorized and the subscriber receives the program. You must assign at least one program tier to an event. Note: The default tier for any newly-created event is 0 (zero). Cisco recommends that tier 0 not be used for any event. To assign program tiers to this virtual channel: 1. Click on the appropriate unused (gray) tier. The tier appears in green. To assign several tiers at once, click on the first tier, hold down the Shift key on your keyboard, and click on the last tier. 2. To remove a tier, click on the appropriate assigned tiers. The green tier turns

5-24

4042066 Rev A

gray. To remove several tiers at once, click on the first selected tier, hold down the Shift key on your keyboard, and click on the last selected tier. 3. Continue to add program tierbits until you have finished selecting the appropriate ones. Note: Any default settings or scheduled event can only be assigned a maximum of 20 tiers. 4. When you finish assigning tiers to the default event, choose OK to save the changes you made to the tier list, or choose Cancel to leave the window without changing the original information.

Saving the Changes


1. With the Event window open and active, choose the Save icon or choose Save from the Actions menu to save the changes you made to the default event. 2. Close the Event window to return to the Event schedule. 3. With the Event schedule window displayed and active, choose the Refresh icon, or choose Refresh from the Actions menu in order for the system to display the correct, current event schedule data in the window. You can now schedule other events for this virtual channel, or close the Event schedule window and perform another action.

RCO Tab
Setting the Remote Control Outputs
The PowerVu Satellite Receiver has TTL open-collector output ports (located on the back panel of the receiver) which can be controlled through the authorization system to act as general-purpose remote control ports. The active state is Low (sinking current) and the non-active state is High impedance, unless a pull-up resistor is connected to the remote control output pin. When the receiver is not receiving an input signal or is deauthorized, the remote control outputs default to High. To set the Remote Control Output: 1. Select one of the following output types for each Remote Control field. The default is No Control. Note: Exercise caution when you select the Pulse High and Pulse Low commands. The PNC system does not automatically check the previously set state. The pulse commands change the output to the

4042066 Rev A

5-25

set pulse level (0V or +5V). If the output of the control line is already at the level to be set, only a step results.
Output Type High Low Pulse High Pulse Low Description
The output is high state (+5V) The output is low state (0V). Pulses output to a high state (+5V) for x milliseconds Pulses output to a low state (0V) for x milliseconds x = 267 milliseconds (525-line or 60 Hz systems) x = 320 milliseconds (625-line or 50 Hz systems) Output remains in the state that it was in after the last control operation. If you set all the control output to No Control, the PNC system does not transmit a command to control the outputs, which reduces the authorization lock-up time and the memory overhead.

No Control

Remote Control Output Types Note: For a diagram and list of PowerVu Commercial Satellite Receiver Expansion Port/Remote Control Pinouts, see Expansion Port/Remote Control Pinouts/Cue Trigger on page A-2. 2. Once you finish setting these values, you can either define the service replacement options, set the blackout codes, assign the program tiers, or choose Save from the Actions menu and return to the Event schedule.

3. When you have finished, choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the data.

5-26

4042066 Rev A

Managing Virtual Channels


The following sections describe how to maintain and work with virtual channels.

Finding a Virtual Channel


To quickly find a specific virtual channel: 1. Choose Channel > Service Summary to display the Service Summary window. Note: The Service Summary window always uses the virtual channel number search criteria from the last time the window was searched. For example, if you selected channels 102 to 127 during your last editing session, then those channels automatically appear in the Service Summary window. 2. Enter a single channel, or a range of channels in the Channel(s) field. For example, if you wanted to search for and select virtual channels 344 to 359, the Channel(s) field in the Service Summary window would look like:

Note: If the Channel(s) field is left blank, then all virtual channels are selected by default. 3. Choose the Events button if you want the Service Summary window to display each channels associated scheduled events in the events panel. Note: This action results in a slower search. 4. Choose Search to start the search. When the search is concluded, any virtual channels meeting the search criteria are displayed in the virtual channel panel of the window.

4042066 Rev A

5-27

Editing a Virtual Channel


To edit an existing virtual channel, follow these steps. 1. Choose Channel > Service Summary. The Service Summary window displays, listing the existing virtual channels.

2. Double-click on an existing channel (or right-click an existing channel and choose Edit from the popup menu that displays) in the virtual channel panel of the Service Summary window. 3. Edit the information in the fields. You cannot edit the CA Scramble field or the Channel Number field. For information about the displayed fields, see Creating a Virtual Channel on page 5-9. Note: If you need to add streams, you need to drag-and-drop from the Stream Summary window. See Displaying and Using the Stream Summary Window on page 5-7 for more information. 4. When you finish changing the information, choose Save from the Actions menu to save your changes, or choose Undo to cancel them and leave the original values unchanged.

5-28

4042066 Rev A

Disabling a Virtual Channel


Channels enabled for transmission display their channel numbers in teal in the Service Summary window. To disable a channel so that it does not broadcast services, follow these steps. WARNING!: Disabling a virtual channel disrupts transmissions. 1. Choose Channel > Service Summary to display the Service Summary window. 2. Search for and highlight the channel you want to disable in the Service Summary window.

3. Double click on the channel number. When the system displays the Service Assignment window, clear the Enable check box in the Properties area of the window. 4. Choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save from the Actions menu to save the change. 5. Close the Service Assignment window. The system displays the Service Summary window. The channel number now appears in maroon with Off beside the number.

4042066 Rev A

5-29

Enabling a Disabled Virtual Channel


To enable a disabled virtual channel: 1. Choose Channel > Service Summary to display the Service Summary window. 2. Search for and highlight the channel you want to enable in the Service Summary window. 3. Double-click on the channel number. When the system displays the Service Assignment window, enable (check) the Enable check box in the Properties area of the windows General tab. 4. Choose the Save icon to save the change. 5. Close or move the Service Assignment window so the Service Summary window is visible again. The channel number now appears in teal, indicating it is now enabled.

Deleting a Virtual Channel


WARNING!: You should only delete a virtual channel for which the transmission has been disabled. If you delete a channel that is transmitting services, the services will immediately be disrupted. To delete a virtual channel, follow these steps: 1. Choose Channel > Service Summary to display the Service Summary window. 2. Search for and highlight the channel(s) you want to delete in the Service Summary window. 3. Right-click on the virtual channel and select Delete on the popup menu. The system displays the message:
Warning! You are about to delete a virtual channel. Do you want to continue?

4. Choose Yes to delete the channel(s), or No to cancel the deletion. The system updates the Service Summary window to remove the channel(s) from the list.

5-30

4042066 Rev A

Defining and Scheduling Events


Each scrambled virtual channel contains an Event Schedule that lists the channels defined events. You can control access to a channel by scheduling events to take place at particular times. This scheduling allows you to control access to a special program, blackout an event for a particular country, region or area, or control access to a channel for a specific time period. It is important to note that the start and end times for events/programs follows the defined time zone for the view, therefore take special care when specifying event start/end times. Note: A channel is scrambled when its definition includes at least one scrambled service. See Configuring Scrambling on page 4-144. There are two situations that need to be considered when controlling decoder access to the events scheduled for a channel:
What What

happens during the times when I have not scheduled events? See Default Settings below. happens during the times when I schedule events? See Scheduled Events below.

Whenever an event is scheduled for a virtual channel, the scheduled events settings take precedence over the default settings. Like the default settings, you can control access to a scheduled event by assigning program tiers and blackout/ spotlight codes.

Default Settings
During times when events are not scheduled it is necessary to have default settings defined to control decoder access to the virtual channel. This is done by defining/ editing control parameters from the Service Assignment for the appropriate Virtual Channel. These control parameters include:
Assigning Assigning Defining

program tiers to the Virtual Channel blackout/spotlight codes, if applicable

Remote Control Outputs, if applicable

When you created the Virtual Channel you may have already defined the default settings for this channel but if you havent or you need to edit this information see the following: To view the Service Assignment window: 1. Select the Service Summary icon or select Channel > Service Summary. 2. From the left side of the Service Summary window, select the virtual channel you want to define access for and double-click the virtual channel number. The

4042066 Rev A

5-31

Service Assignment view displays. 3. There are 2 tabs available to you for selection:
CA

allows you to set program tiers and blackout/spotlight codes allows you to define Remote Control Outputs

RCO

See CA Tab on page 5-50 and RCO Tab on page 5-50 for field definitions. 4. Choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the change(s).

Scheduled Events
You can schedule events for broadcast at any time, change their state (for example, from Expired to scheduled), and control the start and end times. Note: While there is no limit to the time range for which you can schedule events, keep in mind that the more events you have scheduled, the more computer resources you are going to occupy.

Displaying the Event Schedule Window


The event schedule lists all of the events currently defined for this virtual channel. Before you can schedule events for a virtual channel and control access to them, you must: Ensure that at least one of the elementary streams (video, audio or data) selected for the virtual channel is scrambled (encrypted). To scramble an elementary stream, you must enable the Scramble field for the stream on the card. For further information, see Configuring Scrambling on page 4-144. To see if a virtual channel is scrambled, view the channel in the Service Summary window, and see if the channel number appears in teal type, and the word OFF does not appear beside the channel number. Display the Service Assignment window for that channel. If the CA Scramble check box is selected, then the channel is scrambled (encrypted). If the CA Scramble check box is cleared (does not have an X in it), then the channel is not scrambled. Enable the virtual channel to broadcast its services. To see if a virtual channel is enabled, select Service Summary from the Channel menu to display the Service Summary window. If the channel number is displayed in teal type, then the channel is enabled to broadcast its services. If the channel number is displayed in red with the word OFF beside the number, then the channel is disabled. You must enable it before you can control access to the channels services and events. To display the Event schedule window for a virtual channel:

5-32

4042066 Rev A

1. Choose the Event Schedule icon, or choose Channel > Event Schedule. The system displays:

2. From the Virtual Channel list, select the virtual channel. The events for the channel are displayed in the Events area. Note: You can sort the displayed events according to one of the column types by clicking on the column heading. In addition, you can control which columns are displayed by right-clicking on any column heading to display the following window and selecting the columns you want:

4042066 Rev A

5-33

Scheduling Events
After you define the default settings for a virtual channel, you can schedule broadcast events for it. If periods occur when events are not scheduled, then the channel reverts to the default settings. To schedule an event for a virtual channel, follow these steps: 1. Choose the Service Summary icon, or choose Channel > Service Summary to display the Service Summary window.

2. Highlight the channel where you want to schedule events. 3. Choose the Event schedule icon, or click the secondary mouse button and choose Event schedule. The Event schedule window for the selected channel appears, listing all of the events currently scheduled for this channel, the state of each event, and the scheduled times. If you have not previously scheduled events for this channel, then nothing is displayed.

Note: A virtual channel must be scrambled in order for any event action defined in this window to take place. If the virtual channel is not scrambled, any action defined here will have no effect on the system whatsoever. For example, this situation could occur if a virtual channel is created, events are defined and then the virtual channel is turned off or scrambling is disabled. To add a new event: 1. Right-click on the white area below the column headers. 2. Select Add from the popup menu that displays; or choose Actions > Add. An empty Event Summary window displays.

5-34

4042066 Rev A

To copy an existing event: 1. Highlight the event you want to copy on the Event schedule window. 2. Choose Actions > Copy. 3. Choose Actions > Paste. An Event window for the new event displays. Note: The time displayed in this window indicates the system server time, not the local time of your PC.

Saving an Event Schedule to a File


You can save an event schedule to a file for further analysis. To save an event schedule to a text file: 1. With the Event Schedule window displayed, select File > Save As. 2. If the Prompt for fields box has been checked in the Options > Configuration>View >Event Search window, the Save Fields pop-up window will be displayed as shown below. Note: The default settings displayed in the Save Fields window are preset in the Options> Configuration window. To preset this view to save the Event Schedule s in a particular format, see the instructions following this procedure to set the Save As and View functions.

3. Choose to save All the fields, only those Visible or only those Selected, to a text file.
All Visible Selected Fields

Saves all the fields in the Save Events window to a file. Saves only those fields to a file which are visible in the displayed view. Saves only the fields selected in the Save As window to a file as shown in the

4042066 Rev A

5-35

example below. If do not want the Save Fields windows to appear the next time you save the event schedule to a file, check the Do not show this dialog box again box. The same settings will be used to save the file the next time you perform this operation. If you do not want the Save Fields windows to appear the next time you save the Event Schedule to a file, check the Do not show this dialog box again box. The same settings will be used to save the file the next time you perform this operation. Note: Any changes made to the Fields settings at the top of the Save Fields window (i.e., All, Visible or Selected) also appear in the Options> Configuration > View settings, and vice versa. 4. Click OK. 5. In the Windows Save Events window, select the desired folder, the file name and the file format (txt or html) as shown in the following example.

6. Choose Save to save the event schedule to a file or Cancel to abort the operation.

Preconfigured Save As Function


The Save As function can be used to preconfigure how Event Schedules are saved to a file. To set the parameters you want to use to format the saved information:

5-36

4042066 Rev A

1. Choose the Configuration icon, or choose Options > Configuration.

2. Click Save As to display the view shown below.

3. Select the parameters you want to use to format the saved files. This view displays the default characters.
Fields terminated by

The entered character terminates all fields in the file with the selected character. The default is ,, which acts a delimiter. The entered character encloses all fields in the file with the selected character. The default is ., which acts as a delimiter. The entered character terminates all lines in the file with the selected ANSI characters. ANSI escape sequences \r (carriage return), \n (new line) and \t (horizontal tab) are supported. The default is \r\n.

Fields enclosed by

Lines terminated by

4042066 Rev A

5-37

Save header

Check the Save header box to include the header at the top of the file.

4. Choose OK to save the settings to the database or Cancel to abort any changes.

View
The View function is used to pre-select the format of the Event Schedule information when saved to a file. To select the parameters you want to use to format the saved information: 1. Choose the Configuration icon, or choose Options > Configuration. You will see a window similar to that shown below.

2. Select Event Schedule to set the Save As view for saving an event schedule

5-38

4042066 Rev A

to a file.

Prompt for Fields

Check this box to be prompted for the fields you wish to save to a file when performing the File > Save As function. The Save Fields pop-up window is disabled when the Prompt for Fields box is left unchecked. The All, Visible and Selected radio buttons function identical to those displayed in the Save Fields pop-up window. Any changes made to this window also appear in the Save Fields pop-up window when saving the Event Schedule to a file.

Fields selection

4042066 Rev A

5-39

Event Summary Window


The default Event Summary window is a five-tabbed window which allows you to control events. The available tabs are: General (defines Program Schedule characteristics) (See General Tab on page 5-10) SR (See SR Tab on page 5-42) FPT (See FPT Tab on page 5-47) RCO (See RCO Tab on page 5-25) CA (See CA Tab on page 5-20)

General Tab
Enter or select information for the following fields:
Name

Enter an unique reference name for the new event. The description you type does not affect the programming. Only operators with read/write privileges can change the description. All events are in one of the five program States. Each event is scheduled in chronological order by start time and date. Operators with read/write privileges can change the events state in the Event schedule window. The default state for a new event is Hold. You must change the event state, normally to queued, before the event will be transmitted. For information about changing the events state, see Changing an Events Status on page 551.

State

State Active

Description
An active event is currently being broadcast. When its endtime is reached, its state automatically changes to Expired.

5-40

4042066 Rev A

State Queued

Description
A queued event is broadcast and placed in the active state when its start time is reached, and is then rescheduled. From the Event schedule window, you can manually place a queued event in the Active state, or place it on hold. A missed event is one that has not been broadcast due to a system shutdown. You can place a missed event in the Active, queued or Hold states from the Event schedule window.

Missed

Hold

A held event is one that has been temporarily suspended, and has no effect on event scheduling. You can place it in the Active or queued state from the Event schedule window.

Expired

An expired event has already been broadcast. It appears in dark grey type. You can place it in the Active, Hold, or queued state. If you place an expired event in a queued state, then it is automatically scheduled to broadcast on the same day of the week and at the same starting time that it was previously broadcast. For example, if you queue up an expired event on a Friday and it was last broadcast on the Monday at 9:30 pm, the event will be queued up to broadcast on the next Monday at 9:30 pm. Expired events have no effect on programming unless you change their status.

Group Ref

This field is for Cisco service personnel only.

Program Schedule
Start

Enter the date the program is to be broadcast from calendar, and then enter the time (according to the PNC Server time, not the PNC Client local time) the program is to be broadcast according to the 12-hour clock. You can set the start time up to 31 days in advance of the current time. Notes: 1. Make sure that your Windows XP settings agree with the mm-dd-yy format for the start and end dates; otherwise, unpredictable results can occur. To verify or change your Windows XP settings, go to the Control Panel and choose the Regional Settings icon. Select the Date tab, and confirm that mm-dd-yy is selected. 2. The Start and End times are displayed according to PNC Server time, not local PNC Client time. Make sure that the server time is correct before performing any event schedule activities. It is important to note that the start and end times for events/programs follows the defined time zone for the view, therefore take special care when specifying event start/end times.

4042066 Rev A

5-41

End

Select the date this event is to end, and then enter the time the event is to end according to the 12-hour clock. CAUTION:Ensure that the events duration is less than 15 days. The difference between the start and end time determines the event duration. If an event is forced into the Expired state, the end time is not changed. Active events who reach the end time become Expired events.

Actual Start Actual End

These two informational fields show the actual start and end of the event. Sometimes previous events may run long, or there may be an unplanned event occur, in which case these fields show when the impacted event actually started and stopped.

Scheduling Conflicts
When you schedule an event, the PNC system checks the event schedule for scheduling conflicts. If a conflict occurs, then an error message is displayed to indicate the conflict. The PNC system checks for conflicts in the following order: The Start Time of the event you are queuing is set to a time when another scheduled event is scheduled to be broadcast. The End Time of the event you are queuing is set to a time when another scheduled event is scheduled to be broadcast. The Start Time of the event you are queuing is set to a time when an Active event is on transmission. The End Time of the event you are queuing is set to a time when an Active event is on transmission. The Start Time for the event you are queuing is the same as the Start Time for another event in an Active, scheduled, or Hold state. The End Time is before the current time. Note: Event Start and End times are triggered by the time on the server, not your client PCs local time.

SR Tab
Defining Service Replacement (optional)
The PNC service replacement feature enables the operator to replace or substitute one kind of program with another all without the viewer knowing that a channel substitution has occurred. After a defined amount of time during which the service replacement is being broadcast to the viewer (anywhere from a few seconds for a short advertisement, to several hours for a movie or special presentation), the system switches back to the original virtual channel at the conclusion of the service

5-42

4042066 Rev A

replacement event. There are three types of service replacement: Scheduled Replacement in which a defined (timed) event on a primary channel causes a switch to the service being broadcast on a linked alternate channel. Conditional Access Replacement in which the content being broadcast to viewers receiver is filtered according to whether or not the receiver is authorized to access the broadcast. Authorized receivers remain tuned to the broadcast, while unauthorized receivers are switched to an alternate channel. Cue Trigger Replacement in which all receivers tuned to a primary channel are switched to an alternate channel if the specified cue trigger is set OFF If the specified cue trigger is set to the ON position, all receivers remain on . the primary channel. To set the service replacement parameters: 1. Choose Service Replacement Tab on the Event Summary (specific event name) window. The Service Replacement window displays.

Note: You can only define a service replacement if the event is associated with a virtual channel that is defined as a primary channel. The service replacement feature is unavailable for a channel defined as an alternate. 2. Enter or select information for the following fields:
SR Type

Use this field to select the type of service replacement this event controls. Choose from None, CA, Scheduled and Cue Trigger. The None option forces the event to behave like a non-service replacement event. If the None option is selected, the other fields in this window are greyed out. The other option types are covered in greater detail later in this topic.

Alternate Channel

Use this field to type in the alternate channel number. This number is the target channel number that the receiver tunes to when a service replacement event (i.e., CA, Scheduled, or Cue Trigger) reaches its start time.

4042066 Rev A

5-43

Cue Trigger Mask (optional)

A check mark indicates that the particular pin is enabled for cue trigger operation. The default setting for each pin is OFF. Note: These check boxes are only functional with the Cue Trigger Replacement feature. When the Cue Trigger Filter is enabled for one or more remote control pins, open collector information for the pins is transmitted as part of the compressed MPEG-2 video signal. This enables operators at remote sites (provided the site is outfitted with the required third party hardware and software) to control digital advertisement insertion equipment, and control video overlay machines. 3. Choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the database.

Scheduled Service Replacement


This is a defined event on a primary channel which causes a switch to the service being broadcast on a linked alternate channel. For example, a broadcaster offers a local news channel available as a basic service to all subscribers. However, the broadcaster wants all receivers tuned to the local news channel to display the national news during a certain period each day.
Service
Local News Local News National News

Chnl
10 20 90

6:00 pm
Local News 1 Local News 2 All National News

6:30 pm

7:00 pm

7:30 pm
Local News 1 Local News 2

Broadcaster wants to insert national news here Broadcaster wants to insert national news here

Service Replacement The broadcasters PNC operator performs the following steps to achieve the scheduled service replacement: 1. Create a new event for each channel. 2. Set the Start Time to 6:30 pm and the End Time to 7:30 pm for both events. 3. On the events Service Replacement window, select the Scheduled Replacement Type and set the Alternate Channel to 90. 4. Save the new events to the database and schedule them up. When the Start Time for the event arrives, all receivers tuned to the primary channels 10 and 20 switch to alternate channel 90 and remain there for the duration of the event. At the end of the defined event period, all affected receivers

5-44

4042066 Rev A

re-tune to their original primary channels (i.e., 10 or 20).

Conditional Access Service Replacement


This is a defined event on a primary channel in which the content being broadcast to viewers receivers is filtered according to whether or not the receiver is authorized to access the broadcast. Using CA event scrambling as the controlling medium, authorized receivers remain tuned to the broadcast, while unauthorized receivers are switched to an alternate channel. For example, a sports broadcaster offers a set of syndicated sports channels and a set of premium sports channels. The syndicated sports channels are basic services available to all subscribers. The premium sports channels consists of events which the subscribers must pay extra for on a per event basis. The broadcaster wants to ensure that all subscribers tuned to a premium sports channel either remain tuned to the channel and receive the service they paid for, or are sent to a substitute syndicated service automatically when the event occurs.
Service
Premium Sports 1 (scrambled) Premium Sports 2 (scrambled) Syndicated Sports

Chnl
101

6:00 pm
NASCAR

7:00 pm

8:00 pm

9:00 pm

Boxing Special: Tyson vs. Holmes Broadcaster wants all unauthorized subscribers sent to a syndicated alternate. Hockey Stanley Cup: New York vs. Montreal Broadcaster wants all unauthorized subscribers sent to a syndicated alternate. Bowling Sports Report Plowing Match

201

NBA

10

Fishing

Conditional Access Service Replacement The broadcasters PNC operator performs the following steps to achieve the CA service replacement: 1. Define a new event for 101 and 201. 2. Set the Start Time to 7:00 pm and the End Time to 10:00 pm for both events. 3. On the events Service Replacement window, select the CA Replacement Type and set the Alternate Channel to 10. 4. Select the tier or blackout code for the event and ensure that all authorized receivers share the same blackout code or tier. 5. Save the new events to the database and queue them up. When the Start Time for the event arrives, all receivers tuned to the primary channels 101 and 201 switch to alternate channel 10 and remain there for the duration of the event if they are not authorized to view the event. At the end of the defined event period, all affected receivers re-tune to their original primary

4042066 Rev A

5-45

channels (i.e., 101 or 201).


Viewer
Viewer A authorized Viewer B unauthorized

Service
Premium Sports 1 Premium Sports 2

Chnl
101 201

6:00 pm
NASCAR NBA

7:00 pm

8:00 pm

9:00 pm

Boxing Special: Tyson vs. Holmes Hockey Stanley Cup: New York vs. Montreal unauthorized program for Viewer B Bowling Sports Report Plowing Match

Syndicated Sports (unscrambled)

10

Conditional Access

Cue Trigger Service Replacement


This is a defined event on a primary channel in which all receivers tuned to a primary channel are switched to an alternate channel if the specified cue trigger is set OFF. If the specified cue trigger is set to the ON position, all receivers remain on the primary channel. For example, a broadcaster wants all receivers tuned to certain primary channels to re-tune to the local advertising pool during commercial breaks.
Service
Commercials 1 Primary Movie Channel Primary Movie Channel

Chnl
10 101 102

6:00 pm

6:30 pm

7:00 pm

7:30 pm

Local Advertisements #1 The English Patient The Right Stuff

Advertising Pool Re-tune The broadcasters PNC operator performs the following steps to achieve the cue trigger service replacement: 1. Create new events for primary channels 101 and 102. 2. Set the Start Time to 6:00 pm and the End Time to 8:00 pm for both movie events. 3. On each events Service Replacement window, select the Cue Trigger Replacement Type and set the Alternate Channel to 10. 4. Set the Cue Trigger Mask for each event as desired. 5. Save the events to the database and schedule them up. When the events Start Time arrives, all receivers tuned to the primary channel

5-46

4042066 Rev A

switch to the defined alternate channel if the specified cue trigger is set to OFF If . the specified cue trigger is set to ON, the receiver remains tuned to the primary channel.

FPT Tab
Defining the Fingerprint Settings (optional)
The PNC fingerprint trigger feature can be used to force decoders to momentarily display their serial numbers within the video image in a series of numerals or coded dots. By capturing this display, you can interpret the results to determine the decoders User Address. In this way, you can trace the source of suspicious signals violating subscription rights. Contact Cisco for information on how to decipher the fingerprints numeric or coded dot representation. Note: This information available in this window is an optional feature only. To set the fingerprint trigger characteristics for this event: 1. Choose FPT on the Event Summary (specific event name) window. The

4042066 Rev A

5-47

Fingerprint Settings window is displayed.

2. Enter or select information for the following fields:


Grid/Map

The fingerprint grid/map in the top left corner of the window represents the position of the fingerprint information on the video image. You can use the mouse to position the fingerprint on the video image instead of using the position control fields. Position the cursor where you want to place the fingerprint image (a small 3D box appears representing the relative position) and click the primary mouse button.

Enable

When selected this enables fingerprint trigger support for the current event.

Timing
Delay

Enter the amount of time that is to pass after the events Start Time before the decoders display their serial numbers. Enter a delay of from 00 minutes 00 seconds to 42 minutes 30 seconds. Enter the amount of time (in one tenth of a second increments) that the fingerprint trigger is to be active. You can enter a range of time from 0 to 255. The minimum setting is 1 tenth of a second. Enter the amount of time (in minutes and seconds) that the fingerprint trigger is to be OFF (inactive). You can enter a range of time from 0 seconds to 42 minutes 30 seconds. The minimum setting is 10 seconds and it can be adjusted in one second increments. Displays the total amount of time scheduled for the event (start/end date and time) on the Event configuration window along with the variations caused by the values in other timing fields in this window. Note: Modifications to the value of the Delay, On Duration, Off Duration,

On Duration

Off Duration

Duration

5-48

4042066 Rev A

and Repeat Count fields are calculated by the system and are displayed in the Duration value shown here.
Random Off Duration

Use this check box to determine if the system controls the off duration using random time values. When this feature is activated, the off duration may vary between 10 seconds (the minimum off duration) to no more than the maximum value defined by the user for the off duration. Note: This check box is only activated if the user selects a value (other than zero) for the On Duration field.

Repeat Count

Use this field to define the number of times the fingerprint information is displayed during the course of the event. You can enter a range from 0 to 127. A value of 0 represents a special case which instructs the system to perform unending repeats. Note: This field is only activated if the user selects a value (other than zero) for the On Duration field.

Position
Location

Use this field to select the general location where the fingerprint information will appear on the video image. Use this field to select one of eight vertical positions the fingerprint will occupy within the region defined in the Location field. Use this field to select one of eight horizontal positions the fingerprint will occupy within the region defined in the Location field. Use this check box to force the PNC system to move the fingerprint location randomly to any one of the eight positions within the vertical position region. When this check box is set ON, the value in the Vertical Position field is ignored. When this check box is set OFF, the fingerprints position is fixed to one of the eight exact positions defined in the Vertical Position field.

Vertical Position

Horizontal Position

Random Vertical Position

Random Horizontal Position

Use this check box to force the PNC system to move the fingerprint location randomly to any one of the eight positions within the horizontal position region. When this check box is set ON, the value in the Horizontal Position field is ignored. When this check box is set OFF, the fingerprints position is fixed to one of the eight exact positions defined in the Horizontal Position field.

Display
Mode

Use this field to select either a graphical or numeric fingerprint display.

4042066 Rev A

5-49

Size

Use this field to select the size of the fingerprint display.

Color
Foreground Transparent Background

Use this field to select the fingerprints display color. Use this check box to determine if the fingerprint displays on a black or transparent background. If the check box is set ON, the fingerprint displays against the current background color. If the check box is set OFF, the fingerprint displays against a black background. 3. When you finish adjusting the fingerprint settings, choose OK to save the changes, or Cancel to exit the window without saving the changes. 4. Choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the database.

RCO Tab
For a procedure to set Remote Control Outputs, see Setting the Remote Control Outputs on page 5-25. You can edit the Remote Control Outputs for this event.

CA Tab
For information on this tab, see CA Tab on page 5-20.

Saving the New Event


If you are not going to change the assigned blackout codes or program tiers, then you should now save the new event. 1. Choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save this event to the database. 2. Choose the Refresh icon, or choose Actions > Refresh to update the information displayed in the Channel schedule. For information about defining service replacement, changing blackout codes and assigning program tiers for a new event, refer to the topics later in this chapter.

5-50

4042066 Rev A

Changing an Events Status


All scheduled events are in one of the five states listed in the State table. For details, see State on page 5-40. Each event is scheduled in chronological order by start time and date. Operators with read/write privileges can change the events state in the Event schedule window. Notes:
The You

default status for a newly created event is Hold. To ready the event for broadcasting, you must change its state to queued. can also change an event from Expired to Active by editing the event and changing its starting and ending dates.

To change the status of an event, follow these steps: 1. Choose Channel > Event Schedule. 2. Select the channel whose event status you want to change from the Virtual Channel list. After a moment, that channels events display in the Events window. Note: Although you can schedule events for unscrambled channels, or for disabled channels, it will have no effect unless you activate scrambling for the virtual channel. 3. Find the specific event you want to change and right-click on it to display the popup menu. 4. Choose the appropriate state from the popup menu:

Activate

Choose Activate to change the state of a Queued, Missed, Held or Expired event to an Active state. The events color changes to bright green type. Choose Hold to change the state of a Queued, Missed or Expired event to the Hold state. The events color changes to brown type. Choose Queued to change the state of a Held or Expired event to the Queued state. The events color changes to dark green type. Choose Expire to force an event to expire and disappear from the schedule.

Hold

Queue

Expire

4042066 Rev A

5-51

Note: You can easily re-schedule expired events by editing the event and changing its scheduled dates, then changing its state to Queued. 5. Choose Actions > Save to save the changes you have made. 6. Choose Actions > Refresh to update the information in the Event schedule.

Copying Events
You can copy single or multiple events within a virtual channel, or between virtual channels. This enables you to easily duplicate events without having to recreate all their parameters. When copying events, the existing settings are copied to the new event(s). Note: You can copy up to 20 events at any one time. If you attempt to copy more than 20 events at any one time, a warning message will be displayed. If you need to copy more than 20 events, do this is as two actions.

Copying a Single Event


To copy a single event: 1. In the Event schedule window, highlight the event that you want to copy.

2. Click Actions > Copy, or right-click the selection and click Copy. 3. In the Event Copy dialog, in the Target VC field, select the virtual channel to which you want to copy the event.

5-52

4042066 Rev A

4. Click OK. The Event Summary (create) window displays.

5. In the Event Summary window, select the appropriate tab and modify the parameters as required. For information on how to modify the parameters in the Event Summary window tabs, refer to the descriptions in Event Summary Window on page 5-40. 6. Click Actions > Save. The event copy is added to the list of events in the Event Schedule. Note: The system assigns each copied event to the target Virtual Channel to the Hold state.

4042066 Rev A

5-53

Copying Multiple Events


To copy multiple events: 1. In the Event schedule window, highlight the events that you want to copy.

2. Click Actions > Copy, or right-click the selections and click Copy. 3. In the Event Copy dialog, in the Target VC field, select the virtual channel to which you want to copy the events.

4. Click OK. The copied events are added to the list of events in the Event Schedule. Note: The system assigns each copied event in the target Virtual Channel to the Hold state. 5. To modify the parameters of the events: a) Right-click the first event and select Edit. b) In the Event Summary window, select the appropriate tab and modify the parameters as required. For information on how to modify the parameters in the Event Summary window tabs, refer to the descriptions in Event Summary Window on page 5-40. 6. Click Actions > Save. 7. Edit each of the other copied events as required.

5-54

4042066 Rev A

Expired Log
You can view the expired events log by choosing Channel > Expired Log. Choose a virtual channel to view expired events for from the list at the top of the window. When the expired events display in the window, you can right-click on an event and either select View, Copy or Delete.

View

View shows all the same tab dialogs and fields that are available during event scheduling, but no edits are possible. Copy allows you to copy the expired event and reschedule it for another day and time. Delete allows you to permanently remove the expired event entry from the log. Note: If you place an expired event in a queued state, then it is automatically scheduled to broadcast on the same day of the week and at the same starting time that it was previously broadcast. For example, if you schedule up an expired event on a Friday and it was last broadcast on the Monday at 9:30 pm, the event will be scheduled up to broadcast on the next Monday at 9:30 pm. Expired events have no effect on programming unless you change their status. However, you should delete Expired, Missed, or Hold events whenever possible to increase system performance and to reduce memory storage requirements.

Copy

Delete

Saving an Expired Event Log to a File


You can save expired event logs to a file for further analysis. To save an expired event log to a text file: 1. With the Expired Event Log window displayed, select File > Save As. 2. If the Prompt for fields box has been checked in the Options > Configuration>View >Expired Event Log window, the Save Fields pop-up window will be displayed as shown below.

4042066 Rev A

5-55

Note: The default settings displayed in the Save Fields window are preset in the Options> Configuration window. To preset this view to save the Expired Event Log in a particular format, see the instructions following this procedure to set the Save As and View functions.

3. Choose to save All the fields, only those Visible or only those Selected, to a text file.
All Visible Selected Fields

Saves all the fields in the Expired Event Log window to a file. Saves only those fields to a file which are visible in the displayed view. Saves only the fields selected in the Save As window to a file as shown in the example below. If you do not want the Save Fields windows to appear the next time you save the Expired Event Log to a file, check the Do not show this dialog box again box. The same settings will be used to save the file the next time you perform this operation. Note: Any changes made to the Fields settings at the top of the Save Fields window (i.e., All, Visible or Selected) also appear in the Options> Configuration > View settings, and vice versa. 4. Click OK. 5. In the Windows Save Events window, select the desired folder, the file name

5-56

4042066 Rev A

and the file format (txt or html) as shown in the following example.

6. Choose Save to save the Expired Event Log to a file or Cancel to abort the operation.Preconfigured Save As Function The Save As function can be used to preconfigure how Expired Event Logs are saved to a file. To set the parameters you want to use to format the saved information: 1. Choose the Configuration icon, or choose Options > Configuration.

4042066 Rev A

5-57

2. Click Save As to display the view shown below.

3. Select the parameters you want to use to format the saved files. This view displays the default characters.
Fields terminated by

The entered character terminates all fields in the file with the selected character. The default is ,, which acts a delimiter. The entered character encloses all fields in the file with the selected character. The default is ., which acts as a delimiter. The entered character terminates all lines in the file with the selected ANSI characters. ANSI escape sequences \r (carriage return), \n (new line) and \t (horizontal tab) are supported. The default is \r\n. Check the Save header box to include the header at the top of the file.

Fields enclosed by

LInes terminated by

Save header

4. Choose OK to save the settings to the database or Cancel to abort any changes.

View
The View function is used to pre-select the format of the Expired Event Log information when saved to a file. To select the parameters you want to use to format the saved information: 1. Choose the Configuration icon, or choose Options > Configuration. You will see a window similar to that shown below.

5-58

4042066 Rev A

2. Select Expired Event Log to set the Save As view for saving an expired event log to a file.

Prompt for Fields

Check this box to be prompted for the fields you wish to save to a file when performing the File > Save As function. The Save Fields pop-up window is disabled when the Prompt for Fields box is left unchecked. The All, Visible and Selected radio buttons function identical to those displayed in the Save Fields pop-up window. Any changes made to this window also appear in the Save Fields pop-up window when saving the Expired Event Log to a file.

Fields selection

4042066 Rev A

5-59

View Configuration
The View function is also used to pre-select the format of the information to be displayed in a Decoder Search, an Event Schedule or Event Summary, for example. To select the view you want to display for the Event Summary: 1. Choose the Configuration icon, or choose Options > Configuration. You will see a window similar to that shown below.

2. Select Event Summary and then choose between the Default view or Large General (SR+CA) screen view.

5-60

4042066 Rev A

3. Choose OK to save the changes to the database and close the window or Cancel to abort all changes. Note: Changes to configurations that are made to the Large Screen View will not apply to event summary views that are already open.

Event Summary Default View

To view the Large Screen Default View of the Event Summary, double-click on the desired Event in the Event Schedule.

Event Summary Large Screen View

To view the Large Screen View of the Event Summary, double-click on the desired Event in the Event Schedule.

4042066 Rev A

5-61

Controlling Program Access


You can control access to the entire signal, or to certain events that take place on channels. The method you use depends on your requirements, your system configuration, and your system design.

Signal Access Using the Installed Flag


When you load new decoders onto the database, their default Installed state is No. Before decoders can receive services, you must change the Installed flag to Yes. Generally, if decoders are being stored, you can leave the Installed flag at No to ensure that they cannot be used (provided the Installed flag was not set to Yes earlier). When you want to suspend a decoders access to services, you can change the Installed flag to Disabled to send killer message packets to the decoder that will destroy its authorization profile, thus ensuring that unauthorized users cannot gain access to the signal. For a detailed procedure about changing the Installed status for decoders, see Installing the Decoders on page 6-51.

Signal Access Using Multi-Session Keys


The multi-session key is a security measure that encrypts the entire uplink signal to ensure that unauthorized users cannot access it. A decoder is only authorized to decode the encrypted broadcast signal if it has the current multi-session key. The operator may include this information as a component of the data packets for addressed transmission. The multi-session key is a system feature that can be applied to all decoders. You should change it on a regular basis to ensure system integrity. Before a decoder can receive and decrypt broadcast signals, you must enable it to receive the MSK. For a procedure to allow a decoder to receive and decrypt the MSK, see Authorized Programs on page 6-2.

Service Access Using Program Tierbits


You can use program tierbits to control the level of service your subscribers can access on scrambled channels. First, you assign program tierbits to default and/or scheduled events on that channel. You then assign tierbits to the subscribers decoder to match the services the subscriber has requested. When the channel broadcasts the signal for an event, the assigned event tierbits

5-62

4042066 Rev A

accompany the signal. When the decoder receives the signal, it searches its profile for a matching tierbit. If it finds an identical match, and you have set the tierbit to allow viewing, then the subscriber can watch the default event (the channel) or the scheduled event. If the decoder finds an identical match, and you have set the tierbit so that viewing is disallowed, then the decoder cannot decode the signal, and the subscriber cannot view the default event or scheduled event. You can assign the same program tierbits to several channels or events to create a package of services. For example, you can assign the same program tierbit to a family movie channel, a cartoon channel, and a childrens entertainment channel to offer subscribers a childrens program package. In this way, you can use one tierbit to control several channels (or events) at once. You can also assign several tierbits to the same default or scheduled event to provide different levels of service. Assigning program tierbits to default and scheduled events is discussed later in this chapter. Note: Any default event or scheduled event can only be assigned a maximum of 20 tiers.

Service Access Using Blackout Codes


You use blackout codes to control viewing of a specific event in a particular geographical or spatial location. Whereas a tierbit assigned to an event either allows or disallows viewing across the entire decoder database, blackout codes affect only decoders that both have the appropriate program tierbit, and that are tagged with the specific blackout code. For example, if a baseball game is to be broadcast everywhere except the city in which it is being played, then you can use the blackout code for that city to blackout any decoders in the city that would normally receive the event. Similarly, you can broadcast an event so that only authorized decoders in a particular country, geographical area, city or town can receive it, depending on how the system administrator has designed the blackout codes. Note: Any default event or scheduled event can only be assigned a maximum of 10 blackout/spotlight codes.

Sample Program Tiers and Blackout Codes


The tables below illustrate the concept of program tiers and blackout codes. Each event has been assigned a program tier according to its origin. In this case, the system administrator assigned event program tiers by station for The Movie Channel and The Sports Channel, and by program type for the news packages. The Movie Channel and The Sports Channel each have an individual program tier assigned, while NEWS and FIN NEWS (financial news) share the program tier 255. Subscribers with program tier 255 can access both the news channel and the

4042066 Rev A

5-63

financial news channel.


Stations
The Movie Channel The Sports Channel NEWS FIN NEWs 21 92 255

Assigned Program Tier

The subscribers ordered the following services, and had program tiers assigned to their decoders as follows:
Subscriber
Subscriber A (City X) Subscriber B (City Y) Subscriber C (City Z)

Assigned Decoder Program Tiers


21 (The Movie Channel) 92 (The Sports Channel) 92 (The Sports Channel) 255 (NEWS and FIN NEWs) 92 (The Sports Channel) 255 (NEWS and FIN NEWs)

When a subscriber selects a channel, the decoder, with updated authorization information stored in its local memory, first checks for matching program tiers. If no match is found, then the subscriber is not authorized for that event. If a match is found, the decoder then checks to see if any assigned event blackout codes are identical to the decoders blackout codes. If a match is found, then the subscriber is not authorized for that event. In the charts below, Subscriber Bs program tier and blackout code match Event 2s assigned program tier and blackout code. Consequently, Subscriber B cannot access Event 2.

5-64

4042066 Rev A

Event 1: 830 a.m. NEWS and FIN NEWs Program Tiers (Event)
255 (NEWS and FIN NEWs)

Subscriber A City X Program Tiers (Decoder)


21 (Movie Channel) 92 (Sports Channel)

Blackout Codes
76 (City V)

Blackout Codes
17 (City X)

Result
No matching Program Tiers. NOT AUTHORIZED

Subscriber B City Y
92 (Sports Channel) 255 (NEWS and FIN NEW) 173 (City Y)

Result
Matching Program Tier 255. Blackout Code does not match Blackout Code. AUTHORIZED.

Subscriber C City Z
92 (Sports Channel) 255 (NEWS and FIN NEWs) 95 (City Z)

Result
Matching Program Tier 255. Blackout Code does not match Blackout Code. AUTHORIZED.

4042066 Rev A

5-65

Event 2: 2:15 p.m. The Sports Channel Program Tiers (Event)


92 (The Sports Channel)

Subscriber A City X Program Tiers (Decoder)


21 (Movie Channel) 92 (Sports Channel)

Blackout Codes
173 (City Y)

Blackout Codes
17 (City X)

Result
Matching Program Tier 92. Blackout Code 173 does not match Blackout Code 17. AUTHORIZED.

Subscriber B City Y
92 (Sports Channel) 255 (NEWS and FIN NEWs) 173 (City Y)

Result
Matching Program Tier 92. Matching Blackout Code and Blackout Code 173. NOT AUTHORIZED.

Subscriber C City Z
92 (Sports Channel) 255 (NEWS and FIN NEWs) 95 (City Z)

Result
Matching Program Tier 92. Blackout Code does not match Blackout Code. AUTHORIZED.

5-66

4042066 Rev A

Event 3: 7:30 p.m. The Movie Channel Program Tiers (Event)


21 (The Movie Channel)

Subscriber A City X Program Tiers (Decoder)


21 (Movie Channel) 92 (Sports Channel)

Blackout Codes
200 (City W)

Blackout Codes
17 (City X)

Result
Matching Program Tier 21. Blackout Code 200 does not match Blackout Code 17. AUTHORIZED.

Subscriber B City Y
92 (Sports Channel) 255 (NEWS and FIN NEWs) 173 (City Y)

Result
No matching Program Tier. NOT AUTHORIZED.

Subscriber C City Z
92 (Sports Channel) 255 (NEWS and FIN NEWs) 95 (City Z)

Result
No matching Program Tier. NOT AUTHORIZED.

Also see Defining and Scheduling Events on page 5-31 for details on how spotlight and blackout codes work together with program tiers.

4042066 Rev A

5-67

Managing Events
The following sections describe how to control and manage Events.

Finding an Event
To find a specific event scheduled on a specific virtual channel, follow the steps below. Note: You can proceed with Step 1 below immediately, or you can first display the Service Summary screen and highlight the number of the virtual channel you want. 1. Choose the Event schedule icon, or choose Channel > Event schedule. The system displays:

Note: You can sort the displayed events according to one of the column types by clicking on the column heading. Therefore, if the events are displayed in an order you are not accustomed to, simply resort them. 2. From the Virtual Channel pull-down list, select the virtual channel whose events you want to work with. Note: The Events window for the selected channel lists all events currently scheduled for the channel, each events state, and the scheduled times. If you have not previously scheduled events for this channel, only the default event is displayed. 3. If the channel contains a large number of scheduled events, you can make finding the event you want easier by sorting. To do a sort, either choose Actions > Sort, or right click one of the column headings and select the columns you want.

Editing an Event
To edit a scheduled event, follow these steps:

5-68

4042066 Rev A

Note: You can proceed with Step 1 below immediately, or you can first display the Service Summary screen and highlight the number of the virtual channel you want. 1. Choose the Event schedule access icon, or choose Channel > Event schedule. The system displays:

2. From the Virtual Channel pull-down list, select the virtual channel whose events you want to edit. The Events window for the selected channel lists all events currently scheduled for the channel, each events state, and the scheduled times. If you have not previously scheduled events for this channel, only the default event is displayed. 3. Highlight the event you want to edit, and either choose Actions > Edit or right-click on the event you want to edit and choose Edit from the popup menu. You can also double click the event you want to edit. The Event Summary window displays with the current settings for the event.

4. Edit the information you want to change. For more information on the Event Summary window, see Event Summary Window on page 5-40. 5. Choose Actions > Save, or choose the Save icon to save the changes to the database. 6. Choose Actions > Refresh to display the changes in the Event Summary window.

4042066 Rev A

5-69

Deleting an Event
You cannot delete Active events (ones that are currently being transmitted). You should, however, delete Expired, Missed or Hold events whenever possible to increase system performance and reduce memory storage resources. To delete events, follow these steps: Note: You can proceed with Step 1 below immediately, or you can first display the Service Summary screen and highlight the number of the virtual channel you want. 1. Choose the Event schedule access icon, or choose Channel > Event schedule. The system displays:

2. From the Virtual Channel pull-down list, select the virtual channel whose events you want to delete. 3. Highlight the events you want to delete, and either choose Actions > Delete or choose the Delete icon. The following message appears:
Are you sure you want to delete the record(s)?

4. Choose YES to delete the events from the database, or NO to leave the events in the database. 5. Choose Actions > Refresh to display current information in the Event schedule.

5-70

4042066 Rev A

Chapter 6

Decoders
Authorized Programs The Decoder Database Decoder Searches Decoder Management Managing Decoders Grouping Decoders Decoder Output Control Transcoder Configuration Control Authorizing Services

Decoders decrypt Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs) and Entitlement Control Messages (ECMs) sent by the uplink system. These messages contain the controlling and addressing information decoders require to read messages, check for authorized and deauthorized services, and decrypt the appropriate information for authorized programs. When you authorize a decoder, you allow it to access the conditional access information contained in the EMMs and the virtual channel information contained in the ECMs.

Authorizing Decoders Process Diagram

4042066 Rev A

6-1

Authorized Programs
If you do not scramble services and events, then any decoder not just those in the PNC database can access your virtual channels. PNC, however, offers several levels of security, allowing you to manage which decoders can access which scheduled events. Using and combining the various levels of access gives you immense control over both the range of decoders which can decrypt an event from a single decoder to the entire database and the sophistication of the access design. Authorized programs consist of virtual channel services and the events scheduled on those virtual channels; services are packaged by assigning program tiers to the default and/or scheduled events, and then assigning program tiers to the decoder based on the programs the subscriber has ordered. When the decoder receives and decrypts the program service information, it compares the accompanying program tiers for all the channel events with the program tiers assigned to it to determine which events the subscriber can view. Note: You can also assign program tiers to events to disallow viewing.

6-2

4042066 Rev A

The Decoder Database


The Decoder Database contains records of all the individual decoders contained in the PNC system. You can perform simple or complex searches to select a group of decoders, view or edit a single decoders profile, or perform a global edit. Each decoder database record or profile contains all the information required to address a decoder for service authorization. You define the level of service for a decoder by editing its profile. Decoder records are loaded into the decoder database either from a distribution diskette or by manually entering profile information. For information on loading from a distribution diskette, see Using EmcDecoders on page 14-18.

Adding a Decoder Manually on the PNC Client


An external application called IRD Administrator is used to add decoders manually on the PNC Client.Typically, the decoder records you add to the database are downloaded from a distribution diskette onto the PNC Server. Occasionally, however, you may need to load a decoder manually via the PNC Client when a distribution diskette is not available or when the data is corrupt. Note: This application is tied into the PNC User Privileges. To use this application, the user must have System Administrator privileges. For more information on managing User Privileges, see Security and User Administration on page 8-1. WARNING!: Cisco does not recommend the use of this loading method. Moreover, if this loading method is used, it should only be from within a secure environment for both the client and the server. You need the following decoder information before you can load it manually: User Address Tracking ID Secret Serial Numbers 0-3.

4042066 Rev A

6-3

To add a single decoder to the database: 1. Double-click the IRDAdmin icon on your PNC Client desktop. The IRD Administrator login window displays:

The User ID and Password are the same as used in the PNC, itself. The Host is the server address where the PNC Server is located. Click OK to login once the information has been entered. Note: This application is tied into the PNC User Privileges. To use this application, the user must have System Administrator privileges. For more information on managing User Privileges, see Security and User Administration on page 8-1. 2. Once logged in, the IRD Administrator main window displays:

3. Choose Menu > Add IRD. The Add Decoder Window displays.

6-4

4042066 Rev A

4. Enter or select information in the following fields:


User Address

Enter or select the nine-digit User Address number found on the back of the decoder chassis, or on the shipping carton. You do not need to enter leading zeroes. The User Address number is unique to the decoder and you cannot edit it after you have loaded the decoders record into the database. To change a decoders user address, you must delete the decoders record and re-create it by adding a new record to the database. Note: If you obtain the User Address from the label on the back of the decoder, do NOT include the single digit checksum number which follows the user address. For example, a typical decoder user address and checksum is shown below:
001446339-3

In this case, the 1446339 is the User Address, the -3 is the checksum number. You would enter 1446339 in the User Address field.
Tracking ID

Enter the 12-digit Tracking ID found on the back of the decoder chassis, or on the shipping carton. This ID is like an inventory serial number which is used to track repair history, security uses, etc. The tracking ID is unique to the decoder, and you cannot edit it after you have loaded the decoders record into the database.

Secret Serial Number (SSN 0 - 3)

Enter the Cisco Secret Serial Number for each of the four Broadcaster ID fields from the hardcopy listings. If you do not have this information, contact your SSN recipient. 5. Select Add. A dialog displays indicating the decoder has been inserted into the database. Note: You can also delete individual decoders using this application, but you must know the User Address to do so. In general, it is a much better idea to use the PNCs decoder search feature to find decoders and delete them from there. For more information on this, see Decoder Searches on page 6-7. Note: Be sure to exit the IRD Administrator application by choosing Menu > Exit.

4042066 Rev A

6-5

After Adding decoders, you need to configure and install them. For more information on these procedures, performed from within the PNC system, see Decoder Management on page 6-22. Note: When adding decoders to the PNC database either via IRDAdmin or EmcAdmin, it is recommended that you synchronize the master and slave PNCs databases by performing a Sync Now function. This allows changes made on the master PNC to immediately appear on the slave PNC. (This is only applicable if the Data Replication option is installed.) See Initiating an Immediate Database Synchronization on page 13-42 for more information.

6-6

4042066 Rev A

Decoder Searches
To search for individual decoders or to search for multiple decoders, you must use the appropriate search criteria to accurately identify the decoders you want. The PNC decoder database supports up to 250,000 decoders and as a result, efficient decoder search and retrieval is critical. There is less risk in making changes to individual records compared to global changes, which impact multiple decoders. It is important to note that a global change targets every decoder in the selected group. WARNING!: Always perform a database search to retrieve only those decoders which require changes. If you make a Global Change without performing a proper search, you can overwrite the records found in a previous search, or you may even affect the entire database. In a multi-user system, an operator at another active terminal may have modified the records since your last search. Consequently, always perform a fresh search BEFORE you make a global change to ensure that your search parameters are the most recent ones, and that only the selected parameters are changed. The PNC system allows you to define your search with multiple search criteria, allowing searches to be simple or complex. Search items you can use include:
Ad Insertion Tier Affiliate Id Audio 2 Output Enable Blackout Code 1 Blackout Code 4 Code B Company Contact 3 Customer Email Field B Field E Field H Homing Channel Last Edited Model Output Authorization Profile Program Tiers Address ASI Output Control Audio 3 Output Enable Blackout Code 2 City/Town Code C Contact Country Disaster Recovery Profile Event Group Field C Field F Headend Id Installed Low Speed Data Output Enable Notes Phone Province/State Admin Audio 1 Output Enable Audio 4 Output Enable Blackout Code 3 Code A Code D Contact 2 Cue Trigger Mask DPI Output Enable Field A Field D Field G High Speed Data Output Enable IP Data Output Enable Mobile Output Authorization Control Postal/Zip Code Service Name

4042066 Rev A

6-7

Subtitle Output Enable Transcoder Profile Video Output Enable

System Id User Address Wide Band Data Output Enable

Tracking ID VBI Output Enable

The decoders found by your search are listed in the Decoder Database Summary window. After you have searched the decoder database, you can globally edit all of the found or selected decoders, edit individual decoders from the found record set, or save the list to a file for further analysis. To search the database to select the appropriate decoders, follow these steps: 1. Choose Decoder > Decoder Search. The Decoder Search window displays.

2. From the Item list, select a search item. (See previous list for all possible selections.) 3. Select a qualifier for the criteria you are about to enter. Possible options are:
Qualifier
= <> < <= > >=

Means
Equal to (searchs for an exact match) Not equal to Less than Less than or equal to Greater than Greater than or equal to

6-8

4042066 Rev A

Qualifier
LIKE

Means
Criteria is similar to an actual value. LIKE conditions provide simple pattern matching. Characters within pattern are interpreted as follows: - The question mark ? represents any single character - The asterisk * represents any sequence of n characters (n may be zero) - All other characters represent themselves For Program Tiers, a search will find all the decoders where the tiers selected in the search criteria are set. Criteria is contained within a larger value. In-conditions syntax is: x,y (for example: 100, 120) or x,y,z (for example: 125,130,155) etc. Value is between two specified values (for example: x-y) ANY OF is only applicable for Program Tier search. A search will find all the decoders where any of the tiers selected in the search criteria are set.

IN BETWEEN ANY OF

The qualifiers available to you depends on which search criteria you have selected. For instance, if Program Tiers is selected as the item, only =, LIKE and ANY OF are available. The remaining qualifiers will not be displayed. Example: Given that the following decoder Program Tiers are in a decoder database, a decoder search will find/return the decoders shown in the following table for each of the three possible search qualifiers. For certain search criteria (for example: LIKE, IN, BETWEEN), help text is displayed to the right of the qualifier box. Decoder Database
Decoders
IRD a IRD b IRD c IRD d

Decoder Tiers
0-5,7,9,45-50 1-3,8,37 1,3,7-15 2-5,11,15

Search Results
Search Criteria Program Tiers LIKE
1 3 1,3 1,5 IRD a, IRD b, IRD c IRD a, IRD b, IRD c, IRD d IRD a, IRD b, IRD c IRD a

Search Results Qualifier =


no decoders no decoders no decoders no decoders

ANY OF
IRD a, IRD b, IRD c IRD a, IRD b, IRD c, IRD d IRD a, IRD b, IRD c, IRD d IRD a, IRD b, IRD c, IRD d

4042066 Rev A

6-9

Search Criteria Program Tiers LIKE


1,6 3,7-15 1,3,7-15 no decoders IRD c IRD c

Search Results Qualifier =


no decoders no decoders IRD c

ANY OF
IRD a, IRD b, IRD c IRD a, IRD b, IRD c, IRD d IRD a, IRD b, IRD c, IRD d

4. Select the criteria to use. This will differ depending on the Item you have selected. Sometimes it is a Criteria Field, where you can enter the relevant selection criteria. Sometimes it could be a presentation of several check boxes, only allowing you to select one of them. Sometimes there is a more button to select a file. Note: If you selected Event Group as the item, and selected IN as the search criteria and not select an event group in the criteria, then the search is to find all the decoders that do not belong to any event groups. Only decoders that are supported by the Live Event Controller are searched (D9858 and D9854). 5. Click Set. The parameters you select and the information you enter determine which decoders are selected from the database. Descriptions of Selection criteria are given later in this chapter. Specify as many search items and criteria as you can. Selected decoders are sorted according to the order of the items which appear in the Selection Criteria window. For example, if you choose Code and then Tracking ID as search items, the selected decoders are sorted by Code first, and then by Tracking ID within each identical Code grouping.

Assigning a Name to Search Criteria


When performing a search, you can assign a Name to a number of search criteria. This feature is helpful in performing decoder searchs based on different search criteria. To assign a Name to selected search criteria: 1. Select the criteria you want to use for a particular decoder search. 2. Select Save As to display the Save Selection Criteria window as shown below:

6-10

4042066 Rev A

3. Enter a Name for the search criteria. 4. Click OK. The entered Name will appear in the Name drop-down field. 5. To enter another Name, either edit one of the entered Names by selecting it, adding or deleting search criteria Items to or from it and then saving it with a different name.

To delete a Name:
1. Select the Name you want to Delete. 2. Click Delete to display a pop-up window asking whether you want to delete

4042066 Rev A

6-11

it as shown below.

3. Click OK to delete the unwanted Name.

Saving Search Results to a File


After performing a search, you can save the results to a Text, RTF or HTML file for further analysis. Note: Embedded formatting codes within the saved text file may make it difficult to read the text file information with utilities such as Notepad or Write. A spreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel and others should display the file information correctly. Similarly, html files can be displayed in their proper format using a browser such as Internet Explorer. To save search results to a text file: 1. With the search results displayed, select File > Save As. 2. If you selected one or more decoders in the Selected Decoders section before selecting Save As, the Save Decoders dialog will display, prompting you to

6-12

4042066 Rev A

select whether to save the selected decoder(s) or all the decoders.

3. If the Prompt for fields box has been checked in the Options > Configuration>View >Decoder Search window, the Save Fields window will be displayed (as shown below). Note: The settings displayed in the Save Fields window are preset in Options> Configuration window. To preset this view to display and save the Decoder Search Results in a particular format, see the instructions following this procedure to set the Save As and View functions before saving the Decoder Search results to a file.

Moves the order of the field up. Moves the order of the field down. Selects the highlighted field. De-selects the highlighted field.

4. Choose to select All the fields, only those Visible or only those in a Profile, to a text or html file.
All Visible Profile

Saves all the fields in the Save Fields window to a file. Saves only those fields to a file which are visible in the displayed view. Saves only the fields created as a profile to a file. To create a profile: Select Profile and select the fields you want to include in your profile. To reorder the fields in the list, select a field and click Move Up or Move Down.

4042066 Rev A

6-13

Click Show to select the checkbox of the selected field and click Hide to deselect the checkbox of the selected field. Click Save As. The Save Profile dialog appears. Type a name for the current profile and click OK. The name appears under Profile. The profile is saved and applied to the server when you click OK.

To delete a profile: Select the profile you want to delete from the Profile drop-down list. Click Delete. Click Yes to confirm your deletion. Click OK. The profile is deleted. 5. If you do not want the Save Fields window to appear the next time you save the decoder search results to a file, select the Do not show this dialog box again option. The same settings will be used to save the file the next time you perform this operation. Note: Any changes made to the selected Fields at the top of the Save Fields window (i.e., All, Visible or Profile) also appear in the Options> Configuration > View > Decoder Search, and changes made in the Configuration window also affects the Save Fields window. 6. Click OK. 7. In the Windows Save Decoder Search Results window, select the desired folder and file name (with txt or html extension) as shown in the example below.

8. Click Save to save the decoder search results to a file or Cancel to abort the operation.

6-14

4042066 Rev A

Preconfiguring the Save As Function


The Save As function can be used to preconfigure how various views are saved to a file. To set the parameters you want to use to format the saved information: 1. Choose the Configuration icon, or choose Options > Configuration.

2. Click Save As to display the view shown below.

3. Select the Text parameters you want to use to format the saved files. This view displays the default ANSI characters.
Fields terminated by

The entered character terminates all fields in the file with the selected ANSI character. The default is ,, which acts as a delimiter.

4042066 Rev A

6-15

Fields enclosed by

The entered character encloses all fields in the file with the selected character. The default is , which acts as a delimiter. The entered character terminates all lines in the file with the selected ANSI characters. ANSI escape sequences \r (carriage return), \n (new line) and \t (horizontal tab) are supported. The default is \r\n. Select the Save header check box to include the column header at the top of the file. 4. In the Time configuration area, select the time parameters you want to use in the saved files.

Lines terminated by

Save header

Save as UTC

Check the Save as UTC box to include the time in the file as UTC time (Coordinated Universal Time). When this box is checked, the time zone is ignored, and not selectable (greyed out). Check this box to include the time zone information. 5. Choose OK to save the settings to the database or Cancel to abort any changes.

Save time zone info

Displaying Transactions
You can display the Transaction Log History for a single decoder via a decoder search. Note: Transactions functionality is also available in the Decoder Management tree view. 1. Highlight the decoder in the search window list you want to display the tranactions by right-clicking on the decoder to display the popup window.

6-16

4042066 Rev A

2. Selection Tranactions in the pop-up window. The search selection criteria is set automatically and the search is initiated. The Transaction Log History displays a list of transactions for the selected decoder.

3. Double-click on the a decoder record to display the Attributes of Record window. The Attributes of Record window provides information of a decoder transaction such as the time the transaction was made (i.e., Timestamp), who made the change (e.g., User ID), the type of operation (i.e., Operation) and the Global Change ID identifying the change.

Note: When a decoder record is selected in the Decoder Search window, the Transactions function is also alavailable from the Actions drop-down menu.

4042066 Rev A

6-17

View
The View function is used to pre-select the format of the information in a Decoder Search or an Event Schedule when saved to a file. To select the parameters you want to use to format the saved information: 1. Choose the Configuration icon, or choose Options > Configuration. You will see a window similar to that shown below.

2. Select Decoder Search to preset the Save As view you want to use to save a Decoder Search as a text, rtf or html file.

6-18

4042066 Rev A

Prompt for Fields

Check this box to be prompted for the fields you wish to save to a file when performing the File > Save As function. The Save Fields window is disabled when the Prompt for Fields box is left unchecked. The All, Visible and Selected radio buttons function identical to those displayed in the Save Fields pop-up window. Any changes made to this window also appear in the Save Fields pop-up window when saving the Decoder Search results to a file. 3. Choose OK to save the changes to the database or Cancel to abort all changes.

Fields Selection

Large Screen View Decoder Profile


Decoder Profile

Large Screen View

Options are Default, Large screen view and Large screen with program tiers view. Note: Changes to configurations that are made on the Large Screen View will not apply to decoder views that are already open.

4042066 Rev A

6-19

Decoder Profile Default View

To view the Large Screen Default View of the Decoder Profile, double-click the desired User Address in the Decoder Search window.

Decoder Profile Large Screen View

To view the Large Screen View of the Decoder Profile, double-click the desired User Address in the Decoder Search window.

6-20

4042066 Rev A

Decoder Profile with Program Tiers View

To view the Large Screen View of the Decoder Profile with Program Tiers, double-click the desired User Address in the Decoder Search window.

Decoder Global Change Large Screen View

To view the Large Screen View of the Decoder Global Change Profile, click on the desired User Address in the Decoder Search window to select, then click the Global Change button.

4042066 Rev A

6-21

Decoder Management
The following section describes how to use the Decoder Management tree feature to view your decoder database. The Decoder Management tree allows quick visually-based navigation through the decoder database in a hierarchical fashion that resembles everyday network operation. This feature is displayed as a default, but it can be disabled if not required. To disable the Decoder Management tree feature, contact Cisco customer support to have this feature disabled. When the item is disabled, it will be greyed out in the PNC GUI and users will not be able to open the view. The Decoder Management tree hierarchy provides a structured method of viewing the decoder database based on defined locations. Adding or deleting decoders from the tree can affect the decoders themselves when moving them from location to location as moving decoders within the tree affects the parameters within the individual decoder profiles/records. An example of a database hierarchical structure is shown below. Country

Company

City

List window

6-22

4042066 Rev A

List Window
The view to the right in the Decoder Management window provides a Summary for all the decoders selected in the list window, or all the decoders when no selection has been made. When a change is made to the decoders, either all decoders are updated (if no selection), or only those selected are updated. Similarly, when only a single decoder is selected, the decoder record is displayed to the right. In this case, when a change is made to the decoder, only the selected decoder is updated.

4042066 Rev A

6-23

Right clicking on one of the column headings in the list window displays the Columns dialog box. This box lets you pick which columns are displayed, and their order.

To delete a column, uncheck the checkbox corresponding to the column heading and click OK.
Order by

In the Order by list, click the checkbox and select a field to control how the decoders are listed and sorted. The decoder list will not be sorted when the Order By checkbox is unchecked.

Sorting Columns
To automatically sort a column, simply click on the column heading in the list window.

Resizing Columns
Columns can be resized in the same manner as in any Windows interface by moving the cursor over the column divider and dragging it left or right.

6-24

4042066 Rev A

Adding/Deleting Decoder Locations


The Decoder Management tree structure popup options are preset to Add Country, Add Company and Add City. Decoders will automatically appear in the tree-structure hierarchy according to their matching criteria (within the decoder profile/record). Decoder records are searched according to their Country, Company and City, respectively. All decoders matching the Country will be displayed in the list window when the Country is selected/highlighted.

Adding a Country
To add a country to the tree structure: 1. Either right-click in the bottom section of the window below the tree structure or adjacent to a Country. The pointer changes to a hand ( Add Country popup displays. ), and the

2. Enter the name of the Country that you want to add. 3. Select OK to add the Country to the tree structure. Note: Countries are added to the tree structure in alphabetical order from top to bottom as shown below.

4042066 Rev A

6-25

Added Country

Deleting a Country
To delete a Country from the tree structure: 1. Right-click on the Country that you want to delete and choose Delete Country from the popup.

2. You will be prompted with a warning dialog asking you to confirm your selection. Choose Yes to continue, to delete the Country, or choose No to abort the operation and return to the main window.

Note: When you delete a location, all the decoders belonging to the location (e.g., Country) are also deleted from the view; however, decoder records are not affected.

6-26

4042066 Rev A

Adding a Company
1. Right-click on the country (name) or place the cursor adjacent to it. The pointer changes to a hand ( ), and the Add Company popup displays. Leftclick to select and open the Add Company dialog box.

2. Enter the name of the Company that you want to add. 3. Select OK to add the Company to the tree structure. 4. Expand the tree to display the Company. Note: Companies are added to the tree structure in alphabetical order from top to bottom.

Added Company

4042066 Rev A

6-27

Deleting a Company
To delete a Company from the tree structure: 1. Right-click on the Company that you want to delete and choose Delete Company from the popup.

2. You will be prompted with a warning dialog asking you to confirm your selection. Choose Yes to continue, to delete the Company, or choose No to abort the operation and return to the main window.

Note: When you delete a location, all the decoders belonging to the location (e.g., Country) are also deleted from the view; however, decoder records are not affected.

6-28

4042066 Rev A

Adding a City
1. Right-click on the Company (name) or place the cursor adjacent to it. The pointer changes to a hand ( ), and the Add City popup displays. Left-click to select and open the Add City dialog box.

2. Enter the name of the City that you want to add. 3. Select OK to add the City to the tree structure. 4. Expand the tree to display the City. Note: Cities are added to the tree structure in alphabetical order from top to bottom as shown below.

Added City

4042066 Rev A

6-29

Deleting a City
To delete a City from the tree structure: 1. Right-click on the City that you want to delete and choose Delete City from the popup.

2. You will be prompted with a warning message asking you to confirm your selection. Choose Yes to continue, to delete the Company, or choose No to abort the operation and return to the main window.

Note: When you delete a location, all the decoders belonging to the location (e.g., Country) are also deleted from the view; however, decoder records are not affected.

6-30

4042066 Rev A

Adding Decoders
To add a decoder to a City: 1. Right-click on the City that you want to add decoders and choose Add Decoder from the popup. The Add Decoders dialog box will be displayed.

2. Select the search criteria to use, either User Address or Tracking Id. 3. Select a qualifier for the criteria you are about to enter. The options are:
Qualifier
= <> < <= > >=

Means
Equal to (searchs for an exact match) Not equal to Less than Less than or equal to Greater than Greater than or equal to

4042066 Rev A

6-31

Qualifier
LIKE

Means
Criteria is similar to an actual value. LIKE conditions provide simple pattern matching. Characters within pattern are interpreted as follows: - The question mark ? represents any single character - The asterisk * represents any sequence of n characters (n may be zero) - All other characters represent themselves For Program Tiers, a search will find all the decoders where the tiers selected in the search criteria are set. Criteria is contained within a larger value. In-conditions syntax is: x,y (for example: 100, 120) or x,y,z (for example: 125,130,155) etc.

IN

4. Click Verify to display the selected decoder(s) in the bottom half of the window.

5. Highlight the decoders you want to add and select Add Selected, or select Add All to add all the decoders to the City. The decoder(s) will be added to the City and appear in the list window.

6-32

4042066 Rev A

Moving Decoders
From the List Window
You can drag and drop a single decoder or a group of decoders from one location to another as follows. 1. Select the City or location that you want to move the decoders from by double-clicking or pressing the Space bar so that they are displayed in the list window.

Decoders

4042066 Rev A

6-33

2. Select the decoder(s) that you want to drag to another location.

Selecting a group of decoders - to move a group of decoders, scroll down the list in the list window until you find the first decoder in the group that you want to move. Click to select the first decoder, then hold down the Shift key and select the last decoder in the group to highlight the group of decoders that you want to move. Ctrl + left-click can be used to either select or deselect a single decoder. 3. Drag the selected decoders to the new location. You will prompted with a warning message asking you to confirm that you want to move the decoders to the new location. See an example of the warning message below.

4. Select Continue to move the decoder(s) to the new location, or choose Cancel to abort the operation and return to the main window. If you choose Con-

6-34

4042066 Rev A

tinue, the selected decoder(s) will be moved to the new location.

Moved decoder

When you move decoders from one City to another, the following parameters change in the decoder records to match those corresponding to the new location.
Changed Parameters
Country Company Affiliate Id Address Province/State Postal/Zip Code System Id Contact Contact 2 Contact 3 Phone Mobile

5. The Summary is displayed to the right. You can choose to enter or revise information in one or more of the fields before moving the decoders. The information you change affects all the selected decoders for that city. For information on these fields, see Customer Assigned Information on page 6-53. When you begin to type a value in a field, the fields background changes color from white to pink so your eye can more easily confirm what field you are modifying. This feature is designed to help prevent you from making a global change to an unintended field. You also use Ctrl M to unmark a field for change. 6. To save the changes, choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save.

4042066 Rev A

6-35

From the Search Window


To move a decoder into the tree structure, drag and drop the decoder from the search window to the appropriate location in the tree. Note: You can drag and drop single decoders from the Search window to the List window or to a location in the tree structure. Drag and drop of a group of decoders from the Search window is not supported. 1. Perform a search to locate the decoder that you want to move to another location.

Selected decoder

2. Drag the decoder from the Search window to the new location. You will be

6-36

4042066 Rev A

prompted to confirm that you want to move the decoder to the new location.

Selected decoder

3. Select Continue to move the decoder to the new location, or choose Cancel to abort the operation and return to the main window. If you choose Continue, the selected decoder will be moved to the new location.

Moved decoder

4. Repeat this operation to move other decoders from one location to another, one at a time, if desired.

4042066 Rev A

6-37

Moving Decoders from Country to Country


When you move one or more decoders from one Country to another, only the Country field changes in the decoder record. To move all the decoders from one Country to another: 1. Drag the Country that you want to move the decoders from to the Country that you want to move them to.

2. You will be prompted with a warning dialog box asking you to confirm that you want to move the decoders from one Country to another.

3. Select Continue to move the decoders to another Country, or choose Cancel to abort the operation and return to the main window. All the decoders will be moved to the new location. Note: If you drag a Country to another Country, all the decoders that belong to that country will be moved to the new location, with its Companies and Cities, according to the tree structure, and the Country that you moved will be removed from the tree. If a Company already exists in the Country you are moving the decoders to, the decoders will be added to the Company along with their cities. To move a group of decoders from one Company to another, perform a groupmove operation. For an example, see Moving Decoders on page 6-33.

6-38

4042066 Rev A

Moving Decoders from Company to Company


When you move decoders from one Company to another, the following parameters change in the decoder records to match those corresponding to the new location.
Changed Parameters
Country Company Affiliate Id

To move all the decoders from one Company to another in the same or another Country: 1. Drag the Company that you want to move the decoders from to the Company that you want to move them to.

2. You will prompted with a warning message asking you to confirm that you want to move the decoders from one Company to another.

4042066 Rev A

6-39

3. Select Continue to move the decoders to another Company, or choose Cancel to abort the operation and return to the main window. All the decoders will be moved to the new location. Note: If you drag a Company to another Company, all the decoders that belong to that Company will be moved to the new location, along with its cities, and the Company that you moved the decoders from will be removed from the tree. If a city already exists in the Company that you are moving the decoders to, the decoder(s) will be added to the same City and appear in the list window. To move a group of decoders from one Company to another, perform a group- move operation. For an example, see Moving Decoders on page 633.

Moving Decoders from City to City


When you move decoders from one city to another, the following parameters change in the decoder profile/record(s) to match those corresponding to the new location.
Changed Parameters
Country Company Affiliate Id Address Province/State Postal/Zip Code System Id

Changed Parameters
Contact Contact 2 Contact 3 Phone Mobile Email

6-40

4042066 Rev A

Moving all Decoders


To move all the decoders from one city to another: 1. Drag the City that you want to move the decoders from to the City that you want to move the decoders to.

2. Drag the decoders displayed in the List window to the city you want to move them to. You will be prompted with a warning message asking you to confirm that you want to move the decoders from one city to another.

3. Select Continue to move the decoders to another City, or choose Cancel to abort the operation and return to the main window. All the decoders will be moved to the new location. Note: If you drag a City to another City, all the decoders that belong to that City will be moved to the new location, and the City that you moved the decoders from will be removed from the tree.

4042066 Rev A

6-41

Saving Decoder Management Criteria to a File


You can save the decoder management criteria in the list window to a text, rtf or html file for further analysis. Note: Embedded formatting codes within the saved file may make it difficult to read the text file information with utilities such as Notepad or Write. A spreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel and others should display the file information correctly. Similarly, html files can be displayed in their proper format using a browser such as Internet Explorer. To save the decoder management results to a text file: 1. With the list window open, select File > Save As. 2. If the Prompt for fields box has been checked in the Options > Configuration>View >Decoder Management window, the Save Fields pop-up window will be displayed as shown in the following example. Note: The default settings displayed in the Save Fields window are preset in Options> Configuration window. To preset this view to display and save the decoder management criteria in a particular format, see the instructions inPreconfiguring the Save As Function on page 6-15 to set the Save As and View functions before saving the Decoder Management results to a file.

3. Choose to select All the fields, only those Visible or only those Selected, to a text, rtf or html file.
All Visible

Saves all the fields in the Save Fields window to a file. Saves only those fields to a file which are visible in the displayed view.

6-42

4042066 Rev A

Selected Fields

Saves only the fields selected in the Save As window to a file as shown in the example below. If you do not want the Save Fields windows to appear the next time you save the decoder management criteria to a file, check the Do not show this dialog box again box. The same settings will be used to save the file the next time you perform this operation. Note: Any changes made to the selected Fields at the top of the Save Fields pop-up window (i.e., All, Visible or Selected) also appear in the Options> Configuration > View settings, and vice versa.

4. If you selected one or more decoders in the list window before selecting Save As, the Save Decoders popup will display prompting you to select whether to save the selected decoder(s) or all the decoders.

5. Click OK to save the selected decoder(s). 6. In the Windows Save Decoders window, select the desired folder and file

4042066 Rev A

6-43

name (txt, rtf or html extension), matching the file type.

7. Choose Save to save the decoders to a file or Cancel to abort the operation.

6-44

4042066 Rev A

Moving Decoders Using the Cut and Paste Function


To move all the decoders from one location to another: 1. Select the location that you want to move decoders from.

2. Right-click to display the popup window and select Cut as shown above. 3. Select the city that you want to move the decoders to and right-click to display the popup window, and select Paste.

The Decoder Global Change Warning dialog will display prompting you to move the decoders. Select Continue to complete the operation or Cancel to abort the operation.

The decoders will be moved to the new location, and the previous location will be removed.

4042066 Rev A

6-45

Adding an Existing Decoder


You can add an existing decoder to a city. To move a decoder: 1. Select the city you want to add an existing decoder. 2. Right-click the city and select Add Decoder.

The Add Decoder dialog opens.

3. In the first drop-down list, select User Address or Tracking Id to search for a decoder according to its user address or tracking ID. 4. In the second drop-down list, select the qualifier (= or IN).
Qualifier
= IN

Means
Equal to (searchs for an exact match) Criteria is contained within a larger value. In-conditions syntax is: x,y (for example: 100, 120) or x,y,z (for example: 125,130,155) etc.

5. Enter the criteria (User Address or Tracking ID) of the decoder you want to add. 6. Click OK. If the requested decoder is found, you will be prompted with a message asking you to confirm that you want to add the decoder to the selected city. 7. Click OK to complete the operation, or click Cancel to abort the operation and return to the main window. If you choose OK, the decoder will be added.

6-46

4042066 Rev A

If the requested decoder is not found, a message appears informing you that the decoder was not found.

Searching for Decoders in Decoder Management Tree View


The Decoder Management tree-view lists decoders by country, company and city. You can search for a specific decoder in the tree-view according to its user address, tracking ID or system ID. To search for a decoder in the Decoder Management tree-view: 1. Right-click on a country, company or city and select Find Location. The Find Location dialog appears.

2. Select to search according to the decoders User Address, Tracking ID, or System ID. 3. Enter the criteria to use. For example, if you are searching for a decoder according to its User Address, enter the unique user address number of the decoder you want to find. 4. Click Find. Decoder records are searched according to the specified parameters. If the decoder is found, its associated city, company, or country is selected/highlighted. If the city is not found, the company is highlighted. If the company is not found, the country is highlighted. If the decoder is not found, a message appears informing you that the decoder was not found.

4042066 Rev A

6-47

Editing Decoder Records


Globally Editing Records
You can edit one or more decoder records, as follows. To make a global change to all the decoders at a location: 1. Select the City to display the decoders at that location in the list window.

The view to the right in the Decoder Management window provides a Summary for all the decoders at that location when no decoders have been selected in the list window to the left, or for a selected group of decoders. 2. Enter or revise information in one or more of the fields. The information you change affects all the selected decoders, or all the decoders, if no selection has been made in the list window. For information on these fields, see Installing a Single Decoder on page 6-51. When you begin to type a value in a field, the fields background changes color from white to pink so your eye can more easily confirm what field you are modifying. This feature is designed to help prevent you from making a global change to an unintended field.You can mark or unmark the field by pressing Ctrl M. An asterisk (*) also appears next to the tab name to denote a change in the tab information.

6-48

4042066 Rev A

3. To save the changes, choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save. For more information in globally editing decoder records, seeGlobally Editing Decoder Records on page 6-68.

Editing a Single Decoder Record


You can edit a single decoder record from the Decoder Management view as follows. Note: Do not edit the contact information in a single decoder record if you wish to ensure consistency across decoders in each company and/or city. 1. Select the City to display the decoders at that location at the bottom of the window.

2. Locate and highlight the decoder record in the bottom window to display the Decoder Profile for the selected decoder to the right. 3. Enter or revise information in one or more of the fields. The information you change affects only the individual decoder record. For information on these

4042066 Rev A

6-49

fields, see Installing a Single Decoder on page 6-51.

Change

4. When you begin to type a value in a field, the fields background changes color from white to pink so your eye can more easily confirm what field you are modifying. This feature is designed to help prevent you from making a global change to an unintended field.You can also unmark the field by pressing Ctrl M to mark the field. 5. To save the changes, choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save. For information in editing a decoder record, seeEditing an Individual Decoder on page 6-65.

6-50

4042066 Rev A

Managing Decoders
The following sections describe how to manage decoders individually and globally.

Installing the Decoders


Before decoders can receive EMMs (control and addressing information containing broadcast authorization), you must ensure that their Installed status is Yes. Typically, when decoders are loaded into the database from a distribution disk, you change their Installed status from No (uninstalled) to Yes (installed) during the loading process. (For information about changing the status during the loading process, refer to Loading New Decoders.) If the status was not changed during the loading process, or if decoders were loaded manually, then you must change their Installed status from No to Yes to authorize them to receive transmitted EMMs.

Installing a Single Decoder


To change the Installed status of a single decoder from No to Yes: 1. Choose Decoder > Decoder Search. The Decoder Search window displays.

2. Select User Address from the Item list, enter the decoders user address in the Criteria field, and click Set. The user address criteria is listed in the Selection Criteria portion of the window, as shown in the above example. 3. Choose Search. The decoder whose user address you entered for the criteria

4042066 Rev A

6-51

is displayed in the Selected Decoders window.

4. From the Selected Decoders section, double-click on the decoder to display the Decoder Profile window. The decoders current information is displayed.

5. Select Yes from the Installed list. Selecting Yes changes the decoders status from uninstalled to installed.

6-52

4042066 Rev A

6. Configure any other desired settings. When you begin to type a value in a field, the fields background changes color from white to pink so your eye can more easily confirm what field you are modifying. This feature is designed to help prevent you from making a change to an unintended field.

Cisco Assigned Tracking Information


Load Method

This field displays how the decoder record was loaded. DISK indicates the decoder was loaded into the database via a distribution disk. KYBD indicates the decoder was loaded manually. This field is read-only. This read-only field value is derived from the each decoders Tracking ID. The displayed value will be one of the following:
NAP D9223 COMM D9850B PR D9010 DEC D9834 SR Unknown D9828 MDR D9854 APR D9224 PROF D9235 DSR D9234 BSR D9225 HESR D9227 IP CARD D9835 SR(A) D9838 NR D9858 ART D9230 MCR D9850A PR D9228 MDR D9229 CHR D9236 DSRLA D9835 SR(B) D9852 DDPR

Model

If the Model Number reads Unknown, the Tracking ID of the device is not being recognized. We recommend that you contact our Customer Service team for additional help.
User Address Tracking ID

This field is read-only. This field is read-only.

Customer Assigned Information


Installed

The Installed value is one of the methods of determining whether or not the decoder is authorized to receive services. Only decoders whose Installed field is set to Yes can receive the control information (Entitlement Management Messages) which allows them to decode signal and service information. You can use this field to deauthorize decoders completely, or to temporarily suspend services to a decoder.

4042066 Rev A

6-53

Select one of the following options from the list:


Yes
The decoder is authorized and can receive signal and service control permission information via Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs). The decoder is not authorized to receive signals or services. When you select Disabled, the decoder receives EMMs which contain information to deauthorize the decoder (killer packets). When the decoder receives the addressed killer packets, it loses its current setup information (keys and decoder profile information). The decoder is not authorized to receive control information via EMMs. Usually, this status is reserved for decoders which are loaded, but not yet in service; or for subscribers whose services are being temporarily suspended.

Disabled

No

Last Edited

Server time of the last change to this record. This is a system-assigned value and cannot be changed by the user.

Admin
7. Select the Admin tab to enter the following information.

Company

Enter company name information for this decoder. The system administrator or other appropriate personnel should develop a strategy for defining this field value, since finding and controlling decoder records can be improved by using it. The field accepts a maximum of 24 ASCII characters.

Address

Enter address identification information for this decoder. The system administrator or other appropriate personnel should develop a strategy for defining this field value, since finding and controlling decoder records can be improved by using it.

6-54

4042066 Rev A

Postal/Zip Code

Enter postal/zip code identification information for this decoder. The system administrator or other appropriate personnel should develop a strategy for defining this field value, since finding and controlling decoder records can be improved by using it. The field accepts a maximum of 10 ASCII characters.

Country

Enter country identification information for this decoder. The system administrator or other appropriate personnel should develop a strategy for defining this field value, since finding and controlling decoder records can be improved by using it. The field accepts a maximum of 24 ASCII characters.

Contact

Enter contact identification information for this decoder. The system administrator or other appropriate personnel should develop a strategy for defining this field value, since finding and controlling decoder records can be improved by using it. The field accepts a maximum of 24 ASCII characters.

Contact 2

Enter identification information for a second contact for this decoder. The system administrator or other appropriate personnel should develop a strategy for defining this field value, since finding and controlling decoder records can be improved by using it. The field accepts a maximum of 24 ASCII characters.

Contact 3

Enter identification information (for User address) for a third contact for this decoder. The system administrator or other appropriate personnel should develop a strategy for defining this field value, since finding and controlling decoder records can be improved by using it. The field accepts a maximum of 24 ASCII characters.

Phone

Enter telephone identification information for this decoder. The system administrator or other appropriate personnel should develop a strategy for defining this field value, since finding and controlling decoder records can be improved by using it. The field accepts a maximum of 12 ASCII characters.

Mobile

Enter the mobile telephone identification information for this decoder. The system administrator or other appropriate personnel should develop a strategy for defining this field value, since finding and controlling decoder records can be improved by using it. The field accepts a maximum of 12 ASCII characters.

4042066 Rev A

6-55

Email

Enter email identification information for this decoder. The system administrator or other appropriate personnel should develop a strategy for defining this field value, since finding and controlling decoder records can be improved by using it. The field accepts a maximum of 35 ASCII characters.

Code A, B, C, D

Use this field to enter identification information that will allow the operator to further group decoders, as required. This 8-character ASCII field allows users to enter unique information which may be required to identify an individual decoder or group of decoders. This field helps operators search their decoder database. Enter the affiliate identification information for the decoder. This number/Id is unique to the decoders belonging to the affiliate. The system administrator or other appropriate personnel should develop a strategy for defining this field value, since finding and controlling decoder records can be improved by using it. This field accepts a maximum of 10 text characters.

Affiliate Id

System Id

Enter the system identification information for the decoder. This number/Id is unique to the decoders belonging to the affiliate. The system administrator or other appropriate personnel should develop a strategy for defining this field value, since finding and controlling decoder records can be improved by using it. This field accepts a maximum of 10 text characters.

Headend Id

Enter the headend identification information for the decoder. This number/Id is unique to the decoders belonging to the headend location. The system administrator or other appropriate personnel should develop a strategy for defining this field value, since finding and controlling decoder records can be improved by using it. This field accepts a maximum of 10 text characters.

Notes

This is a 256-character comment field. Searches can be performed on key items in this field.

Custom Fields
The Custom Fields tab allows you to enter specific information in the Decoder Profile/record to better identify the decoders location in the network (for example). You can have up to 8 fields. Note: The Custom Fields tab is disabled by default. To display and use this feature, it must be enabled on the PNC server. For instructions on enabling this feature, see Adding Decoder Custom Fields on page 14-5.

6-56

4042066 Rev A

8. Select the Custom Fields tab to edit the decoders custom fields information.

Fields A to H

Use these fields to enter information to identify the location of the decoder in the network.

Configuration
9. Select the Configuration tab to edit the decoders configuration information.

Lock
Reset Password

Use this check box to enable a subscriber to define a new password for the decoders front panel lockout feature. Select the check box, then choose Actions > Save to reset the password change in the decoder database. As a security measure, the check box automatically clears itself after the next EMM update.

4042066 Rev A

6-57

Under normal circumstances, subscribers can change their own passwords at any time. However, in those cases where the subscriber forgets the password, this feature enables the System Administrator to cancel the forgotten password so that the subscriber can create a new one. Decoders are shipped with the default password 1234.
Change Level to

Use this field to set the subscribers decoder to lock to a certain security level setting. Level locking is used to lock the current decoder settings against unauthorized use or modification. If the decoder is locked, the subscriber is restricted to modifying decoder settings depending on the lock level, as described below. As a security measure, the check box automatically clears itself after the next database update. As with the Reset Password field, the system positions an EMM in the queue instructing the system to clear the Change Level check box at its next opportunity.
Level 0 1 2 3 4 Description
All settings unlocked (receiver lockout disabled) All settings unlocked except Factory Reset and Password options on the decoder All settings unlocked except Receiver Setup and User Setup options on the decoder All settings locked (access via Password only) on the decoder All settings locked (access via remote terminal or PNC uplink signal only) on the decoder

Force Tune
Enable

Use this check box to force the decoder to tune to the specified virtual channel after the appropriate number of minutes defined in the Time to Wait period. Select or enter the number of minutes the decoder should wait before tuning to the specified virtual channel. Enter a number in the range from 1 to 32000. Note: The default setting for this field is zero. If you leave the field set to zero, then the force tuning action takes place immediately, once you set the Enable Force Tune check box to ON and update the decoder database.

Time to Wait

Channel

Select the number of an existing virtual channel to which you want the decoder tuned. If the decoder is re-initialized, this channel number resets to zero. If your decoder is re-initialized, be sure to set this value to the applicable channel number.

6-58

4042066 Rev A

Note: If service is disrupted, the decoder does not automatically reset to the force tune channel. It returns to the setting determined by the Homing Channel option on the Decoder Profile window (see Homing Channel on page 6-59).

Standby Transition Channel


Homing Channel

Use this field to determine the channel the decoder tunes to when service is restored after a power failure or other interruption disrupts service. Home channel functionality is only implemented on Model D9223, D9224, D9225 and D9234 receivers. Model D98xx receivers (e.g., D9834, D9835 and D9850) power up using the Last Channel (they ignore the Home channel setting). If you select Home as the Power Up Channel option, you must enter the channel number to which the decoder is tuned to when the decoder is switched to the normal operating mode (i.e., from standby mode). If you do not define a Power Up Channel setting for the homing channel, the system defaults to the Last channel.

Power Up Channel

Power Up Channel functionality is only implemented on Model D9223, D9224, D9225 and D9234 receivers. Model D98xx receivers (e.g., D9834, D9835 and D9850) power up using the Last Channel (they ignore the Power Up Home channel setting). On Model D92xx receivers only (i.e., Model D9223, D9224, D9225 and D9234) select one of the following options to define the decoders channel setting when it is switched from Standby mode to the normal operating mode. Note: The receiver always returns to the Last channel when power cycled regardless of the Power Up Channel setting.
Setting Action
The decoders virtual channel/homing channel is reset to the last channel selected before it is switched to standby mode.

Example
If Channel 10 was selected before the decoder was switched to standby mode or the receiver was power cycled, then the decoder automatically resets to Channel 10 when it is switched back to the normal operating mode. If the decoder was on Channel 10 when you switch the receiver to standby mode, but you have selected Home and set the Homing Channel field to 20, then the decoder automatically resets to Channel 20 when you switch it back to the normal operating mode. You must enter a channel number in the Homing Channel field when you select this option.

Last

Home

On Model D92xx receivers, the virtual channel resets to the channel you specify in the Homing Channel field when you switch the receiver to standby mode and then back to the normal operating mode.

4042066 Rev A

6-59

Time
Time Zone

This field is reserved for future use. (When the optional decoder output feature is installed, this field is not available.)

Disaster Recovery
ID

Displays the system disaster recovery ID. This value is in the range from 1 to 32767. It is set at the time of installation and is unique for each customer. This is the definition of the unique disaster recovery profile. Disaster recovery profiles can apply to an individual decoder or a group of decoders. For more information on disaster recovery profiles and how to configure them, refer to Chapter 10, Protecting your Services. If your search is to include decoders predicating in a DRP select one of the , preconfigured disaster recovery profiles. This default setting is default profile.

Profile

Event Group Membership

List of event groups to which the current decoder belongs. The Event Groups are created and maintained in the Event Group Summary window. For more information, see Grouping Decoders on page 6-70. Note: This is only available if the decoder is D9050 LEC. Otherwise, the Event Group Membership is disabled. A completed Decoder Profile window is shown below, with the Installed status changed to Yes and the homing channel set to last channel.

6-60

4042066 Rev A

Blackouts/Triggers
10. Use this tab in conjunction with the assigned program tier bits to determine the authorization status of the decoder. If one of the blackout codes in the Decoder Profile window matches the blackout code associated with a specific event, the decoder is either authorized or unauthorized to receive the event, depending on whether or not the blackout code is placed in the Blackout or Spotlight box in the events Blackout Codes window. Blackout codes have no effect on decoders which have not been assigned program tiers which match the event. The system administrator should define a strategy for the Blackout Code numbering scheme. A five-digit decimal number in the range from 1 to 65535 can be used to specify the blackout code for a decoder. Enter up to four blackout codes, as shown below:

Program Tiers
11. Use this tab to assign or remove program tiers to or from the decoder(s). For more information, see Assigning Program Tiers on page 6-89.

Output Authorization Control (optional)


12. Use this tab if you want control over PowerVu Model D9850 Program Receivers, these fields allow you to specify settings for that control.

Custom Configuration
To perform custom configuration of this decoder or multiple decoders without the use of Profiles, select the Output Authorization tab and then select the Custom

4042066 Rev A

6-61

Control radio button as shown in the example below:

Since multiple Decoder Management windows can be opened simultaneously in the PNC, the User Address is displayed at the top of the window as a reference.
ASI Output

This controls whether or not the ASI output (transport output) on the decoder is controlled by the PNC or not. Possible options are:
Option
No Uplink Control Output Enabled

Means
The Uplink (PNC) releases control of the ASI output on the decoder. The decoder uses the ADP (Addressed Data Packet) to enable its ASI output. The decoder uses the ADP to disable its ASI output.

Output Disabled

6-62

4042066 Rev A

Stream Authorization

Enables control of streams output from the decoder. When the stream is deselected, the decoder disables the output from the analog outputs and the digital (ASI) outputs. When the stream is selected, the decoder outputs the stream to both the analog and the digital (ASI) outputs. This applies to all the following streams:
Video VBI DPI Subtitle High Speed Data Wide Band Data Low Speed Data IP Data Audio

Audio

Each of four audio streams are controlled separately. Enabling (checking) a stream outputs that audio stream from the decoder. For the PNC to perform routing of this audio, see the following section. You can enable or disable the decoders eight expansion port remote control pinouts for cue trigger operation. A check indicates that the particular pin is enabled for cue trigger operation. The default setting for each pin is OFF (unchecked). When the Cue Trigger Mask is enabled for one or more remote control pins, open collector information for the pins is transmitted as part of the compressed MPEG2 video signal. This enables operators at remote sites (provided the site is outfitted with the required third party hardware and software) to control digital advertisement insertion equipment, and control video overlay machines. Decoders can be configured via their front panel to generate local DTMF cue tones on receipt of a cue trigger. In addition to enabling and disabling the open collector Cue Trigger outputs of the decoder, the Cue Trigger Mask also controls the generation of local DTMF tones on the Cue Tone output of the decoder based on receipt of a Cue Trigger. Please refer to the PowerVu receiver installation and operation guide for the receivers/decoders deployed in your network for information on configuring cue tones on the decoder. Note: In order for the decoder(s) to receive the cue trigger information in the video signal, the Cue Trigger check box in the Device Configurations Video Encoder configuration window also needs to be Enabled. For more information, see Multiplex Group tab on page 4-53.

Cue Trigger Mask (optional)

Audio Routing

Controls the routing of the audio output from the decoder. The Enable Audio Routing Controls check box must be selected before any of the Audio Output # Source fields will have any effect. If the Enable Audio Routing Controls check box remains unchecked, this allows local audio control at the decoder.

4042066 Rev A

6-63

Audio Output # Source

The Audio Output # Source fields select an audio from the virtual channel by its order in the PMT (Program Map Table) and routes that numbered audio, if enabled in the Stream Authorization section. More information on this relationship can be found in To add a profile: on page 6-76.

Ad Insertion Tiers
13. Use this tab to assign or remove ad insertion tiers to or from the decoder(s). The following displays the Ad Insert Tiers tab:

For more information on Ad Insertion Tiers, see Assigning Ad Insertion Tiers on page 6-94.

Transcoder
14. If the decoder is a transcoder, use the Name field in the Transcoder tab to assign a transcoder configuration profile to the decoder(s). For more information, see Using Transcoder Configuration Profiles on page 6-87. If the decoder is not a transcoder, the Name field and the Parameter List area are greyed out. 15. After you have entered the information as required, you can save the information. To save the currently displayed information and load this decoder into the database, click Save in the upper right hand corner, or choose Actions > Save.

6-64

4042066 Rev A

For information on editing Decoder Profiles, see the sections below.

Editing an Individual Decoder


To change the information for a single decoder: 1. Choose Decoder > Decoder Search and enter the appropriate search criteria. 2. Double-click the decoder displayed in the Selected Decoders window. The decoders current values are displayed in the Decoder Profile window. Revise the information you want to change. For information about forcing the decoder to tune to a specific virtual channel, or assigning tiers to an individual decoder, refer to the appropriate section later in this chapter. When you begin to type a value in a field, the fields background changes color from white to pink so your eye can more easily confirm what field you are modifying. This feature is designed to help prevent you from making a change to an unintended field. 3. With the Decoder Profile window active, click Save, or choose Actions > Save to load the revised decoder information into the database.

Installing Multiple Decoders


Before you can edit a decoders profile, you must display the Decoder Search window, which lists the currently selected decoders. To display the list, you must search the database for the appropriate decoders. To search for multiple decoders, you must search for the appropriate user addresses, locations, or other information. The global changes you make affect every decoder in the selected group. WARNING!: Always perform a database search to retrieve only those decoders that require changes. If you make a Global Change without performing a proper search, you can overwrite the records found in a previous search, or may even affect the entire database. The system now forces you to do a search before you can do a global change. In a multi-user system, an operator may have modified the records since your last search. Consequently, always perform a fresh search BEFORE you make a global change to ensure that your search parameters are the most recent ones, and that only the selected parameters are changed. To find a group of decoders: 1. Choose the Decoder Search icon, or choose Decoder > Decoder Search. The

4042066 Rev A

6-65

Decoder Search window displays with the available search criteria.

2. To find the appropriate decoders, you must enter the appropriate search criteria. For instance, you can search for all the decoders whose Installed status is No and that have a specific program tier. To enter the search criteria:
Select

a search item from the Item list, enter the criteria in the Criteria field, and click Set. The criteria is listed in the Selection Criteria portion of the window. other criteria in the same way. The search will seek out decoders whose configuration matches all the criteria listed in Selection Criteria.

Enter

Use the following chart to quickly determine the installed status of a decoder:
Bkgd Colour
Red Green White

Meaning
Decoder is not installed Decoder is installed Decoder is disabled

Decoder status colours 3. Choose Search to begin the search. If your search is successful, then the Selected Decoders portion of the window lists the decoders matching all the criteria you entered.

6-66

4042066 Rev A

Installing the Selected Decoders


After you have selected the decoders whose Installed status you want to change from No to Yes, follow this procedure to change their status: 1. Make sure the decoders whose status you want to change are listed in the Selected Decoders portion of the window. 2. Choose Global Change to display the Decoder Global Change window.

3. Select Yes from the Installed list to change the decoders status from uninstalled to installed. 4. Choose OK. The following message is displayed:
Do you really want to save the changes?

5. Choose Yes. The system updates the selected records. 6. If you choose No, none of the decoder records are updated. This is the same as clicking Cancel on the Decoder Global Change window. 7. Choose OK to complete the global edit. The selected decoders are now installed.

4042066 Rev A

6-67

Globally Editing Decoder Records


When you have searched the decoder database and selected the records you want to change, you can edit all the selected records at the same time by using the global edit function. To make a global change to selected decoder records: 1. Perform a search. 2. Click the Global Change button to display the Decoder Global Change window.

3. Enter or revise information in one or more of the fields. The information you change affects all of the selected decoder records. For information on these fields, see Installing a Single Decoder on page 6-51. When you begin to type a value in a field, the fields background changes color from white to pink so your eye can more easily confirm what field you are modifying. This feature is designed to help prevent you from making a global change to an unintended field. Note: The Merge Tiers feature is only available during global updates. Cisco recommends you always enable this check box during updates. If it is disabled, the Program Tiers for this record overwrite all Program Tiers in the currently selected group. When enabled, the Program Tiers are added or merged with the existing Program Tiers.

6-68

4042066 Rev A

The Generate EMM feature is also only available during global updates. Cisco recommends always enabling this checkbox. If disabled, the EMM is not generated until the next system update. Enabling this field sends the EMM update immediately after you perform an update to apply your changes to the database. 4. Click OK. A message dialog asks you if youre really sure you want to change xxx number of decoders, where xxx is the number of decoders your operation is going to affect.

5. Click Yes and your operation will execute. The system updates the selected records.

4042066 Rev A

6-69

Grouping Decoders
The following sections describe how to create and maintain event groups. The event groups are created for configuring channel tuning events in the LEC server. For more information on the LEC server, refer to the Live Event Controller Users Guide.

Adding Event Groups


The Event Group Summary window displays a list of event groups. Event groups are groups of decoders. The groups are created to import into the Live Event Controller (LEC) Server for scheduling channel tuning events. To create an Event Group: 1. Choose Decoder > Event Group Summary. The Event Group Summary window opens.

2. Right-click anywhere and select Add. The Add Event Group dialog opens.

3. Enter the name of the event group in the Name field.

6-70

4042066 Rev A

4. Set an event ID number in the Value field. The ID number must be unique. 5. Click Add. The event is added to the Event Group Summary.

Editing Event Groups


You can edit the information of an existing event group. To edit an event group: 1. Choose Decoder > Event Group Summary. The Event Group Summary window opens. 2. Right-click the event group you want to modify and select Edit. The Edit Event Group dialog opens.

3. Make the necessary changes. 4. Click Set. The event group is updated.

Saving Event Group Summary Entries


You can save the list of event groups as a text, HTML, or rich text format file. To save event groups: 1. In the Event Group Summary window, click File > Save As. 2. If you selected event groups in the Event Group Summary window, the following message appears:

3. If you want to save the selected event groups only, select the Marked option. If you want to save all the event groups listed in the Event Group Summary window, select the All option. 4. Click OK. The Save Event Groups dialog appears.

4042066 Rev A

6-71

5. Navigate to the folder to which you want to save the event group file. 6. In the File name field, enter the name of the event group file. 7. Select the type of file (*.txt, *.html, or *.rtf) and click Save.

Assigning an Event Group to a Decoder


After you create the event groups, you must assign the groups to the appropriate decoders. Each decoders user address can belong up to a maximum of 32 event groups. To add an event group to a decoder: 1. In the Decoder Profile there is Event Group Membership area, displaying all the event groups the decoder is currently assigned. The following displays an example:

List of Event Groups assigned to the current decoder

Remove Event Group Add Event Group

6-72

4042066 Rev A

2. Click the add (+) button and the Add Event Groups window displays.

3. Select the event groups you want the current decoder to belong. To select multiple event groups, hold down the Shift key as you select a range of event groups or hold down the Ctrl key as you select individual event groups. Note: You can include up to a maximum of 32 event groups. 4. Click OK. The new event group(s) appear in the Event Group Membership list. 5. Click Save, or choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the decoder profile.

Removing an Event Group from a Decoder


To remove the event group from a decoder: 1. In the Decoder Profile window, click the Configuration tab. 2. Select the event group in the Event Group Membership section and click the remove (-) button. 3. Click Save, or choose Actions > Save to save the changes to the decoder profile. The event group is no longer assigned to the decoder.

Editing Event Group Memberships Globally


You can edit a group of decoders at the same time in the decoder search window by using the global edit function. In the Global Change window, you can edit the event group memberships for all the listed decoders. The listed decoders are generated through a decoder search. To make a global event group membership change to a group of decoder records: 1. Perform a search. The decoders listed will be affected by the global change. 2. Click Global Change to display the Decoder Global Change window.

4042066 Rev A

6-73

3. Click the Configuration tab.

Event groups listed will automatically replace existing event groups

Select Merge to add the event groups listed above to the existing event group membership

Select Remove to delete the event groups listed above from the existing event group membership

4. In the Event Group Membership section, click the add (+) button to add one or more event groups to the list of event groups to which the decoders belongs. Click the minus (-) button to remove one or more event groups from the list of event groups. Note: If Merge or Remove are not selected below, the list created here replaces all event group lists for all the listed decoders. 5. If you want the listed event groups to be added to the existing event group membership for all the selected decoders, select Merge. 6. If you want the listed event groups to be removed from the existing event group membership for all the selected decoders, select Remove. 7. Click OK and a message dialog appears asking if you are sure you want to change xxx number of decoders. 8. Click Yes. The event group memberships are updated for the listed decoders.

6-74

4042066 Rev A

Decoder Output Control


Optionally, decoder output on the PowerVu Model D9850 Program Receiver can be controlled through the PNC. This control encompasses:
Control Stream Audio

of the ASI Output

Filtering

Output Routing

Control of the ASI Output helps to prevent loss of service if cable operators drop certain services from their analog tier and then add them to their digital tier. Stream Filtering control allows operators to enable/disable services on a per stream basis. And Audio Output Routing control allows the selection of audios from the PMT (Program Map Table), so they can be routed to the available decoder outputs.

Output Authorization Profile Summary


Output Authorization allows you to save profiles with various parameter settings so that in future configurations, you can simply select the previously saved profile to have a decoder emulate the settings of a previously set up decoder. This can also be used as a shortcut, if your desired settings differ only slightly from the settings in a previously saved profile. If you have previously created Output Authorization Profiles, you can use those profiles here to save you time. Select the Profile radio button and then select the desired profile from the drop-down list. For more information on creating Output Authorization Profiles, see Output Authorization Control (optional) on page 661. Note: The profile selection None can only be selected if the decoder is using custom as its control. You can access the Output Authorization Profile Summary window by choosing Decoder > Output Authorization, if this feature has been installed on the server.

4042066 Rev A

6-75

This window displays a list of all previously setup Output Authorization Profiles, if any exist. The columns display the settings present in the profile. The display of columns can be customized to show only the ones you are interested in by rightclicking on a column header and selecting/de-selecting the columns to display. You can also sort by any column by clicking on that columns heading. Except for ASI Output Control, Cue Triggers and Audio#, all field values are displayed as either On or Off. ASI Output Control can be Output Disabled, Output Enabled or No Uplink Control. Cue Triggers are shown as a string of eight 0s (off) and 1s (on), indicating the setting for cue trigger 8 through 1, respectively. Audio# is shown as On or Off, followed by optional routing information. The routing information is omitted if the audio routing control has not been enabled. (i.e. On2 means Audio is on, routing control is enabled and the audio is routed to VC Audio 2; On means Audio is on, but routing control is not enabled) You can add/edit/delete profiles. To edit a profile, right-click on the profile you would like to edit, and select Edit from the pop-up menu. Make any desired changes and then click the save icon or press F6. To delete a profile, right-click on the profile you would like to delete, and select Delete from the pop-up menu. Note: Delete actions are applied immediately. No further action is required. Note: If a profile is currently being referenced by a decoder, whether the decoder is using custom or profile as its control, that profile cannot be deleted.

To add a profile:
1. Right-click anywhere below any entries in the Output Authorization Profile Summary window and select Add from the pop-up menu. The Output Authorization window displays:

2. Enter the Name you would like to use to refer to this profile in the Name field. This is the name that will appear in the list of profiles on the Decoder Pro-

6-76

4042066 Rev A

file and Decoder Global Change dialogs. (See Output Authorization Control (optional) on page 6-61.) This value must be unique among all the other profiles. 3. Choose your desired ASI Output Control setting. Possible options are No Uplink Control, Output Enabled, and Output Disabled. Note: If the IRD output control option is installed on the PNC, local control of the D9850 audio outputs is not supported. Remove the IRD Output Control option if local audio routing is required. 4. Select the streams you would like to authorize for output control. When a box is checked, that value is available for output control. 5. Choose whether to enable audio routing or not. To enable it, select the Enable Audio Routing Controls check box. Once enabled, you have to tell the PNC which Audio stream for the Virtual Channel is mapped to which decoder output. Note: If you set Audio Output 1 Source to something other than VC Audio #1, you must make sure no other Sources are mapped to that audio. A warning box is displayed if you do not do this. 6. Once all the settings are as you want them, you must perform a Save to apply the settings. You can save by either clicking Save, or by pressing F6. A dialog displays indicating the number of decoders which will be affected by this change. If you click Cancel, the Save action is aborted, but the changes you made to the window remain. Click OK to accept the changes. Note: Profiles can also be deleted. However, if a profile is referenced by any decoder, then the user will not be able to delete the record.

Using Profiles
If you have previously created Output Authorization Profiles, you can use those profiles on the Decoder Profile window to save configuration time.

Select the Profile radio button and then select the desired profile from the dropdown list. All settings in the profile are applied to the decoder. For information on customizing these settings using the Custom radio button and window, see Output Authorization Control (optional) on page 6-61. If you select Profile, you must select a profile name. The option None is not valid. The option None can only be selected if the decoder is using Custom as its control.

4042066 Rev A

6-77

Force Tuning Decoders


You can force one or more decoders to tune to a specific virtual channel; the decoders remain set to that channel until either you disable the force tuning or the decoder operator selects another channel. Note: If a service disruption occurs, the decoder is not automatically reset to the force tune channel. The setting it returns to is determined by the option you set for the decoder in its Decoder Profile. If you selected Home, and entered a Channel number, then the decoder is reset to that channel; if you selected Last, then the decoder is reset to the channel it was on before the disruption.

Force Tuning an Individual Decoder


To force a specific decoder to tune to a specific virtual channel: 1. With the Decoder Search window displayed, double-click the decoder you want to force tune. The Decoder Profile window appears with the decoders values displayed. 2. Enter or select information in these fields:
Channel

Select or enter the number of an existing virtual channel to which you want the decoder tuned. Enter a number in the range from 1 to 65535. CAUTION:You must select a channel from the pull down list if Enable Force Tune is selected. Otherwise, the decoder is forced to tune to channel 0 (zero). If the decoder is re-initialized, this channel number resets to zero. If your decoder is re-initialized, be sure to set this value to the applicable channel number. If service is disrupted, the decoder does not automatically reset to the force tune channel. It returns to the setting determined by the Standby Transition Channel option in the Decoder Profile window.

Time to Wait (mins)

Select or enter the number of minutes the decoder should wait before tuning to the specified virtual channel. Enter a number in the range from 1 to 65535. The default setting for this field is zero. If you leave the field set to zero, then the force tuning action takes place immediately, once you select the Enable Force Tune check box and update the information in the window.

6-78

4042066 Rev A

This Force Tuning window shows the decoder being forced to channel 7 after a 10 minute delay.

3. Select the Enable check box to force the decoder to tune to the specified virtual channel after the appropriate number of minutes. 4. Choose the Save icon or choose Actions > Save to update the decoder record.

Force Tuning Multiple Decoders


You can set multiple decoders to tune to a specific virtual channel. With this feature, you can, for example, schedule a training session to be transmitted at a particular time to specific decoders, or broadcast a special message to a number of locations at the same time. The decoder stays tuned to that channel until the operator switches to a different channel, or you disable the force tuning. The procedure to force tune multiple decoders is exactly the same as that used to force tune an individual decoder (see previous section), except that you use the Global Change button instead of double-clicking a specific decoder in the search list. This enables you to affect the entire search results list of decoders.

Deauthorizing Decoders
You can quickly deauthorize one or more decoders by wiping out the decoders local memory so that it can no longer interpret the signal and service access information. WARNING!: Highlighting records and performing changes not only changes the highlighted record(s), but ALL THE DECODERS FOUND IN THE SEARCH. WARNING!: If you delete a decoder from the database without first deauthorizing it, the decoder remains authorized until you change the multisession source key (MSK). See Multi-Session Keys on page 8-2 for more information. Note: Cisco recommends that any time you delete decoders from the database, you immediately change the MSK. See Multi-Session Keys on page 8-2 for more information.

4042066 Rev A

6-79

To deauthorize decoders: 1. Choose Decoder > Decoder Search. The Decoder Search window appears. 2. Choose a search Item from the Item list. 3. Enter the search criteria to match for that item in the criteria field. 4. Click Set to add the search item to the Selection Criteria window. Note: Add as many search items and criteria as desired. 5. Click Search to find the decoders to deauthorize. 6. Click the Global Change button to display the Decoder Global Change window. 7. Click the Installed drop-down and choose Disabled. The decoders found in the search will receive EMMs (see Entitlement Management Message (EMM) Transmission on page 8-3) containing information which deauthorizes them (killer packets) during the next EMM transmission. 8. Click OK and answer Yes to the prompt to save the change(s) to the decoder(s). 9. Click Save or choose Actions > Save to implement the change.

6-80

4042066 Rev A

Transcoder Configuration Control


Optionally, decoder output on the PowerVu Model D9858 Advanced Receiver Transcoder can be controlled through the PNC. Transcoder configuration control encompasses:
HD

and SD Resolution Controls HD and SD Settings

Advanced

The HD and SD resolution controls determine the HD and SD output video resolution and the output bit rate mode. The advanced HD and SD settings allow you to configure the Transcode Group of Pictures (GOP) format and value.

Transcoder Configuration Profile Summary


Transcoder Configuration Profile Summary window allows you to save profiles with various parameter settings so that in future configurations, you can select the previously saved profile to have a transcoder emulate the settings of a previously set up transcoder. Note: If the inband transcode feature is not installed, you cannot access the Transcoder Configuration Profile Summary window. For more information on the installation of the inband transcode feature, contact your System Administrator. By default, there are two profiles: default profile and Null. If the Null profile is selected, no profile data will be transmitted, and the IRDs affected will retain the parameters and characteristics of the last profile. It is highly recommended that the affected IRDs are configured for full end-user control prior to selecting the Null profile. Otherwise, the transcode parameters for the affected IRDs are locked out at the front panel. Note: The default and Null profiles are mandatory in the Transcoder Configuration Profile Summary window. You cannot edit or delete the Null profile. You can edit but not delete the default profile. A transcoder profile can be selected in the Transcoder tab of the Decoder Profile window. By default, if you do not select a transcoder configuration profile, the Null profile is automatically selected. For more information, see Using Transcoder Configuration Profiles on page 6-87.

4042066 Rev A

6-81

You can access the Transcoder Configuration Profile Summary window by choosing Decoder > Transcoder Configuration.

This window displays a list of all the previously setup transcoder configuration profiles, if they exist. The columns display the settings present in the profile. The display of columns can be customized to show only the ones you are interested in by right-clicking on a column header and selecting/de-selecting the columns to display. You can also sort by any column by clicking on that columns heading. The Inband Transcode Status displays the status of the inband transcode feature (Enabled or Disabled). If the state is Disabled or if the inband transcode feature is uninstalled, the transcoder information will not be transmitted from the uplink. For more information, contact your System Administrator.

Adding a Profile
1. In the Transcoder Configuration Profile Summary window, right-click anywhere and select Add. The Transcoder Configuration Profile window displays.

2. Set the following information:

6-82

4042066 Rev A

Name

Enter a unique name for the current profile. This is the name that will appear in the list of profiles on the Transcoder Configuration Profile Summary and Decoder Profile windows. Select to allow the user to manually configure the transcoder to transcode by HD and/or SD using the front panel of the D9858 Advanced Receiver Transcoder. Deselect to disallow front panel configurations. When selected, it automatically selects and disables Allow Local HD Transcode Selection, disables Allow Local HD Transcode selection, and de-selects and disables Allow Local SD Parameter Control for basic parameters and Allow Local Parameter Control for advanced parameters. The user can only configure HD parameters using the current configurations and will not be able to configure the parameters using the front panel of the D9858 Advanced Receiver Transcoder. When selected, it automatically selects and disables Allow Local SD Transcode Selection, disables Allow Local HD Transcode selection, and de-selects and disables Allow Local SD Parameter Control for basic parameters and Allow Local Parameter Control for advanced parameters. The user can only configure SD parameters using the current configurations and will not be able to configure the parameters using the front panel of the D9858 Advanced Receiver Transcoder. Select to allow the user to manually configure HD and/or SD parameters using the front panel of the D9858 Advanced Receiver Transcoder. De-select to disallow front panel configurations. In the HD Controls, selects the transcode channel HD horizontal output video resolution.
Setting Description
Input Resolution Full Resolution 3/4 Resolution Full Resolution 3/4 Resolution 1080i 1080i 720p 720p Output Resolution 1920 1440 1280 960

Allow Local HD/SD Transcode Selection

Force HD Transcode

Force SD Transcode

Allow Local HD/SD Parameter Control

H Res

In the SD Controls, select the SD horizontal output video resolution as follows: 352, 480, 528, 544, 640, 704, or 720.
CBR or Capped VBR CBR Default (Mbps)

Select the transcode channel output bit rate mode (CBR or VBR). If CBR was selected above, set the transcode channel output bit rate for CBR. The range is from 10 to 25 Mb/s in 400 b/s increments for HD transcoding. The range is from 2 to 15 Mb/s in 400 b/s increments for SD transcoding. If Capped VBR was selected above, set the maximum transcode channel output bit rate for VBR. The range is from 10 to 25 Mb/s in 400 b/s increments for HD transcoding. The range is from 2 to 15 Mb/s in 400 b/s increments for SD

Capped VBR Max (Mbps)

4042066 Rev A

6-83

transcoding.
Convert (SD Controls only)

This is the type of (aspect ratio) conversion the transcoder will perform based on what you have selected. The following table displays the conversions performed by the transcoder based on your selection, and the effect on the picture displayed by the transcoder in each case: Convert
4:3 Follow AFD 4:3 No Conversion

Description
Auto AFD, Auto setting using Active Format Descriptor. Picture appears tall and thin.

Image

4:3 Center Cut

Horizontally up-samples the center portion of the picture to fill the 720.

16:9 Letterbox

Vertically down-samples the picture and applies black bars at the top & bottom of the screen.

14:9 Letterbox

Compromises some up-sampling. Some black bars and some cropping are visible.

16:9 Follow AFD 16:9 No Conversion

Auto AFD, Auto setting using Active Format Descriptor. Picture is short and fat.

16:9 Scaled

Vertically up-samples the center of the 4:3 picture and crops the top and bottom of the screen.

6-84

4042066 Rev A

Convert
4:3 Pillarbox

Description
4:3 picture is centered in a pillar-style box.

Image

14:9 Pillarbox

Compromises some up-sampling. Some black bars and cropping are visible.

Allow Local Selection of Passthrough

Select to allow the user to set the transcoder to passthrough the source program to the output using the front panel of the D9858 Advanced Receiver Transcoder. The output may include the source program only or the source program with the transcoded channels. If de-selected, the user cannot change the passthrough mode through the transcoder. Select to include the original video stream in the output. When selected, the Allow Local Selection of Passthrough is automatically selected and disabled.

Force Passthrough

4042066 Rev A

6-85

Advanced HD/SD Settings

Click to open the Advanced HD or SD Settings dialog boxes for additional advanced parameters.

HD Settings
Allow Local Parameter Control

SD Settings

Select to allow the user to manually configure the GOP format using the front panel of the D9858 Advanced Receiver Transcoder. De-select to disallow front panel configurations. Select the Transcode Group of Pictures (GOP) format (I-Frame Align or User GOP). Select the transcode manual GOP format value. The transcoder attempts to reuse information from the encoded bit stream to improve the video quality of the transcoded stream. Amongst others, if the incoming GOP structure is similar to that of an MPEG-2, it will reuse the frame allocations from the incoming stream as long as GOP control is set to I-Frame Align. If the downstream receiver does not support altering GOP structures, set the GOP control setting to User GOP This . will also require the setting of the GOP structure which is given as two numbers, where the first is the length of the GOP and the second is the number of Bpictures per sub-GOP The supported structures are: M1 N1, M3 N12, M3 N15, . M3 N24 or M3 N30. Enable or disable 3:2 pulldown. Defines the format of the captions into the video user data. Select one of the following options from the drop-down list: CEA-708, SCTE-20, or Not Used. 3. Click OK to save the advanced HD settings. Click Cancel to close the window without saving.

I-Frame Align or User GOP GOP Select

3/2 PDI Caption Packets (SD Settings only)

Editing a Transcoder Configuration Profile


1. Right-click on the profile you would like to edit and select Edit. 2. Make the desired changes. 3. Click Save or press F6.

6-86

4042066 Rev A

Deleting a Transcoder Configuration Profile


Note: You can only delete a transcoder configuration profile if it is not associated with a transcoder. Right-click on the profile you would like to delete and select Delete. The selected profile is deleted. Note: You cannot delete the default or Null profiles.

Using Transcoder Configuration Profiles


If you have previously created Transcoder Configuration Profiles, you can select a profile in the Decoder Profile window. The transcoder configuration profile can only be changed if the Inband Transcode Status is either Enabled or Disabled. If the status is Uninstalled, the profile selection is read-only. The transcoder profile ADP will only be sent if the Inband Transcode Status is Enabled. 1. From the Decoder Profile window, select the Transcoder tab, as shown in the example below:

2. In the Name drop-down list, select the transcoder configuration profile you want to use. All settings in the profile are applied to the decoder. Note: The Null profile is the default transcoder profile selection for a newly

4042066 Rev A

6-87

installed decoder. Note: If you change an existing transocder profile to Null, the following warning message appears:

You must ensure that the last profile assigned to the transcoder allowed full control of the transocding parameters. Otherwise, the user will not be able to configure the unit. 3. The Parameter List displays the transcoder parameters associated with the selected configuration profile. For details on the parameters, refer to Adding a Profile on page 6-82 and the PowerVu Model D9858 Advanced Receiver Transcoder Installation and Operation Guide. 4. To save the currently displayed information and load this decoder into the database, click Save in the upper right hand corner, or choose Actions > Save.

6-88

4042066 Rev A

Authorizing Services
Service authorization determines which services channels and events a decoder is authorized to output for viewing.

Assigning Program Tiers


When you define a scrambled virtual channel, you associate program tiers with the channel and its events. When you enable program tiers for a decoder, and one of its program tiers matches the tier assignment for a virtual channel or event, then the decoder is authorized to decode the signal for the channel or event. If no tier match is found, then the decoder is not authorized and cannot access the channel or event. For more information on channels and events, see Virtual Channels and Controlling Access on page 5-1. Note: Decoder authorization can be affected by the decoders Blackout (blackout/spotlight) codes. For details, see Setting Blackout Codes on page 5-23. You can edit individual decoder profiles to assign program tiers to a specific decoder, or you can globally edit a number of decoder profiles to simultaneously assign a group of decoders the same program tiers.

Assigning Program Tiers to Individual Decoders


To assign program tiers to a specific decoder to authorize it for programs with matching program tiers:
1. In the Selected Decoders portion of the Decoder Search window, double-click the decoder you want to work with. The Decoder Profile window displays the current values for this decoder.

2. Choose Program Tiers from the Decoder Profile window. The Tier Map window appears for this decoder, as shown below. The default program tier assigned to all new decoders is 0 (zero).
Assigned Unused Rogue

program tiers appear in green.

program tiers appear in gray.

program tiers (tiers removed by a superuser or service provider) appear in red. Do not use these program tiers.

4042066 Rev A

6-89

Note: Rogue tiers should never occur in a PNC system, but if rogue tiers do appear on the Tier Map, you cannot continue to edit tiers until the rogues are removed.

3. Choose a Service Name from those available, or enter a new Service Name (maximum of 15 alphanumeric characters) to identify the program tiers for the selected decoder. If you choose to enter a new Service Name, it will be appended to the list of Service Names for selection for other decoders. 4. To assign a tier to the decoder, click on an unassigned (gray) number in the Tier Map area. The numbers background turns green. You can only assign the tiers that appear in the window. You can assign multiple tiers to a decoder. To remove an assigned tier from the decoder, click on the assigned (green) number in the Tier Map area. The numbers background turns gray. Note: To select a tier range, highlight the first tier in the range and while pressing the Shift key highlight the last tier in the range. 5. The tier map below assigns tiers 106-107, 115-116, 135-136, and 140-141 to the decoder.

6-90

4042066 Rev A

6. Choose OK to complete the changes you have made, or Cancel to leave the window without saving the changes. 7. Choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changed information to the database. If this procedure is not completed, the tier information will not be saved.

Assigning Program Tiers to Multiple Decoders


To assign program tiers to multiple decoders: 1. Search the database for the decoders whose status you want to change. WARNING!: You should always perform a search for the decoders you want to edit BEFORE you actually make the changes. Performing a fresh search ensures that you have selected the appropriate decoders, especially on a multi-user system where others may be working on the same database. 2. After you have selected the decoders whose program tiers you want to assign, and they are listed in the Selected Decoders portion of the Decoder Search Window, choose Global Change to display the Decoder Global Change window.

4042066 Rev A

6-91

3. Choose Program Tiers to display the Program Tier Map window. The changes you make affect all of the selected decoders. No default tiers are assigned.

6-92

4042066 Rev A

WARNING!: If you dont enable (check) the Merge Tiers check box, then all existing tiers in the selected decoders are overwritten by your new selections. Enabling this option merges the existing tiers with your new selections on a unique basis. What this means is, if you have 1,000 decoders selected - all with different current tier configurations - and youre adding tiers 5 and 7, all the decoders retain their original tiers, plus they add tiers 5 and 7 to their tier configurations. Notes:
Assigned Unused

program tiers appear in green.

program tiers appear in gray. These program tiers have not been assigned to these decoders. The decoders are not affected by any activity related to unassigned (unused) program tiers. program tiers (tiers removed by a superuser or service provider) appear in red. Do not use these tiers. tiers should never occur in a PNC system, but if rogue tiers do appear on the Tier Map window, you cannot continue to edit tiers until the rogues are removed.

Rogue

Rogue

4. Choose a Service Name from those available, or enter a new service name to identify the program tiers for the selected decoders. If you choose to enter a new Service Name, it will be appended to the list of Service Names for selection for other decoders.
Service Name

This field accepts a maximum of 15 text characters. 5. To assign tiers to these decoders, click on an unassigned (gray) number in the Tier Map area. The numbers background turns green. You can only assign the

4042066 Rev A

6-93

tiers that appear in the window. You can assign multiple tiers to the decoders. To remove an assigned tier from the decoders, click on the assigned (green) number in the Tier Map area. The numbers background turns gray. 6. Choose OK to save the changes, or Cancel to leave the decoders unchanged. When you choose OK, the following message is displayed:
Do you really want to save the changes?

7. Choose Yes. The system updates the selected records, and then displays the following message:
Global set completed. View will be closed now.

8. Choose OK to complete the global edit. 9. Choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to update the database with the changes you have made. If this procedure is not completed, the tier information will not be saved.

Assigning Ad Insertion Tiers


When your automation system prepares an ad insertion, it assigns a unique ad insertion tier with the DPI stream and a cue tone. When you use the PNC system to assign ad insertion tiers to a decoder, the decoder is authorized to decode the signal for ad insertions that match the ad insertion tiers assigned by your automation system. If the PNC system does not find a tier match, the decoder is not authorized and cannot access the ad insertion. Note: Decoder authorization can be affected by the decoders Blackout (blackout/spotlight) codes. For details, see Setting Blackout Codes on page 5-23. You can edit individual decoder profiles to assign ad insertion tiers to a specific decoder, or you can globally edit a number of decoder profiles to simultaneously assign a group of decoders the same ad insertion tiers.

Assigning Ad Insertion Tiers to Individual Decoders


To assign the ad insertion tiers, follow these steps:
1. In the Selected Decoders portion of the Decoder Search window, double-click the decoder you want to work with. The Decoder Profile window displays the current values for this decoder.

2. In the Decoder Profile window, click Ad Insert Tiers. The Ad Insert Tiers

6-94

4042066 Rev A

Map window appears for this decoder, as shown below. The default ad insertion tier assigned to all new decoders is 0 (zero).

Assigned Unused

ad insertion tiers appear in green.

ad insertion tiers appear in gray.

3. To assign a tier to the decoder, click an unassigned (gray) number in the Tier Map area. The numbers background turns green. You can only assign the tiers that appear in the window. You can assign multiple tiers to a decoder. To remove an assigned tier from the decoder, click on the assigned (green) number in the Tier Map area. The numbers background turns gray. Note: To select a tier range, highlight the first tier in the range and while pressing the Shift key highlight the last tier in the range.

4042066 Rev A

6-95

4. The tier map below assigns tiers 106-107, 115-116, 135-136, and 140-141 to the decoder.

5. Choose OK to complete the changes you have made, or Cancel to leave the window without saving the changes. 6. Choose the Actions > Save or Save icon to save the changed information to the database. If this procedure is not completed, the tier information will not be saved.

6-96

4042066 Rev A

Assigning Ad Insertion Tiers to Multiple Decoders


To assign ad insertion tiers to multiple decoders, follow these steps: 1. Search the database for the decoders whose status you want to change. WARNING!: You should always perform a search for the decoders you want to edit BEFORE you actually make the changes. Performing a fresh search ensures that you have selected the appropriate decoders, especially on a multi-user system where others may be working on the same database. 2. After you have selected the decoders whose ad insertion tiers you want to assign, and they are listed in the Selected Decoders portion of the Decoder Search Window, choose Global Change to display the Decoder Global Change window.

3. Choose Ad Insert Tiers to display the Tier Map window. The changes you make affect all of the selected decoders. No default tiers are assigned.

4042066 Rev A

6-97

WARNING!: If the Merge tiers checkbox is de-selected, then all existing tiers in the selected decoders are overwritten by your new selections. Enabling this option merges the existing tiers with your new selections on a unique basis. What this means is, if you have 1,000 decoders selected - all with different current tier configurations - and youre adding tiers 5 and 7, all the decoders retain their original tiers, plus they add tiers 5 and 7 to their tier configurations. Notes:
Assigned Unused

ad insertion tiers appear in green.

ad insertion tiers appear in gray. These ad insertion tiers have not been assigned to these decoders. The decoders are not affected by any activity related to unassigned (unused) ad insertion tiers.

4. To assign tiers to these decoders, click on an unassigned (gray) number in the Tier Map area. The numbers background turns green. You can only assign the tiers that appear in the window. You can assign multiple tiers to the decoders. To remove an assigned tier from the decoders, click on the assigned (green) number in the Tier Map area. The numbers background turns gray. 5. Choose OK to save the changes, or Cancel to leave the decoders unchanged. When you choose OK, the following message is displayed:

6-98

4042066 Rev A

Do you really want to save the changes?

6. Choose Yes. The system updates the selected records, and then displays the following message:
Global set completed. View will be closed now.

7. Choose OK to complete the global edit. 8. Choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to update the database with the changes you have made. If this procedure is not completed, the tier information will not be saved.

Using the EmcDecoder Command Line Interface


Typically, when the system is first installed, or when you need to add decoders, you receive a distribution CD or diskette (depending on your server configuration) containing the new decoders. However, in networks where remote loading is required, the EmcDecoder Command Line Interface (CLI) provides a direct file load utility to load decoders directly from a CD or hard drive. This utility is accessible via telnet or another command line interface. Note: If your server is equipped with a diskette drive, you must copy the SSN file to the hard drive before running the EmcDecoder CLI utility.

Internet / telco Operators PC

Remote PNC Server #1

Remote PNC Server #2

Using the EmcDecoder Command Line Interface you can choose to load a whole (complete) SSN file, a single User Address (UA) or a list of user addresses.

4042066 Rev A

6-99

Loading SSN Files from Diskette to Hard Drive


To load the SSN file from the SSN diskette to the PNC server, you must copy the SSN file to the PNC server hard drive before running the EmcDecoder CLI utility. 1. Ensure that the diskette is placed in the servers diskette drive. 2. Log in as user emcadmin. 3. Change directories by typing in:
cd /v/emc/JavaInstallation

4. Copy the SSN file to the server hard drive by typing:


cpio -icvdumB -I/dev/rfd0 5.

Proceed to step 4 of one of the following procedures to load the SSN file or individual UAs depending on whether you want to load a complete SSN file, single or multiple UA addresses.

Loading a Complete SSN File from CD or Hard Drive


To load a complete SSN file from a CD or hard drive (HD) to the PNC server: 1. If loading from a CD, ensure that the CD is placed in the servers CD drive. 2. Log in as user emcadmin. 3. Change directories by typing in:
cd /v/emc/JavaInstallation

4. Run the EmcDecoder CLI and enter the name of the SSN file by typing:
emcdecoder.sh file=a2061056_1.dis from HD) (example: loading

or emcdecoder.sh file=/cdrom/cdrom0/a2061056_1.dis loading from CD) (example:

The following commands will be displayed/returned together with a summary of the UA files that loaded and/or were rejected, and were not found.
Initializing EmcDecoder, please wait... Starting EmcDecoder Command Line Interface... Processing...

6-100

4042066 Rev A

Summary ======= File Id: Total# in File: Total# Requested: ---------Accepted: Rejected: Not Found:

a2061056_1 5 5 5 0 0

5. To view the emcdecoder log, type:


cat emcdecoder.log

The following information will be displayed as part of the log/summary.


Summary ======= File Id: Total# in File: Total# Requested: ---------Accepted: Rejected: Not Found:

a2061056_1 5 5 5 0 0

Details - Loaded UA(s) ====================== 4440001 4440002 4440003 4440004 4440005 Details - Erroneous UA(s) =========================

Loading a Single User Address from CD or Hard Drive


To load a single User Address from a CD or hard drive to the PNC server: 1. If loading from a CD, ensure that the CD is placed in the servers CD drive. 2. Establish a telnet session to the PNC server. 3. Log in as user emcadmin. 4. Change directories by typing in:
cd /v/emc/JavaInstallation

5. Run the EmcDecoder CLI and enter the specific UA by typing:


emcdecoder.sh file=a2061056_1.dis ua=440002 (example: loading from

4042066 Rev A

6-101

HD)

The following commands will be displayed/returned together with a summary of the UA file that loaded and/or were rejected, and were not found.
Initializing EmcDecoder, please wait... Starting EmcDecoder Command Line Interface... Processing... Summary ======= File Id: Total# in File: Total# Requested: ---------Accepted: Rejected: Not Found:

a2061056_1 5 1 1 0 0

6. You can view the emcdecoder log similar to that described in the previous section by typing:
catemcdecoder.log

Loading a List of User Addresses from CD or Hard Drive


To load a list of User Addresses from a CD or hard drive to the PNC server: 1. If loading from a CD, ensure that the CD is placed in the servers CD drive. 2. Establish a telnet session to the PNC server. 3. Log in as user emcadmin. 4. See Loading SSN Files from Diskette to Hard Drive on page 6-100 or Loading a Single User Address from CD or Hard Drive on page 6-101 (depending on your model of PNC server) to transfer the SSN file to the PNC server. Create a text file called ua.txt in the \tmp directory listing the user addresses that you wish to load. Syntax of <UAfile>: sequence of UAs, in decimal, separated by new line characters

For example: 4441234 4441235 3334444 4441111 5532222

5. Change directories by typing in:

6-102

4042066 Rev A

cd /v/emc/JavaInstallation

6. Run the EmcDecoder CLI and enter the name of the SSN file by typing:
emcdecoder.sh file=a2061056_1.dis list=\tmp\ua.txt loading from HD) (example:

The following commands will be displayed/returned together with a summary of the UA files that loaded and/or were rejected, and were not found.
Initializing EmcDecoder, please wait... Starting EmcDecoder Command Line Interface..| Processing... Summary ======= File Id: Total# in File: Total# Requested: ---------Accepted: Rejected: Not Found:

a2061056_1 5 3 1 1 1

7. You can view the emcdecoder log similar to that described in the previous section by typing:
cat emcdecoder.log

Errors and Warnings


The following table indicates the possible errors and warnings that may be displayed on screen when loading either a complete SSN file, single or multiple user addresses.
Message Usage: emcdecoder.sh Error : Error found in UA list file - please check the log file for details. EmcDecoder is being used by another user. Do you wish to kill it and start again [y|n, default=n]:? Error : Contents of SSN file may be corrupted/ wrong Invalid entries found in the UA list file Error Description Invalid input format Severity Suggested Action Error Verify users input against the displayed usage. Check the log file and adjust the UA list file accordingly.

Another instance of EmcDecoder utility is running

Warning

Enter N to quit and wait until the other user finished. Enter Y to continue if you have confirmed that there is no other user running this utility

Invalid SSN file. Possible causes: Corrupted SSN file Wrong file specified not a SSN file Other customers SSN file

Critical

Make sure that you are specifying the correct file. Check with PSDM Coordinator and request another SSN file if necessary.

4042066 Rev A

6-103

The following table indicates the possible errors and warnings that may be displayed in the log file when loading either a complete SSN file, single or multiple user addresses.
Message Description Severity Suggested Action Warning Check with Customer Service to verify that you have the latest decoder models information loaded. Verify that you have specified the correct UA. Verify that you have specified the correct UA. Confirm that the ownership change is what you intended. Unknown Product Code Unknown product code XX XX - Total#:NNN found in NNN Tracking IDs in the SSN file Not Found: NNN uuuuaaa :Not Found: Rejected: NNN uuuuaaa :Rejected: Updated: NNN uuuuaaa :Updated: UA uuuuaaa is not present in the SSN file UA uuuuaaa is present in the database already UA uuuuaaas customer code is updated (Programmer
Segmentation)

Error Error Warning

6-104

4042066 Rev A

Chapter 7

Uplink Configuration
Viewing an Uplink Configuration Encoder Web GUI Control Multiple Signalling Redundancy Systems Transport Media and Assigning Frequencies Allocating Bandwidth Managing EMM Configuration DPI Source Multiplexer Rate Control Configuring Multiplex Group Statistical Multiplexing

The PNC system supports as many as four independently-configured transponder signals. Your systems installation and configuration determine which of the following pertain to your specific situation. Possible configuration steps are: Configure automatic redundancy switching, including the priority of the devices. Note that you can also manually change a devices operating state and mode, and/or switch it to standby for maintenance purposes. Add frequency plans for multi-frequency hops. Note that frequency plans are normally configured by Cisco personnel during installation. Configure system devices and services. For more information on procedures for configuring device streams and services, see Configuring Streams and Services on page 4-1. Allocate bandwidth. Configure Multiplex Group Statistical Multiplexing

4042066 Rev A

7-1

Viewing an Uplink Configuration


To view an uplink configuration: 1. Select the appropriate signal from the signal bar. 2. Choose the Uplink Configuration icon, or choose Uplink > Uplink Configuration. The graphical representation of the uplink configuration for the selected signal is displayed.

Each physical hardware rack is represented, and contains the current system hardware: the actual encoders, multiplexers and modulators. You can easily view the mode and operating state for each device, and manually change them. You can also double-click a device to view and/or configure its streams. In multiple signal systems, all devices are displayed, but devices not associated with the selected signal appear grayed-out and are not configurable for the selected signal.

7-2

4042066 Rev A

Saving an Uplink Configuration to a File


You can save Uplink Configurations to a file for further analysis. To save an uplink configuration to an html: 1. With the Uplink Configuration window displayed, select File > Save As. 2. If the Prompt for fields box has been checked in the Options > Configuration>View >Uplink Configuration window, the Save Fields pop-up window will be displayed as shown below. Note: The default settings displayed in the Save Fields window are preset in the Options> Configuration window. To preset this view to save the Uplink Configuration in a particular format, see the instructions following this procedure to set the Save As and View functions.

3. Choose to save the uplink configuration for all signals or the Selected signal only (when box is checked), Save device properties for all signals or for the selected signal or both to an html file.
Devices for selected signal only

Saves all the devices in the Uplink Configuration window for the selected signal to a file when checked, or saves the uplink configuration for all configurations when unchecked. Saves the device properties for the selected signal(s) to an html file, when checked. If do not want the Save Uplink Configuration window to appear the next time you save the uplink configuration, check the Do not show this dialog next time box. The same settings will be used to save the file the next time you perform this operation. Note: Any changes made to the settings in the Save Uplink Configuration window (i.e., Selected signal only and Save device properties) also appear in the Options> Configuration > View settings, and vice versa. 4. Click OK. 5. In the Windows Save Uplink Configuration window, select the desired

Device properties

4042066 Rev A

7-3

folder, the file name and the file format (txt or html) as shown in the following example.

6. Choose Save to save the Expired Event Log to a file or Cancel to abort the operation.

Preconfigured Save As Function


The Save As function can be used to preconfigure how Uplink Configurations are saved to a file. To set the parameters you want to use to format the saved information: 1. Choose the Configuration icon, or choose Options > Configuration.

7-4

4042066 Rev A

2. Click Save As to display the view shown below.

3. Select the parameters you want to use to format the saved files. This view displays the default characters.
Fields terminated by

The entered character terminates all fields in the file with the selected character. The default is ,, which acts a delimiter. The entered character encloses all fields in the file with the selected character. The default is ., which acts as a delimiter. The entered character terminates all lines in the file with the selected ANSI characters. ANSI escape sequences \r (carriage return), \n (new line) and \t (horizontal tab) are supported. The default is \r\n. Check the Save header box to include the header at the top of the file.

Fields enclosed by

Lines terminated by

Save header

4. Choose OK to save the settings to the database or Cancel to abort any changes.

View
The View function is used to pre-select the format of the Uplink Configuration information when saved to a file. To select the parameters you want to use to format the saved information: 1. Choose the Configuration icon, or choose Options > Configuration. You will see a window similar to that shown below.

4042066 Rev A

7-5

2. Select Uplink Configuration to set the Save As view for saving an uplink configuration to an html file.

Rack size to fit window size Devices for selected signal only

Displays the Uplink Configuration window within the PNC application window. Saves all the devices in the Uplink Configuration window for the selected signal to a file when checked, or saves the uplink configuration for all configurations when unchecked. Saves the device properties for the selected signal(s) to an html file, when checked.

Device properties

7-6

4042066 Rev A

Prompt for options

Check this box to be prompted for the fields you wish to save to a file when performing the File > Save As function. The Save Fields pop-up window is disabled when the Prompt for options box is left unchecked.

Dragging and Dropping Devices


You can drag-and-drop both individual devices within a rack, as well as racks, themselves, within the systems configuration to reposition them.

Signal Bar

The signal bar shows which signal is currently selected, and the operating state of each transponder. Signal states are colour coded as follows:
Colour
Green Red Black Yellow

Signal States
Normal Major Alarm Offline Warning/Maintenance

Items that appear in the signal bar are dependent on the installed feature set. For example, the signal bar above is typical for a 3-signal system.

Customizing Signal Bar Labels


You can perform a minor customization of a signals label on the Signal Bar to help you identify them more readily. By default, signals are named S1, S2, etc. To change the label: 1. Choose Uplink > Signal Parameters. The Signal Parameters dialog displays. 2. Change the Signal Name to the new label you would like to use.

4042066 Rev A

7-7

3. Choose the Save icon on the tool bar to save your changes. Note: The field for the Signal Name in the Signal Parameters dialog is wide enough to take a great many more characters than the box on the signal bar is capable of displaying. The font used on the signal bar is proportional (meaning an uppercase W takes up vastly greater space than a lowercase i), so the number of characters that will display without being truncated depends on which characters you use. As a rule, theres enough space for 4-6 letters. Its best to experiment and see what best suits your requirements. CAUTION: The Transport Stream ID, while changeable here, is used by the Transport Media window. Any changes to the Transport Stream ID also require a PNC Server reset before they take effect. For more information on the Transport Media window, see The Transport Media Window on page 7-27.

7-8

4042066 Rev A

Encoder Web GUI Control


The PNC offers the capability to control encoders such as the D9034, D9036, and D9054 Encoders via the Launch Web Interface option. To launch the web interface for an encoder, simply right-click on the encoder in the Uplink Configuration window, and select Launch Web Interface. Note: When you launch the web interface, the status bar at the bottom of the web GUI indicates the percentage remaining for load complete.

For the D9034 and D9054 encoders, launching the web interface will start the encoders web GUI and display the Summary view. From this view, you can configure video and audio elementary streams similar to that when using the

4042066 Rev A

7-9

encoder Web GUI for the device directly.

For the D9036 Modular Encoding Platform, launching the web interface will start the D9036 web GUI and display the login screen. For more information on logging on to the web GUI, refer to the Cisco D9036 Modular Encoding Platform Installation and Configuration Guide, part number 4036850. The Operating states for web GUI devices are displayed and set similar to other devices except that you need to set the operating parameters for the active primary or secondary devices using their web GUI. WARNING!: If an encoder fails and goes Offline/Standby while its Web GUI window is open, a pop-up message will be displayed on the PNC GUI client informing the operator that the encoder has failed and its operating state has changed. See Setting the Operating State and Mode of a Device on page 7-21 for information on setting the operating modes of devices.

7-10

4042066 Rev A

Synchronizing Settings for the D9036 Encoder


There are three methods for synchronizing the settings file in the D9036 encoder: Note: If the D9036 is in hot standby mode, the PNC will write the settings file to the standby device. For more information on the redundancy group settings, contact your System Administrator. 1. By default, a regular schedule is set to update the settings file from the D9036 encoder every five minutes. If you need to increase the frequency, contact your PNC installer to change the settings. 2. After making changes in the D9036 web GUI, click Save in the upper right hand corner, or choose Actions > Save to save the settings file to the D9036 encoder. 3. Right-click on the D9036 encoder in the Uplink Configuration window and select Sync Settings.

The PNC retrieves the D9036 settings file from the D9036 encoder. The Diagnostic Monitor Log displays the transfer details.

Configuring a Web GUI Device


Proceed as follows to configure a Web GUI device. 1. In the Uplink Configuration window, double-click on the Web GUI device you wish to configure. This will launch the Web GUI Device window as shown

4042066 Rev A

7-11

below.
Sum of bandwifdth of all enabled streams

Name assigned to Web GUI Device by the system

Alias (nickname) assigned to the Web GUI Device to improve identification

Redundancy
Group

The encoder redundancy group is decided during system configuration at the factory (i.e. it is not a user configurable parameter). It is essentially the grouping of encoders (it actually applies to other devices - muxes, modulators) with similar card sets. Select the encoder priority for autochangeover to a standby encoder in case this encoder fails. The lower the number, the higher the priority. For example, if encoders 1 and 2 both fail, and their priorities are set at 50 and 100 respectively, encoder 1 has priority to the standby encoder of the same type. The standby encoder must be configured as Standby, and Autochangeover must be enabled. Select a number from 0 to 255. The default, and the highest priority, is 0. 2. To add a stream, right-click in the Web GUI Device streams window, and choose Add from the popup menu to display the Web GUI Device streams dialog:

Priority

7-12

4042066 Rev A

Note: Only elementary streams originating from the encoder are used in the PNC system. Any tables created by the encoding devices are discarded. Services can be set up utilizing the elementary streams from the Web GUI device by selecting them from the signal Summary screen, as with other types of encoders. See 3. Enter or select information in the following fields:
Name Type

This non-editable field displays the name the system uses to identify the stream. The types of streams from the list which may added are:
Stream Types
Video Audio(DBE) Subtitling Audio(AAC) Audio(MPEG) DPI Audio(AC3) VBI

Note: The DPI selection only appears if the optional DPI feature has been installed. When selecting a Video stream, choose H.264 to the right of the Type field. For all other Type selections, this field is grayed-out. Note: If your system is to support H.264 (MPEG-4 part 10) video streams, contact Cisco customer support to properly configure your system for H.264 applications. Cisco will configure the PNC to enable H.264 stream descriptors to be added to the PMT Table for support of third party equipment. This is necessary to achieve MPEG compatibility.
Enable

When set to ON, this stream is available for transmission and its bandwidth is included in the Total Bandwidth at the top of the window. This field is useful when adding streams which are not necessarily always available. In this field you enter the amount of signal bandwidth assigned to this particular stream, in bps. In this field you enter the incoming PID for this particular stream. In this field you enter the outgoing PID for the particular stream. This field allows you to associate or group a variety of input streams. Note: All Video streams within the same encoder must be unique. Once created, streams are available to Virtual Channels, as any regular streams from Encoders would be. The streams are displayed in yellow in the Stream Summary window. Note: If you want to scramble the video stream, go to Configuring Scrambling on page 4-144 to find out how to configure scrambling for the video stream.

Bandwidth

In PID Out PID Program ID

4042066 Rev A

7-13

DPI Notes

A DPI stream cannot be added or edited such that its Program ID does not reference a Video stream with a matching Program ID. A Video stream cannot be deleted if it has a DPI stream referencing it. The Program ID of a Video stream cannot be changed if it has a DPI stream referencing it. A DPI stream cannot exist alone in a Web GUI device without first adding a Video stream.

4. When all of the information has been entered, click Add to add the stream to the Web GUI Device streams window, and apply the bandwidth to the Total Bandwidth field at the top of the window. You can now continue to add streams, clicking Add when each is complete, or you can click Close to dismiss the dialog. 5. If you need to edit or delete an added stream, right-click on that stream and select the appropriate option from the popup menu. 6. When all the data is added and configured, choose the Save icon in the tool bar to add your changes to the system. 7. In the Web GUI Device streams window, highlight/select and then double-click the Video stream you wish to configure.

7-14

4042066 Rev A

The Web GUI Device window will be displayed.

8. Set the Input PID (InPID) to the same value as shown on the Web Interface PSI Video window for the selected encoder H.264 video channel. See an example of a D9034 Encoder Web GUI, PSI Video window below.

4042066 Rev A

7-15

9. Highlight/select and then double-click the encoder audio stream you wish to configure.

The Web GUI Device window will be displayed.

10. Set the Input PID (InPID) for each encoder audio stream to the same value as shown in the Web GUI PSI Audio window for the selected audio channel. See an example of a PSI Audio Dolby Digital Channel 1 window below.

11. Save all Web GUI Device parameters.

7-16

4042066 Rev A

Modifying Alarm Settings


The alarms for Web GUI devices must be configured in the encoder Web GUI Message Settings window. You can choose to configure the alarms settings for each encoder separately or copy the alarms settings to other encoders of the same type (see the optional steps below). To modify the alarm settings: 1. Launch the Web interface of a Web GUI Encoder (e.g., ENC1P3). The Message Settings window should appear similar to that shown below. Use this screen to set the alarm status, e.g., Enable (check box) or Disable (unchecked), and Alarm Severity (e.g., Major, Minor, Warning or Information) for each alarm.

2. Click Apply to save the changes.


Optional

To copy the alarm settings to other encoders of the same type. This also sets up the Relay (Critical/Major to Relay A, Minor to Relay B, others to None), clears the Backup Trigger (an alarm that is not cleared automatically when received) and sets the trap destination to the PNC. Contact Cisco Customer Support if you require assistance with this task. To copy the alarm settings to one or more devices: 1. Log onto the PNC Server computer as user emcadmin.

4042066 Rev A

7-17

2. Change directories by typing:


cd /v/emc/bin/WebControlDevice

3. To copy the alarm settings from the D9034 or D9054 encoder that you configured (e.g., ENC1P3) to all other encoders of the same type, type the following command:
propagateG3AlarmSetup -s ENC1P3

For the D9036 encoder, type the following command:


propagateG4AlarmSetup.py -s ENC1P4 -t ENC1P3,ENC1S3 -s -t

is the source encoder from which to copy the alarm configurations. is the list of target encoders to copy the alarm configurations.

The modified alarm is copied back to the source encoder as well as to the other encoders. Important: To avoid unnecessary D9036 device reboot during redundancy switching, use the same alarm configurations for the primary and secondary D9036 encoders that belong to the same redundancy group.

D9034/D9054 Statmux Control


For the PNC to successfully communicate with the D9034 and/or D9054 Encoders, and for the Encoders to communicate with each other, you must set the Network Interface to IP Main in the D9034 and D9054 Web GUI. To setup the Statistical Multiplexing Network Interface: 1. From the user interface of the D9034 or D9054 Encoder, click the Video tab, expand the H.264 icon and click the Statistical Multiplexing icon from the subpages, and then Network Interface. 2. Select the communication port to IP Main and click Apply. The following displays the Network Interface pages in D9034 and D9054:

7-18

4042066 Rev A

Ensure IP Main is selected in the D9034 and D9054 Web GUI for the PNC to successfully communicate with the Encoders.

4042066 Rev A

7-19

Multiple Signalling
The PNC is flexible in that the supported system configuration is dependent on the total number of multiplexers and encoders which are present across all signals. The device limitation across all signals is 54 devices, where: Each encoder represents 1 device Each multiplexer represents 3 devices The dispersal of these 54 devices is subject to 2 constraints: 1. The maximum number of encoders for one signal is 4:32. 2. The maximum number of signals is 4. Given these constraints, and the fact that each redundant signal requires 2 multiplexers, the following represents some example configurations:
Example System Configurations
2 x 4:16

Calculation
2 signals with 2 Multiplexers each, where each multiplexer represents 3 devices for a total of 16 devices 18 encoders per signal, where each encoder represents 1 device for a total of 36 devices 3 signals with 2 multiplexers each, where each multiplexer represents 3 devices for a total of 36 devices 12 encoders per signal, where each encoder represents 1 device for a total of 36 devices

Total Devices
52

3 x 4:8

54

Other configurations must adhere to the systems limit and constraints as outlined above. The example that follows details the devices and windows you can reach from each signal via the Uplink Configuration window.

7-20

4042066 Rev A

Setting the Operating State and Mode of a Device


A devices operating state and mode are shown on the coloured status panel on the depicted device. The operating state can be Active, Standby, Offline or Failed, while the mode can be Normal or Maintenance. To change the operating state and mode, follow these steps. 1. Right-click anywhere on the device and click the desired mode from the options at the top of the shortcut menu:
Modes

4042066 Rev A

7-21

If the device is Maintenance mode, you will only be able to set it to a normal mode when the required maintenance on the device has been completed. WARNING!: Service disruptions will occur when you change a units state from Active/Normal to another state, even when a standby unit is available. The length of the disruption depends on the configuration of the backup unit; the unit must be set to the appropriate configuration before it can provide service.
Operating States
Active

Description
Active indicates that the data paths are operating normally. If the system fails, you can force a retry of the data path by changing the status to Active. This unit is the one being used for broadcast purposes. Standby indicates that the system and virtual channel data paths are operating normally for the unit designated as the standby device. Offline indicates communication with the device has stopped. This is generally used for device maintenance and stops the reporting of diagnostics messages for this unit. It also disables the transmission of virtual channel EMMs. You must change the state of primary and secondary devices to Offline to enable them to receive downloaded microcode. Failed is set by the PNC system software because of a failure in the device. This indicates communication has stopped between the PNC system and the device (i.e. a cable problem or a power supply failure).

Standby Offline

Failed

2. Choose Actions > Save or click the Save icon on the tool bar for the status change to take effect. If you do not choose Save, then the system resets the device to its previous mode and state on the next refresh cycle.
Modes
Normal Maintenance

Description
No major errors have occurred in the device since the operator or PNC system placed the device in Normal mode. At least one major error has occurred in the device since it was placed in Normal mode. The device remains in Maintenance mode until the operator places it in Normal mode. If a major error exists in the device, it automatically changes to Maintenance mode to indicate a major problem.

7-22

4042066 Rev A

Redundancy Systems
To prevent transmission disruptions in the case of equipment failure, the PNC system consists of both primary and secondary encoders and multiplexers. Primary encoders and multiplexers actively transmit data under normal operating conditions. When a device fails, or you want to perform maintenance on it, the secondary unit takes over the primary devices functions until the unit is back online. During system installation, the primary and secondary encoders and multiplexers are grouped by alphanumeric codes to identify linked units for the purpose of changeover/redundancy. In addition, each encoder and multiplexer is designated as either primary or secondary. This information is stored in the database when the system is installed.

Configuring Redundancy Switching


You can control how and when redundancy switching takes place for each transponder signals uplink system. For example, you can configure the uplink system to automatically switch a failed devices functions to a secondary device, and you can control the condition of the operating states under which the switching takes place. You can also disable automatic switching altogether. To control the redundancy system for a signals uplink system: 1. Select Uplink > Redundancy. The Redundancy dialog displays. 2. Select the desired signal from the list of signals on the left.

4042066 Rev A

7-23

3. Select one of the following options:


Switching Modes
Disable

Description
Select Disable to turn off automatic switching. When a primary unit fails, its functions do not automatically switch to a secondary unit. This is the normal state for a system where secondary units are not available. Select Enable on major faults to enable automatic switching to a standby unit in a superior operating state when a primary unit fails. With this option enabled, communication still exists between the failed unit and the PNC. This is the recommended state for PNC systems which contain secondary units. When a primary unit fails, the failed unit automatically changes over to a secondary unit which is in a better operating state and/or mode. For example, if the failed unit is in Maintenance mode, the PNC switches to a secondary unit in Normal mode. The PNC system also prevents you from manually selecting a secondary unit in a lower operating state. Instead, if another unit is available in a superior state, the PNC tries to switch to it.

Enable on major faults

4. Choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save this information to the database. Note: For information on setting switcher ports and redundancy priorities, see Redundancy on page 4-4.

Manually Changing a Device to Standby


When you want to perform maintenance on a device for example, if an encoder has not failed, but is behaving erratically you can manually changeover a device. Once you have performed the maintenance task, you can then manually switch the device back online. To manually switch a device: 1. Drag the replacement device and drop it on top of the unit you want to replace. The system sets the state of the replaced device to Standby or Offline, and sets the replacement device to Normal/Active. 2. Choose the Save icon, or choose Save from the Actions menu to save the changes you have made.

7-24

4042066 Rev A

Transport Media and Assigning Frequencies


The Transport Media window is used to define and configure network information parameters used to facilitate the transmission of your broadcast (i.e. programs), as well as configuring network information for your broadcasts reception by your receiver population. Transport Media takes a variety of different applications into consideration and provides maximum flexibility in configuring your broadcasts. The following provides an overview of a few of the possible broadcast applications which the PNCs Transport Media can abridge for you.

Single Frequency Plans


One of the most common scenarios customers will face, is the Single Frequency Plan. This is where a broadcast is transmitted to a single receiver population. The Transport Media window simplifies the definition and configuration of such an application. A single Network Information Table (NIT) is generated to carry the defined tuning information for all the channels involved.

Multiple Frequency Plans


The ability to use the Transport Media window to define and configure multiple frequency plans enables you to use the PNC to transmit broadcasts to multiple receiver populations, including using multiple satellite hops or dual illumination. A single PNC uplink system can control up to eight populations of receivers via different transmissions (that is, eight frequency plans, equivalent to eight network IDs). Each frequency plan uses a Network Information Table (NIT) to carry tuning information for all channels within the broadcast. Note: The system contains only one virtual channel map, but this map can be found at each downlink location for each frequency.

4042066 Rev A

7-25

Grooming
Grooming is the consolidation or separation (depending on your particular situation) of broadcasts to maximize bandwidth usage and efficiency. For example, if you had a channel that didnt broadcast at night or had reduced traffic during off hours, and another that was used for nightly business file transfers, you could groom these channels together so that you only used half of the bandwidth you were using before for the same traffic. Transport Media helps you do this by controlling the settings used to turn bandwidth limits on or off. If you set a bandwidth limit, the unused bandwidth (freed space, as in the example above) either a) is available for you to use for other transmissions, or b) is not needed, and you can save money by only buying what you need. Note: Applying limits works best when downstream grooming is static, since the limits are set accordingly to enable grooming to be successful. Removing limits works best when downstream grooming is dynamic, since the changes in grooming configuration needs to be reflected in the source setup if bandwidth limiting was enabled.

Ad Hoc
To enable flexible satellite use, Transport Media allows you to create configuration templates. What this means is if you have 20 possible carriers, you could create a configuration for each one and only enable the ones you are currently using. You may also have many carriers which fall under several different types. In this case, you could create templates of the various types and then use those to create new, specific carrier profiles, instead of starting from scratch each time. When the Disaster Recovery feature is installed on the PNC, you can to transmit the Disaster Recovery Plan to PowerVu Model D9850 Program Receivers in order to recover from a critical transmission link failure. This feature allows the receivers in your network to locate an alternate signal and resume normal operation following an interruption in service.

7-26

4042066 Rev A

The Transport Media Window

You access the Transport Media window by clicking the Transport Media icon in the tool bar or by choosing Uplink > Transport Media.

Network Info

Transport Media window - Network Info Section The Network Info section displays the following information:
Network Name

The Network description selected when the transport was created or modified. Network definitions are created at the time of system installation and cannot be modified by the operator. An actual network is directly connected to the PNCs transponders. By convention, the name extension HOP is added to the network name of non-actual networks.

Enabled

When the network is enabled, an entry is made in the NIT, enabling the config-

4042066 Rev A

7-27

uration. A network can only be enabled if the enabled Modulators on all its carriers are not enabled on any other enabled network. All enabled Modulators must be initialized after the NIT is sent when a network is enabled.
Service List Disabled

Removes service list descriptors from the Network ID. (This is not recommended and Cisco discourages this approach.) Identifies the ID defined for the network. Network IDs are associated with the actual satellites, and are assigned by the international DVB organization at the request of the satellite operator. This Network ID is used to identify the network throughout the system. If your PNC needs to transmit across several satellites, the Network IDs assigned to each frequency plan (that is, for each satellite hop) must be entered into the PNC at the time of installation. This means, in turn, that each decoder must have the correct Network ID set (along with other required signal parameters) so that the signal can be received at the decoders specific downlink site. For more information on assigning and transmitting NIDs in the EMM stream, see Assigning Network IDs on page 7-32, of this chapter. Note: All PNC software and decoders are produced with a Network ID value equal to 1. If your system will not operate across satellites, and you do not know a satellites Network ID, the system can be operated using the default value.

DVB Network ID

Carrier Type Actual Flag Original Network

Possible carrier types are DVB Satellite or DVB Cable. This check box is informational only, indicating an actual NIT entry will be made. This check box is informational only.

Carrier Info

Transport Media window - Carrier Info Section The Carrier Info section displays the following information:
Carrier Name

This field is simply a label to help you identify the carrier.

7-28

4042066 Rev A

Transport Stream ID

This field is informational and the data comes from the Signal Parameters dialog. To access this dialog choose Uplink > Signal Parameters. Note that any change made in this dialog is not reflected until the PNC is restarted. This field is informational. To affect actual change in signal association, right click on a specific carrier and select Associate Signal from the quick menu. The Signal Association window displays. To Associate a signal with the carrier, select the desired signal in the table and then click OK. The Transport Media window will momentarily reflect the change. A signal cannot be disassociated from a carrier if it has a modulator enabled for it. Carriers with signal associations are displayed by a green (outlined) icon followed by the carrier name in black text. Carriers without any signal associations are displayed by a grey icon (i.e., no green outline) and the carrier name in grey text.

Signal Association

Modulator Enabled

When selected, this check box enables the modulator displayed in the modulator drop-down field. A modulator can only be enabled if the carrier has a signal association. If a modulator has already been enabled on one carrier currently on an enabled network, then it is not available for any other carrier. This field displays the ID of the available primary modulators for the associated signal. You can only have one primary modulator per signal, so this field is for informational purposes only. The Frequency is the transponder signal frequency (Satellite, L-Band, C-Band, Ku Band) for each site. All decoders receiving EMMs on the selected transponder signal must be set to this frequency to receive their downloaded frequency plan and authorized virtual channel services. If you use the Satellite setting in the Scheme field, the values in the Frequency fields should represent the frequency used by the satellite. Satellite frequency information is available from the satellite service provider.

Modulator DropDown Field

Downlink Frequency

Modulation Info

Transport Media window - Modulation Info Section The Modulation Info section displays the following information:
Modulation Type

This field allows you to select the modulation scheme you would like to use. Note that all calculated values in this section are impacted by this selection. It is recommended that you check with Ciscos Customer Support staff if you are unsure what to select for this field.

4042066 Rev A

7-29

The PNC supports the generation of DVB-S2 compliant NITs. When one of the eight DVB-S2 modulation schemes are selected, two new fields are displayed as shown below:

Pilot Mode

Select between No Pilot and Pilot Active. When Pilot Active is selected, the modulator inserts 36 unmodulated symbols every 16 slots (of 90 symbols) to aid in receiver synchronization. Select between 0.35, 0.25 and 0.2 based on signal quality. This value is used with the symbol rate to calculate the occupied bandwidth. This is a calculated value in bits/second, which relies on all of the items in the Modulation Information section to determine its value. WARNING!: Be extremely careful making any changes in this window. If you change any parameter Frequency, Offset (when using C.Band mode), Symbol Rate, or FEC the decoder is forced to tune to the new configuration. Be aware that there may be some signal loss before the modulator also tunes to the new configuration. Be sure that you want to make these changes before you choose the Save icon. If you intentionally change the parameters and your modulator is at a remote location (i.e., not connected to the Ethernet cables), make sure you arrange to have the modulator and uplink settings adjusted to match the new values. If you changed the parameters by mistake and your modulator is connected to the system, you may be interfering with someone elses signal. You must reset each decoder manually to the former correct values. In other words, you must reinstall each decoder and set it to its previous tuning configuration.

Roll-off Factor

Calculated Bandwidth Capacity

Symbol Rate

Indicates the number of symbols being transmitted per second. The symbol rate is displayed in MSymbols in the format xx.xxx. Number of bits transmitted with each symbol. The Forward Error Correction for this carrier. This is a calculated value, shown for informational purposes only.

Bits Per Symbol FEC Reed Solomon

7-30

4042066 Rev A

Bandwidth Info

Transport Media window - Bandwidth Info Section The Bandwidth Info section displays the following information:
Bandwidth Control

Set to Auto by default, this state enables the PNC to perform sophisticated calculations to determine the best value for the Available Bandwidth field. When set to manual, you can enter the desired Available Bandwidth manually. If the above field is set to Auto, this field is calculated and is displayed for informational purposes only. If the above field is set to Manual, you can enter your desired Available Bandwidth manually in this field. Note that if you are at all unsure of the impact of this decision, Cisco strongly recommends that you contact Customer Support as incorrect values in this field can significantly impact communication performance, including signal overlap with other satellite subscribers. Set to Enable by default, changing this field to Disabled removes the bandwidth limit, but again can have dire consequences if incorrectly implemented. Please check with Ciscos Customer Support staff if you are unsure of what you should do.

Available Bandwidth

Bandwidth Limit

Satellite Info

Transport Media window - Satellite Info Section The Satellite Info section displays the following information:
Polarization Orbital Direction Orbital Position

Select either Horizontal or Vertical polarity. The path of the satellite currently being used. The location in orbit of the satellite currently being used. The location is displayed in the format xxx.x.

4042066 Rev A

7-31

WARNING!: When you update a frequency assignment, the following window displays:

Assigning Network IDs


Network IDs (NIDs) are assigned by the international DVB organization at the request of satellite operators, and are used to identify one satellite from another. Each satellite (if it operates within the DVB parameters) is assigned a unique Network ID, and each receiver within the network/system must be configured to recognize the same NID in order to receive the signal from the satellite.

Remote Distribution of Network IDs


Using the remote distribution feature available in this version, a system administrator is able to change the NID value for all applicable decoders by making changes on the PNC server and then transmit the new NID to the decoders via ADPs. With this feature, the administrator can configure individual decoders, each with unique NIDs, as well as groups of decoders which all share the same NID. This feature comes in handy when an administrator has a group of decoders which belong to one satellite hub using the same NID value (say 10) for each decoder in the group, and the administrator wants to change the NID value for the decoder group so that the decoders now respond to another frequency plan which corresponds to another NID (say 20). WARNING: Cisco advises you to contact Cisco Customer Support for assistance. The Customer Support staff have specific procedures designed to change preassigned NIDs in the system files and database. An error or improper command at this point could seriously affect the database and system-wide operation.

7-32

4042066 Rev A

Any mismatch in the NID frequency plan between the PNC system settings and the modulator which transmits the NID signal will cause the decoders using that NID to lose signal.

Moving a Signal from Carrier to Carrier


A DRP uses a set of common signal input (CSI) to find alternate services when a disaster is declared. A CSI carries:
the

network identification - to confirm that the correct network has been tuned information - to tune to a transport stream with the NIT

to
carrier the

service list - to identify services that may participate in the DRP

The Transport Media window in its current state can be used to enter carriers that will be used for creating DRPs. These carriers provide the network identification and carrier information. The service list from the signal/carrier associations is used to create the service list for the DRP See the Disaster Recovery Plan view for how . the service lists are created and maintained. Any changes to the CSI will cause the disaster recovery tables (DRTs) in the GDS using the carrier to be regenerated by the PNC server. The network identification can be changed through network editing. The carrier information can be changed through carrier editing. And the service list can be changed through carrier/signal association operations. To move a signal from an existing carrier to another carrier within the same network: 1. Right-click on the selected carrier you want to remove the signal from. 2. Choose Disassociate Signal from the popup menu to remove the signal from the carrier. 3. Right-click on the carrier you want to add the signal to. 4. Choose Associate Signal from the popup menu.

5. Choose the signal you want to add to the carrier from the Signal Association window and select OK.

4042066 Rev A

7-33

You can also Delete or simply Disassociate a signal from a carrier using the popup menu.

7-34

4042066 Rev A

Allocating Bandwidth
The amount of total bandwidth available in a system remains constant from the time the system is configured and installed. By comparing the total amount of bandwidth and the unused or free bandwidth, you can determine how best to configure and optimize the amount of bandwidth needed for the system devices and their individual video, audio and data streams. You can view and control the bit rates assigned to: Each signal in the PNC system Each multiplexer and encoder associated with a signal Each video, audio, VBI, DPI and Subtitle stream in an encoder Each enabled sync and async utility data stream in the multiplexer Conditional Access, including the EMM and ECM streams PSI/SI tables

Notes:
You Be

cannot control the bandwidth for Video Input Control cards.

aware that each virtual channel you create also takes up bandwidth.

Audio The

channels configured as Single Mono can only be set up to 192K. All other audio channels can be set up to 384K.

total amount of bandwidth the system uses is always slightly larger than the sum of the actual numbers you assign. This overhead, required for transmission, is calculated and included in the total amount of bandwidth used and the resulting amount of free bandwidth displayed on the Bandwidth Allocation window.

Viewing Bandwidth Assignments


To view the current system, device and card bandwidth settings: 1. Click the Bandwidth Summary icon, or click Uplink > Bandwidth Summary. The system displays the Bandwidth Summary window for all signals. As shown in the following illustration, the Bandwidth Summary window features:
A A

signal device hierarchy tree that displays all signals in the PNC system, all multiplexers that feed each signal, and all encoders connected to each multiplexer bandwidth configuration and status area on the right side of the window.

Note: Before you can edit the bandwidth of a stream, you must enable the stream at the device level (double-click on device in uplink configuration view and enable the stream).

4042066 Rev A

7-35

2. In the signal device hierarchy tree: a) Expand the desired Signal object to display the multiplexers that feed the signal. b) Expand the Multiplexer object to display the encoders associated with each multiplexer. c) Select the desired device in the hierarchy. The right side of the window displays the following content:
Device

ID of the device configurations and configuration controls for each card in the

Bandwidth

encoder
Signal

bandwidth status, including bandwidth usage bar

3. Check the Show disabled streams box if you want to see the bandwidth assignments for all streams, enabled and disabled, so you can determine the potential effect on total bandwidth usage when disabled streams are enabled.

7-36

4042066 Rev A

The Bandwidth Summary window includes the following fields:


Limit

This indicates the amount of bandwidth allocated to your signal. This amount is based on a calculation which considers FEC rate, symbol rate and Modulation Type. The total amount of bandwidth used for the signal. This is the sum of PSI/SI, CA, Non-BitMizer ES and BitMizer ES. This amount will vary depending on the device and card bandwidth allocation. The amount of free bandwidth available in the signal in Kbits/second. If you change the bit rate settings on any of the devices accessible from this window, you either increase or decrease the amount of free bandwidth available. The amount of bandwidth allocated to PSI/SI table transmission. This value is automatically calculated by the system. It is possible to change this value by adjusting the PSI/SI trim slider on the right side of the window when the multiplexer is selected.If the disaster recovery feature is installed on the PNC, a Global Data Stream (GDS) is required for transmission of disaster recovery plans. Bandwidth allocated to the GDS is part of the PSI/SI bandwidth. Note: Cisco recommends that the PSI/SI trim be set to zero at all times, which means that bandwidth has been allocated as displayed by the Calculated PSI/SI Usage value. Cisco advises against allocating less PSI/SI bandwidth than the Calculated Bandwidth Usage, however, if you feel there has been an over-allocation of bandwidth to PSI/SI, then move the slider of the PSI/SI trim to the left as required to free up bandwidth. It is also possible to increase the bandwidth allocated to PSI/SI by moving the PSI/SI trim to the right -- this may be advantageous if during an OS download, increasing the PSI/SI trim will increase the space or bandwidth allotted to OS downloads. This essentially speeds the task up. You may want to discuss this with a Cisco Customer Support representative before you begin.

Used

Free

PSI/SI

CA

This displays the amount of bandwidth allocated to Conditional Access for the system or the sum of the bandwidth allocated to EMM and ECM transmission. The amount of bandwidth allocated to EMMs directly impacts how quickly decoder authorizations occur. On the right side of the window when the multiplexer is selected, EMM and ECM stream bars are displayed -- these values are read-only on this view. It is possible to manage EMM bandwidth through the EMM Configuration window -- please see Managing EMM Configuration on page 7-40. It is not possible to change the bandwidth allocated to ECMs. EMMs are allocated on a per system basis, so that the bandwidth allocation will be the same for each signal.

Non-BitMizer ES

This indicates the sum of the bandwidth used up by all of the enabled CBR elemental streams associated with your selected signal. If streams are being BitMized, then their bandwidth will be accounted for under BitMizer ES. The NonBitMizer ES value includes bandwidth allocated to enabled video, audio, VBI, Subtitle

4042066 Rev A

7-37

and all data streams. It is possible to manage bandwidth on a per stream basis by clicking on the device you want to work with and then adjusting the sliders or entering a value in the bandwidth field for the streams as found in the right side of the window. Note: See Displaying and Using the Stream Summary Window on page 5-7 for information on how to enable a stream.
BitMizer ES

This is the sum of the bandwidth allocated to VBR or BitMizer Statistically Multiplexed streams. This value will match the read-only value displayed for BitMizer Grp 1 on the right side of the window when the multiplexer is selected. This value is derived from the BitMizer Configuration window. This bar graph indicates the percentage of total bandwidth used, which is the Total Usage divided by the Bandwidth Limit.

Bandwidth Usage

Selecting a Device for Bandwidth Allocation


To select a device for allocating bandwidth, expand the device hierarchy tree and select a signal, multiplexer or encoder.

You can configure the bandwidth of the streams.

7-38

4042066 Rev A

Allocating Bandwidth to a Stream


To allocate bandwidth for the elemental streams of a device: WARNING!: Changing the bandwidth allocation may cause a service interruption. 1. With the devices streams displayed, adjust the amount of bandwidth assigned to an individual stream by dragging the slider, or by entering a bit rate in the Bandwidth field. Note that stream types are colour coded, as follows:

Colour
Purple Light Blue Dark Blue Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Brown Green Yellow Green Yellow Yellow Video

Stream Type / Setting

Single Mono (audio) Stereo modes and dual mono (audio) ECM/EMM PSI/SI Trim Imitext Subtitling (SBT, STL) DPI Low Speed Data High Speed Data VBI Wide Band Data DVB Subtitles WST

2. When you have completed configuring the bandwidths, click the Save icon, or click Actions > Save to update the database. To cancel the configurations, click Actions > Undo before updating the changes.

4042066 Rev A

7-39

Managing EMM Configuration


The PNC uses EMMs to control and authorize the receivers in the downlink population. EMMs are usually sent out from a PNC uplink directly to its receiver population. These are considered locally generated EMMs. However, in some instances the operator may want to use MetroMux functionality to enable one PNC system to control the receiver populations of a number of other PNC systems; in which case EMMs are generated remotely (or MetroMuxed). To view the EMM Configuration window: 1. Select the appropriate signal from the signal bar. 2. Choose Uplink > EMM Configuration to display the following window.

3. Edit the following fields as required:


EMM PID EMM Source

This is the ID assigned to locally generated EMMs. Choose one of the following from this list:

Local IRD
If EMMs are generated locally, then select this value from the list. Note: When this value is selected, the MetroMux tab is grayed out and is unavailable.

MetroMux
If you are generating your EMMs remotely, then select this value from the list and complete the table on the MetroMux Tab (see MetroMux Tab on page 7-41).

7-40

4042066 Rev A

Bandwidth Tab
EMM Bandwidth

The default value is automatically calculated for the system. In most situations operating based on the default calculation is sufficient. However, you can adjust the EMM bandwidth as you require by moving the slider or by typing the value into the bandwidth field. If you increase the bandwidth allocated to EMMs then this will allow decoder authorization to occur quicker but at the expense of taking bandwidth away from somewhere else. If you decrease the bandwidth allocated to EMMs then this will free up bandwidth for other services but at the expense of slowing down decoder authorization. The EMM bandwidth value on the EMM configuration screen drives the value found on the Bandwidth Allocation view. The lower part of the window provides you with a summary of the bandwidth available within the system to reference while making changes to EMM bandwidth. EMMs are allocated on a per system basis so that the bandwidth allocation will be the same for each signal.

MetroMux Tab
EMM Input PID

This is the ID of remotely generated EMMs. This must match the sources PID or the EMMs will not be received. You can select which MetroMux device you would like associated with which signal in the list on this tab, as shown below:

MetroMux Device list

Note: Multi-signal systems require all signals to have EMM MetroMux enabled for the same EMM PID to use the EMM re-mux feature.

4042066 Rev A

7-41

Monitoring EMM Transmission


EMM Transmission Status is a read-only status window that provides a dynamic and comprehensive view of the progress of an EMM transmission cycle. Because EMMs are transmitted in repeated cycles that vary in length depending on how many decoders are in the downlink population, this feature helps PNC administrators gauge when the system will authorize a new device that is added to the network. Note: Devices are authorized in sequence during the EMM transmission cycle, and come online as soon as they are authorized. To monitor the EMM transmission: 1. Click Uplink > EMM Transmission Status. The system displays the EMM Transmission Status window.

2. Review the status of the following fields:


Start Time Completed Estimated Completion Time Actual Completion Duration (previous cycle)

The time at which the current EMM Transmission cycle began. The proportion of the current EMM Transmission that has been completed. The system-estimated completion time of the EMM Transmission cycle. The exact length of the previous EMM Transmission cycle.

7-42

4042066 Rev A

DPI Source
The Digital Program Insertion (DPI) Source establishes a connection between the cue trigger source and the encoder. A DPI Source generates one DPI stream. No DPI streams can be generated until a DPI source is connected to the encoder, both physically and logically through the PNC. The DPI Source View is divided into two panels:

Navigation Panel
On the left side of the DPI Source View is the Navigation Panel, a three-level display of the selected signal, in the form <system name> - <name>, the encoders in the form <system name> - <name>, and the cue trigger sources in the form <name>. The right side shows the DPI stream number which each of the DPI sources belong to.

To Add a Cue Trigger Source


Right click on an encoder or an existing cue trigger source and select Add Cue Trigger Source from the pop-up menu to add a cue trigger to the selected encoder or the encoder under which the cue trigger source you originally right-clicked on resides. You can also press the INS (insert) key to perform this function while an encoder or cue trigger source is selected. You can add up to eight cue trigger sources for each encoder.

4042066 Rev A

7-43

Note: All DPI sources added to each DPI stream are all associated with the same PID. The PID is set at the Device Config level as shown below.

7-44

4042066 Rev A

To Delete a Cue Trigger Source


Right click on the cue trigger source you would like to delete and select Delete Cue from the pop-up menu which displays. You can also press CTRLDEL to perform this function while the cue trigger source to be deleted is selected.
Trigger Source

Note: A Cue Trigger Source cannot be deleted if there is a Virtual Channel associated with it.

Cue Trigger Source Panel


On the left side of the DPI Source View is the Cue Trigger Source Panel. Clicking on an item in the navigation panel will change what is displayed in this panel:
Navigation Panel Level Signal Cue Trigger Source Panel Display
Selecting a Signal in the Navigation Panel displays the Cue Trigger Usage Summary. In this context, it shows every cue trigger source for all encoders on the selected signal. Selecting an encoder in the Navigation Panel displays the Cue Trigger Usage Summary. In this context, it shows all cue trigger sources for the selected encoder. Clicking on a Cue Trigger Source in the Navigation Panel displays the Cue Trigger Source Information window

Encoder Cue Trigger Source

DPI Source View Interactive Behaviour

Cue Trigger Usage Summary Window


The following explains the columns which appear in this window:

4042066 Rev A

7-45

Stream Number

This is the operator-assigned decimal number used to identify the cue trigger source. Possible values are in the range 1 to 8, inclusive. This number is also used in the Uplink Configuration view to identify defined Cue Trigger Sources. Note: Values entered here must be unique within the encoder.

Cue Trigger Source Cue Triggers

This is the operator-assigned name of the cue trigger source. These columns show the allocation of the cue triggers to the cue trigger source. The symbols represent:
Symbol
^ v A x <blank>

Meaning
start stop both start and stop cancel not used

Encoder

When the Signal is selected, this window also shows the Encoder associated with the cue trigger source.

Cue Trigger Source Window

The following explains the fields available in this window:


Stream Number

This is the ID of the DPI Stream. This number is used to sort cue trigger stream in the display. Possible values are in the range 1 to 8, inclusive. This number is also

7-46

4042066 Rev A

used in the Uplink Configuration view to identify defined Cue Trigger Streams.
Name

This is the name of the cue trigger source. Entry is limited to 30 characters, with the characters % * \ / disallowed. These check boxes represent cue triggers which can be allocated to a cue trigger source. Cue trigger resources are divided among all existing cue trigger sources for each Encoder. In other words, if the first cue trigger is taken by the first cue trigger source for an encoder, other cue trigger sources for the same encoder cannot use that occupied cue trigger. A checked box indicates a used cue trigger. This is the cue trigger number to use in triggering start, stop and cancel messages. Possible values are 1 to 8, inclusively, and None. If None is selected, this indicates that the cue trigger does not support this type of message generation. The Start Cue Trigger is mandatory (i.e. cannot be set to None). All other cue triggers may be optionally set. When the Start and Stop cue triggers are identical, the Asserted field for the Stop trigger is set to the opposite of the Asserted field for the Start trigger (i.e. if Start trigger Asserted field is set to Open, Stop trigger Asserted field is set to Closed) and is made un-editable. The Cancel Cue Trigger cannot be set to the same value as either the Start or Stop Cue Trigger. One exception is if the Stop Cue Trigger is set to None, the Cancel Cue Trigger can also be set to None. If the Stop Trigger is set to None, then the Cancel Trigger cannot be set to anything but None. To set the Cancel Trigger to some other value, set the Stop Trigger to a value first. Note: If you select a cue trigger which is already assigned to a cue trigger source, a red line appears above and below that trigger. This provides instant information, allowing you to choose another, unoccupied trigger, if one exists.

Used Cue Triggers

Start/Stop/Cancel Cue Trigger

Asserted Field

This field indicates whether the cue trigger is asserted Open or Closed for the respective cue triggers. This has an effect only if the associated Start/Stop/Cancel Cue Trigger is not set to None. These fields set the time delay required prior to the Start or Stop trigger initiating due to equipment latency. Possible values are in the range of 0.0 to 60.0 seconds. The default for the Start trigger is 5.0 seconds. The default for the Stop trigger is 0.0 seconds.

Pre-roll Start/Stop Delay

4042066 Rev A

7-47

Multiplexer Rate Control


In certain applications it may be necessary to manually set the output rate of the multiplexer. Examples of these applications include using a third party modulator with a higher bandwidth capacity than the MUX input rate, and some ad hoc networks which involve satellite hops, requiring a decreased output rate to facilitate interconnectivity with the smallest network involved. CAUTION:Cisco recommends that you do not manually change the output rate of your multiplexer unless you absolutely have to. You could significantly impact performance if the rate is incorrect for your particular situation. To view the Multiplexer Rate Control window, choose Uplink > Multiplexer Rate Control.

The window is divided into 2 regions: Input Rate Output Rate The Input portion of the window is read-only.
Maximum Bandwidth Limit Actual Input Bandwidth Limit Carrier Name/Signal/ Bandwidth Limit

Smallest satellite space you know the signal will ever be on. This limit is automatically determined and is based on all the services configured in the system. Provides a summary of the carriers and associated signals that have been defined for your system. Bandwidth Limit is calculated on a per system basis and will therefore always be the same for each signal.

7-48

4042066 Rev A

The Output Rate portion of the view allows you to edit the output rate of your multiplexer.
Rate Selector

The default for this parameter is Auto which means that the system automatically sets the output rate. When in auto mode, the output rate always matches the Actual Input Bandwidth Limit. Cisco recommends that you always operate your system in this mode. If you have a situation that requires you to change your output rate, then this parameter can be set to Maximum overriding the system settings and allowing you to edit the Actual Output Rate of the multiplexer.

Actual Rate

Defines the output rate of the Multiplexer and is based on whether the output selector is set to Auto or Maximum. If the Output Selector is set to Auto, then this field is read-only. However, if the selector is set to Maximum, then this field becomes editable. If you do edit this field, you should input a value that is either equal to or less than the Maximum Bandwidth Limit defined at the top of the window. If you exceed the Maximum Bandwidth Limit you may experience intermittent loss of signal or other bandwidth abuse results.

4042066 Rev A

7-49

Configuring Multiplex Group Statistical Multiplexing


Note: The Statistical Multiplexing option must be installed on the PNC server in order to configure your decoders into statmux groups. Check with your PNC administrator to verify that the option is installed before proceeding to configure multiplex groups. Multiplex group statistical multiplexing enables you to: Configure multiplexed video streams to one of two groups so that you can groom the bandwidths of broadcast streams to the bandwidth capacity of downstream redistribution systems. Configure statistical multiplexing (statmux) of video streams to achieve maximum uplink bandwidth efficiencies. Note: Contact Cisco Customer Support for applications requiring statistical multiplexing of two multiplex groups to ensure your settings are within the proper ranges, and not constraining other services.

Dual Regulus/Dual Statmux Group Operation


The PNC supports the use of two Regulus Multiplex Controllers, known as Dual Regulus support. An encoders connection to Regulus determines its group membership/assignment. The multiplex group that the encoders belong to will be configured upon installation by Cisco. Encoders cannot be moved from one multiplex group to another without physically changing their connection from one Regulus to another. Note: Any encoder which is not connected to a Regulus controller is not in a multiplex group and therefore cannot be statistically multiplexed with other encoders. Encoders not connected to a Regulus Controller must be configured with Statmux Off - CBR.

Configuring Multiplex Groups


You must be assigned the appropriate user privileges before you can change the multiplex group statmux configuration values. To view the Multiplex Group Configuration window: Select the appropriate signal from the signal bar and then click Uplink > Multiplex Group Configuration. You will see a window like the one below. It displays a navigation area on the left and a configuration area on the right. Each navigation area level (Signal,

7-50

4042066 Rev A

Multiplex Group, video stream) displays a unique configuration area.


Configuration area Navigation area

Adding a Video Stream


To add a video stream to a multiplex group, follow these steps: 1. In the navigation area of the Multiplex Group Configuration window, click the signal you want to work with and then click the multiplex group you want to add channels to (Multiplex Group 1 or Multiplex Group 2). The configuration area displays the Multiplex Group configuration fields:

Multiplex Group configuration

Bandwidth Summary staging area

2. Right-click the appropriate multiplex group and then click Add. You will see a list of video streams within the same signal that have not been added to either

4042066 Rev A

7-51

multiplex group as shown in the example below.

Click the stream you want to add to the multiplex group and then hit F6 or click the Save icon in the upper right corner of the PNC window. The stream will appear as a new item in the Group Membership list.

Configuring a Multiplex Group


The Multiplex Group Configuration area displays Multiplex Group Controls when the multiplex group is selected in the navigation tree. To configure a multiplex group, follow these steps: 1. In the navigation area, click the multiplex group you want to configure.

If the multiplex groups do not appear under the signal you want to work with, click the signal. This will reveal the multiplex groups.

2. In the Multiplex Group configuration area, select or enter information for the following fields:
Enable Fixed Group Limit

Click this check box to set the multiplex group bandwidth limit to a fixed value as selected by the Fixed Group Limit slider. If the check box is cleared, the multiplex group bandwidth will be dynamically allocated as needed based on the bandwidths used by all video streams in the group. Enable the fixed group limit if downstream contribution needs to fit into a fixed capacity.

Fixed Group Limit

Sets the total bandwidth limit in Mbps for all video streams in the multiplex group when you have checked the Enable Fixed Group Limit check box. To set the value, type in a value to a maximum of two decimal places in a range

7-52

4042066 Rev A

from the total bandwidth of the video streams in the group, to the available bandwidth of the signal. The maximum value is equal to the initial used bandwidth of the multiplex group plus available free bandwidth in the signal.
Delay Mode

Sets the amount of delay that will apply to all videos in the statmux group. Selecting a lower delay will result in less statmux efficiency. In the Delay Mode list click one of three options: Normal, Extended, Low. Lists the attribute settings for the video streams in the multiplex group. For a description of the attributes, see Multiplex Group tab on page 4-53. Displays the bandwidth usage of the multiplex group you are configuring. The Bandwidth Summary is your configuration staging area. As you configure attributes, the bandwidth summary stages the changes and reflects the bandwidth usage for the signal as well as the multiplex group after each change.

Group Membership

Bandwidth Summary

Unused bandwidth Grey bar Used bandwidth Black bar - used bandwidth not used by the next bandwidth pipe in the hierarchy. Green bar - bandwidth used by the next bandwidth pipe in the hierarchy. The bandwidth pipe hierarchy is: signal, multiplex group, statmux group.

If you allocate a bandwidth that exceeds the bandwidth limit: The bandwidth summary bar becomes red. The text value for Free bandwidth displays a negative value highlighted in red. This value represents the total amount of bandwidth that exceeds the limit. The Save icon dims so the configuration cannot be applied. To configure the bandwidth to valid values within the specified limits: 1. Reconfigure the bandwidth allocations as required. 2. Hit F6 or click the Save icon in the upper right corner of the PNC window.

4042066 Rev A

7-53

Configuring Statistical Multiplexing of a Video Stream


To configure statistical multiplexing of an encoder within a multiplex group, follow these steps: 1. In the navigation area of the Multiplex Group Configuration window, click the signal you want to work with and then click the multiplex group you want to add channels to (Multiplex Group 1 or Multiplex Group 2). 2. Click the + beside the multiplex group to display all the video streams that have been added to the multiplex group. 3. Click the video stream you want to configure. The configuration area displays the Video stream configuration fields as shown below:

Video stream configuration fields

Bandwidth Summary staging area

4. In the Multiplex Group configuration area, select or enter information for the following fields. All the attributes presented are identical to the ones in the multiplex group tab of the video configuration view. They are presented as sliders and changes are staged and shown immediately in the bandwidth summary. Bit rates can be entered from the slider or its adjacent numeric entry box. The bit rate sliders have an upper limit that depends on the types of encoders in the multiplex group, e.g., HD or SD (VE4 or VE5) encoders. The constraints for the Maximum Rate and Minimum Rate are displayed as colour coded areas in the slider. The blue areas represent invalid selections. A slider moved into the blue area causes the colour to change to red until the constraint is resolved (by moving the Max/Min slider or the Bit rate slider). Changes cannot be submitted until the violation is resolved.
PID

Read-only. Displays the transport packet PID of the video stream.

7-54

4042066 Rev A

Chroma Format

Read-only. Displays the chroma format used to encode the video stream. The format is configured on the Video Encoder card configuration view (Uplink > Uplink Configuration > <Encoder> > Video Encoder >Encoding tab). The value is displayed here so you can evaluate the constraints of other configuration settings. Sets the encode mode used to control statmux participation of the video stream within a multiplex group. It can be set to Statmux On - VBR or Stamux Off - CBR. A statmux group exists within a multiplex group. An encoder can transition between Statmux Off - CBR and Stamux On - VBR, but can only belong to one multiplex group. Any encoder which is not connected to a Regulus controller is not in a multiplex group and therefore cannot be assigned to a statmux group. Encoders not connected to a Regulus Controller must be configured with Statmux Off - CBR.

Encode Mode

Bitrate

Sets the PES encoding rate (in Mbps) to be allocated to the video stream. In the Mbps field, type a value to a maximum of two decimal places. You can also use the Bitrate slider to set the value. To set the bit rate, type in a value to a maximum of two decimal places within the following ranges: 1.49 to 15.00 if the Chroma Format value is set to 4:2:0 4.0 to 50.00 if the Chroma Format is to 4:2:2 The default bit rate is 4.0.

Maximum Rate (Mbps)

Sets the maximum encoding bit rate when statmux is enabled. This control is provided so you can limit the burstiness of generated video stream to prevent overflowing downstream consumption equipment. To set the bit rate, type in a value to a maximum of two decimal places within the following ranges: 0.50 to 15.00 if the chroma format value is set to 4:2:0 4.00 to 50.00 if the chroma format value is set to 4:2:2 The default bit rate is 15.00. You can also use the Maximum Rate slider to set the value.

Minimum Rate (Mbps)

Sets the minimum encoding bit rate when statmux is enabled. To set the bit rate, type in a value to a maximum of two decimal places within the following ranges: 0.500 to 15.00 if the chroma format value is set to 4:2:0 4.00 to 50.00 if the chroma format value is set to 4:2:2 When Preanalysis is On and Chroma Format is set to 4:2:0, the minimum allowed bit rate setting is 0.5 Mb/s. Similarly, when Preanalysis is Off, and Chroma Format

4042066 Rev A

7-55

is set to 4:2:0, the minimum allowed bit rate is 1.5 Mb/s. The default bit rate is 0.50. You can also use the Minimum Rate slider to set the value.
Priority

Sets the relative priority used by the statmux process to assign bandwidth to the video stream. When statmux performs bandwidth redistribution, the video quality of higher priority video is maintained, while the video quality of lower priority streams may be reduced. To assign a priority value to the video stream, in the Priority list click one value in a range from 0 - 15, where 0 is the lowest priority and 15 is the highest. The default priority value is 8.

Quality

Sets the bandwidth efficiency of the statmuxed video stream. The highest quality uses all available bandwidth allocated to the video stream. Lower values use progressively less proportions of the allocated bandwidth. To assign a bandwidth quality level to the statmuxed video stream, in the Quality list click one value in a range from 0 - 15, where 0 is the lowest quality and 15 is the highest. The default quality value is 15 - highest.

Configuring BitMizer Statistical Multiplexing for Encoders with D9790 Video Encoder cards
Statistical multiplexing enables multiplexed channels to take advantage of lulls in demand from one channel to transmit peaks of demand from another channel. For instance, if a news program and a hockey game were simultaneously being broadcast on two different channels being multiplexed through a single multiplexer, it would be much more efficient for the high demand sporting event to use the bandwidth the news program is wasting, rather than allocating an average amount of bandwidth to each of these types of programs. This frees up bandwidth which can be used for other programming requirements. The more programs being multiplexed, the more efficient this method becomes. The PNC allows you to effectively manage the operation of BitMizer open-loop statistical multiplexing through a consolidated view. To view the BitMizer Configuration window: 1. Select the appropriate signal from the signal bar. 2. Choose Uplink > BitMizer Configuration. 3. The following 2 views display:
BitMizer

Signal Overview this read-only window provides a summary of your settings in table format, allowing you to see all of your settings in a single glance, both cumulatively and on a per signal basis. While any changes made in

7-56

4042066 Rev A

the BitMizer View (see below) are not actually implemented until you specifically save them, they are reflected on the BitMizer Signal Overview display, allowing you to tinker with values until the best possible optimization is achieved. All without impacting your bandwidth until youre ready.

Note: The signal overview display is controlled by the setting of the signal overview icon (at left). When selected, the window displays. When not selected, only the BitMizer view displays.

BitMizer

view this window consists of 2 regions when the BitMizer Group is selected on the left side of the window, and 3 regions when an individual stream is selected on the left side of the window. The left side of the window provides a summary of the BitMizer Group in hierarchical format and all of the associated video streams for each encoder associated with the currently selected signal. Note that whether a stream has been enabled (BitMized) or not has nothing to do with what appears on this side of the window. right side of the window, when the BitMizer Group is selected, displays all of the parameters which affect the BitMizer Group as a whole. This region moves to the lower half of the right side of the window when an individual stream is selected on the left side of the window. When an individual stream is selected on the left side of the window, the upper half of the right side of the window displays all of the parameters required to manage BitMizer on a per stream basis. Any changes you make to these parameters are reflected in the summary fields in the lower half of the window.

The

Note: The current release supports only one BitMizer Group per signal.

4042066 Rev A

7-57

System Name Name

Actual name of the video stream in the PNC system. Name of the System Name stream after its been BitMized. Note: The displayed stream name in the hierarchical listing on the left is actually a combination of these two names, in the form System Name:Name. (i.e., ENC1P6VID1:ENC1P6-VID1)

PID

Displays the Packet Identification Number (PID) as entered for the stream from the video encoder configuration view.

Chroma Format

4:2:0 supports video bit rates from 0.5 Mbps to 15 Mbps 4:2:2 supports video bit rates up to 50 Mbps

Enable

Selecting this check box adds this stream/channel to the BitMizer group and subjects it to open-loop statistical multiplexing. If this box is unchecked, the default, then the video transmits within a predefined constant bit rate (CBR). This parameter is based on the Enable check box.
If

Encode Syntax

the Enable check box is clear, then Encode Syntax is set to CBR (constant bit rate) mode. No matter what the content is, the stream transmits at the same bit rate.

7-58

4042066 Rev A

If

the Enable check box is selected, then Encode Syntax is set to VBR (variable bit rate) mode. This means the bit rate allocated to this stream can dynamically react to the type of content being transmitted on all of the channels in the BitMizer group.

Bitrate

This is the allocated Bitrate for the selected stream. This is initially derived on the Bandwidth Allocation window, but can be changed here. Any change will be reflected back to the Bandwidth Allocation window. Every piece of equipment has a buffer which can allow the input rate to be greater than the output rate. Over time these two values average out, so eventually the input rate equals the output rate. The size of the buffer determines how much greater than the output rate the input rate can be. When planning for this, its important to note that different equipment have different buffers. Provides instructions on how the content should be encoded.
Aggressive - High bandwidth savings. Reduces the bandwidth by possibly reducing

Peak Burst Rate

Objective

the output quality.

HighQ Select this option to maximize the output quality. Priority

Complete explanations on the impact and suggested use of each priority are contained in the table below.
Priority
1 2

Under Light Stress


protected, no recoding (i.e., absolutely no video interruptions) 1 recoded frame/sec.; much less chance of recoding two frames in a row. 2 recoded frames/sec.; much less chance of recoding two frames in a row. 3 recoded frames/sec. 4 recoded frames/sec. 5 recoded frames/sec. 6 recoded frames/sec. 7 recoded frames/sec. 8 recoded frames/sec. still picture mode

Under Heavy Stress


protected, no recoding more recoding, but all lower priority channels affected first. more recoding, but all lower priority channels affected first. more recoding, but all lower priority channels affected first. more recoding, but all lower priority channels affected first. more recoding, but all lower priority channels affected first. more recoding, but all lower priority channels affected first. more recoding, but all lower priority channels affected first. substantially more recoding still picture mode

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Table 4: Encoder Priority Considerations

4042066 Rev A

7-59

It is recommended that you leave the priority of the video channel at the default of 6, and never set all channels simultaneously to a priority higher than 6 (i.e., 1 to 5). Also note that it is not recommended to set all channels simultaneously to a priority of 1, since this would preclude BitMizer from performing any re-encoding. Some facts to consider:
Default Priority

(and recommended) priority is 6.

settings 1 through 3 should be used sparingly. As a rule of thumb, less that 1/3 of statmuxed channels should be set to priority 1 through 3. The rest should be between 4 and 9. In very light bit savings applications (say 10%), it would be possible to set more channels to high priorities (1 through 3). However, for scenarios of 20% bit savings or greater, this rule of thumb applies. still picture mode should be used only for low update and still contents such as poster, music program background, etc. This mode has the potential of very low bit rate (0.2 - 0.6 Mbps). is possible for the sum of the input video bit rates to the BitMizer to be too large for the BitMizer to statistically multiplex these sources with time shifting only. Whenever this occurs, the BitMizer will recode frames of one or more video channels to a lower bit rate and, therefore, possibly reduce video quality. The priority settings of the BitMizer allow you to prioritize which video channels are most affected wherever re-encoding occurs.

The

It

BitMizer Group
BitMizer Capacity Control & BitMizer Capacity

BitMizer Capacity Control determines how BitMizer Capacity is determined. If this parameter is set to Adaptive (the default), then the BitMizer Capacity is automatically determined based on a summary of all of the BitMized streams, plus the Overdrive setting. However, if Manual is selected, then this enables you to use the BitMizer Capacity slider or the value field to enter the capacity that you require. In most instances, the Adaptive mode should meet your needs, however if you have a fixed pipe that cannot be exceeded, then Manual mode should be selected and this fixed size should be entered as the BitMizer Capacity. Within a fixed pipe, the benefit of BitMizer is the ability to free up space to make room for another service.

Desired Overdrive

Determines how aggressive you want to be in terms of your BitMizer savings. For example, a desired overdrive set to 30% means you wish to fit the same number of video channels into a space that is 30% smaller. The trade off is video quality. There is no hard rule on what the desired overdrive should be because it depends on the content being transmitted etc. It is recommended that you start at 0% where the allocated bandwidth is the same as in CBR mode and increase the overdrive incrementally from there while monitoring your video. BitMizer Capacity, Desired overdrive and video bit rate are all interrelated and can all be manipulated in some way to achieve desired savings. The following example will illustrate this relationship: Manually set BitMizer capacity must be greater than what is being used, as it was mentioned this could mean there is a fixed pipe. If the Manual capacity goes below

7-60

4042066 Rev A

what is being used, then the overdrive bar on the summary screen will go red (meaning the capacity is too small) and the operator must adjust by: Increasing Desired Overdrive (fitting more into less space) Increasing capacity, if able to do so Disabling a video stream to free up bandwidth Decreasing the video bit rate You can stage this and make changes to various video streams and see what the bandwidth impact will be before saving everything. 4. Select the encoder/video stream that you want to manage by highlighting it on the left side of the window.

Configuring Statistical Multiplexing for Encoders with D9791 Video Encoder cards
Multiplex group statistical multiplexing enables you to: Configure multiplexed video streams to one of two groups so you can groom the bandwidths of broadcast streams to the bandwidth capacity of downstream redistribution systems. Configure closed-loop statistical multiplexing (statmux) of video streams to achieve maximum uplink bandwidth efficiencies. You must be assigned the appropriate user privileges before you can change the multiplex group statmux configuration values.

4042066 Rev A

7-61

To view the Multiplex Group Configuration window: Select the appropriate signal from the signal bar and then click Uplink > Multiplex Group Configuration. You will see a window like the one below. It displays a navigation area on the left and a configuration area on the right. Each navigation area level (Signal, Multiplex Group, video stream) displays a unique configuration area.
Navigation area Configuration area

Adding a Video Stream


To add a video stream to a multiplex group, follow these steps: 1. In the navigation area of the Multiplex Group Configuration window, click the signal you want to work with and then click the multiplex group you want to add channels to (Multiplex Group 1 or Multiplex Group 2). The configuration area displays the Multiplex Group configuration fields:

Multiplex Group configuration fields

Bandwidth Summary staging area

7-62

4042066 Rev A

2. Right-click the appropriate multiplex group and then click Add. You will see a list of video streams within the same signal that have not been added to either multiplex group. 3. Click the stream you want to add to the multiplex group and then hit F6 or click the Save icon in the upper right corner of the PNC window. The stream will appear as a new item in the Group Membership list.

Configuring a Multiplex Group


The Multiplex Group Configuration area displays Multiplex Group Controls when the multiplex group is selected in the navigation tree. To configure a multiplex group, follow these steps: 1. In the navigation area, click the multiplex group you want to configure.

If the multiplex groups do not appear under the signal you want to work with, click the signal. This will reveal the multiplex groups.

2. In the Multiplex Group configuration area, select or enter information for the following fields:
Enable Fixed Group Limit

Click this check box to set the multiplex group bandwidth limit to a fixed value as selected by the Fixed Group Limit slider. If the check box is cleared, the multiplex group bandwidth will be dynamically allocated as needed based on the bandwidths used by all video streams in the group. Enable the fixed group limit if downstream contribution needs to fit into a fixed capacity.

Fixed Group Limit

Sets the total bandwidth limit in Mbps for all video streams in the multiplex group when you have checked the Enable Fixed Group Limit check box. To set the value, type in a value to a maximum of two decimal places in a range from the total bandwidth of the video streams in the group, to the available bandwidth of the signal. The maximum value is equal to the initial used bandwidth of the multiplex group plus available free bandwidth in the signal.

Delay Mode

Sets the amount of delay that will apply to all videos in the statmux group. Selecting a lower delay will result in less statmux efficiency. In the Delay Mode list, click one of three options: Normal, Extended, Short Delay. Note: The video channel selected as part of the Multiplex Group must be a CBR (Encode) mode in order to change the setting in this field. This means, if the channel is set to VBR, you must switch it to CBR, change the setting in this field and then switch it back to VBR.

Group Membership

Lists the attribute settings for the video streams in the multiplex group. For a description of the attributes, see Multiplex Group tab on page 4-14.

4042066 Rev A

7-63

Configuring Statistical Multiplexing of a Video Stream


To configure statistical multiplexing of an encoder within a multiplex group, follow these steps: 1. In the navigation area of the Multiplex Group Configuration window, click the signal you want to work with and then click the multiplex group you want to add channels to (Multiplex Group 1 or Multiplex Group 2). 2. Click the + beside the multiplex group to display all the video streams that have been added to the multiplex group. 3. Click the video stream you want to configure. The configuration area displays the Video stream configuration fields as shown below:

Video stream configuration fields

Bandwidth Summary staging area

4. In the Multiplex Group configuration area, select or enter information for the following fields. All the attributes presented are identical to the ones in the multiplex group tab of the video configuration view. They are presented in a more graphical manner (sliders) and changes are staged and shown immediately in the bandwidth summary panel. Bit rates can be entered from the slider or its adjacent numeric entry box. The bit rate sliders have an upper limit that depends on the chroma format only: 15 Mbps for 4:2:0 and 15 Mbps for 4:2:2.
PID Chroma Format

Read-only. Displays the transport packet PID of the video stream. Read-only. Displays the chroma format used to encode the video stream. The format is configured on the Video Encoder card configuration view (Uplink > Uplink Configuration > <Encoder> Device Config > Video Encoder > Encoding tab). The value is displayed here so you can evaluate the constraints of other

7-64

4042066 Rev A

configuration settings.
Encode Mode

Sets the encode mode used to control statmux participation of the video stream within a multiplex group. In the list, click either Statmux Off- CBR or Statmux On VBR. Sets the PES encoding rate (in Mbps) to be allocated to the video stream. In the Mbps field, type a value to a maximum of two decimal places. You can also use the Bitrate slider to set the value. To set the bit rate, type in a value to a maximum of two decimal places within the following ranges: 1.50 to 15.00 if the Chroma Format value is set to 4:2:0 3.0 to 15.00 if the Chroma Format is to 4:2:2 The default bit rate is 4.0.

Bitrate

Statmux Video Controls


Maximum Rate (Mbps)

Sets the maximum encoding bit rate when statmux is enabled. This control is provided so you can limit the burstiness of generated video stream to prevent overflowing downstream consumption equipment. To set the bit rate, type in a value to a maximum of two decimal places within the following ranges: 1.5 to 15.00 if the chroma format value is set to 4:2:0 or 4:2:2 The default bit rate is 1.5.

Minimum Rate (Mbps)

Sets the minimum encoding bit rate when statmux is enabled. To set the bit rate, type in a value to a maximum of two decimal places within the following ranges: 1.500 to 15.00 if the chroma format value is set to 4:2:0 or 4:2:2 The default bit rate is 1.5. You can also use the Minimum Rate slider to set the value.

Priority

Sets the relative priority used by the statmux process to assign bandwidth to the video stream. When statmux performs bandwidth redistribution, the video quality of higher priority video is maintained, while the video quality of lower priority streams may be reduced. To assign a priority value to the video stream, in the Priority list click one value in a range from 0 - 15, where 0 is the lowest priority and 15 is the highest. The default priority value is 8. Channels must be changed individually to a higher priority.

Quality

Sets the bandwidth efficiency of the statmuxed video stream. The highest quality

4042066 Rev A

7-65

uses all available bandwidth allocated to the video stream. Lower values use progressively less proportions of the allocated bandwidth. To assign a bandwidth quality level to the statmuxed video stream, in the Quality list click one value in a range from 0 - 15, where 0 is the lowest quality and 15 is the highest. The default quality value is 15 - highest.
Bandwidth Summary

Displays the bandwidth usage of the multiplex group you are configuring. The Bandwidth Summary is your configuration staging area. As you configure attributes, the bandwidth summary stages the changes and reflects the bandwidth usage for the signal as well as the multiplex group after each change.
Unused bandwidth Grey bar Used bandwidth Black bar - used bandwidth not used by the next bandwidth pipe in the hierarchy. Green bar - bandwidth used by the next bandwidth pipe in the hierarchy. The bandwidth pipe hierarchy is: signal, multiplex group, statmux group.

If you allocate a bandwidth that exceeds the bandwidth limit: The bandwidth summary bar becomes red. The text value for Free bandwidth displays a negative value highlighted in red. This value represents the total amount of bandwidth that exceeds the limit. The Save icon dims so the configuration cannot be applied. To configure the bandwidth to valid values within the specified limits: 1. Reconfigure the bandwidth allocations as required. 2. Hit F6 or click the Save icon in the upper right corner of the PNC window.

7-66

4042066 Rev A

Configuring Statistical Multiplexing for HD Encoders


Multiplex group statistical multiplexing enables you to: Configure multiplexed video streams to one of two groups so you can groom the bandwidths of broadcast streams to the bandwidth capacity of downstream redistribution systems. Configure HD closed-loop statistical multiplexing (statmux) of video streams when connected to a Regulus Multiplex Controller to achieve maximum uplink bandwidth efficiencies.

HD Closed Loop Statistical Multiplexing Support


The user should be aware of following restrictions regarding the creation of closed-loop multiplex groups in systems consisting of both HD and SD encoders: Multiplex groups can be created consisting of HD encoders and/or SD encoders (in the same multiplex group). HD encoders and SD encoders can exist on the same signal provided they are connected to separate Regulus Multiplex Controllers. You must be assigned the appropriate user privileges before you can change the multiplex group statmux configuration values. To view the Multiplex Group Configuration window: Select the appropriate signal from the signal bar and then click Uplink > Multiplex Group Configuration. You will see a window like the one below. It displays a navigation area on the left and a configuration area on the right. Each navigation area level (Signal, Multiplex Group, video stream) displays a unique configuration area.
Navigation area Configuration area

4042066 Rev A

7-67

Adding a Video Stream


To add an HD video stream (encoder) to a multiplex group, follow these steps: 1. In the navigation area of the Multiplex Group Configuration window, click the signal you want to work with and then click the multiplex group you want to add channels to (Multiplex Group 1 or Multiplex Group 2). The configuration area displays the Multiplex Group configuration fields:

Multiplex Group configuration fields

Bandwidth Summary staging area

2. Right-click the appropriate multiplex group and then click Add. You will see a list of video streams within the same signal that have not been added to either multiplex group. 3. Click the stream you want to add to the multiplex group and then hit F6 or click the Save icon in the upper right corner of the PNC window. The stream will appear as a new item in the Group Membership list.

Configuring a Multiplex Group


The Multiplex Group Configuration area displays Multiplex Group Controls when the multiplex group is selected in the navigation tree. To configure a multiplex group, follow these steps: 1. In the navigation area, click the multiplex group you want to configure.

If the multiplex groups do not appear under the signal you want to work with, click the signal. This will reveal the multiplex groups.

2. In the Multiplex Group configuration area, select or enter information for the following fields:

7-68

4042066 Rev A

Enable Fixed Group Limit

Click this check box to set the multiplex group bandwidth limit to a fixed value as selected by the Fixed Group Limit slider. If the check box is cleared, the multiplex group bandwidth will be dynamically allocated as needed based on the bandwidth used by all video streams in the group. Enable the fixed group limit if downstream contribution needs to fit into a fixed capacity.

Fixed Group Limit

Sets the total bandwidth limit in Mbps for all video streams in the multiplex group when you have checked the Enable Fixed Group Limit check box. To set the value, type in a value to a maximum of two decimal places in a range from the total bandwidth of the video streams in the group, to the available bandwidth of the signal. The maximum value is equal to the initial used bandwidth of the multiplex group plus available free bandwidth in the signal.

Delay Mode

Sets the amount of delay that will apply to all videos in the statmux group. Selecting a lower delay will result in less statmux efficiency. In the Delay Mode list, click one of three options: Normal, Extended, Short Delay. Note: The video channel selected as part of the Multiplex Group must be a CBR (Encode) mode in order to change the setting in this field. This means, if the channel is set to VBR, you must switch it to CBR, change the setting in this field and then switch it back to VBR.

Group Membership

Lists the attribute settings for the video streams in the multiplex group. For a description of the attributes, see Multiplex Group tab on page 4-53.

4042066 Rev A

7-69

Configuring Statistical Multiplexing of an HD Video Stream


To configure HD multiplex of video streams, follow these steps: 1. In the navigation area of the Multiplex Group Configuration window, click the signal you want to work with and then click the multiplex group you want to add channels to (Multiplex Group 1 or Multiplex Group 2). 2. Click the + beside the multiplex group to display all the video streams that have been added to the multiplex group. 3. Click the video stream you want to configure. The configuration area displays the Video stream configuration fields as shown below:

Video stream configuration fields

Bandwidth Summary staging area

4. In the Multiplex Group configuration area, select or enter information for the following fields. All the attributes presented are identical to the ones in the multiplex group tab of the video configuration view. They are presented in a more graphical manner (sliders) and changes are staged and shown immediately in the bandwidth summary panel. Bitrates can be entered from the slider or its adjacent numeric entry box. The bit rate sliders have an upper limit that depends on the selected Video Input and Chroma format. Only 4:2:0 Chroma Format is supported for HD video.
PID Chroma Format

Read-only. Displays the transport packet PID of the video stream. Read-only. Displays the chroma format used to encode the video stream. The format is configured on the Video Encoder card configuration view (Uplink > Uplink Configuration > <Encoder> Device Config > Video Encoder > Encoding tab). The value is displayed here so you can evaluate the constraints of other configuration settings.

7-70

4042066 Rev A

Encode Mode

Sets the encode mode used to control statmux participation of the video stream within a multiplex group. In the list, click either Statmux Off- CBR or Statmux On VBR. Note: Setting Chroma Format to 4:2:2 in the Device Configuration view for the HD encoder will disable Encode Mode in Multiplex Group that the HD encoder belongs to as shown in the example below. This prohibits changing the mode of operation from CBR to VBR mode because 4:2:2 chroma format is only supported in Statmux - Off CBR mode.

4:2:2 Chroma FormatT

Encode mode is disabled

4042066 Rev A

7-71

Bitrate

Sets the PES encoding rate (in Mbps) to be allocated to the video stream. In the Mbps field, type a value to a maximum of two decimal places. You can also use the Bitrate slider to set the value. To set the bit rate, type in a value to a maximum of two decimal places within the following ranges: 3.33 to 25.00 for 4:2:0 Chroma Format The default bit rate is 10.0.

Statmux Video Controls


Maximum Rate (Mbps)

Sets the maximum encoding bit rate. This control is provided so you can limit the burstiness of generated video stream to prevent overflowing downstream consumption equipment. To set the bit rate, type in a value to a maximum of two decimal places within the following ranges: Up to 80.00 Mbps depending on the selected Video Input and Encode Mode. You can also use the Maximum Rate slider to set the value.

Minimum Rate (Mbps)

Sets the minimum encoding bit rate. To set the bit rate, type in a value to a maximum of two decimal places within the following ranges: From 3.33 Mbps depending on the selected Video Input and Encode Mode. The default bit rate is 10.00 Mbps. You can also use the Minimum Rate slider to set the value.

Priority

Sets the relative priority used by the statmux process to assign bandwidth to the video stream. When statmux performs bandwidth redistribution, the video quality of higher priority video is maintained, while the video quality of lower priority streams may be reduced. To assign a priority value to the video stream, in the Priority list click one value in a range from 0 - 15, where 0 is the lowest priority and 15 is the highest. The default priority value is 8. Channels must be changed individually to a higher priority.

Quality

Sets the bandwidth efficiency of the statmuxed video stream. The highest quality uses all available bandwidth allocated to the video stream. Lower values use progressively less proportions of the allocated bandwidth. To assign a bandwidth quality level to the statmuxed video stream, in the Quality list click one value in a range from 0 - 15, where 0 is the lowest quality and 15 is the highest. The default quality value is 15 - highest.

7-72

4042066 Rev A

Bandwidth Summary

Displays the bandwidth usage of the multiplex group you are configuring. The Bandwidth Summary is your configuration staging area. As you configure attributes, the bandwidth summary stages the changes and reflects the bandwidth usage for the signal as well as the multiplex group after each change.
Unused bandwidth Grey bar Used bandwidth Black bar - used bandwidth not used by the next bandwidth pipe in the hierarchy. Green bar - bandwidth used by the next bandwidth pipe in the hierarchy. The bandwidth pipe hierarchy is: signal, multiplex group, statmux group.

If you allocate a bandwidth that exceeds the bandwidth limit: The bandwidth summary bar becomes red. The text value for Free bandwidth displays a negative value highlighted in red. This value represents the total amount of bandwidth that exceeds the limit. The Save icon dims so the configuration cannot be applied. To configure the bandwidth to valid values within the specified limits: 1. Reconfigure the bandwidth allocations as required. 2. Press F6 or click Save in the upper right corner of the PNC window.

4042066 Rev A

7-73

7-74

4042066 Rev A

Chapter 8

Security and User Administration


Security Features Displaying Current Security Values User Administration Managing Email Alerts for Alarms API Management

You can define the active network broadcast, multi-session keys, and other security features to protect your system without disrupting service to the decoder population. The PNC uses the active networks multi-session keys (MSKs) to encrypt the system data. Each network is assigned two MSKs, an Even key and an Odd key. You can change the inactive key, transmit it to the decoder population, and then switch to the active key at a later time with little or no service disruption. The decoders in the network can decipher the broadcast if they possess the encryption key. This encryption/decryption key is transmitted to the decoders via Address Data Packets (ADPs) contained in Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs). EMMs and ADPs are explained in the next section.

4042066 Rev A

8-1

Security Features
The PNC offers several levels of security, including service scrambling, Entitlement Control Management (ECM) packet encryption, Entitlement Management Message (EMM) encryption, and Multi-Session Key Management. When you configure an elementary stream (video, audio or data) on a device card, you either enable or disable its Scramble setting. Enabling scrambling for an elementary stream means that any virtual channel you create using that stream is automatically scrambled. Entitlement Control Management (ECM) packets contain virtual channel descriptions, and are encrypted by the random hexadecimal value you set or create for the active Multi-Session Key. Similarly, Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs), which contain decoder program and service access information, are also encrypted by the Multi-Session key. The active Multi-Session key value combines with the individual decoders Secret Serial Number to create a unique encryption value for each decoder. Only the decoder to which the EMM packets are addressed can decrypt this information and access the appropriate program services.

Multi-Session Keys
Decoders must receive the current multi-session key to be able to decrypt access information. There are two multi-session keys: the Even key and the Odd key. The keys are related to the Even and Odd tier sets; if you use the Even key as the transmission source, then only the Even program tiers assigned to decoders are transmitted. Similarly, if you use the Odd key as the transmission source, then only the Odd program tiers assigned to decoders are transmitted. When assigning program tiers, the system copies the selection automatically to represent both even and odd tiers. This ensures that when the multi-session key is changed from even to odd or vice-versa, the authorization is not disrupted. Cisco recommends that you change the source of the multi-session key from Even to Odd and vice-versa on a regular basis to maintain network security integrity. The procedure given in this chapter provides a method of changing the multisession key with minimal disruption to service. If you choose to transmit both the Even and Odd keys when you start a refresh task for EMM transmission, and have copied assigned decoder program tiers from Odd to Even and vice-versa, you can then select the non-active key as the new multi-session key without disrupting service.

8-2

4042066 Rev A

Algorithms A and B
Two algorithms are available for the encryption format. The default Algorithm is always A. If you want to use Algorithm B, please contact Cisco. This is only configurable by Cisco service personnel.

Entitlement Management Message (EMM) Transmission


EMMs are encrypted data packets broadcast as part of the digital signal. The packet begins with a non-encrypted numerical address which specifies the destination decoder. Only the destination decoder is capable of decrypting the rest of the packet. The EMM carries all the global and addressed control information, from multisession keys to memory patches. For PowerVu decoders, this includes system data and ADPs. Changes to a decoder record are made simultaneously to its data packets to maintain record-packet synchronization. You transmit EMMs to decoders by selecting the Odd or Even Multi-Session key as the source key, and then allowing the Refresh Task to transmit the EMMs.

Addressed Data Packets (ADPs)


Most decoders must receive six ADPs to be authorized:
4 1 1

ADPs containing program tier information ADP containing force tuning information ADP containing blackout code information.

4042066 Rev A

8-3

Displaying Current Security Values


To display the current security settings: 1. Choose Security > Network Security. The Network Security window displays.

Network Control
Customer Code

The customer identification code that the decoders in the network are assigned (belong) to. Cisco defines this field when the system is installed. You cannot edit this field.

Multi-Session Key
Note: The Broadcast ID is always 0 and is un-editable. WARNING!: If you change the active Multi-Session key, decoders will be deauthorized until the new key is sent. Similarly, If you change the Multi-Session key and have not ensured that the Even and Odd program tiers assigned to each decoder are identical, then decoders will lose their access to program services. For example, if you assigned only Even program tiers to a decoder, but did not copy those tiers to the Odd set of program tiers, then switching the Multi-Session key source from Even to Odd means that the decoder is no longer authorized to receive program services. For information about assigning decoder program tiers, see Authorized Programs on page 6-2. 1. Create a new encryption value for the currently inactive source key, but do not make it the active key, yet:

8-4

4042066 Rev A

Look at the Source Key field to find out which key is active (even or odd). In the above window, the active key is Even. Do not change the encryption value for the active key. Choose Create for the inactive key, or enter a 14 digit hexadecimal value in the inactive keys encryption field. In this example, create or enter a new value for the Odd key. A new encryption value is created for that key. 2. Select the previously inactive key for the Source Key field. For example, if the Source Key field was previously set to Odd, select Even. If it was previously set to Even, then select Odd. Any decoders that do not have program tiers assigned for the corresponding set of tiers (Odd or Even) will lose their program access. 3. Choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changes you have made to this window. Note: The Last Modified column indicates the last time the key was changed. The Versions column indicates the number of times the key has been changed.

Encryption
All of the Encryption information is setup during installation and is un-editable.
Active Algorithm

The currently active algorithm (A or B). This field is assigned by Cisco, and is normally set to Algorithm A. The security microprocessor used to decrypt system data. Select either the inboard processor, ISE (Internal micro chip), or the outboard processor, OSE (External/Smart Card). These un-editable fields are internal encryption parameters and are displayed for Cisco service personnel use.

Target

EMM & ECM

4042066 Rev A

8-5

User Administration
The PNC offers administration features which allow you to control system access for users. Before you add users to the system, you create privilege groups which correspond with the levels of access you want users to have. For example, the top privilege group, generally assigned to super users or system administrators, is usually given access to all system functions. Other privilege groups may allow users to work with the decoder database, but not to view or update encoder or multiplexer configurations. Once you have created privilege groups for the required levels of system access, you can add users and assign them to the appropriate privilege groups. The procedures for configuring the PNC to provide PNC system control to customer users are slightly different than configuring for internal users. For more information, see Configuring Programmer Segmentation on page 9-1.

Summary of Steps
To add users to the system: 1. Create appropriate privilege groups for each level of user who will be using your system. For example, you may want to have a Decoder privilege group with access only to the Decoder Database windows, and an Operations group with write access to the database windows and the virtual channel and event windows. 2. Create users and assign them to privilege groups.

Creating Privilege Groups


Before you can add users to the system, you must create privilege groups to which to assign the users. Privilege groups allow you to create different levels of system access tailored to the requirements of the different types of users. Privileges are based on PNC system areas: if a user is denied Read or Update privileges to a particular area, the user cannot access any window, lower level window or function within that area. Three types of users and the privileges they are typically assigned are described at the end of this section.

8-6

4042066 Rev A

To create a privilege group, follow these steps. 1. Choose Privilege Administration from the Administration menu to display the Privilege Group window. This window lists privilege access levels for the selected privilege group.

2. To create a new privilege group, right-click on any existing privilege group and choose Create Privilege Group from the popup menu. An item is added to the privilege group hierarchy list on the left side of the window temporarily called New group. Enter the new name you would like to use for the group in the Name field on the right side of the window and enable (check) all the privileges you would like this new group to have. When youre done, click the Save icon in the tool bar, or choose Actions > Save to apply your changes. The privilege group * New group will be renamed to what you specified in the Name field. Below are explanations of the various privileges. Read
Selected

Users assigned to this group can view the associated window and all windows accessible from it. Users assigned to this group cannot view the associated window or any of the windows or functions accessible from it. Update

Cleared

Selected

Users assigned to this group can view and update the data and/or records in the associated window and all windows accessible from it.

4042066 Rev A

8-7

Cleared

Users assigned to this group cannot update the data and/or records in the associated window or any of the windows accessible from it. Create

Selected

Users assigned to this group can add data and/or records to the associated window. Users assigned to this group cannot add data and/or records to the associated window. Delete

Cleared

Selected

Users assigned to this group can delete data and/or records from the associated window. Users assigned to this group cannot delete data and/or records from the associated window.

Cleared

Privilege Group Templates


Before any customizations have been performed, the PNC client ships with 5 privilege groups pre-created for you:

These groups have varying privileges configured as defaults. For instance, the System Administrator privilege group has all possible permissions, whereas the Customer Support Representative privilege group has only a few Read privileges, a single Update privilege and absolutely no Create or Delete privileges. The idea is that you can use these pre-created groups as templates for your own privilege groups. You can: use them as is, and just start adding Users within them adjust the default privileges and then use them copy a specific group and then adjust the privileges for your own needs, thus retaining the original groups defaults for future use As well, you can create your own groups from scratch, setup their privileges and then use those as templates. The choice is yours.

8-8

4042066 Rev A

Typical Privilege Group Assignments


The privilege groups you design depend largely on the functions of the personnel working on your PNC system. Two typical privilege group users are described below: the Operations group, who maintain the uplink configurations, virtual channels and network security; and the decoder database group, who may sell airtime and/or loan satellite channels. Note: Disaster Recovery user privileges are part of the Transport Media privilege group.

Operations Group
The typical Operations people are responsible for maintaining the uplink and virtual channels, and network security. To define privileges for these users, you can give them full read and write privileges for Data Replication, Device/Redundancy Configuration, Network Security and Virtual Channels, and then give them read privileges for the transaction log and alarm/diagnostic logs; but prevent access to the decoder database and other areas, as shown in the table below.
Privilege
API Admin Alarm/Diagnostic Logs Bandwidth/PID Allocation Customer Administration Data Replication Decoder Decoder Transfer Device/Redundancy Configuration Email Alert Event Schedule Network Security Privilege Group Assignment Storage Transaction Log Transport Media User Assignment Virtual Channel No No Yes No No Yes No No Yes No No Yes No No Yes No No Yes

Read

Update
No No No No No Yes No No Yes No No Yes No No No No No Yes

Create
No No No No No Yes No No Yes No No Yes No No No No No Yes

Delete
No No No No No Yes No No Yes No No Yes No No No No No Yes

Privileges

4042066 Rev A

8-9

Salespeople/Customer Service In this example, the salespeoples goals are to sell airtime and loan satellite channels. Consequently, they need access to the decoder database and related functions.
Privilege
API Admin Alarm/Diagnostic Logs Bandwidth/PID Allocation Customer Administration Data Replication Decoder Decoder Transfer Device/Redundancy Configuration Email Alert Event Schedule Network Security Privilege Group Assignment Storage Transaction Log Transport Media User Assignment Virtual Channel No No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No No Yes No Yes

Read

Update
No No No No No No Yes Yes No No Yes No No No No Yes No Yes

Create
No No No No No No Yes Yes No No Yes No No No No Yes No No

Delete
No No No No No No Yes Yes No NO Yes No No No No Yes No No

Privilege Example

Copying Privilege Groups


To copy a privilege group for renaming: 1. Choose Administration > Privilege Administration to display the Privilege Administration window. 2. Select (highlight) the privilege group you want to copy from the privilege group list. 3. Choose Actions > Copy or right-click on the privilege group to copy and choose copy from the popup menu.

8-10

4042066 Rev A

4. Select the copied privilege group that now appears at the bottom of the list and adjust the name and permissions as desired. You can now add users to the new privilege group.

Deleting a Privilege Group


To delete a privilege group: WARNING!: DO NOT DELETE YOUR OWN PRIVILEGE GROUP If you . delete your own privilege group, you will be unable to access system functions until an administrator from a higher privilege group re-creates your privilege group. 1. Choose Administration > Privilege Administration to display the Privilege Administration window. 2. Select (highlight) the privilege group you want to delete from the privilege group list. 3. Choose Actions > Delete to remove the privilege group from the database, or right-click on the group to be removed and choose Delete from the popup menu.

Working with Users


After you have created privilege groups, you can add users to the PNC system and assign them to the appropriate privilege group for their system access. Once a user list exists, you can perform these actions on individual users: Edit user information Suspend user privileges by deactivating the user Reactivate a user who has reached the maximum number of unsuccessful login attempts Delete a user who no longer requires system access.

Adding a User
After you have created the required privilege groups, you can add users to the privilege groups. Only users with appropriate administration privileges can add and edit new users. Note: To ensure that your System Administrator always has an alternate route into the system, create a new user to be reserved for emergency use. In this way,

4042066 Rev A

8-11

if you exceed the number of allowed unsuccessful logins (maximum three attempts), you are not locked out of the system. To add a new PNC user: 1. Choose Administration > Privilege Administration to display the Privilege Administration window. 2. In the privilege group list, right-click on the group you want to add a user to. 3. Choose Create User from the pop-up menu. The following window is displayed.

4. Enter or select information in the following fields.


First Name

Enter the first name of the user. It can consist of up to 64 alphanumeric characters, any of which can be a blank character, i.e. space bar, or leave blank. Enter the last name of the user. It can consist of up to 64 alphanumeric characters, any of which can be a blank character, i.e. space bar, or leave blank. Enter a user name. This field must be a minimum of three characters from the first to the last non-blank character. Indicates whether the user is locked out or not. Any user locked out will not be able to log onto the system or enable email alerts. You can toggle the status by clicking the Lock Account button located to the right. Unlocking the Account Status only unlocks the PNC user login privilege, not the email alert privilege. Unlocking the users Email Alert privilege can be done in this window by checking the Email Alert Enable box or in the Email Recipient Summary window. See the Email Recipient Summary for more information.

Last Name

User Name

Account Status

8-12

4042066 Rev A

New Password

Enter the password for the user. This field is case sensitive. The password must be between 1 and 8 characters in length, none of which can be a blank character, i.e. space bar. As confirmation, enter the password exactly as you entered it above. If the user is to receive email alerts, enter the email address of the user. Enter the email address in the standard address format, e.g., name@company. All users chosen to receive email alerts will receive the same alarm messages. 5. Choose Actions > Save to add the user to the database. The new user appears in the user list.

Confirm Password Email Address

Editing a User
To edit a users information: 1. Choose Administration > Privilege Administration to display the Privilege Administration window. 2. Double-click on the appropriate group to display all users in the group. 3. Click the user you want to edit to display the User window. 4. Change the appropriate information. You cannot change the User Name directly from this window. 5. Choose Actions > Save to save the changed information to the database.

Deactivating a User
When you need to temporarily suspend a users system access, but do not want to remove the user from the system, you can deactivate the user ID. To suspend a users privileges: 1. Choose Administration > Privilege Administration to display the Privilege Administration window. 2. Double-click on the appropriate group to display all users in the group. 3. Click on the user whose access and activities you want to suspend and the users current information displays. 4. Click the Lock Account button. Though the user remains on the list, the user is unable to log in to the PNC system.

4042066 Rev A

8-13

Note: The Lock Account button changes to Enable Account. 5. Choose Actions > Save to save the changed information to the database.

Reactivating a User
When you suspend a users privileges by deactivating the user, or when a user reaches the maximum number of login attempts (set to three) without successfully logging in, the PNC system automatically suspends (deactivates) the users privileges. Before the user can log in and use the system, you must reactivate the user. Note: The number of login attempts is fixed at three. To reactivate a user: 1. Choose Administration > Privilege Administration to display the Privilege Administration window. 2. Double-click on the appropriate group to display all users in the group. 3. Click on the user whom you want to enable and the User window displays. 4. To restore the users login privileges, choose the Enable Account button. 5. Choose Actions > Save to save this information to the database.

Deleting a User
WARNING!: Once you have deleted a user, that users profile is lost, and the user will no longer be able to access the system. To delete a user who is no longer to have system access: 1. Choose Administration > Privilege Administration to display the Privilege Administration window. 2. Double-click on the appropriate group to display all users in the group. 3. Right-click on the user whom you want to delete. 4. Choose Delete from the popup menu.

Changing a Users Password


Users can change their own passwords by:

8-14

4042066 Rev A

1. Choose Administration > Privilege Administration to display the Privilege Administration window. 2. Double-click on the appropriate group to display all users in the group. 3. Select the appropriate user name to display the user information. 4. Type the new password in the New Password field. This field is case-sensitive. 5. Retype the new password in the Confirm Password field exactly as you entered it in the New Password field. 6. Choose Actions > Save to save your new password. Note: If you lose or forget your new password, ask your Systems Administrator to delete your user name from the list of users and then re-create your user name with a new password.

4042066 Rev A

8-15

Managing Email Alerts for Alarms


Initial configuration and subsequent management of email alerts consists of the following tasks: Enable users to receive email alerts for alarms Identify and set the alarms that generate email alerts Enable the system for email alerts Manage email alerts for alarms

Enabling Users to Receive Email Alerts


Email alerts can be managed by the PNC administrator or a user with the Email Alert privilege. This feature is used to configure the PNC to send emails containing alarm messages to users when specific alarms occur. Note: Users configured to receive email alerts must have the Alarm/Diagnostics Log privilege. To enable a user to receive an email alert: 1. Choose Administration > Privilege Administration to display the Privilege Administration window.

Enable box must be checked for user to receive emails

2. Make sure the User Account Status is Enabled, i.e., not locked.

8-16

4042066 Rev A

3. Enter the email address of the user to receive email alert messages (i.e. alarm messages) in the Email Address box. All users identified to receive email alerts will receive the same alarm messages. (The Alarms viewed by users are defined in Emcadmin. See Defining Alarms on page 14-16 for more information.)
Email Address

If the user is to receive email alerts, enter the email address of the user. Enter the email address in the standard address format, e.g., name@company. 4. Check the Enable box.

Enable

Check the Enable box to enable an email alert for the entered email address or leave it unchecked to disable the email alert. Note: Once a users email address is entered, the user cannot receive email messages unless the Enable box is checked, and more importantly the System for Email Alert box in the Recipient Summary window is checked. See the section titled Managing Email Alert Users later in this section for more information on setting the System Email Enable function. 5. Choose Actions > Save to save the changed information to the database.

Selecting Alarms that Generate Emails Messages


Operators are able to customize their system and select and enable which alarms will generate email messages, as some alarms may be more critical and of concern than others. Specific alarms can include PNC alarms or device alarms. The alarms that can be selected to trigger an Email Alert message are set in the Alarms Email Configuration window.

Alarm Search
To search for alarms enabled for emails or to search for multiple alarms, you must use the appropriate search criteria to accurately identify the alarms you want. The PNC alarm database presently supports up to 2000 alarms and as a result, efficient alarm search and retrieval is critical. It is important to note that a global change targets every alarm in the selected group. The PNC system allows you to define your search with multiple search criteria, allowing searches to be simple or complex. The alarms found by your search are listed in the Selected Alarms window. After you have searched the alarm database, you can globally edit all of the found or selected alarms.

4042066 Rev A

8-17

To search the database for specific alarms, follow these steps: 1. Choose Logging > Alarms Email Configuration. The Alarms Email Configuration window will be displayed.

2. From the Item list, select a search item. (See previous list for all possible selections.) 3. Select a qualifier for the criteria you are about to enter. Possible options are:
Qualifier
= <> < <= > >= IN BETWEEN

Means
Equal to (searchs for an exact match), Searchs for a specific alarm number. Not equal to Less than Less than or equal to Greater than Greater than or equal to Criteria is contained within a larger value. In-conditions syntax is: x,y (for example: 2801, 2802) or x,y,z (for example: 2801,2802,2805) etc. Value is between two specified values, e.g., 2800 - 2810.

4. Select the criteria to use. This will differ depending on the Item you have selected. Sometimes it is a Criteria Field, where you can enter the relevant selection criteria. Sometimes it could be a presentation of several check boxes, only allowing you to select one of them.

8-18

4042066 Rev A

5. Click Set. The parameters you select and the information you enter determine which alarms are selected from the database. Specify as many search items and criteria as you can. Selected alarms are sorted by number according to the order of the items which appear in the Selection Criteria window. Right clicking on one of the column headings in the selected alarms window or choosing Actions > Columns lets you pick which columns are displayed.

6. To delete a search item listed in the Selection Criteria window, select it and click Delete. 7. Click Search to search the alarm database. The PNC system will display the selected alarms in the Selected Alarms portion (at the bottom) of the window. An example of an alarm search based on a specified range of alarm messages from 2000 to 5000, with both major and minor severity is shown below.

4042066 Rev A

8-19

Changing a Single Email Alarm State


When you have completed an alarm database search, you can individually select the alarms you want to generate email messages. To select and change the state of a single alarm to generate an email message: 1. Perform a search. 2. To edit an alarm in the Selected Alarms view, select (highlight) the alarm you want to change, and then right-click in the list to display the flyout menu. 3. Select Enable or Disable in the flyout menu to either enable or disable the generation of an email for the specific alarm as shown below.

Changing the state of an alarm to either Enable or Disable determines whether an alarm message is sent to a user when the alarm occurs.

8-20

4042066 Rev A

Globally Changing the Email Alarm Configuration


When you have searched the alarm database and selected the alarms you want to generate email messages, you can edit all the selected alarms states at the same time using the global change function. To make a global change to selected alarms: 1. Perform a search. 2. Click the Global Change button to display the Global Change - Alarms Email Configuration popup window.

3. Select the Email Enable or Disable radio button to either enable or disable all the selected alarms for email alerts.

4042066 Rev A

8-21

Enabling Email Alerts for the PNC System


This is a system level, email alert Enable function which enables the PNC Email alert messages to be sent to all users enabled to receive email messages. Note: Even though user accounts have been enabled to receive email messages, and alarms have been identified and selected to generate email messages, users will not receive email messages unless the System for email alert function has been Enabled. To enable PNC System Email Alerts: 1. Choose Logging > Email Recipient Summary in the main window. You will see a window similar to that shown below.

2. Select the System for email alert Enable box as shown below. Note: The Enable box must be checked for any and all users to receive PNC system email alert messages regardless of whether their user account is enabled for emails or alarms. Enable box must be checked for users to receive emails

8-22

4042066 Rev A

3. Choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changed information to the database.

Managing Email Alerts for Users


The Email Recipient Summary shows the list of users either enabled or disabled to receive email alert messages. Users can be enabled or disabled to receive email alert messages using this screen. To view the Alarm Recipient window, select Logging > Email Recipient Summary in the main window. You will see a window similar to that shown below.

All fields in the window are read-only except for the Email Alert Status column. The fields in the Email Recipient Summary are described as follows.
User Name First Name Last Name Email Address

The name of the user as it appears within the user group. The first name of the user. The last name of the user. The email address of the user in the format abc@xyz.xxx. If this field is empty for a user, their Email Alert status cannot be enabled. The status of Email Alerts for the user. If the users account is locked, the Email Alert status cannot be enabled.

Email Alert Enable

4042066 Rev A

8-23

Enabling or Disabling Email Alerts for Users


To enable or disable a users Email Alert status: 1. Right-click on the user you want to enable or disable. This will display a flyout menu. 2. Select Enable on the flyout menu to enable the users Email Alert status as shown below. Likewise, select Disable to disable the users Email Alert status. (You can also choose Actions > Enable to enable the users Email Alert.)

If the Email Address field is empty or the selected users account is locked for the selected user, the Email Alert status cannot be enabled. Note: Changing a users email alert status in the Email Recipient Summary also changes their status in the Privilege Administration window. 3. Choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changed information to the database.

8-24

4042066 Rev A

Alarm Messages displayed using MS Outlook


Once the system is configured to send email alerts, the users have been identified to receive them, and the alarms have been selected, the users are able to receive alarm messages. An example of a received email alarm message displayed using MS Outlook is shown below; however, other similar email programs may be used to send and receive email alerts.

Maximum number of alarms per message


The number of alarm messages received in an email message is preset to a maximum of 20, but the total number of alarm messages appearing in any email message depends on the number of alarms generated by the PNC and the time duration between generated alarms.

Time Duration Between Messages


At any time, the PNC waits 10 seconds before generating an email message to the users selected to receive email alerts; however, this depends on the frequency that alarms are generated by the PNC. Alarms which are generated back-to-back at less than 10-second intervals are accumulated for 2 minutes and sent in the same message, up to a maximum of 20 alarms per message. Alarms which are generated at time intervals longer than 10 seconds, appear in separate email messages.

4042066 Rev A

8-25

API Management
An Application Program Interface (API) is available. The API definition gives technicians the ability to access a subset of the decoder database functionality that a PC user has using the PNC GUI client. This allows integration with external systems such as commercial billing and affiliate management systems to authorize and de-authorize decoders. Refer to the document titled PowerVu Network Centre Application Program Interface User's Guide (P/N 4010314) provided with the PNC API for more information.

Managing API Interface Communication


To communicate and update the API: 1. Choose Administration > API Management. The API Management window displays.

2. Check the Enable box to enable communication between the PNC and the external billing system via the API. 3. Choose a setting for the Inactivity Timeout in the range from 0 to 32767 minutes. This sets the period of time after which the PNC will disconnect (log off) from the session if the connection is idle for the defined period of time. 4. Check the Session Autorefresh Event check box if you want to automatically update the session window, which indicates the users logged on via the API. Choose a time period in the range from 0 to 3600 seconds. The default Ses-

8-26

4042066 Rev A

sions refresh period is 5 seconds.


Note: The Autorefresh configuration does not require the user to "save" the setting, i.e., choose the Save icon or Actions > Save.

5. Choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to save the changed information to the PNC database. The Sessions window displays information which identifies the API(s) connected to the PNC. The fields in the Sessions window are described as follows.
User ID Login Remote Name

The User IDs of the users logged onto the PNC via the API. The login names of the users logged onto the PNC via the API. The name of the remote network/system logged onto the PNC via the API.

4042066 Rev A

8-27

8-28

4042066 Rev A

Chapter 9

Configuring Programmer Segmentation


Overview of Programmer Segmentation Creating a Customer Account Configuring Uplink Customer Controls Configuring Downlink Customer Controls

The programmer segmentation feature provides third-party customers (typically programmers) with segmented access to your PNC database. The programmer can then log on to the PNC and manage specified assets such as events and IRDs without the participation of your PNC administrator. Customer control is achieved by configuring the PNC database into programmer segments. This chapter describes how to configure these programmer segments PNC database so your customers can use the programmer segmentation feature.

4042066 Rev A

9-1

Overview of Programmer Segmentation


The programmer segmentation feature provides your customers (typically programmers) with access to a limited set of assets on the PNC. Primarily, programmer segmentation gives customers control over scheduling events and managing decoders. For a complete list of privileges and control levels, see Maximum Privilege Control Settings Available for PNC Customer Control on page 9-7. The PNC Administrator configures the PNC for each customer, and maintains complete control of all PNC assets and functions, and can intervene at any time to provide assistance to a customer. This chapter section describes the tasks that are required to configure the PNC for customer control. These tasks include: Creating a customer Creating privilege groups Adding customer users Assigning customers to virtual channels Assigning program tiers to customer virtual channels

9-2

4042066 Rev A

Creating a Customer Account


A customer is any third-party entity to whom you will provide access to the programmer segmentation feature. Typically, a customer is a programmer, and a customer account must be created for each customer. The privileges to create customer accounts are assigned by the PNC administrator.

Creating a Customer Account


A customer account consists of a unique name and customer number. To create a new customer account: 1. Click Administration > Privilege Administration. 2. In the Privilege Administration window, right-click anywhere in the navigation tree, and in the shortcut menu, select Create Customer. The system adds an unnamed customer to the navigation tree, and displays the all the program tier assignments currently assigned to all the other customers.

3. Under Customer: a) In the Name field, type the customer name and press Tab. b) In the Number field, type the customer number value that was provided to you by the Cisco program manager; otherwise dont change this value (i.e., leave at -1).
If

you are creating an account for a new customer, or you do not know the number for an existing customer, contact your Cisco program manager or a Cisco customer service representative. (For contact information, see Product Support on page 1-3.)

4042066 Rev A

9-3

c) Assign tiers for the customer to use. See Assigning Program Tiers for Customer Use on page 9-4 for more information. Note: When creating a new customer or assigning and/or changing customer tier allocations, if you want the new or changed information to be reflected on the slave PNC, synchronize the master and slave PNCs databases by performing a Sync Now function. This is only applicable if the Data Replication option is installed. See Initiating an Immediate Database Synchronization on page 13-42 for more information. 4. Click the Save icon or click Actions > Save. The new customer is displayed in the navigation tree.

d) Privilege groups can now be created for the customer. See Creating Customer Privilege Groups on page 9-6.

Assigning Program Tiers for Customer Use


Tiers are arbitrary sets of numbers used for authorizing a program for a particular decoder. If a customer uses the programmer segmentation feature to configure events and manage event schedules, they must be assigned a set of program tiers. The PNC administrator must assign each customer a set of tiers from a total of 256 tiers to be shared among all PNC customers. Only the tiers you assign will be available to the customer. The remaining tier bits (including both unassigned tier bits as well as tier bits assigned to other customers) will be dimmed. CAUTION:The PNC allows the sharing of tier bits by multiple customers. Proceed carefully when sharing program tiers as this will entail ensuring that business arrangements are in place prior to making these assignments. To assign tiers to a customer: 1. Click Administration > Privilege Administration. 2. In the Privilege Administration window, in the navigation tree, select the customer. The Program Tier Map displays the status of all tier assignments for all custom-

9-4

4042066 Rev A

ers. Each state is colour coded, as described in the following table.


Colour
Grey Light Green Yellow Dark Green Unassigned Assigned to the current customer only Assigned to the current customer and to one or more other customers Assigned to one or more customers other than the current customer

Description

Table 5: Customer Control Program Tier Colour Codes

Note: A tier can be assigned to multiple customers. 3. In the Program Tier Map, select the program tiers that the customer can use. For example, if you assign tiers 32-47, and 251-255 to a customer, the customer will see the following tier view in the Service Assignment window for their virtual channel:

4. Click the Save icon or click Actions > Save. For more information on how to use the Program Tier Map, see Assigning Program Tiers on page 5-24. Note: These same program tiers are used to assign service to decoders. See Assigning Decoders to a Customer on page 9-11 for more information.

4042066 Rev A

9-5

Creating Customer Privilege Groups


A privilege group is specified subset of PNC access rights assigned to a customer. Individual users who are added to a privilege category are restricted to the access rights specified in the category configuration. A typical set of three privilege categories for a programmer is Events (control of events), Decoders (control of IRDs), Full (control of events as well as decoders). The process for creating privilege groups for customers is similar to creating privilege groups within your organization. This section describes the basic procedure for creating privilege groups, but for more information, see Creating Privilege Groups on page 8-6. To create a privilege group for a customer: 1. Click Administration > Privilege Administration. 2. In the Privilege Administration navigation tree, right-click on the customer name in the navigation tree, and in the shortcut menu, select Create Privilege Group. The system adds an unnamed privilege group within the customer hierarchy, and displays the list of privilege categories.

3. Under Privilege Group, in the Name field, type the appropriate name and then click the Save icon or click Actions > Save.

9-6

4042066 Rev A

The new privilege group is displayed in the navigation tree.

4. Under Privilege Group, in the Privileges List, select the appropriate controls for each privilege category. Although the list displays all privilege categories, the PNC can only be configured to provide customers with a limited set of privileges, as described in the following table, which lists:
The The

subset of privilege categories that can be configured for a customer available control settings that can be assigned to for each privilege category Create Delete Read

Privilege
Admin Customer Administration Decoder Decoder Transfer Event Schedule Transaction Log Virtual Channel

Update

Table 6: Maximum Privilege Control Settings Available for PNC Customer Control

For example, the settings for a typical uplink privilege category might be:

4042066 Rev A

9-7

5. Click the Save icon or click Actions > Save. For more information on privilege groups, see Creating Privilege Groups on page 8-6. When all privilege groups are created, you can create customer users within each group.

Adding Customer Users


A user is a unique password protected PNC account that is created within a privilege category. The procedure for adding customer users is identical to the procedure for adding users within your organization. To add users to a customer privilege group and complete all other user-related administration tasks, follow the procedures in Chapter 8: Security and User Administration, beginning with Working with Users on page 8-11, with the following exceptions: On the User configuration window, the Email Address field is disabled for customer user accounts. No email services are available to customer users. Customer users appear in the hierarchy tree under a privilege group under the customer object.

9-8

4042066 Rev A

Configuring Uplink Customer Controls


Creating Virtual Channels for Customers
If a customer wants to configure their own events, you must create a virtual channel that they can control. To create a virtual channel for a customer, follow the procedures described in Creating a Virtual Channel on page 5-9. The only difference is that when you configure the general service assignment parameters in the General tab of the Service Assignment window as described in General Tab on page 5-10, you must also assign the customer to the service. For the programmer segmentation feature, the Service Assignment window includes a Customer input field, as shown in the following illustration.
Customer field

To assign the service to a customer, select the appropriate customer name from the list. When assigned, the Customer value cannot be changed. Note: The uplink service provider remains the owner of the service and assigns the use of a service to a customer temporarily. You can view the customer assignments for services using the Service Summary window. For the programmer segmentation feature, the Service Summary window includes a Customer column that lists the assigned customer for a service,

4042066 Rev A

9-9

as shown in the following illustration.

Conditional Access (CA) Tab


For a newly created virtual channel, Tier 0 is enabled by default as shown below; however, you may want to select one or more tiers that were allocated to the programmer instead using the CA tab view of the Service Assignment window.

Remote Control Output (RCO) Tab


Configure a set of default values for the remote control outputs, using the RCO tab of the Service Assignment window as described in RCO Tab on page 5-25. Note: The configurations defined in this tab can be modified by the customer.

9-10

4042066 Rev A

Configuring Downlink Customer Controls


Assigning Decoders to a Customer
If a customer wants to control a segment of their decoder population, you must assign decoders to the customer. Typically, a customer will want to control a subset of their decoder population, so you must discuss with your customer which decoders, or which subset of decoders they want to control, search for those decoders, then assign them to the customer. To assign a set of decoders to a customer: 1. Click Decoder > Decoder Search. 2. In the Decoder Search window: a) Select the required search criteria to isolate only the decoders that you want to assign to the customer. For a complete description of the decoder search options available to you, refer to Decoder Searches on page 6-7. b) Click Set and then click Search. The system lists the decoders that match the search criteria. 3. In the Selected Decoders area, click Global Change. 4. The system displays the Decoder Global Change window. The programmer segmentation feature places a Customer configuration box in the upper-right corner.
Customer configuration

In the Decoder Global Change window: a) Under Customer, select the customer to whom you will provide decoder control through the PNC. b) In the Admin field, if required, type a note or code of 20 characters or less.

4042066 Rev A

9-11

The Admin field can only be modified by the administrator and cannot be edited/changed by the programmer. c) Click OK. The selected decoders are now assigned to the customer.

Transferring Decoders from One Customer to Another


Customers can transfer their control of one or more decoders to another customer. This unique feature within programmer segmentation functions much like an email client: 1. Customer A selects a decoder from the Decoder Search list and transfers it to Customer B. 2. The PNC places the decoder in Customer As Decoder Transfer outbox (Customer Bs inbox). 3. Customer B opens their Decoder Transfer inbox and accepts the decoder transfer. The PNC administrator can transfer and accept decoders on behalf of any customers. To transfer a decoder from one customer to another customer: 1. Click Decoder > Decoder Search. 2. In the Decoder Search window: a) From the Item list, select Customer, and then click Customer List. b) In the Customer List, select the customer who will transfer the decoder, and then click OK. c) Click Set and then click Search. d) In the Selected Decoders list, right-click the decoder to be transferred, and select Transfer. e) In the Decoder Transfer window:

9-12

4042066 Rev A

In In

the To Customer field, select the appropriate customer.

the Transfer Notes field, type a short note, if desired.


OK.

Click

The system removes the decoder from the Selected Decoders search view and lists it as an event item in the Decoder Transfer outbox of the customer who is transferring the decoder out, and simultaneously lists it in the Decoder Transfer inbox of the customer who is receiving the decoder. 3. Click Decoder > Decoder Transfer. 4. In the Decoder Transfer window: a) Select Inbox. All decoder transfer events are listed, from the standpoint of the customer who is receiving the transfer. b) In the list of decoder transfer event items, right-click the appropriate decoder transfer event and select Accept.

c) The system prompts you to confirm the transfer. Click Yes. The decoder can now be controlled by the customer to whom it was transferred. The decoder is disabled and has not been configured. The profile for the device will be blank except for the Admin, Customer and Last Edited Time (read-only) fields. For information on installing a decoder, see Installing a Single Decoder on page 6-51. For complete customer decoder transfer procedures, see Transferring Decoders To and From Another Programmer on page 10-15.

Creating a Pool of Shared Customer Decoders


If it is necessary for programmers to temporarily share the use of the decoders owned by other programmers, you can configure a pool of shared decoders. Shared decoders are a set of installed decoders that any customer can utilize temporarily via the PNC. This provides customers with the flexibility to respond immediately to the demand for more decoders. To create a pool of shared customer decoders:

4042066 Rev A

9-13

1. Click Decoder > Decoder Search. 2. In the Decoder Search window: a) Select the required search criteria to isolate only the decoders that you want to assign to the initial pool of Shared Customer decoders. b) Click Set and then click Search. The system lists the decoders that match the search criteria. 3. In the Selected Decoders area, click Global Change. 4. The system displays the Decoder Global Change window. The programmer segmentation feature places a Customer configuration box in the upper-right corner.
Customer configuration

In the Decoder Global Change window: a) Under Customer, select SHARED Customer. b) In the Admin field, if required, type a note or code of 20 characters or less. c) Add any other common configuration parameters that are appropriate. d) Click OK. The selected decoders are now assigned to the pool of SHARED Customer decoders.

Transferring a Shared Customer Decoder to a Customer


To transfer a decoder from the Shared Customer pool to your decoder population: 1. Click Decoder > Decoder Search. 2. In the Decoder Search window: a) In the Item field, select Customer. b) Click the Customer button.

9-14

4042066 Rev A

c) In the Customer list, select Shared Customer.

d) Click Set and then click Search.

In the Selected Decoders area of the Decoder Search window, the system lists all decoders in the Shared Customer pool. You can select any number of decoders from this list to add to your customers decoder pool.

4042066 Rev A

9-15

e) In the Selected Decoders list, right-click the decoder to be transferred to your customers decoder pool, and select Transfer.

f)

In the Decoder Transfer window, in the To Customer field, select your customer name and click OK.

The system removes the decoder from the Selected Decoders search view and lists it as an event item in your Decoder Transfer inbox.

9-16

4042066 Rev A

Chapter 10

PNC User Guide for Programmers


Introduction to the PowerVu Network Centre Logging On to the PNC Client Controlling Subscriber Access to Scrambled Programs Defining and Scheduling Your Programming Events Managing Your Decoders Monitoring PNC Operating Status

This chapter is a users guide that describes how to set up decoders and assign services to decoders using the programmer segmentation feature. Segmentation of the decoder database allows a programmer to control only those decoders assigned to them. Conventionally, the PNC is used primarily by uplink service providers. However, as a valued customer of your uplink service provider, you enjoy access to core PNC features that give you control of your assets so you can manage assets such as events and decoders on the PNC directly, without the participation of your uplink service providers PNC administrator.

4042066 Rev A

10-1

Introduction to the PowerVu Network Centre


The PowerVu Network Centre (PNC) is a powerful tool for managing the technology that distributes your programming. This sophisticated, yet reliable and easy-to-use system provides state-of-the-art: Network management Security Decoder management Advanced revenue protection. The PNC is designed to meet the analog and digital content distribution needs of programmers, private networks and other network operators - users who need to control multiple encoders in an automatically redundant system to securely transmit video, audio and data to a large receiver population.

Configure the Transmission of Your Programming Signal to the Satellite


You can use the PNC to control the video, audio, data and other ancillary services of your uplink. The PNC enables you to configure and control your network devices, including PowerVu Encoders, Multiplexers and Advanced Modulators.

Configure the Decoders That Distribute Your Programming Signal


With the PNC, you can control where your information is being received. The PNC addresses all PowerVu receivers in the field and puts all the information you need right at your fingertips so you can address decoders for a specific service authorization. In addition, the PNC provides tools you can use to: Transfer control of individual decoders to another programmer, or have another programmer transfer control of decoders to you. Monitor the status of your PNC activities Many of the tasks are nearly identical to the tasks that are completed by the PNC users at your uplink service provider, and these tasks are documented in detail in this Users Guide. As you move through this programmers guide chapter, you will be pointed to specific areas in other chapters of this Users Guide so you can gain a complete understanding of this powerful tool.

10-2

4042066 Rev A

Logging On to the PNC Client


The PNC Client is the interface you will use to manage your network assets. To log on to the PNC Client: 1. On your desktop, double-click the PNC shortcut. 2. On the Logon window: a) Enter your assigned user ID in the User field. The system administrator should assign you your own user ID. b) Enter your assigned password in the Password box.

CAUTION: The default number of logon attempts is set to three. If you try to log on unsuccessfully three times consecutively, your account is automatically deactivated, and the system administrator must reactivate the account before you can try again.

If you do not want to display or change the advanced communication information, then skip to Step 5. c) To configure the IP address and other communication values, click Advanced.

4042066 Rev A

10-3

The Logon window expands to display additional fields.

Select or enter information in the following fields.


Host Name

Enter the IP Address of the PNC system server. This number is initially set by Cisco personnel, and must match the IP address of the Server to which it is connected. Enter the reserved port on the Solaris server. This value is set when the system is installed, and you should not change it unless recommended by Cisco customer support personnel. The default value is 7088. Enter the timeout rate, in seconds, desired for the server. This is the inactivity the server allows from logged-on PNC Clients before it sends a request to verify if the client is still active and connected. If no response is received to the servers request, the server disconnects from the client. d) Click OK.
If

Server Port

Timeout (sec)

your logon is successful, the Logon window closes and the main PNC window displays. your user ID or password are incorrect (not recognized by the system), the system wipes the attempted password and displays the logon window again. You can try to log on three times before the system locks out your keyboard from attempting another logon. If this occurs, the system administrator must reactivate your user ID to unlock the keyboard so another logon can be attempted.

If

Logging Off the PNC Client


When you have finished working on the PNC Client, you should log off to prevent unauthorized access. To log off the PNC Client: 1. Update any changes you have made by choosing the Save icon while each

10-4

4042066 Rev A

open window is active. 2. Close all open windows. 3. Click File > Exit. The PNC cleans up any minimized windows, performs routine background maintenance, and closes the PNC window.

PNC Client Basics


For more information on the basic elements of the PNC Client, see the following sections in this book: Introducing the Main PNC Elements on page 3-14 Startup Configuration on page 3-20 Supported Keyboard on page 3-21

4042066 Rev A

10-5

Controlling Subscriber Access to Scrambled Programs


You can use the PNC to control subscriber access to scrambled programs. This section describes how to authorize subscribers to view these programs.

Accessing the Program Authorization Tools


To configure program authorization, you will work with virtual channels. A virtual channel is a collection of services that are defined within the PNC System. As a PNC customer, you must ask your PNC administrator to assign access privileges to you so you can work with your virtual channels to manage your program authorizations. The PNC administrator will assign the access privilege and assign a set of program tiers that you can use to set authorizations.

Authorizing Subscriber Access to Scrambled Programs


This section describes the step-by-step procedures to follow to authorize your subscribers to view scrambled programs. If concepts such as scrambling, program tiers, blackout codes, and spotlight codes are unfamiliar to you, see the following sections in this book: Scrambling Action on page 5-20 Tiers on page 5-24 Assigning Program Tiers on page 5-24 Blackout/Spotlight on page 5-21 To authorize subscribers to view a scrambled program: 1. From the PNC Client, click Channel > Service Summary. 2. In the Service Summary window, double-click the channel that carries the scrambled program. The system displays the General tab in the Service Summary window. This tab provides you with a read-only view of the service configuration, including the service type, service stream PIDs (packet IDs), and stream references, as

10-6

4042066 Rev A

shown in the following illustration.

3. Click the CA tab. The system displays the CA tab in the Service Assignment window. This tab displays:
Blackout/Spotlight Program

assignments

tier assignments

4. In the CA tab: a) In the Blackout/Spotlight area, set the appropriate blackout codes as described in Setting Blackout Codes on page 5-23. Blackout codes are colour coded black, and spotlight codes are colour coded blue. b) In the Tiers area, assign the program tiers as described in Assigning Program Tiers on page 5-24. Initially you will see a series of grey numbered boxes. These are the set of program tiers that the PNC administrator has assigned to your virtual channel for assignment When you click on a tier to assign it, the system

4042066 Rev A

10-7

colour codes the block green.

Configuring the Remote Control Outputs for a Receiver


You can also use the authorization feature in the PNC Client to control the TTL open-collector output ports located on the back panel of a The PowerVu Satellite Receiver. You can then use these configurations as general-purpose remote control ports. To control these remote control outputs: 1. Click Channel > Service Summary. 2. In the Service Summary window, double-click on the virtual channel through which you want to control the PowerVu Satellite Receiver output ports. 3. On the Service Assignment window, click the RCO (remote control) tab. 4. On the RCO tab, configure the Remote Control Outputs as described in Setting the Remote Control Outputs on page 5-25.

10-8

4042066 Rev A

Defining and Scheduling Your Programming Events


You can use the PNC Client to control access to a channel by scheduling events to take place at particular times. With this feature, you can: Control subscriber access to a special program Black out an event for a particular country, region or area Control access to a channel for a specific time period As a PNC customer, you can complete all event scheduling tasks as the PNC administrator, excluding Service Replacement. For complete information on how to use the PNC Client to schedule your events, refer to the procedures and descriptions provided in Defining and Scheduling Events on page 5-31.

4042066 Rev A

10-9

Managing Your Decoders


You can use the PNC Client to manage a population of decoders that are assigned to you by the PNC administrator. As a PNC customer, you can: Search your decoder database to find any subset of decoders based on a wide range of search criteria Edit individual decoder records/profiles. Refer to Editing an Individual Decoder on page 6-65 for more information. Globally edit decoder records/profiles. Refer to Globally Editing Decoder Records on page 6-68 for more information. Transfer decoders to/or accept decoders from other programmers who can access the PNC of your uplink service provider Transfer decoders to and from the Shared Customer pool of stand-by decoders

Searching the Decoder Database


The PNC provides a powerful search environment that you can use to find any subset of decoders based on a wide range of search criteria. To search for a specific subset of decoders in the population of decoders under your control: 1. Click Decoder > Decoder Search. 2. In the Decoder Search window: a) Select the required search criteria to display only the decoders that you want to edit.

To search only your subset of decoders, in the Customer List, select Myself, or to search both your own subset of decoders and shared decod-

10-10

4042066 Rev A

ers, select both Myself and Shared Decoders as shown in the Customer List below.

Note that if customer criteria is not specified, your subset of decoders and shared decoders will be searched. For a complete description of the decoder search options available to you, refer to Decoder Searches on page 6-7. b) Click Set and then click Search. The system lists the decoders that match the search criteria.

4042066 Rev A

10-11

Editing an Individual Decoder


To change the information for a single decoder: 1. Choose Decoder > Decoder Search and enter the appropriate search criteria.

To search only your subset of decoders, in the Customer List, select Myself, or to search both your own subset of decoders and shared decoders, select both Myself and Shared Decoders as shown in the Customer List below.

Note: If customer criteria is not specified, both private and shared decoders will be searched. For a complete description of the decoder search options available to you, refer to Decoder Searches on page 6-7 2. Double-click the decoder displayed in the Selected Decoders window. The decoders current values are displayed in the Decoder Profile window as shown below.

10-12

4042066 Rev A

3. Revise the information you want to change. For your own decoders, you can edit any parameters you want except the Customer and Admin fields. For shared decoders, you can only edit tiers. In either case, you will only be able to select the tiers you have been assigned as shown in the example below. For more information about forcing the decoder to tune to a specific virtual channel, or assigning tiers to an individual decoder, see Editing an Individual Decoder on page 10-12 for more information.

4042066 Rev A

10-13

4. With the Decoder Profile window active, choose the Save icon, or choose Actions > Save to load the revised decoder information into the database.

Globally Editing Decoder Records


When you have searched the decoder database and selected the records you want to change, you can edit all the selected records for the selected search criteria, e.g., myself, shared decoders, or both. For more information on global editing of decoder records, see Globally Editing Decoder Records on page 10-14. When globally editing decoder records, if Shared Customer is selected in the customer search criteria, you can only edit tiers. Other information of shared decoders can only be edited by the PNC administrator.

10-14

4042066 Rev A

Transferring Decoders To and From Another Programmer


You can use the PNC Client to transfer control of one or more of your decoders to another programmer who enjoys access to your uplink service providers PNC, based on arrangements you make with that programmer. You can also accept the transfer of one or more decoders from another programmer to you. The decoder transfer feature includes an outbox and an inbox, similar to an email client, and the feature functions similarly to an email client as well. For example, if you want to transfer a decoder to another programmer (e.g., Programmer B), the task would included the following steps: 1. You select a decoder from the Decoder Search list and transfer it to Programmer B. 2. The PNC places the decoder in your Decoder Transfer outbox (Programmer Bs inbox). 3. Programmer B opens their Decoder Transfer inbox and accepts the decoder transfer.

Transferring Decoders to Another Programmer


To transfer a decoder to another programmer: 1. Click Decoder > Decoder Search. 2. In the Decoder Search window: a) In the Item field, select Customer. b) Click Customer. c) In the Customer list, select Myself. Myself represents the decoder population under your control.

d) Click Set and then click Search. In the Selected Decoders area of the Decoder Search window, the system

4042066 Rev A

10-15

lists all decoders in your customer group.

e) In the Selected Decoders list, choose/highlight one or more decoders, and then select Transfer. f) In the Decoder Transfer window:

In In

the To Customer field, select the appropriate customer.

the Transfer Notes field, type a short note, if desired.


OK.

Click

The system removes the decoder from the Selected Decoders search view and lists it as an event item in your Decoder Transfer outbox, and simultaneously lists it in the Decoder Transfer inbox of the programmer who is receiving the decoder.

10-16

4042066 Rev A

g) To view the transfer event, click Decoder > Decoder Transfer, and then click Outbox.

Although the decoder transfer event is listed in your Outbox, the decoder remains under your control until the other customer accepts the transfer, and only you can see the profile information about the decoder.
To To

cancel the transfer, select one or more decoders and click Cancel.

modify the transfer notes, right-click on the decoder transfer event and click Modify Transfer Notes.

Accepting a Decoder Transfer From Another Programmer


This function is performed similarly when accepting private or shared decoders. To accept a decoder transfer from another programmer: 1. Click Decoder > Transfer. 2. In the Decoder Transfer window: a) Select Inbox. b) In the list of decoder transfer event items, choose/highlight one or more decoders, and then select Accept.

c) The system prompts you to confirm the transfer. Click Yes. You can now control the decoder that was transferred to you. The decoder is disabled and has not been configured, and the profile for the device is blank. For information on installing a decoder, see Installing a Single Decoder on page 6-51.

4042066 Rev A

10-17

Transferring Decoders To and From the Shared Customer Decoder Pool


Your PNC administrator may maintain a pool of decoders, called Shared Customer decoders, that can be added to your decoder population on a temporary or permanent basis. All other PNC customers of your uplink service provider also share access to these decoders. Shared Customer decoders are installed decoders that you can transfer in and out of your decoder population for temporary use. If you require the use of a decoder on a permanent basis, request the PNC administrator to transfer a decoder to you.

Transferring a Decoder Into the Shared Customer Pool


If you are controlling a surplus of decoders, you can transfer one or more of these surplus decoders to the Shared Customer pool. To transfer a decoder into the Shared Customer pool, follow the procedures described in Transferring Decoders to Another Programmer on page 10-15, but when you select the programmer to transfer the decoder to, select Shared Customer.

10-18

4042066 Rev A

Monitoring PNC Operating Status


You can use the PNC Client to view the system transaction log. The Transaction Log records past user transactions, dated and time stamped. You can search through the logged transactions for particular transaction types and save a transaction log to an ASCII output file for viewing with any Windows or DOS text editor or viewer. To view the transaction logs, from the PNC Client: Click Logging > Transaction Log Monitor Click Logging > Transaction Log History Note: There is a maximum number of events that can be recorded in the log. When the system reaches this maximum, each new event replaces the oldest recorded event.

4042066 Rev A

10-19

10-20

4042066 Rev A

Chapter 11

MetroMux
MetroMux Software Advantages Using the MetroMux Software

The optional MetroMux software feature of your PNC system uses software to convert a multiplexer temporarily into a remultiplexer. This remultiplexer concept enables your MetroMux software capable system to combine MPEG-2 transport streams from various sources into one transport stream in real time. Signals can be transmitted over the entire network, including regional or global backhaul systems and other networks with special requirements. A complete signal or selected elements of the signal can be received at one or more points, fed into a MetroMux software system and retransmitted via satellites with different coverage, or backhauled via E-3 or DS-3 links to another uplink.

4042066 Rev A

11-1

MetroMux Software Advantages


Normally, multiple compressed digital signals arriving at a teleport from different locations are decompressed, converted to analog or D1 format, recompressed and multiplexed together into a signal for satellite transmission. Using MetroMux software, the arriving signals dont need to be decompressed before retransmission. Because MetroMux software takes the signal and redirects it digitally there is no recompression of the signal, hence there is no loss of picture quality. The ability to remultiplex the original signal using MetroMux software ensures that the original signal arrives at each destination with the same image quality as the first location. This eliminates the quality degradations which can occur during multiple compression cascades. Since recompressing the signal is not necessary, the costs and operating expenses associated with the additional encoding and decoding equipment normally required for this process are eliminated. MetroMux software also supports the insertion of locally encoded programming. A program can join the multiplex at one point, and travel through one or more MetroMux software equipped installations, like getting on and off a metro rail or subway system. For example, programs originating on the east coast of the United States could be uplinked for distribution to Europe, and then turned around in MPEG-2 form and transmitted to Asia, all without converting them back to baseband. The next diagram illustrates some MetroMux software applications.

11-2

4042066 Rev A

4042066 Rev A

11-3

Using the MetroMux Software


To display the MetroMux configuration window, follow these steps. 1. Choose the Uplink icon, or choose Uplink > Uplink Configuration to display the Uplink Configuration window.

Note: MetroMux devices always appear to be in Normal mode in the Active state. 2. Choose (double-click) the MetroMux device you want to display. The MetroMux Window displays:

11-4

4042066 Rev A

Sum of bandwidth from all enabled streams

Name assigned by System to the MetroMux Device

Alias (nickname) assigned to MetroMux Device to improve identification

3. To add a MetroMux stream, right-click in the MetroMux Streams window, and choose Add from the popup menu. The MetroMux Stream dialog appears:

4. Enter or select information in the following fields:


System Name

This non-editable field displays the name the system uses to identify the MetroMux software. This field is an alias you assign to improve stream identification.

Name

4042066 Rev A

11-5

Type

The streams listed in this list represent the type of streams which can be MetroMuxed. Possible types are:
Stream Types
Video PCR High Speed Data Async Data DPI Audio(AC3) VBI Wide Band Data Other Audio(MPEG) Subtitling IP Data DVB Subtitles

Note: The DPI selection only appears if the optional DPI feature has been installed. When selecting the MetroMux stream as a Video stream, choose either the stream as either HD, SD or H.264 to the right of the Type field. For all Type selections, this field is grayed-out. Note: If your system is to support H.264 (MPEG-4 part 10) video streams, contact Cisco customer support to properly configure your system for H.264 applications. Cisco will configure the PNC to enable H.264 stream descriptors to be added to the PMT Table for support of third party equipment. This is necessary to achieve MPEG compatibility. Note: The Other field only becomes available after you have chosen Other from the list. Before then, it is grayed-out. This field allows you to MetroMux any streams which are not listed, as long as they have an MPEG stream type. Select Other and enter the MPEG stream type into the activated field.
Enable

When set to ON, this stream is available for transmission and its bandwidth is included in the Total Bandwidth at the top of the window. This field is useful when adding streams which are not necessarily always available. In this field you enter the amount of signal bandwidth assigned to this particular stream, in bps. In this field you enter the incoming PID for this particular stream. In this field you enter the outgoing PID for the particular stream. This field allows you to associate or group a variety of MetroMux inputs. Note: All Video streams within the same MetroMux encoder must be unique. Once created, MetroMux streams are available to Virtual Channels, as any regular streams from Encoders would be. The MetroMux streams are displayed in yellow in the Stream Summary window.

Bandwidth

In PID Out PID Program ID

11-6

4042066 Rev A

Note: If you want to scramble the MetroMux video stream, go to Configuring Scrambling on page 4-144 to find out how to configure scrambling for the video stream. DPI Notes

A DPI stream cannot be added or edited such that its Program ID does not reference a MetroMux Video stream with a matching Program ID. A Video stream cannot be deleted if it has a DPI stream referencing it. The Program ID of a Video stream cannot be changed if it has a DPI stream referencing it. A DPI stream cannot exist alone in a MetroMux device without first adding a Video stream.

5. When all of the information has been entered, click Add to add the stream to the MetroMux Streams window, and apply the bandwidth to the Total Bandwidth field at the top of the window. You can now continue to add MetroMux streams, clicking Add when each is complete, or you can click Close to dismiss the dialog. Note: Only the Name field can be left empty. All other fields MUST have data entered in order to be able to add the stream. 6. If you need to edit or delete an added stream, right-click on that stream and select the appropriate option from the popup menu. 7. When all the data is added and configured, choose the Save icon in the tool bar to add your changes to the system.

4042066 Rev A

11-7

11-8

4042066 Rev A

Chapter 12

Log and Transaction Monitoring


Monitoring Aids Monitoring Transactions Diagnostic Monitoring Saving Transaction Log or Diagnostic Search Results to a File PNC SNMP Agent

This chapter describes the types of monitoring you can perform on the PNC.

4042066 Rev A

12-1

Monitoring Aids
The PNC offers the following monitoring aids:
Transaction Log

The Transaction Log holds past user transactions, date and time stamped. You can search through the logged transactions for particular transaction types and save a transaction log to an ASCII output file for viewing with any Windows or DOS text editor or viewer. The Diagnostic Monitor Log holds past time stamped diagnostic messages sent to the PNC about communications diagnostics, disk diagnostics, or task completions. The severity level and time of each event is recorded. Diagnostic events include such items as communications diagnostics, disk diagnostics, or task completions. Note: The total number of past events in the Transaction and Diagnostic Monitor log is 25,000 entries, each. Once this maximum is reached, the oldest events are replaced with the newest ones.

Diagnostic Monitor Log

12-2

4042066 Rev A

Monitoring Transactions
Every action a user performs is logged, time stamped and recorded as it occurs by the PNC system. You can use this data for auditing purposes, security purposes, or system diagnostics. You can save a transaction log to an ASCII output file, which you or other personnel can later view with any Windows or DOS text editor or viewer. You view and search transactions by using the Transaction Monitor History window.

Displaying the Transaction Monitor


To view the Transaction Monitor window: 1. Click Logging > Transaction Log Monitor. The Transaction Log Monitor window appears, displaying user transactions. The most recent transactions are added to the bottom of the list.

Information displayed for each transaction is described below. Note: You can select which columns of information are displayed by rightclicking on the heading of any column, and selecting the appropriate check boxes.
ID TImestamp

The database record ID of the transaction. The time and date the transaction occurred. Note: The time displayed in this window indicates the system server time, not the local time of your PC.

4042066 Rev A

12-3

User ID Login Address Operation Filter Attributes

The user ID of the user who performed the transaction. The IP address or tty port of the remote PC used for the transaction. The type of operation performed. Additional information about the logged operation if it is available. Additional information about attributes edited on the operation performed.

Automatically Displaying New Transactions


You toggle Autoscroll on or off by either clicking the Autoscroll icon in the tool bar, or by choosing Actions > Autoscroll. When performing the latter, a check appears in the Actions menu if Autoscroll is currently on. When you select the check box, new user transactions are displayed at the bottom of the window after each screen refresh.

Scrolling Through All the Transactions


When you turn Autoscroll off, the new user transactions are no longer displayed, although they are still logged in the transaction file. You can now scroll through the transactions listed on the screen.

Viewing Transaction Attributes


You can view a transactions attributes in several ways: Right-click on the column headings in the Transaction Monitor window and enable the Attributes check box to have attributes display in the window for each transaction Click the Attributes icon in the tool bar to display the attributes window Click Actions > Attributes to display the attributes window

12-4

4042066 Rev A

Note: Once displayed, the Attributes window details are dynamic, changing as you select different transactions in the Transaction Monitor window.

Searching the Transaction Log


This section describes how to configure the system to search the transaction log and save the results to a file. To search a transaction log, follow these steps. 1. Click Logging > Transaction Log History. The Transaction Log History window appears:
Search item list Item criteria list Criteria value entry area

2. In the Selection Criteria area: a) From the search item list, select an appropriate search item. The following options are available: Id, Timestamp, User ID, Login Address, Operation(Type), Operation(Component), Filter, Error Code, Error Message, Global Change Id. b) Select a qualifier for the criteria you have selected. The following qualifiers are available, depending on the criteria you select:
Qualifier
= <> < <=

Description
Equal to (searchs for an exact match) Not equal to Less than Less than or equal to

4042066 Rev A

12-5

> >= LIKE

Greater than Greater than or equal to Criteria is similar to an actual value. LIKE conditions provide simple pattern matching. Characters within pattern are interpreted as follows: - The question mark ? represents any single character - The asterisk * represents any sequence of n characters (n may be zero) - All other characters represent themselves For Program Tiers, a search will find all the decoders where the tiers selected in the search criteria are set. Criteria is contained within a larger value. In-conditions syntax is: x,y (for example: 100, 120) or x,y,z (for example: 125,130,155) etc. Value is between two specified values

IN BETWEEN

c) In the criteria value entry area, enter an appropriate value.


For

the Id, User ID, Login Address, Operation(Component), Filter, Error Code, Error Message, and Global Change Id search items, type an alphanumeric value. the Timestamp search item, the criteria value entry area includes two timestamp selection boxes. For all item criteria selections other than BETWEEN, in the first box enter a specific date and time. Click the list arrow to use the pop-up calendar, or type the date in mm-dd-yyyy format, and the time in 12-hour (am/pm) clock hh-mm-ss format. The default value is the current system time. For the BETWEEN criteria selection, enter the appropriate date and time in the second box.

For

12-6

4042066 Rev A

For

the Operation(Type) search item, the criteria value entry area includes an Operations button. Click the Operations button, select the appropriate items in the Operation list, and click OK. The list of operations will appear in the criteria value entry box.

3. In the Order by list, select a field to control how the search results are sorted. 4. Click Set. The parameters you select and the information you enter appear in the criteria set list. 5. Repeat steps 2-4 as required to apply additional search items so you can refine the search. 6. Click Search to start the search. The search results appear in the Selected Records list area.

You can select which columns of information are displayed by right-clicking on any column heading, and selecting the appropriate check boxes.

7. If required, save the search results. For instructions, see Saving Transaction Log or Diagnostic Search Results to a File on page 12-20.

Displaying a Transaction Log for a Decoder Global Change


When executing a global change, every decoder addressed has a change request. For example, if 10,000 records are changed, 10,000 transaction records are

4042066 Rev A

12-7

logged. In addition, a log line for the global change operation is displayed chronologically following the individual decoder log lines. A sample Transaction Log Monitor view would appears similar to the one shown below.

In this example, #57 and #63 are the global change operation log lines marking the start and end of operation, #58 - #62 are individual decoder log lines in the global change, and #64 is a line caused by another single decoder update. To reduce network traffic, individual log lines are sent to the GUI client. To view those log lines, the user must either close and re-open the Transaction Log Monitor view, or use the Transaction Log History view instead. In this case there is no Attribute of Record view for individual decoder log lines. To check what is being modified for a decoder, you must refer to the global change operation log lines located either at the start or the end of the operation. The Attribute of Record view for the global change operation would appear similar to the one shown below for this example.

12-8

4042066 Rev A

Diagnostic Monitoring
The Diagnostic Monitor consists of diagnostic information the PNC provides about past and current system events such as communications diagnostics, disk diagnostics, or task completions. Each event is given a severity level, time stamped and recorded as it occurs. You can save a diagnostic log to an ASCII output file, which you or other personnel can later view with any Windows or DOS text editor or viewer. You should back up alarm logs on a regular basis to prevent records from being lost.

Displaying the Diagnostic Monitor


The Diagnostic Monitor allows you to view the latest event messages the system has generated. To view the Diagnostic Monitor: 1. Choose Logging > Diagnostic Monitor. The Alarm Monitor window appears, displaying system alarm messages.

4042066 Rev A

12-9

The most recent messages are added to the bottom of the list. Information displayed for each alarm is described below. Note: You can select which columns of information are displayed by rightclicking on the heading of any column, and selecting the appropriate check boxes. Note: The alarm messages for Model D9034 and D9054 Web GUI controlled Encoders are the same as those displayed in the Encoder Web GUI Message Log, except that they are incremented by 20000. See an example below.

ID Timestamp

The events identification number. The time and date the event occurred. Note: The time displayed in this window indicates the system server time, not the local time of your PC.

System Name

The name the system has assigned to the device, process or task that reported the diagnostic condition. The possible devices and processes are shown below.

12-10

4042066 Rev A

Device names are the eight-character names you defined when you configured the encoder, the multiplexer, or the audio/video switcher. Some examples are shown below.
Device
ENC1P1 AVS01 MUXP1 MOD1P1 MM1P1

Description
Encoder 1 Primary 1 Audio Video Switcher 1 Multiplexer Primary 1 Modulator Primary MetroMux Primary

Example Device Names Process names consist of six to eight characters which represent the process name. Cisco customer support personnel use the process name to help assess system diagnostics.
Process
SHMMGR DSMGR UNSOL EMMMGR LOGMON BROAD

Description
Process designed to manage the shared memory area for interprocess communications with DSMGR. Process designed to monitor the systems status (Active, Standby, Fail or Offline) and then undertake redundancy switching decisions. Process designed to deal with unsolicited messages which come directly from the uplink devices. Normally, these are alarm messages. Process designed to manage and transmit the EMM table to the CA card. Process designed to monitor the diagnostics log messages. Process designed to manage the transmission of the MPEG(DVB) tables that are common to all signals. Even though the process is referenced as a broadcast I/O, it is not a real net broadcast (using address 255), since it still needs to check the status of a device to decide whether or not to send data to the device. Process designed to collect Addressed Data Packets (ADPs) from the decoder database for the creation of EMM tables. Process designed to handle pre-scheduled events at the right time. n/a Each one is a specialized process designed to communicate with the uplink devices. These processes use the UDP/IP protocol to communicate with a PNC system and its uplink devices through an Ethernet link. To improve performance, the uplink devices are partitioned into several groups. The PNC system uses multiple CBIOs (one for each device group) to communicate in parallel with all device groups, as required. It is DEVMGR's responsibility to decide which CBIO to communicate with

ADPCOL EVTEXE OMGR CBI00 to CBI08

Process Names

4042066 Rev A

12-11

Process
ADPMGR 03SCR

Description
Process used to manage the creation of ADPs from decoder database. This is a legacy process from the older DEMC text-only screen processes. The process is still involved in PNC system control because it is used to help control the backup/restore functions which cannot be done from a GUI screen. In addition, the text screen can obtain real-time diagnostics. n/a Process designed to communicate with the A/V switchers. It uses a serial communication protocol. Process designed to control the transmission of EMMs. See 03SCR above for details. This is a router process. It is designed to accept requests from tasks like DSMGR, SCR, IFSERVER etc., and route them into the correct CBIO. When it receives a reply from a CBIO, it sends the response back to the correct calling process. The DEVMGR keeps track of the many devices in the system and the relationship between the devices and CBIOs.

OSRV AVSIO REFRESH 04SCR DEVMGR

Process Names
Severity

The severity of the event. Possible severities are:


Color
White (no highlight) Yellow

Severity
Normal Warning

Description
The device or process is functioning within established parameters. The device or process has a problem, but is still functioning within established parameters. The device or process is not functioning within established parameters.

Red

Failure

Description

A description of the event.

12-12

4042066 Rev A

Alarm Watch Monitor


The Diagnostic Monitor Watch view allows you to configure Alarm Watch functionality, which enables/disables global alarm watches and how they are indicated to the operator. To configure the Diagnostics Alarm Monitor: 1. Choose Logging > Diagnostic Monitor. The Alarm Monitor window appears, displaying system alarm messages.

4042066 Rev A

12-13

2. Choose the Watch tab at the top of the Diagnostic Monitor window to display the Alarm Watch system view as shown in the example below.

Watch List

Current Alarm Watch

The Alarm Watch view is used to configure the Alarm Watch System to display alarms according to selected states (enabled or disabled) and match criteria. 3. Enable or Disable the Alarm Watch system. When this feature is not selected/ checked, the selected sound will not be audible when the alarm occurs, and a dialog box will not be displayed. Note: you can Enable or Disable an item in the Watch List by simply checking the box or you can right click in the window to Enable, Disable or Delete an item using the flyout menu. 4. Select one or more of the user-defined watches in the Watch List; however only the currently selected (highlighted) item can be modified. Each selected item in the Watch List displays the selected attributes in the Watch group where the watch attribute criteria can be modified.

Note: The order in which alarm watches appear in the Watch List is important.If multiple alarm watches are enabled, only the first one matched is used.

12-14

4042066 Rev A

5. Watch criteria can be modified similar to Decoder Search criteria. Select a qualifier for the criteria you are about to enter. Possible options are:
Qualifier
= <> < <= > >= LIKE

Means
Equal to (searchs for an exact match) Not equal to Less than Less than or equal to Greater than Greater than or equal to Criteria is similar to an actual value. LIKE conditions provide simple pattern matching. Characters within pattern are interpreted as follows: - The question mark ? represents any single character - The asterisk * represents any sequence of n characters (n may be zero) - All other characters represent themselves Criteria is contained within a larger value. In-conditions syntax is: x,y (for example: 100, 120) or x,y,z (for example: 125,130,155) etc. Value is between two specified values, x-y (for example: 100-200).

IN BETWEEN

The qualifiers available to you depend on which match criteria you have selected. The remaining qualifiers will not be displayed. 6. Press Set to save the Current Alarm Watch criteria for the selected Name. Likewise you can highlight and press Delete to remove criteria or right click and select Delete to remove the selected criteria in the Criteria window. You can also select the Severity criteria for the Current Alarm Watch as shown below. You can select from Fail, Warning, Debug and Normal.

7. Select a sound for the alarm. Use the browse button to locate the file and select Play to make the sound audible. If sound is enabled (i.e., Play is checked), but the Name of the sound file is not specified/entered, a beep will be audible when the alarm occurs. The Test button can be used to check the selected sound. Each new alarm is checked against each of the items in the Watch List. It is first matched (and enabled) to play a sound (if Play is selected). Note: Press Set at the bottom of window to save the settings for the Alarm watch. Similarly, press New to clear all fields and then set new criteria for an Alarm Watch or press Delete to remove all criteria from the Watch List.

4042066 Rev A

12-15

if the Alarm Watch system is enabled and user-defined watches exist and are enabled in the Watches List, then the Alarm Watch dialog will be displayed.

The Alarm dialog can be permanently disabled by selecting the permanently radio button in this view. See Configuring PNC Application Status/Alarm Messages on page C-2 for more information. Note: The Alarm Watch dialog will only be overwritten when a new alarm occurs which is of higher priority (e.g., a Warning alarm is followed by a Fail alarm). The order of alarm priority from highest to lowest is - Fail, Warning, Debug and Normal. Alarms colours are used to display and differentiate alarm attributes in the dialog. Even if an Alarm Watch Dialog is disabled, a sound will still play (if Play is checked) for every alarm which matches the user-defined criteria.

12-16

4042066 Rev A

Automatically Displaying New Events


You toggle Autoscroll on or off by either clicking the Autoscroll icon in the tool bar, or by choosing Actions > Autoscroll. When performing the latter, a check mark appears in the Actions menu if Autoscroll is currently on. When you select the check box, new user transactions are displayed at the bottom of the window after each screen refresh.

Scrolling Through All the Events


When you turn Autoscroll off, the new events are no longer displayed, although they are still logged in the diagnostic file. You can now scroll through the events listed on the screen.

Searching the Diagnostic Log


This section describes how to configure the system to search the transaction log and save the results to a file. To search a transaction log, follow these steps. 1. Click Logging > Diagnostic History. The Diagnostic Log History window appears:
Search item list Item criteria list Criteria value entry area

2. In the Selection Criteria area: a) From the search item list, select an appropriate search item. The following options are available: Id, Timestamp, System Name, Severity, and Description.

4042066 Rev A

12-17

b) Select a qualifier for the criteria you have selected. The following qualifiers are available, depending on the criteria you select:
Qualifier
= <> < <= > >= LIKE

Description
Equal to (searchs for an exact match) Not equal to Less than Less than or equal to Greater than Greater than or equal to Criteria is similar to an actual value. LIKE conditions provide simple pattern matching. Characters within pattern are interpreted as follows: - The question mark ? represents any single character - The asterisk * represents any sequence of n characters (n may be zero) - All other characters represent themselves For Program Tiers, a search will find all the decoders where the tiers selected in the search criteria are set. Criteria is contained within a larger value. In-conditions syntax is: x,y (for example: 100, 120) or x,y,z (for example: 125,130,155) etc. Value is between two specified values

IN BETWEEN

c) In the criteria value entry area, enter an appropriate value.


For For

the Id, System Name, and Description search items, type an alphanumeric value. the Timestamp search item, the criteria value entry area includes two timestamp selection boxes. For all item criteria selections other than BETWEEN, in the first box enter a specific date and time. Click the list arrow to use the pop-up calendar, or type the date in mm-dd-yyyy format, and the time in 12-hour (am/pm) clock hh-mm-ss format. The default value is the current system time. For the BETWEEN criteria selection, enter the appropriate date and time in the second box.

For

the Severity search item, select the appropriate event severity type check boxes. Clear the check boxes for severity levels you do not want to display

3. In the Order by list, click the checkbox and select a field to control how the search results are sorted.

12-18

4042066 Rev A

4. Click Set. The parameters you select and the information you enter appear in the criteria set list. 5. Repeat steps 2-4 as required to apply additional search items so you can refine the search. 6. Click Search to start the search. The search results appear in the Selected Records list area.

You can select which columns of information are displayed by right-clicking on any column heading, and selecting the appropriate check boxes.

7. If required, save the search results. For instructions, see Saving Transaction Log or Diagnostic Search Results to a File on page 12-20.

4042066 Rev A

12-19

Saving Transaction Log or Diagnostic Search Results to a File


After performing a search, you can save the results to a TXT or HTML file for further analysis. Note: Embedded formatting codes within the saved file may make it difficult to read the text file information with utilities such as Notepad or Write. A spreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel and others should display the file information correctly. Similarly, HTML files can be displayed in their proper format using a browser such as Internet Explorer. To save transaction log search results to a file: 1. With the search results displayed, select the records you want to save.
Ctrl+click Click

to select individual events.

an event and then Shift+click to select a range of records.

Note: The system default is to save all records in the Selected Records search results area. 2. Click File > Save As. 3. In the Save Fields box, select to save either All the fields, only the Visible fields, or only those Selected, to a TXT or HTML file.

Available transaction search result fields


All Visible

Available diagnostic search result fields

Saves all the fields in the Save Fields window to a file. Saves only those fields to a file which are visible in the displayed view.

12-20

4042066 Rev A

Selected Fields

Saves only the fields selected in the Save As window to a file as shown in the example below. Note: You can customize the Save as options for your search results. For information on how to configure the Save as options, see Preconfiguring the Save As Function on page 12-21. Note: Any changes made to the selected Fields at the top of the Save Fields window (i.e., All, Visible or Selected) also appear in the Options> Configuration > View settings, and vice versa. 4. Click OK. 5. In the Save Search Results window: a) Select the desired directory. b) Type the file name (with .txt or .html extension). c) Click Save. CAUTION:Do not try to save a system or log file if the file is already open in another application (e.g., Notepad, Microsoft Word, etc.). This will cause a sharing violation and might lock up the system. If this occurs, you may need to restart the PNC client PC, or Windows. CAUTION:When log search results are saved to the default files, the current search results overwrite the contents of the default files. Saved files cannot be opened in the Diagnostic Monitor.

Preconfiguring the Save As Function


The Save As function can be used to preconfigure how searches are saved to a file. To create custom Save search settings: 1. Click the Configuration icon, or Click Options > Configuration. 2. In the Configuration window: a) Click Save As. b) In the Text configuration area, select the text parameters you want to use

4042066 Rev A

12-21

to format the saved files.

This view displays the default ANSI characters.


Fields terminated by

The entered character terminates all fields in the file with the selected ANSI character. The default is ,, which acts as a delimiter. The entered character encloses all fields in the file with the selected character. The default is ., which acts as a delimiter. The entered character terminates all lines in the file with the selected ANSI characters. ANSI escape sequences \r (carriage return), \n (new line) and \t (horizontal tab) are supported. The default is \r\n. Check the Save header box to include the column header at the top of the file. c) In the Time configuration area, select the time parameters you want to use in the saved files.

Fields enclosed by

LInes terminated by

Save header

Save as UTC

Check the Save as UTC box to include the time in the file as UTC time (Universal Time, Coordinated), which displays time based on a 24-hour clock. When this box is checked, the time zone is ignored, and not selectable (greyed out). Check this box to include the time zone information in GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) format, which displays time according to the pre-configured time zone format for the view (e.g., server, local or other time zone). 3. Click OK.

Save time zone info

View
Use the View function to configure the Save As function for event history search results.

12-22

4042066 Rev A

To configure the Save As function, in the Configuration window (Options > Configuration): 1. Expand the View list and click the desired History configuration (Diagnostic or Transaction Log). 2. In the Save As area, select the appropriate field options.

The options in the Save As configuration area are the same for Transaction Log History and Diagnostic History.
Prompt for Fields

Select this check box so the system will prompt you to select the fields you wish to save to a file each time you use the Save As function. Clear this check box to disable the Save Fields prompt during the Save As function. The All, Visible and Selected radio buttons function identical to those displayed in the Save Fields pop-up window. Any changes made to this window also appear in the Save Fields pop-up window when saving the Decoder Search results to a file. 3. Click OK.

Fields Selection

4042066 Rev A

12-23

PNC SNMP Agent


A PNC SNMP v2C agent is supplied with each PNC server application. This agent supports PNC and device status monitoring via a third party network monitoring system (NMS). The PNC SNMP agent allows a network management system to communicate with the PNC via a MIB (Management Interface Base) definition. By polling for information available in the MIB, the NMS can monitor the status of the following devices: 1. Status of the PNC.
Hardware Software

platform status.

application status.

2. Status of uplink device status on a per signal basis. The following table provides an example of the list of parameters/devices that are monitored via the PNC SNMP agent.
Monitored Parameters/Devices
PNC Platform Status PNC Platform Version PNC Application Status PNC Application Version PNC Application Start Time Number of Signals Signal Status Table Signal Summary

Major Alarm Devices for each Signal Active Secondary Devices for each Signal Highlighted Alarm Devices for each Signal

Refer to the document titled PowerVu Network Centre SNMP Agent Users Guide (P/N 4008636) provided with your PowerVu Network Centre for details on the SNMP Agent.

12-24

4042066 Rev A

Chapter 13

Protecting Your Services


Disaster Recovery Data Replication

The PowerVu Network Centre is designed to provide thorough protection of your valued services. In the event of a critical failure in the transmission link, the PowerVu Disaster Recovery solution automatically locates and resumes normal operation on a predefined alternate recovery location. Data Replication allows the operator to connect two uplink locations together and designate one as the master and the other as a slave.This PNC solution provides automatic replication and synchronization of data between the two systems (i.e.,master to slave). This ensures that in the event of a master uplink failure, the slave system contains the same information, allowing services to be transmitted.

4042066 Rev A

13-1

Disaster Recovery
A disaster is defined as a loss of signal lock for a pre-determined period of time by the decoder due to: Sun outage Transponder failure Satellite failure Uplink failure Downlink antenna failure Interference A bad NIT re-tune

Theory of Operation
Disaster Recovery Plan

13-2

4042066 Rev A

Summary of User Tasks


To manage the Disaster Recovery feature, the PNC operator needs to complete the following tasks: 1. Preconfigure the carriers/signals for your network using the Transport Media view. See Uplink Configuration on page 7-1 for information on Transport Media and Assigning Frequencies. 2. Configure the Disaster Recovery Plan by:
selecting defining enabling

carrier(s) for the Disaster Recovery Plan which will be searched as potential recovery locations in the event of a disaster Stand-in Services (if required) Disaster Recovery plan operation

3. Configure Disaster Recovery Profile Summary views. 4. Configure the Decoder Profiles (set Disaster Recovery Control) for each of the decoders you want to participate in the Disaster Recovery.

4042066 Rev A

13-3

Configuring the Disaster Recovery Plan


The PNC server is pre-loaded with a default Disaster Recovery Plan (DRP) that is always enabled. Changes to a DRP can be made in the Disaster Recovery Plan window. The operator can perform multiple editing functions without submitting the changes. When all edits are complete, the operator saves changes by pressing the Save icon or choosing Actions > Save from the drop down menu. The DRP defines the behaviour of the PowerVu uplink network when a disaster recovery occurs (e.g., when a transmission link failure occurs). The DRP is transmitted to the decoder population in a Global Data Stream.This information is downloaded to the decoder so that the decoder engages its algorithm and knows where to search for a likely recovery location. The Disaster Recovery Plan is configured in two steps: 1. Configure the operating parameters for the DRP by enabling or disabling the feature for the decoders participating in disaster recovery. 2. Define/edit the participating carriers, which then allows the operator to view the resulting service list and backup set (recovery locations).

13-4

4042066 Rev A

To view the Disaster Recovery Plan window: From the main PNC window click Uplink > Disaster Recovery Plan. A window similar to the one below displays.

The Disaster Recovery Plan window displays the following common information for both Configuration and Carrier views.
Customer Code Disaster Recovery ID

This is the unique (read-only) numeric customer code assigned to each customer. A unique (read-only) ID assigned to the DRP for the PowerVu customer. This is configured at the time of installation. The customer ID and disaster recovery ID uniquely identify a DRP globally among all customers. The value displayed is in the range from 1 to 32767. Use this field to enter/assign a name for the DRP The length of the name cannot . exceed 30 characters. It must contain at least one (1) alphanumeric character. Carriers may be added, deleted or edited within the Disaster Recovery Plan. Adding a carrier to the DRP will cause:
all

Disaster Recovery Plan Name

virtual channels from the new carrier's signal association to be added to the service list for the DRP In effect the DRP's service list contains all the service . Ids for all the carriers in the DRP . sets to be created by replicating service Ids for each service in the service list

backup

This Carriers view displays the Carrier List and Service List.The Carrier List contains the carriers participating in disaster recovery. The Service List displays the primary and Stand-in disaster recovery services.

4042066 Rev A

13-5

Configuring and Enabling the Disaster Recovery Plan


To configure and enable the disaster recovery plan: 1. With the Configure tab selected in the Disaster Recovery Plan window, check the Enable box (as shown in the figure below). This will enable transmission of the DRP to the decoders participating in disaster recovery.

Note: Sun Outage disaster recovery is controlled by Transmission Failure Enable. Similarly, disabling Transmission Failure also disables Sun Outage disaster recovery regardless of whether Sun Outage Enable is checked. 2. Check the Sun Outage Enable check box if the decoder(s) are to participate in sun outage disaster recovery. The default is disabled (unchecked). 3. Set the Daily West Switch Time (in hours and minutes) for the decoder(s) to search for the west satellite/carrier when sun outage disaster recovery is triggered. The default is 00:00. 4. Select the East and West Carriers to use for both the primary and stand-in signals respectively. The default is None. 5. Click Save or press F6 to save the change.

13-6

4042066 Rev A

Suspending Sun Outage Triggering


To suspend sun outage triggering for a period of time, but still leave the sun outage feature enabled, check Suspend Triggering as shown below.

All IRDs particpating in sun outage disaster recovery will switch to the West Carrier according to the Daily West Switch Time. Checking the Suspend Triggering box will stop decoders still on the West Carrier (at the time you suspend triggering) from switching to the East Carrier at the time sun outage occurs. Note: Sun outage triggering will be suspended until you deselect the Suspend Triggering box.

4042066 Rev A

13-7

Using the Decoder Change Input (GoTo) Command


The Decoder Change Input Command is used to change the input port on the decoder(s) following a disaster or the end of the sun outage period. This function is only applicable to those decoders particpating in disaster recovery and is performed after the disaster has been cleared or resolved. To perform a Go to function: 1. Choose Uplink > Disaster Recovery Plan to display the Disaster Recovery Plan window, similar to that shown below.

The Current Input Command status will be in one of the following states: Stopped means that the Decoder Change Input Command operation has been stopped manually by checking the Stop Input Command box, or the time the command was transmitted to the decoder(s) has expired. The previous figure shows the Stopped state. Running means that the Decoder Change Input Command is being transmitted to the decoder(s). The figure below shows the Running state.

2. Check the Initiate Input Command box.

Decoder Change Input Command


Current Input Command Status and Initiate/Stop Input Command directly affect the decoder(s) participating in the DRP provided the Enable box has been checked. This function is used to reset the decoders to receive the signal on the

13-8

4042066 Rev A

specific input used to receive the primary signal after a disaster recovery has been resolved. When Global Change Input Command Status is in a Running state, the time is displayed in hh:mm:ss, and is read-only.
Initiate/Stop Input Command

The Global Change Input Command can be initiated when in the Stopped state or stopped when in the Running state. The check box will clear after you save the change. 3. Set the Initiate Input Command to, RF Input and for fields according to the pre-disaster recovery decoder settings.

RF Input

This field is used when the to field is set to Specified RF Input. It can be set to Input #1, Input #2, Input #3 or Input #4. This field is read-only in the Running state. The default is Input #1. The to and RF Input fields specify the type of input command to be transmitted, and the specific RF input of the decoder repulsively.

to

Select the type of Decoder Change Input Command IRD Preferred means the Decoder Change Input Command is sent to the decoder to switch it to the input it was installed to initially receive the signal (Installed Signal Input, ISI). When this option is selected, RF input is greyed out. Specified RF Input means the Decoder Change Input Command is sent to the selected RF Input on the decoder. Pre Transmit Failure Input means the Decoder Change Input Command is sent to the decoder input that was used to receive the signal prior to the disaster recovery. When this option is selected, RF input is greyed out. The default is Specified RF Input This field is read-only in Running state.

for

The duration in minutes that the Decoder Change Input Command is transmitted to the decoders participating in the DRP (when the Current Input Command status is in the Running state). The range is from 1 to 60 minutes. It is read-only in the Running state. The default value is 5 minutes. 4. Check the Enable box to direct the decoders participating in the DRP to respond to the Initiate Input Command(s).

Enable

Select to enable the DRP but it also forces the decoders participating in the DRP to , respond to the Initiate Input Command (when de-selected).

4042066 Rev A

13-9

The default is de-selected. 5. Click Save or press F6 to save the changes to the database, and direct transmission of the signal to the selected port on the decoder(s) (i.e., the port receiving the signal prior to the loss of signal).

Adding a Carrier to the Disaster Recovery Plan


To add a carrier to the DRP: 1. With the Disaster Recovery Plan window, Carrier tab selected, right click in the Carrier List. You will see a popup menu similar to the one below.

2. Select Add Carrier in the popup menu to display the Disaster Recovery Plan Carrier Add dialog.

3. Choose the Network, Carrier, and Input Port you want the DRP signal to be received on by the IRD and the state of the Stand-in Service (either Enabled or Disabled). The default is disabled.

13-10

4042066 Rev A

The information displayed in this window is described as follows.


Plan Name

This is a read-only field that contains the operator-assigned Disaster Recovery Plan Name (see page for more information). The carrier list (table) contains the carriers participating in the DRP The index . number indicates the order in which the carrier was entered in the Carrier List. The default is 8. This is the name of the network transmitting the selected DRP This drop down . field contains selections which have been defined in the Transport Media window. This is a pull-down field containing all the carriers associated with the selected network. These carriers are set in the Transport Media window. (See Uplink Configuration on page 7-1 for information on the Transport Media window.) Select the carriers you want to include as potential recovery locations in the DRP . Select the input port on the receiver (e.g., PowerVu Model D9850 Program Receiver) which is connected to the carrier. Select from Input port 1 to 4. The default is Input Port 1. Stand-in services are only applicable for specific scenarios, and will not be used by most system operators. The default is Disabled. See Editing the Service List (Stand-in Service) on page 13-14 for details on when this feature is used. 4. Click Save or press F6 to save the changed information to the database. Carriers are added sequentially to the end of the carrier list. The added carrier will be assigned an Index number one greater than the largest Index number currently in use, e,g., if the last Index number in the Carrier List is 4, the added carrier will be assigned Index 5. Note: Only carriers not currently participating in the DRP may be added. When the network is selected, the list of carriers in the Carrier field will be updated accordingly. If you assign an Input Port already in use, the PNC will consider the carrier to be on the same satellite otherwise the uplink will need to be manually reconfigured when a transmission failure occurs. Note: The Delete and Edit operations will be greyed out if a carrier has not been selected.

Index

Network

Carrier

Input Port

Stand-in Service

4042066 Rev A

13-11

Editing Disaster Recovery Plan Carriers


To edit a Carrier associated with the DRP: 1. With the Disaster Recovery Plan window, Carrier tab selected, select the carrier in the Carrier List that you want to edit. 2. Right click on the selected Carrier to display the pop-up menu.

3. Select Edit. The Disaster Recovery Plan Carrier Edit dialog displays.

4. Choose the Input Port you want the DRP signal to be received on by the IRD and the state of the Stand-in Service (either Enabled or Disabled). 5. Click Save or press F6 to save the changed information to the database.

13-12

4042066 Rev A

Deleting a Carrier from the Disaster Recovery Plan


To delete a carrier from the DRP: 1. With the Disaster Recovery Plan window, Carrier tab selected, right click in the Carrier List on the Carrier Name you want to remove. You will see a popup menu similar to the one below:

2. Select Delete Carrier in the popup menu to remove the selected Disaster Recovery Plan Carrier. A deleted carrier is marked with an x in the Carrier List, no dialog box is displayed. You can delete more than one carrier before saving changes to the Carrier List. 3. Click Save or press F6 to save the change(s) to the database. Deleting a carrier from a DRP will remove the carrier's services from the DRP's service list. Deleting a carrier will not affect the remaining indices. Note: The Delete and Edit operations will be greyed out if a carrier has not been selected.

4042066 Rev A

13-13

Editing the Service List (Stand-in Service)


Stand-in services are used in applications where the backup location/service will not be available for an extended period of time (due to agreement with satellite service provider).e.g., due to sun outage. In this case, rather than waiting for availability of the backup recovery location and displaying black (i.e., no programming), the user can switch to a (stand-in) service to either display timeshifted programming via another satellite (e.g., east satellite to /west satellite switch) or a different program while waiting for the primary recovery location to be restored. In typical system applications, the stand-in service definition is not required. To configure a stand-in service for a primary service: 1. With the Disaster Recovery Plan window, Carrier tab selected, right click in the Service List. 2. Then select the Edit Service popup to display the Disaster Recovery Plan Stand-in Service Edit dialog.

3. In this case only the Stand-in Service ID can be edited.You can select from the list of DRP services or manually enter a service ID. 4. Click Save or press F6 to save the changed information to the database.

13-14

4042066 Rev A

Disabling the Disaster Recovery Plan


To disable the disaster recovery plan: 1. With the Configure tab selected in the Disaster Recovery Plan window, clear the Enable check box (as shown in the figure below). This will stop decoders from responding to the DRP .

Clear check box

2. Click Save or press F6 to save the change.

4042066 Rev A

13-15

Disaster Recovery Profile Setup


The Disaster Recovery Profile Summary is launched from the Decoder pull-down menu from the tool bar. This option is included in the pull-down menu only if the Disaster Recovery option has been installed. Once a Disaster Recovery Profile is created, it must be associated with the Decoder Profile(s) for the decoders taking part in disaster recovery to recover from a disaster. For information on selecting the Disaster Recovery Profile for decoders, see Adding a Disaster Recovery Profile on page 13-17.

Displaying the Disaster Recovery Profile Summary


To display the Disaster Recovery Profile Summary: 1. Choose Decoder > Disaster Recovery Profile as shown in the example below.

2. A window similar to that shown below displays.

The Disaster Recovery Profile Summary window displays a list of all the defined disaster recovery profiles. The columns in the profile table display the settings present in the profile. Profiles may be added, edited or deleted using a right button click in the list panel.

13-16

4042066 Rev A

Adding a Disaster Recovery Profile


The PNC system is installed with a Default Disaster Recovery Profile. You can either edit the default profile or add a new profile for a single decoder or group of decoders. Note: On initial setup, once you add a new profile, ensure that you associate the Disaster Recovery Profile with the decoders participating in disaster recovery. To add a Disaster Recovery Profile: 1. In the Disaster Recovery Profile window, right-click in the Disaster Recovery Profile list. 2. Select Add in the popup menu. A window similar to the one below displays.

The system is installed with a Default Disaster Recovery Profile that has disaster recovery Disabled. The default profile cannot be deleted. New profiles are automatically reflected in the Disaster Recovery Profile Summary. 3. Select or enter the settings for the profile based on its participation in disaster recovery.
Name

This is the name of the profile. It is used to select one of the disaster recovery profiles. Enter or create a unique name for each profile up to 30 characters in length.

4042066 Rev A

13-17

Transmission Failure Controls


Decoder Participation

Select whether the decoder(s) associated with this profile will be participating in disaster recovery. Select either Enable or Disable. The default is enabled.

Loss of Lock Timeout

Select or enter the number of seconds that a loss of lock must occur before a disaster is triggered and the decoders begin to engage their recovery algorithms. Enter a number in the range from 1 to 65535 seconds. The default is 600 seconds.

Focused Search Duration

When a disaster occurs, the decoders will search the defined recovery locations (i.e., carriers in the DRP) in order to find a signal and PSI/SI lock. If a signal is not found and PSI/SI lock is not achieved, the decoders will continue to cycle through the recovery locations for the time defined in this field. Once this time period expires the decoders will extend their search to include the Installed Signal Input (ISI) preset on the decoder. In addition, the decoders continue to search the recovery locations defined in the DRP . Enter a date and time in the range from 0 days, 0 hours, 1 minute to 45 days, 12 hours, 15 minutes. The default is 0 days, 1 hour, 0 minutes.

Sun Outage Controls


Allow Decoder Override of Triggers Triggers Decoder Participation

Check this box if you want the decoder to control the trigger parameters for sun outage disaster recovery instead of the uplink.

Select whether the decoder(s) associated with this profile will be participating in sun outage disaster recovery. Select either Enable or Disable. The default is enabled.

Bit Error Rate

Sun outage disaster recovery is triggered when) a preset BER is exceeded (i.e., high BER) for a specified time period. Select the BER threshold after which sun outage is to be triggered, following a specified timeout period (see Bit Error Rate Timeout for more information), in the range from 1.0 E-01 to 9.99 E-09. The default is 1.0 E-01.

Bit Error Rate Timeout

Select the amount of time to wait after the Sun outage BER threshold is exceeded before starting to execute sun outage disaster recovery in the range from 1 to 255 seconds. The default is 15 seconds.

13-18

4042066 Rev A

Service Verification Period

Select or enter the number of seconds that a decoder must achieve PSI/SI lock to a service before complete service lock is declared successful. Enter a number in the range from 1 to 256 seconds. The default is 20 seconds.

RF Lock Period

Select or enter the number of seconds that a decoder may achieve RF lock before it is considered successful. Once RF lock is achieved, PSI lock will be attempted. Enter a number in the range from 1 to 256 seconds. The default is 5 seconds. 4. Click Save or press F6 to save the new profile to the database. WARNING!: When saving an edited profile, proceed with the same degree of caution as when performing a Decoder Global Change since it may affect many IRDs. A warning indicating the number of affected IRDs should be displayed before submitting the change to the server. The request should be confirmed by the operator before proceeding. The default is 5 seconds.

4042066 Rev A

13-19

Selecting a Disaster Recovery Profile


To associate or add a Disaster Recovery Profile to a decoder participating in disaster recovery, you must add it to the decoder record. To associate a disaster recovery profile to a decoder or group of decoders, you must edit the decoder record(s): 1. Choose Decoder > Decoder Search and enter the appropriate search criteria.

2. When you have searched the decoder database and selected the decoders you want to add an active disaster profile, either double-click the individual decoder record displayed in the Selected Decoders window or select Global Change to display the Decoder Global Change window. This allows you to edit all the selected records at the same time using the global edit function. When you select an individual decoder, a Decoder Profile window similar to

13-20

4042066 Rev A

the one below displays.

3. Select the Disaster Recovery Profile from the pull down selection that you want to add to the decoder record. 4. Choose the Save icon or choose Actions > Save to save the revised decoder information to the database.

Editing a Disaster Recovery Profile


To edit a Disaster Recovery Profile: 1. In the Disaster Recovery Profile Summary window, click on the Disaster Recovery Profile you want to change.

4042066 Rev A

13-21

2. Select Edit in the popup menu. A window similar to the one below displays.

You can edit an existing profile using this window. Any changes made to existing profiles will be automatically reflected in the Disaster Recovery Profile Summary, and will affect the selection of the decoders using the profile. 3. Select Enable or Disable depending on its participation in disaster recovery. 4. Change the settings for the profile based on its participation in disaster recovery. 5. Click the Save or press F6 to save the new profile to the database. WARNING!: When saving an edited profile, proceed with the same degree of caution as when performing a Decoder Global Change since it may affect many decoders. A warning indicating the number of affected decoders should be displayed before sending the change to the decoder database. You will be prompted to confirm the change before it is saved to the database.

13-22

4042066 Rev A

Deleting a Disaster Recovery Profile


To delete a Disaster Recovery Profile: 1. In the Disaster Recovery Profile Summary window, click on the Disaster Recovery Profile you want to delete. 2. Right click on the selected profile to display the popup menu. 3. Select Delete from the popup menu. You can delete any or all disaster recovery profiles except the default profile. 4. Click Save or press F6 to save the change to the database. WARNING!: When deleting a profile, proceed with the same degree of caution as when performing a Decoder Global Change since it may affect many decoders. A warning indicating the number of affected decoders should be displayed before sending the change to the decoder database. You will be prompted to confirm the change before it is saved to the database.

4042066 Rev A

13-23

Post Disaster Operations


Following a disaster, you can either allow the decoder(s) affected by the disaster to remain on the alternate service or you can force tune one or more of the decoders back to their previously received service, prior to the disaster. The decoders remain set to that force tune channel until you either disable force tuning or the decoder operator selects another channel. Note: If a service disruption occurs, the decoder is not automatically reset to the force tune channel. The setting it returns to is determined by the option you set for the decoder in its Decoder Profile. If you selected Home, and entered a Channel number, then the decoder is reset to that channel; if you selected Last, then the decoder is reset to the channel it was on before the disruption.

Force Tuning an Individual Decoder


To force a specific decoder to tune to its previously received service, prior to a disaster: 1. With the Decoder Search window displayed, double-click the decoder you want to force tune. The Decoder Profile window appears with the decoders values displayed. 2. Enter or select information in these fields:
Channel

Select or enter the number of the previously received channel virtual channel in the range from 1 to 65535. CAUTION: You must select a channel from the pull down list if Enable Force Tune is selected. Otherwise, the decoder is forced to tune to channel 0 (zero). If the decoder is re-initialized, this channel number resets to zero. If your decoder is re-initialized, be sure to set this value to the applicable channel number. If service is disrupted, the decoder does not automatically reset to the force tune channel. It returns to the setting determined by the Standby Transition Channel option in the Decoder Profile window.

Time to Wait (mins)

Select or enter the number of minutes the decoder should wait before tuning to the specified virtual channel. Enter a number in the range 1 to 65535. The default setting for this field is zero. If you leave the field set to zero, then the force tuning action takes place immediately, once you select the Enable Force Tune check box and update the information in the window.

13-24

4042066 Rev A

This Force Tuning window shows the decoder being forced to channel 7 after a 10 minute delay.

3. Select the Enable check box to force the decoder to tune to the specified virtual channel after the appropriate number of minutes. 4. Choose the Save icon or choose Actions > Save to update the decoder record.

Force Tuning Multiple Decoders


You can set multiple decoders to tune to their previously received service after a disaster has cleared. The decoder stays tuned to that force tune channel/service until the operator switches to a different channel, or you disable the force tuning. The procedure to force tune multiple decoders is exactly the same as that used to force tune an individual decoder (see previous section), except that you use the Global Change button instead of double-clicking a specific decoder in the search list. This enables you to affect the entire search results list of decoders.

4042066 Rev A

13-25

Data Replication
Data replication is a feature that allows information to be automatically replicated in a fully redundant uplink system from the master PowerVu uplink to a slave PowerVu uplink without the need for operator intervention at the slave uplink site. The benefit of this feature is that if there is a critical master uplink failure, the slave uplink can be used to effectively control services. A warm standby PNC server equipped with data replication is available as an option, which is applicable for nonredundant systems. See the section titled PNC Warm Standby Server with Data Replication later in this chapter for more information.

Theory of Operation
Data replication resides on the PNC server as a separate application. Upon installation of the feature at both the primary (master) and secondary (slave) sites, the PNCs must be re-started to access the Data Replication application. It is necessary that the primary PowerVu uplink be identified as the master and the backup site be identified as the slave. Data replication coordinates the master and slave PNC databases over a LAN or WAN.The system configuration is show in the diagram below.

System Configuration Operations or requests performed on the master PNC system are automatically replicated/synchronized on the slave PNC.

Coordination of PNC Databases

13-26

4042066 Rev A

Data in the context of the data replication feature can be categorized as three separate types:

Replicated Data
Replicated data incudes dynamic or frequently changing information on the master PNC. Changes made to replicated data on the master PNC are automatically sent to the slave PNC in real time. Replicated data includes the following PNC information: Network security - all editable fields
Odd MSK

and even MSK selection: odd or even updates (including global changes)

Decoders - all editable fields


Decoder

State: installed/not installed/disabled Entitlement: tiers, blackouts, output controls Control: force tune Bookkeeping fields: address, state, country, contact code A, etc. Profile membership Group membership Profiles Output control profiles Disaster recovery profiles Transcoder profiles Event Groups state transitions: hold, queued, active, expired action trigger

Feature

Events - all editable fields


Operator ECM

service entitlements: tiers and blackouts replacement control outputs

Scrambling Service

Fingerprint Remote

Synchronized Data
Synchronized data consists of data that changes less frequently. Changes made to synchronized data on the master PNC are sent/updated on the slave PNC during a scheduled daily synchronization or via a user-initiated synchronization task.During a synchronization function, the master PNC GUI is in read-only mode while the database is copied. This copy/snapshot is transferred to the slave PNC triggering an automatic slave PNC restart. The PNC restart is necessary before the updated PNC information is available to the slave. Synchronized data includes the following PNC information:

4042066 Rev A

13-27

Conditional access
Scrambling

Group ID: CW scrambling and ECM de-scrambling information Enabling of event to control scrambling Decoder loading: distribution disk load and IRD administration, single decoder add media: RF tuning

Decoder tuning
Transport Disaster Virtual

recovery plans

channels multiplexers, modulators, AV switchers links: Metromux, ESU

Devices and configuration parameters


Encoders, Contribution PID,

rate controls parameters configuration: enable, severity

Encoding Alarm

Site Specific Data


This information is specific to the equipment at the individual sites. Site specific data is not transferred between master and slave PNC servers during data replication. Site specific data consists of the following information: Diagnostic logs
Device

Alarm logs States


Communication state: failed, online Redundancy state: active, standby

PNC users and privileges Transaction logs


On

the slave PNC Logs generated at the slave site are preserved Requests submitted by the master are logged under the master user ID

13-28

4042066 Rev A

Logging Onto the PowerVu Data Replication Client


Before you can perform any task on the Data Replication client, you must log onto the application which resides on the PNC GUI client. The PowerVu Data Replication (PDR) Client Login offers regular and advanced login methods. Advanced login options allow you to define the target IP address, communication port, and timeout before you log in. This setup should be used the first time you configure the client. To log on to the PDR Client, follow these steps. 1. Double-click the PDR shortcut on your desktop to display the login screen. The PDR Logon window is displayed.

CAUTION: The default number of logon attempts is set to three. If you try to logon unsuccessfully three times consecutively, then your account is automatically deactivated, and the system administrator must reactivate the account before you can try again.

2. Enter your assigned user ID in the User field. The system administrator should assign you your own user ID. 3. Enter your assigned password in the Password field. Note: The default user ID is pncadministrator, and the default password is middlefield. For security reasons, the system administrator should change the

default password and create a unique user profile for each user as soon as the system is operational.

4042066 Rev A

13-29

Site 1
4. Enter the IP Address of the Site 1 PNC (with data replication installed) in the Host Name field. This number is initially set by Cisco personnel, and must match the IP address of the Server to which it is connected. 5. Enter the reserved port on the Site 1 PNC in the Server Port field. This value is set when the system is installed, and you should not change it unless recommended by Cisco customer support personnel. The default value is 7088. 6. Enter the timeout rate, in seconds, desired for the server in the Timeout field. This is the inactivity the server allows from logged-in clients before it will send a request to verify if the client is still active and connected. If no response is received to the servers request, the server shuts down the connection.

Site 2
7. Enter the IP Address of the Site 2 PNC (with data replication installed) in the Host Name field. This number is initially set by Cisco personnel, and must match the IP address of the Server to which it is connected. 8. Enter the reserved port on the Site 2 PNC in the Server Port field. This value is set when the system is installed, and you should not change it unless recommended by Cisco customer support personnel. The default value is 7088. 9. Enter the timeout rate, in seconds, desired for the PNC server in the Timeout field. This is the inactivity the server allows from logged-in clients before it will send a request to verify if the client is still active and connected. If no response is received to the servers request, the server shuts down the connection. 10. Click OK. If your login is successful, the Login window closes and the main Data Replication window displays and the GUI client connection will be established between both sites. If your user ID or password are incorrect (not recognized by the system), the system clears the attempted password and re-displays the logon window. You are allowed up to three login attempts before your keyboard is locked out. If this occurs, the system administrator must reactivate your user ID to unlock your keyboard and allow you to try again.

Logging Off the Data Replication Client


When you have finished working on the Data Replication Client, you should log off to prevent unauthorized access and free up system resources. To log off the Data Replication Client:

13-30

4042066 Rev A

1. Update any changes you have made by choosing the Save icon while each open window is active. 2. Close all open windows. 3. Choose File > Exit. The data replication client cleans up any minimized windows, performs routine background maintenance, and closes the PowerVu Data Replication window.

Introducing the Data Replication Elements


The following are the elements users will have the most frequent contact with while using the PowerVu Data Replication application. Understanding these elements is critical to all procedures and tasks within the application.

Main Window

4042066 Rev A

13-31

Menus and Toolbar Icons


While availability is impacted by context and system state, the following shows the relationship between features available on both the tool bar and the menu:
Menu File Menu Item Relogin Sync Now Exit View Window List
n/a n/a

Button

Description
Log onto/re-log onto the PowerVu Data Replication application. Allows database synchronization to be initiated. Exit the application. Displays the Window List window which allows you to manage currently open windows. Displays the Startup Views view which specifies which views to automatically launch on successful login. Displays the Monitor and Control view which allows for general monitoring and control. Displays the Alarms view which allows monitoring of the current state of alarms at both sites. Displays the Context Resolution view which allows for any context conflicts to be resolved. Displays the Operating Thresholds view which allows thresholds and timeouts to be configured. Displays the Configuration window which allows you to set how status/ alarm messages are displayed, and which views to display on startup. Displays general help for the active window.

Startup Views

Status

Monitor and Control

Alarms

Administration

Context Resolution Operating Thresholds

Options

Configuration

Help

Contents About
n/a

Displays the information dialog. Retrieves information from the local server and refreshes the display. Saves changes in the active window to the databases at both sites. Once changes are saved, they cannot be undone.

Actions
The contents of the Actions menu are dynamic, changing based on what the operator is currently doing.

Refresh

Save

Menu and Tool Bar Items

13-32

4042066 Rev A

Menu

Menu Item

Button

Description
Prior to a Save, you can choose Undo to cancel any changes you have made to the active window. Some windows are updated immediately and do not support the Undo function. Displays general help for the active window.

Undo

Help

Contents About
n/a

Displays information dialog.

Menu and Tool Bar Items


Site Bar

The site bar displays the radio buttons for each site. Each site is displayed with the host name from the login dialog and whether it is configured as the Master or Slave. The Site Bar also allows you to select a site by clicking on the sites radio button. This causes all views to display data from the selected site.

Site # or name Status Bar

Site # or name

The status bar displays the replication status of the system. The data replication system status on the left indicates one of the following states:
Status
Ready Updating Synchronizing

Description
PNC is available to process all requests Currently updating data replication. No requests will be processed. Currently performing a database synchronization. No update requests will be processed.

The replication status field on the right displays the replication status. The colourcoded replication status displayed in this field matches the Status in the Replication group/block. See the Status field under Managing Data Replication on page 13-39 for more information.

4042066 Rev A

13-33

Configuring Data Replication


Initial Setup
Initial configuration of the master and slave sites is performed in the Context Resolution window. To initially configure data replication, you need to perform the following tasks: configure the master and slave communication parameters ensure the Database Signatures are identical for the master and slave enable Data Replication Replication conflicts generally usually occur when the Context Resolution settings for the master and slave sites do not match. Change of context may be due to a change made in the window content by an operator or prolonged disconnection of the slave server causing automatic disabling of the master. To set the Context Resolution parameters for initial setup: 1. From the main PowerVu Data Replication window click Administration > Context Resolution. You will see a window similar to the one below.

13-34

4042066 Rev A

The following example shows a Context resolution window with matching Context Status (normal operating state) between the master (Site 1) and slave (Site 2) sites, but with a mismatch in the Last Context Update times.

The Role of both sites must be identical, i.e., Site 1 and Site 2 must view the Role of Site 1 as the Master, and Site 1 and Site 2 must view the Role of Site 2 as the Slave. The Context Status and Run-time fields are described as follows: Always examine the Context Status and Run-time fields when encountering a context resolution to determine whether the problem is a mismatch in the Database Signature.

4042066 Rev A

13-35

Context
The context group contains the data replication context configuration fields. The Context description column is background colour-coded to indicate the connection status.

Context Status
This is the status of the data replication context resolution.The colour of the fields depends on the connection status.

Run-time
The run-time group contains colour-coded, read-only fields that show information resulting from run-time data replication operation.
Last Context Update

Date and time that the last Data Replication was enabled or disabled by an operator. The format is determined by the operating system. The default is date, time - year, month, day, hour, minute, second. Database signature which consists of the checkpoint ID, replication ID, and sync ID as shown below. The database signature format is 0:0.0.

Database Signature

Checkpoint ID

Replication ID

Sync ID

The Database signatures will be identical for both sites if successful transfer of information has taken place. When these IDs do not match, a context conflict has occurred, either due to a transmission link failure or an operator-initiated change. The Checkpoint ID indicates the number of checkpoints or synchronization updates since the data replication was enabled. This value increments with each synchronization. The Replication ID indicates the number of pending data replications to be sent to the slave server. In the case of the slave site, this value should be identical to the master site if transmission of replication data was successful. However, if the link is down, the number will increase until it reaches the failed threshold and the data replication will stop. Note: This value resets to zero (0) after each successful synchronization and all pending replications are also successfully completed. The Sync ID indicates the number of pending data synchronization updates. The value will reset to zero (0) if the pending synchronizations are successfully completed. In the case of the slave site, this value should always be zero (0) as

13-36

4042066 Rev A

transmission of this data will not occur until the next synchronization event (checkpoint).
Last Database Update

Time and date of the last successful synchronization data update. The format is determined by the operating system. The default is date, time - year, month, day, hour, minute, second. 2. Set or enter information in the Site 1 and Site 2 fields so that the images/views for both sites are identical. One site must be set as the Master. When you define the role of one site as the Master, the other site will automatically be set as the Slave. If one of the sites have not been set as the Master, you will not be able to save the parameters (i.e., Save will be greyed out).

Site 1 Name Site 1 IP Address Site 1 Role

Name of the site. This may be up to 40 characters in length. IP address of the site. Use this field to select the replication role of the site, to either Master or Slave. One site must be set as the master. When you define the role of the particular site as the Master, the other site will automatically be set as the Slave. If one of the two sites have not been set as the Master, you will not be able to save the parameters (i.e., Save will be greyed out). The Role of both sites must be identical, i.e., Site 1 and Site 2 must view the Role of Site 1 as the Master, and Site 1 and Site 2 must view the Role of Site 2 as the Slave.

Site 2 Name Site 2 IP Address Site 2 Role

Name of the site. This may be up to 40 characters in length. IP address of the site. Use this field to select the replication role of the site, to either Master or Slave. If you set Site 1 as the master above, Site 2 will automatically be set as the Slave. If a site has not been set as the Master, you will not be able to save the parameters (i.e., Save will be greyed out). These Database signature will be identical for both sites if successful transfer of information has taken place. When these IDs do not match, a context conflict has occurred, either due to a transmission link failure or an operator-initiated change. 3. Set the Site 1 and 2 Replication Enable fields to Yes.

Replication Enable

Use this field to enable data replication between the two sites. Select Yes to enable data replication or No to disable data replication. 4. Click Save or press F6 to initiate data replication between the Master and

4042066 Rev A

13-37

Slave sites. Saving the context information updates the Data Replication context between the master and slave sites. This operation can only be triggered/performed if both locations have the same data replication setup information. Note: All the Site 1 and Site 2 fields with the exception of Context Status will be empty if the master and slave databases are not connected. If a conflict does not exist when data replication is initiated, the Context Resolution window will display OK status for Sites 1 and 2 as shown in the following example.

If a context resolution exists, the Site 1 and Site 2 Context Status fields will display Conflict. If all connections to the servers and GUI have been checked, the conflict is most likely caused by a mismatch in the Site 1 and Site 2 information in Context Resolution window. For more information on context resolution refer to Resolving a Data Replication Conflict at the end of this chapter.

13-38

4042066 Rev A

Managing Data Replication


The Monitor and Control view allows an operator to monitor the status of data replication and control attributes that affect daily operation, enable data replication and schedule database synchronization. To view the Monitor and Control window, select Status > Monitor and Control from the main window. A window similar to the one below displays.

Note: If you have the IRD-Only Data Replication option installed, refer to IRDOnly Data Replication on page 13-41 for information on the Monitor and Control view when this option is installed.

Enabling Data Replication


To enable data replication: 1. Select Enable, under Replication, to enable data replication. It is recommended that you check the Site 1 and 2 Context Status in the Context Resolution window before performing this task to verify the settings for both sites are correct. This will aid in avoiding a conflict when this operation is initiated. 2. Click the Save icon or choose Actions > Save to initiate data replication.

Replication
Enable

Select Enable to enable data replication or clear the check box to disable data replication. The default is disabled. Note: It is highly recommended that you keep the data replication enabled. You can disable data replication if a system maintenance is being performed on the system or LAN.

4042066 Rev A

13-39

Status

This is the system status of data replication. The top line displays the site name/ designation, and the bottom line displays the status. This field is read-only. The colour of the field depends on the operating state and replication content at the two sites as follows:
Status
Offline Normal Warn Conflict Fail

Background Colour
Grey Green Yellow Red Red Replication is disabled.

Description

This is the normal operating state. Replication is enabled and both sites have the same data replication content. Replication is enabled and both sites have the same data replication content, but one site has a minor alarm. The connected sites have different data replication content. Replication is enabled and both sites have the same data replication content, but one site has a major alarm. When this occurs, data replications stops.

Enabling a Daily Scheduled Synchronization


To automate synchronization of the master and slave databases to occur at a scheduled time: 1. Select Daily Sync Enable to enable the daily synchronization of data replication data at the scheduled time. Clear the check box to disable the daily scheduled synchronization. The default is disabled. Note: It is highly recommended that you enable the daily synchronization to ensure that the master and slave servers are synchronized. Otherwise, encoder configurations or changes will not be sent to the salve server. 2. Set the Daily Sync Time, in the range from 01:00:00 AM to 12:00:00 PM (12 hr or 24 hr format depending on the operating system format), to execute daily synchronization of replication data. Daily sync time follows the time zone setting for this view. The default time setting is 12:00:00 AM. Note: It is recommended that you schedule this operation to occur when programs/events are not scheduled as it will temporarily suspend all PNC activities while it is being performed/running (i.e., the PNC will not be available for operator use during this time). 3. Click Save or press F6 to initiate database synchronization at the scheduled time.
Current Checkpoint

This field displays the date and time of the last synchronization since the data replication was enabled. The time format is set by the operating system.

13-40

4042066 Rev A

IRD-Only Data Replication


IRD-only data replication provides data replication and synchronization of network security and decoder-specific information only between sites. See Replicated Data and Synchronized Data on page 13-27 for more information on the type of data included in these types of PNC information. All other information, including events, is considered site-specific, and will not be replicated or synchronized, and therefore will remain unchanged. When the IRD-only data replication option installed, the title bar in the main PDR window, and the Monitor and Control window will appear slightly different. The title bar at the top of the main window will indicate (IRD Only) as shown in the example below.

An example of the Monitor and Control window when the IRD-only data replication option is installed is shown below.

4042066 Rev A

13-41

Database Synchronization, i.e., Daily IRD Sync Enable and Daily IRD Sync Time are controlled in this window as shown below. See Enabling a Daily Scheduled Synchronization on page 13-40 for more information.

Note: Unlike full data replication, daily synchronization between the master and slave PNCs does not initiate or require a restart of the slave PNC. Newly added IRDs are not transferred to the slave PNC until a daily sync is performed; however any changes to the existing IRD database are replicated immediately.

Initiating an Immediate Database Synchronization


When you want to synchronize the master and slave PNC databases without waiting for the daily scheduled task to be performed, you can perform an immediate synchronization. Note: Synchronization tasks temporarily disrupts all programs/services on transmission, and stops access to the PNC system. The master PNC will change to read-only state while it takes a copy of the PNC master database, and the slave PNC will perform a restart after synchronization data has been transferred to its database. The slave PNC will be unavailable until the restart operation is completed and has returned to its normal operating state. To initiate an immediate database synchronization: 1. Choose File > Sync Now from the main window. The system displays the message below:

2. Choose Yes to initate the sync request, or No to cancel the operation. Synchronization data will be transferred from the master to the slave PNC databases in the same manner as during a scheduled operation.

13-42

4042066 Rev A

Monitoring Data Replication


The Site Monitoring section of the window is used to monitor the replication status of the Master and Slave sites.

You can select which site to monitor (Master or Slave) by selecting the corresponding site in the Site Bar at the bottom of the screen. The information displayed is site-specific. All the fields are read-only. Each of the Site Monitoring fields are described below.
Sites Role

The names of Site 1 and Site 2 respectively The replication role of the site. The roles are assigned in the Context Resolution window. Under normal operating conditions the master site should report itself as the Master and the slave site as the Slave. When the data replication client cannot connect to the server at one of the two sites, the Role for that site indicates Offline. The role of the site must be correctly assigned for replicated data to be transferred from the master to the slave site. Additionally, the Enable box must be checked for changes in replicated data to appear at the slave site.

Site Status

The Site Status is a summary of the four status fields/blocks to the right:
Connection Database Database

Status

Status - Replicated Status - Synced Alarm Status

Replication

The colour/status of these fields (for Master and Slave) represents the worst state of any of the four fields/blocks. The colour of the fields depends on the connection

4042066 Rev A

13-43

state between the two sites as follows:


Status
Offline Normal

Background Colour
Grey Green

Description
The data replication client cannot connect to the data replication server. This is the normal operating state. The data replication client is connected to the data replication server. When this field is in Normal state, all other fields will show Pass. The data replication client is connected to the data replication server, but the site has a minor alarm. The connection between the data replication server and the salve site has failed. When this occurs, data replication stops.

Warn Fail

Yellow Red

Connection Status

The status of the data replication link.The colour of the fields depends on the link status, as follows.
Status
Offline Normal

Background Colour
Grey Green

Description
The data replication client cannot connect to the data replication server. This is the normal operating state. The data replication client is connected to the data replication server. The master and slave data replication servers are connected, and the PNC is running. The data replication client is connected to the data replication server, but either the data replication master server at the master or slave site is not connected. The PNC is running. The data replication client is not connected to the data replication server, beyond the defined link failure timeout. The timeout value is defined in the Operation Thresholds window. For details, see Setting Operating Thresholds on page 13-49.

Warn

Yellow

Fail

Red

Database Status

The database status indicates whether data between the master and slave sites is out of sync. The IDs in the database signatures are used to determine if the database is in sync. The database signatures are exchanged between the servers to make this determination.

13-44

4042066 Rev A

Replicated

The status of the replications. The colour of the field depends on the connection state between the two sites and the checkpoint and replication IDs reported by the master and slave servers as follows:
Status
Offline Pass

Background Colour
Grey Green

Description
The data replication client cannot connect to the data replication server. This is the normal operating state. The master and slave servers